Olivetti d-Copia 3500MFplus – 4500MFplus – 5500MFplus User manual

GUIDA ALLE FUNZIONI
OPERATION GUIDE
NÁVOD K OBSLUZE
BETJENINGSVEJLEDNING
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙΔΙΟ ΧΡHΣHΣ
GUÍA DE USO
MANUEL D'UTILISATION
HASZNÁLATI ÚTMUTATÓ
GEBRUIKERSHANDLEIDING
PODRĘCZNIK OBSŁUGI
GUIA DE USO
MANUAL D’INSTRUCCIONS
GUIA DE USO
GHID DE OPERARE
KÄYTTÖOPAS
BRUKSANVISNING
OPERATØRHÅNDBOK
РУКОВОДСТВО ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ
ÇALIŞTIRMA KILAVUZU
‫הלעפה ךירדמ‬
d-COPIA3500MF plus/4500MF plus/5500MF plus
Code: 578600en
PUBLICATION ISSUED BY:
Olivetti S.p.A.
Gruppo Telecom Italia
Via Jervis, 77 - 10015 Ivrea (ITALY)
www.olivetti.com
Copyright © 2013, Olivetti
All rights reserved
The mark affixed to the product certifies that the
product satisfies the basic quality requirements.
The manufacturer reserves the right to carry out modifications to the product described in this manual at any time
and without any notice.
ENERGY STAR is a U.S. registered mark.
The ENERGY STAR program is an energy reduction plan introduced by theUnited States Environmental Protection
Agency in response to environmental issues and for the purpose of advancing the development and utilization of
more energy efficient office equipment.
Your attention is drawn to the following actions which could compromise the conformity attested to above, as well as
the characteristics of the product:
• incorrect electrical power supply;
• incorrect installation, incorrect or improper use or use not in compliance with the warnings provided in the
User’s Manual supplied with the product;
• replacement of original components or accessories with others of a type not approved by the manufacturer, or
performed by unauthorised personnel.
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means,
electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval
system, without permission in writing from the Publisher.
> Preface
Preface
Thank you for purchasing the d-Copia 3500MF plus/4500MF plus/5500MF plus.
This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly, perform routine maintenance, and take
simple troubleshooting measures as needed so that the machine can always be used in the optimum condition.
Please read this Operation Guide before using the machine.
We recommend the use of our own brand supplies.
Please use our genuine toner containers, which have passed rigorous quality control testing.
The use of non-genuine toner containers may cause failure.
We will not be liable for any damages caused by the use of third party supplies in this machine.
i
> Overview
Overview
This machine is equipped standard with copy and print functions, and a scanned image can be sent to an E-mail
recipient as an attachment or to a computer on the same network. A fax function is available as an option.
Input Data
Original
Electronic data
Fax data
USB memory
Security
You can use the machine security
levels according to your needs.
Operations from your PC
Strengthen security (page v)
Document
Box functions
Embedded Web Server RX
You can check the status and
change the settings of the machine
from a Web browser on your
computer.
This function is useful for a variety of purposes,
including saving data in the machine and in a USB
memory stick.
Printing Data Saved on the Printer (page 4-14)
Using a Custom Box (page 5-52)
Embedded Web Server RX (page 2-33)
Embedded Web Server RX User Guide
Output Data
Copy functions Printer functions
Copying (page 5-16)
Printing from PC (page 4-1)
USB memory
Saving Documents to
USB Memory (Scan
to USB) (page 5-65)
Fax functions
FAX Operation
Guide
Send functions
Sending (page 5-19)
NOTE
• Before using the machine, be sure to read Legal and Safety Information on page 1-1.
• For preparations for use of the machine such as cable connections and software installation, refer to Installing and
Setting up the Machine on page 2-1.
• To learn how to load paper, place originals, set up shared folders, and add addresses to the address book, refer to
Preparation before Use on page 3-1.
ii
> Machine Features
Machine Features
The machine is equipped with many useful functions. Here are some examples. For details, refer to Using Various
Functions (page 6-1).
Optimize your office workflow
Access to frequently used functions
with just one touch (Program)
Scan originals of different sizes at a
time (Mixed Size Originals)
Scan a large number of originals in
separate batches and produce as one
job (Continuous Scan)
You can preset frequently used functions.
It is useful when preparing conference
materials.
It is useful when preparing many-page
handouts.
You can set the different sized originals at
one time so you don't need to reset the
originals regardless of size.
When a large number of originals cannot
be placed in the document processor at
one time, the originals can be scanned in
separate batches and then copied or sent
as one job.
Once you set the functions as a preset
program, all you need to do is press the
program number to call up the functions.
Using this program brings the same
results even if operated by another
person.
Mixed Size Originals (page 6-14)
Continuous Scan (page 6-52)
Program (page 5-6)
Optimize your office workflow
Send one time with multiple sending
options (Multi Sending)
Save energy and cost
Save frequently used documents in
the machine (Custom Box)
Save energy as needed
(Energy Saver function / Energy Saver
Recovery Level)
On
You can send a same document to the
multiple destinations using a different
method.
You can specify multiple destinations of
different send methods such as E-mail,
SMB, and Fax.
You can reduce your workflow by sending
a job at once.
You can share frequently used
documents with the others.
You can save the frequently used
document in the machine and print or
send it when needed.
A document can be shared among
multiple users.
Using a Custom Box (page 5-48)
Sending to Different Types of
Destinations (Multi Sending) (page
5-36)
Off
The machine is equipped with Energy
Saver function that automatically
switched into Low Power Mode or Sleep
Mode. You can set appropriate Energy
Saver Recovery Level depending on the
operation.
In addition, the machine can
automatically be switched into Sleep and
recovered at a specified time for each day
of the week.
Energy Saver function (page 3-14)
Weekly Timer Settings (page 8-56)
iii
> Machine Features
Save energy and cost
Create attractive documents
Print multiple originals onto one sheet
(Duplex / Combine)
Skip blank pages when printing
(Skip Blank Page)
Prevent image bleed-through
(Prevent Bleed-through)
You can print originals on both sides of
the paper. You can also print multiple
originals onto one sheet.
When there are blank pages in a scanned
document, this function skips the blank
pages and prints only pages that are not
blank.
You can prevent image bleed-through
from the reverse side when scanning thin
originals.
Combine (page 6-31)
Duplex (page 6-39)
Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-26)
Skip Blank Page (page 6-56)
Create attractive documents
Strengthen security
Create a booklet
(Booklet)
Print a stamp on copies
(Text Stamp / Bates Stamp)
Password-protect a PDF file
(PDF Encryption Functions)
It is useful when preparing handout.
It is useful when adding text or date that is
not included in originals.
Use the PDF format's password security
options to restrict document viewing,
printing and editing.
You can create a magazine, pamphlet, or
other booklet from sheet originals.
Facing-page, two-sided copies of
originals can be folded down the center to
create a booklet.
You can print desired text and date as a
stamp onto the first page or all pages.
Text Stamp (page 6-48)
Bates Stamp (page 6-50)
The cover page can be printed onto
colored paper or heavy paper.
Booklet (page 6-36)
iv
Encrypted PDF Password (page 665)
> Machine Features
Strengthen security
Protect data on the hard disk
(Encryption / Overwrite)
Prevent loss of finished documents
(Private Print)
Log in by ID card
(Card Authentication)
ID
OK !
You can overwrite the unnecessary data
that remains on the hard disk
automatically.
To prevent an external leakage, the
machine encrypts data before writing it to
the hard disk.
You can temporarily save a printer
document in the machine. By printing the
document from the machine prevents
someone takes your document.
Private Print/Stored Job (page 4-14)
You can log in simply by touching an ID
card. You don't need to enter your user
name and password.
Card Authentication Kit(B) "Card
Authentication Kit" (page 11-6)
Data Security (page 8-50)
Strengthen security
Use functions more efficiently
Strengthen security
Expand functions as necessary
(Application)
(for administrator use)
Display file size before sending /
storing a job (File Size Confirmation)
1 MB
Various functions are available for
administrators to strengthen security.
To Strengthen the Security (page 231)
The functionality of the machine can be
expanded by installing applications.
You can check the file size before
sending/storing the document.
Applications that help you perform your
daily more efficiently such as a scan
feature and an authentication feature are
available.
If your server specifies an e-mail size
limit, you can check the size in advance.
v
File Size Confirmation (page 6-64)
> Machine Features
Use functions more efficiently
Install the machine without concerning
the network cables (Wireless Network)
Use USB memory
(USB Memory)
Specify image file format
(Scan Format)
In an environment where the wireless
LAN is used, you can install the machine
without concerning the network cables.
It is useful when you need to print
document outside your office or you
cannot print document from your PC.
You can select the various file formats
when sending/storing images.
Wireless Network (page 8-48)
Plugging USB memory directly into the
machine enables you to print the files
stored in the USB memory.
You can print the document from the USB
memory by plugging it directly into the
machine.
Original scanned at the machine can be
saved in the USB memory also.
Printing Documents Stored in
Removable USB Memory (page 563)
Saving Documents to USB Memory
(Scan to USB) (page 5-65)
Use functions more efficiently
Skip the error job
(Job Skip Functions)
Perform remote operation
(Embedded Web Server RX)
When paper empty error occurs at the
cassette by specifying the special paper
size or type, the machine skips the error
job and perform the next job.
You can access to the machine remotely
to print, send or download data.
Error Job Skip (page 8-55)
Administrators can configure the machine
behavior or management settings.
Embedded Web Server RX (page 2-33)
vi
File Format (page 6-59)
> Color and Image Quality Functions
Color and Image Quality Functions
The machine is equipped with various color and image quality functions. You can adjust the scanned image as desired.
Basic Color Modes
The basic color modes are as follows. For details, refer to Color Selection (page 6-24).
Reference image
Color mode
Description
Before
Color/Gray
Color/B & W
Automatically recognizes whether a document being
scanned is color or black & white.
Full Color
Scans a document in full color.
Grayscale
Scans a document in grayscale.
Black & White
Scans a document in black & white.
vii
After
> Color and Image Quality Functions
Adjusting Image Quality
To adjust the image quality, use the following functions.
Sample image
I want to...
Function
Before
Page
After
Easily adjust the image quality to match your own image
Remove dark background or
bleed-through from the original
such as a newspaper.
Program
Clearly reproduce fine lines, faint
lines, broken lines, and other fine
details in a CAD or other
drawings.
Program
page 5-6
[Newspaper Copy]
page 5-6
[Drawing Copy]
Adjust the image quality precisely
Adjust the density.
Density
page 6-22
Emphasize or blur the image
outline.
Sharpness
page 6-25
Background Density
page 6-25
Prevent Bleedthrough
page 6-26
Decrease the file size and
produce the characters clearly.
File format
page 6-59
Convert a paper document to
PDF with searchable text.
File format
Example: Emphasize the image
outlines
Darken or lighten the background
(the area with no texts or images)
of a document.
Example: Lightening the
background
Prevent bleed-through in 2-sided
originals.
Adjust the scanned image
[High Comp. PDF]
[PDF] or
[High Comp. PDF]
with
[OCR]
viii
page 6-59
> Guides Provided with the Machine
Guides Provided with the Machine
The following guides are provided with the machine. Refer to each guide as needed.
The contents of the guides are subject to change without notice for the purpose of improvement of machine
performance.
Printed guides
Start using the
machine quickly
Quick Guide
Explains how to use basic functions of the machine, how to use convenient features, how
to perform routine maintenance, and what to do when problems occur.
Safety Guide
For safe use of the
machine
Provides safety and cautionary information for installation and use of the machine. Be sure to
read this guide before using the machine.
Safety Guide (d-Copia 3500MF plus/4500MF plus/5500MF plus)
Indicates the space required for machine installation, and describes the cautionary labels
and other safety information. Be sure to read this guide before using the machine.
Guides (PDF) on the DVD (Product Library)
Use the machine
thoughtfully
Use the fax functions
Use the ID card
Strengthen security
Operation Guide (This Guide)
Explains how to load paper and perform copy, print and scan operations, and indicates
default settings and other information.
FAX Operation Guide
Explains how to use the fax function.
Card Authentication Kit (B) Operation Guide
Explains how to perform authentication using the ID card.
Data Security Kit (E) Operation Guide
Explains how to introduce and use the Data Security kit (E), and how to initialize the system.
Easily register
machine information
and configure settings
Embedded Web Server RX User Guide
Print data from a
computer
Printer Driver User Guide
Directly print a PDF file
Explains how to access the machine from a Web browser on your computer to check and
change settings.
Explains how to install the printer driver and use the printer function.
Network Tool for Direct Printing Operation Guide
Explains how to print PDF files without launching Adobe Acrobat or Reader.
Monitor the machine
and printers on the
network
Network Print Monitor User Guide
Scan images and save
with information
File Management Utility User Guide
Explains how to monitor your network printing system (the machine) with Network
Print Monitor.
Explains how to use File Management Utility to set various parameters and send and save
scanned documents.
Install the Adobe Reader (version 8.0 or later) to view the manuals on the DVD.
ix
> About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
Structure of the guide
The Operation Guide contains the following chapters.
Chapter
Contents
1
Legal and Safety Information
Provides precautions regarding use of the machine and trademark information.
2
Installing and Setting up the
Machine
Explains part names, cable connections, installation of the software, login, logout, and
other matters related to administration of the machine.
3
Preparation before Use
Explains preparations and settings that are required in order to use the machine, such
as how to use the operation panel, load paper, log in and log out, and create an address
book.
4
Printing from PC
Explains functions that are available when the machine is used as a printer.
5
Operation on the Machine
Explains the basic procedures for using the machine, such as placing originals, making
copies, sending documents, and using user boxes.
6
Using Various Functions
Explains convenient functions that are available on the machine.
7
Status/Job Cancel
Explains how to check the status of a job and the job history, and how to cancel jobs
being printed or waiting to print. Also explains how to check paper and toner levels, how
to check the device status, and how to cancel fax transmission.
8
Setup and Registration (System
Menu)
Explains System Menu and how it relates to the operation of the machine.
9
User Authentication and
Accounting (User Login, Job
Accounting)
Explains user login and job accounting.
10
Troubleshooting
Explains what to do when toner runs out, an error is displayed, or a paper jam or other
problem occurs.
11
Appendix
Describes convenient options that are available for the machine. Provides information
on media types and paper sizes, and gives a glossary of terms. Explains how to enter
characters, and lists the specifications of the machine.
x
> About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
Conventions Used in This Guide
Adobe Reader X is used as an example in the explanations below.
Click an item in the Table of Contents
to jump to the corresponding page.
Click to move from the current page to the previously
displayed page. This is convenient when you want to return to
the page from which you jumped to the current page.
NOTE
Indicates supplemental
explanations and reference
information for operations.
Refer to
Click the underlined text to jump to
the corresponding page.
CAUTION
Indicates that personal injury or
mechanical damage may result
from insufficient attention to or
incorrect compliance with the
related points.
IMPORTANT
Indicates operational
requirements and restrictions to
operate the machine correctly,
and avoid damage to the machine
or property.
NOTE
The items that appear in Adobe Reader vary depending on how it is used. If the Table of Contents or tools do not
appear, refer to Adobe Reader Help.
Certain items are indicated in this guide by the conventions described below.
Convention
[Bold]
Description
Example
Indicates keys on the operation panel and buttons on
your computer screen.
Press the [Start] key.
[Regular]
Indicates keys on the touch panel.
Press [OK].
"Regular"
Indicates a message or setting displayed on the touch
panel or computer screen.
"Ready to copy." appears.
xi
Click the [OK] button.
You can select from the "Print size" menu.
> About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
On pages that explain a convenient function, the modes in which that function can be used are indicated by icons.
Using Various Functions > Functions
Functions
Original Size
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Copy
Org./Sending
Data Format
Send
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
Specify the original size to be scanned.
Icon
Copy
Description
Icon
The function can be used when copying a
document.
Custom
Box
Description
The function can be used when saving to or
printing from a user box.
Copies
Copy
Image
Preview
Shortcut 1
No.
0001
Shortcut 2
Name
Owner
SALES
Used
Anonymous
----
Search(Name)
Place original.
Search(No.)
Shortcut 3
Auto
100%
1/1
Normal 0
Add/Edit Box
Shortcut 4
Paper
Selection
Original : A4
: --Original
Zoom
: 100%
Zoom
: 100%
Paper
: --Paper
: A4
Zoom
Shortcut 5
1-sided
>>1-sided
Preview
Preview
Off
Duplex
Quick Setup
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Density
Off
Shortcut 6
Staple
/Punch
Combine
Image Quality
Layout/Edit
Store File
Advanced
Setup
Program
Custom Box
Copy screen
Send
Detail
Open
Program
User box screen
The function can be used when sending a
document.
USB
Memory
The function can be used when saving to or printing
from removable memory such as a USB memory stick.
Destination
Destination
Detail
ABCD
[email protected]
TUVW
192.168.188.120
Group1
Group1
On Hook
Direct
Chain
㪘㪻㪻㫉㪼㫊㫊
㪙㫆㫆㫂
1/1
Removable Memory
㪜㪄㫄㪸㫀㫃
㪘㪻㪻㫉㩷㪜㫅㫋㫉㫐
Name
Detail/Edit
Delete
Recall
㪝㪘㪯㩷㪥㫆㪅
㪜㫅㫋㫉㫐
0001
AAA
0002
0003
BBB
0006
FFF
CCC
0007
DDD
0008
GGG
㪛㪼㫊㫋㫀㫅㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅
0004
HHH
㪨㫌㫀㪺㫂㩷㪪㪼㫋㫌㫇
0005
0009
III
Org./Sending
Data Format
No.
i-FAX
Addr Entry
EEE
0010
1/100
JJJ
㪚㫆㫃㫆㫉㪆
㪠㫄㪸㪾㪼㩷㪨㫌㪸㫃㫀㫋㫐
㪘㪻㫍㪸㫅㪺㪼㪻
㪪㪼㫋㫌㫇
Date and Time
Size
1 Document
02/02/2013 09:30
1 MB
2 Document
02/02/2013 09:40
3 MB
3 Document
02/02/2013 09:50
4 MB
4 Document
02/02/2013 10:00
1 MB
Memory
Information
5 Document
02/02/2013 10:05
2 MB
Remove
Memory
Up
Folder Path
Entry
WSD Scan
/DSM Scan
Print
Delete
Detail
001/999
Open
Store File
㪧㫉㫆㪾㫉㪸㫄
Send screen
Removable memory screen
Icon
Description
Access to the function is indicated by icons.
Copy
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Example: Press the [Org./Paper/Finishing] tab in the Copy
screen to use the function.
xii
> About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
Conventions used in procedures for operating the machine
In this Operation Guide, continuous operation of the keys on the touch panel is as follows:
Actual procedure
Procedure indicated in this guide
Press the [System Menu] key, [Common Settings],
[ ] (twice), and then [Next] in "Message Board Settings".
Press the [System Menu] key
T
Press [Common Settings]
T
Press [
] twice
T
Press [Next] in "Message Board Settings"
Touch panel keys that are pressed are outlined in red.
System Menu
Quick Setup Wizard
Cassette/MP Tray Settings
Common Settings
Home
Copy
Send
Document Box/Removable
Memory
FAX
Printer
Report
System/Network
1/2
Close
Press [
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
Procedures consisting of a sequence of operation panel or touch panel operations are numbered as shown below.
User Login/Job Accounting - User Login
1
User login administration.
Select authentication method.
㪦㪽㪽
Server Type
2
Domain
Default Domain
NTLM
Local
Authentication
Add/Edit
Kerberos
Network
Authentication
Expansion
Authentication
Ext.
Host
Host Name
Cancel
OK
3
xiii
> About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
Originals and Paper Sizes
Original sizes and paper sizes such as A4, B5, and Letter can be used in both the horizontal and vertical orientations. To
distinguish the orientations when these sizes are used, "R" is added to sizes used in the horizontal orientation.
Indicated size*
Orientation
Vertical
orientation
A4, B5, A5, B6, A6
Letter, Statement
Original
Paper
Dimension Y of the original/paper is longer than X.
Horizontal
orientation (-R)
A4-R, B5-R, A5-R, B6R, A6-R, Letter-R,
Statement-R
Original
Paper
Dimension Y of the original is shorter than X.
*
Original/paper sizes that can be used vary depending on the function and source tray. For details,
refer to Specifications on page 11-22.
Icons on the touch panel
The following icons are used to indicate original and paper placement orientations on the touch panel.
Orientation
Original
Vertical
orientation
Horizontal
direction
xiv
Paper
Contents
Preface ..................................................................................................................................... i
Overview ................................................................................................................................. ii
Machine Features .................................................................................................................. iii
Color and Image Quality Functions .................................................................................... vii
Basic Color Modes ....................................................................................................... vii
Adjusting Image Quality .............................................................................................. viii
Guides Provided with the Machine ...................................................................................... ix
About the Operation Guide (this Guide) .............................................................................. x
Structure of the guide ..................................................................................................... x
Conventions Used in This Guide................................................................................... xi
Contents ................................................................................................................................ xv
Menu Map ............................................................................................................................ xxii
1
Legal and Safety Information .................................................................1-1
Notice .................................................................................................................................. 1-2
Safety Conventions in This Guide .............................................................................. 1-2
Environment ............................................................................................................... 1-3
Precautions for Use .................................................................................................... 1-4
Laser Safety (Europe) ................................................................................................ 1-5
SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA) ............................................................................ 1-6
Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power ....................................... 1-7
WARNING .................................................................................................................. 1-7
Radio Tag Technology ............................................................................................... 1-7
Other precautions
(for users in California, the United States) ................................................................. 1-7
Warranty (the United States and Canada) ................................................................. 1-8
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning ..................................................................... 1-9
EN ISO 7779 .............................................................................................................. 1-9
EK1-ITB 2000 ............................................................................................................. 1-9
Legal Information ..................................................................................................... 1-10
Energy Saving Control Function .............................................................................. 1-16
Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function ............................................................................ 1-16
Resource Saving - Paper ......................................................................................... 1-16
Environmental benefits of "Power Management" ..................................................... 1-16
Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program ................................................................ 1-17
2
Installing and Setting up the Machine ...................................................2-1
Part Names .......................................................................................................................... 2-2
Machine Exterior ........................................................................................................ 2-2
Connectors/Interior ..................................................................................................... 2-4
With Optional Equipments Attached .......................................................................... 2-5
Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables .......................................... 2-6
Connection Example .................................................................................................. 2-6
Preparing Necessary Cables .................................................................................... 2-7
Connecting Cables ............................................................................................................. 2-8
Connecting LAN Cable ............................................................................................... 2-8
Connecting USB Cable .............................................................................................. 2-9
Connecting the Power Cable ..................................................................................... 2-9
Power On/Off .................................................................................................................... 2-10
Power On ................................................................................................................. 2-10
Power Off ................................................................................................................. 2-11
Installing Software ........................................................................................................... 2-13
Software on DVD (Windows) ................................................................................... 2-13
Installing Printer Driver in Windows ......................................................................... 2-14
Uninstalling the Software ......................................................................................... 2-16
Installing Printer Driver in Macintosh ........................................................................ 2-17
xv
Setting TWAIN Driver ............................................................................................... 2-19
Setting WIA Driver .................................................................................................... 2-20
Login/Logout .................................................................................................................... 2-21
Login ........................................................................................................................ 2-21
Logout ...................................................................................................................... 2-22
Default Settings of the Machine ...................................................................................... 2-23
Setting Date and Time ............................................................................................. 2-23
Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) .................................................................. 2-25
Quick Setup Wizard ................................................................................................. 2-28
Checking the Counter .............................................................................................. 2-30
Additional Preparations for the Administrator .............................................................. 2-31
To Send Documents to a PC ................................................................................... 2-31
To E-mail Scanned Images ...................................................................................... 2-31
To Strengthen the Security ...................................................................................... 2-31
Embedded Web Server RX ............................................................................................ 2-33
Accessing Embedded Web Server RX .................................................................... 2-34
Changing Security Settings ...................................................................................... 2-35
Changing Host Name ............................................................................................... 2-36
Sending E-mail ......................................................................................................... 2-37
Registering Destinations .......................................................................................... 2-40
Registering a Custom Box ....................................................................................... 2-41
Data Migration from Other Olivetti Products ............................................................... 2-42
Migrating the Address Book ..................................................................................... 2-42
3
Preparation before Use ...........................................................................3-1
Using the Operation Panel ................................................................................................ 3-2
Operation Panel Keys ................................................................................................ 3-2
Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle ......................................................................... 3-3
Touch Panel Display .......................................................................................................... 3-4
Home Screen ............................................................................................................. 3-4
Display for Originals and Paper ................................................................................. 3-8
Display of keys that cannot be set ............................................................................. 3-8
Original Preview ......................................................................................................... 3-9
Enter key and Quick No. Search key ....................................................................... 3-11
Help Screen ............................................................................................................. 3-12
Accessibility Functions (Magnifying the View) ......................................................... 3-13
Energy Saver function ..................................................................................................... 3-14
Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode ......................................................... 3-14
Sleep and Auto Sleep .............................................................................................. 3-15
Loading Paper .................................................................................................................. 3-16
Before Loading Paper .............................................................................................. 3-17
Loading in the Cassettes .......................................................................................... 3-18
Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray ................................................................. 3-26
Paper stopper ........................................................................................................... 3-29
Specifying Paper Size and Media ............................................................................ 3-30
Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC ............................................................... 3-35
Making a note of the computer name and full computer name ................................ 3-35
Making a note of the user name and domain name ................................................. 3-36
Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder ................................. 3-37
Configuring Windows Firewall (for Windows 7) ........................................................ 3-41
Registering Destinations in the Address Book ............................................................. 3-45
Adding a Destination (Address Book) ...................................................................... 3-45
Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) ..................................... 3-53
4
Printing from PC ......................................................................................4-1
Printing from PC ................................................................................................................. 4-2
Printer driver print settings screen ............................................................................. 4-5
Printer Driver Help ...................................................................................................... 4-6
xvi
Changing the default printer driver settings (Windows 7) .......................................... 4-6
Canceling printing from a computer ........................................................................... 4-6
Banner printing ................................................................................................................... 4-7
Printing Data Saved on the Printer ................................................................................. 4-14
Private Print/Stored Job ........................................................................................... 4-14
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold ...................................................................................... 4-16
5
Operation on the Machine ......................................................................5-1
Loading Originals ............................................................................................................... 5-2
Placing Originals on the Platen .................................................................................. 5-2
Loading Originals in the Document Processor ........................................................... 5-3
Checking the Equipment's Serial Number ....................................................................... 5-5
Program ............................................................................................................................... 5-6
Registering Programs ................................................................................................ 5-7
Recalling Programs .................................................................................................... 5-7
Editing and Deleting Programs .................................................................................. 5-9
Registering Shortcuts ...................................................................................................... 5-10
(Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings) ................................................................... 5-10
Adding Shortcuts ...................................................................................................... 5-10
Editing and Deleting Shortcuts ................................................................................. 5-11
Using the Internet Browser ............................................................................................. 5-12
Launching and Exiting the Browser .......................................................................... 5-12
Using the Browser Screen ....................................................................................... 5-13
Canceling Jobs ................................................................................................................. 5-14
Canceling Jobs ......................................................................................................... 5-14
Canceling printing from a computer ......................................................................... 5-15
Copying ............................................................................................................................. 5-16
Basic Operation ........................................................................................................ 5-16
Reserve Next ........................................................................................................... 5-17
Interrupt Copy .......................................................................................................... 5-18
Sending ............................................................................................................................. 5-19
Basic Operation ........................................................................................................ 5-20
Specifying Destination .............................................................................................. 5-22
Checking and Editing Destinations .......................................................................... 5-30
Confirmation Screen of Destinations ........................................................................ 5-31
Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) ..................................... 5-32
WSD Scan/DSM Scan ............................................................................................. 5-33
Scanning using TWAIN .................................................................................................... 5-37
Scanning a document placed in the machine .......................................................... 5-37
Scanning a document stored in a custom box ......................................................... 5-39
Scanning with FMU Connection ..................................................................................... 5-41
Using FMU Connection to scan an original .............................................................. 5-41
What is Document Box? .................................................................................................. 5-42
Basic Operation for Document Box .......................................................................... 5-43
Using a Custom Box ........................................................................................................ 5-48
Creating a New Custom Box (Add/Edit Box) ............................................................ 5-48
Editing Custom Box .................................................................................................. 5-50
Storing Documents (Store File) ................................................................................ 5-51
Printing Documents (Print) ....................................................................................... 5-52
Sending Documents (Send) ..................................................................................... 5-53
Editing Documents ................................................................................................... 5-55
Deleting Documents ................................................................................................. 5-59
Job Box ............................................................................................................................. 5-60
Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs .................................................................................. 5-60
Form for Form Overlay ............................................................................................. 5-61
xvii
Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory ............................................. 5-63
Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) ...................................................... 5-65
Check the USB memory information .............................................................................. 5-66
Removing USB Memory ................................................................................................... 5-67
Manual Staple ................................................................................................................... 5-68
6
Using Various Functions ........................................................................6-1
Functions Available on the Machine ................................................................................ 6-2
Copy ........................................................................................................................... 6-2
Send ........................................................................................................................... 6-4
Custom Box (Store File, Printing, Send) .................................................................... 6-6
Removable Memory (Store File, Printing Documents) ............................................... 6-9
Functions .......................................................................................................................... 6-11
Original Size ............................................................................................................. 6-11
Paper Selection ........................................................................................................ 6-12
Mixed Size Originals ................................................................................................ 6-14
Original Orientation .................................................................................................. 6-16
Fold .......................................................................................................................... 6-17
Collate/Offset ........................................................................................................... 6-18
Staple/Punch ............................................................................................................ 6-19
Paper Output ............................................................................................................ 6-22
Density ..................................................................................................................... 6-22
Original Image .......................................................................................................... 6-23
EcoPrint .................................................................................................................... 6-24
Color Selection ......................................................................................................... 6-24
Sharpness ................................................................................................................ 6-25
Background Density Adj. .......................................................................................... 6-25
Prevent Bleed-thru ................................................................................................... 6-26
Zoom ........................................................................................................................ 6-27
Combine ................................................................................................................... 6-31
Margin/Centering, Margin, Centering ....................................................................... 6-33
Border Erase ............................................................................................................ 6-34
Booklet ..................................................................................................................... 6-36
Duplex ...................................................................................................................... 6-39
Cover ........................................................................................................................ 6-42
Form Overlay ........................................................................................................... 6-43
Page # ...................................................................................................................... 6-44
Memo Page .............................................................................................................. 6-46
Image Repeat ........................................................................................................... 6-47
Text Stamp ............................................................................................................... 6-48
Bates Stamp ............................................................................................................. 6-50
Continuous Scan ...................................................................................................... 6-52
Auto Image Rotation ................................................................................................ 6-53
Negative Image ........................................................................................................ 6-53
Mirror Image ............................................................................................................. 6-53
Job Finish Notice ...................................................................................................... 6-54
File Name Entry ....................................................................................................... 6-54
Priority Override ....................................................................................................... 6-55
Repeat Copy ............................................................................................................ 6-55
DP Read Action ........................................................................................................ 6-56
Skip Blank Page ....................................................................................................... 6-56
2-sided/Book Original ............................................................................................... 6-57
Sending Size ............................................................................................................ 6-58
File Format ............................................................................................................... 6-59
File Separation ......................................................................................................... 6-62
Scan Resolution, Resolution .................................................................................... 6-62
E-mail Subject/Body ................................................................................................. 6-62
Send and Print ......................................................................................................... 6-63
Send and Store ........................................................................................................ 6-63
xviii
FTP Encrypted TX .................................................................................................... 6-64
File Size Confirmation .............................................................................................. 6-64
Delete after Printed .................................................................................................. 6-64
Delete after Transmitted ........................................................................................... 6-64
Storing Size .............................................................................................................. 6-65
Encrypted PDF Password ........................................................................................ 6-65
JPEG/TIFF Print ....................................................................................................... 6-66
XPS Fit to Page ........................................................................................................ 6-66
Functions Available in the Home Screen ....................................................................... 6-67
Send to Me (E-mail) ................................................................................................. 6-67
Send to Me from Box (E-mail) .................................................................................. 6-67
7
Status/Job Cancel ...................................................................................7-1
Checking Job Status .......................................................................................................... 7-2
Details of the Status Screens ..................................................................................... 7-4
Checking Detailed Information of Jobs ...................................................................... 7-9
Checking Job History ...................................................................................................... 7-11
Checking the Detailed Information of Histories ........................................................ 7-13
Sending the Log History ........................................................................................... 7-13
Pause and Resumption of Jobs ...................................................................................... 7-14
Canceling of Jobs ............................................................................................................ 7-14
Priority Override for Waiting Jobs .................................................................................. 7-15
Reordering Print Jobs ...................................................................................................... 7-16
Device/Communication .................................................................................................... 7-17
Removing the USB Memory ..................................................................................... 7-18
Canceling FAX Communication ............................................................................... 7-19
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Paper/Supplies) .................... 7-20
8
Setup and Registration (System Menu) ................................................8-1
System Menu ...................................................................................................................... 8-2
Operation Method ...................................................................................................... 8-2
System Menu Settings ............................................................................................... 8-4
Cassette/MP Tray Settings ........................................................................................ 8-7
Common Settings ....................................................................................................... 8-9
Home ........................................................................................................................ 8-28
Copy ......................................................................................................................... 8-28
Send ......................................................................................................................... 8-29
Document Box/Removable Memory ........................................................................ 8-34
FAX .......................................................................................................................... 8-35
Printer ....................................................................................................................... 8-35
Report ...................................................................................................................... 8-37
System/Network ....................................................................................................... 8-43
Edit Destination ........................................................................................................ 8-53
User Login/Job Accounting ...................................................................................... 8-53
User Property ........................................................................................................... 8-54
Date/Timer/Energy Saver ......................................................................................... 8-54
Adjustment/Maintenance .......................................................................................... 8-57
Internet ..................................................................................................................... 8-60
9
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) 9-1
User Login ........................................................................................................................... 9-2
First User Login Administration .................................................................................. 9-2
User Login Setting ...................................................................................................... 9-2
User Login .................................................................................................................. 9-4
Authentication Security .............................................................................................. 9-6
Adding a User (Local User List) ................................................................................. 9-8
xix
Changing User Properties ........................................................................................ 9-11
Local Authorization ................................................................................................... 9-15
Group Authorization Set. .......................................................................................... 9-15
Guest Authorization Set. .......................................................................................... 9-18
Obtain NW User Property ........................................................................................ 9-21
Simple Login Settings .............................................................................................. 9-23
ID Card Settings ....................................................................................................... 9-26
Job Accounting Setting ................................................................................................... 9-27
First Job Accounting Setup ...................................................................................... 9-27
Job Accounting Setting ............................................................................................ 9-27
Job Accounting ......................................................................................................... 9-29
Login/Logout ............................................................................................................ 9-29
Job Accounting Access ............................................................................................ 9-30
Job Accounting (Local) ............................................................................................. 9-31
Accounting List ......................................................................................................... 9-32
Managing Accounts .................................................................................................. 9-33
Default Setting .......................................................................................................... 9-36
Counting the Number of Pages Printed ................................................................... 9-38
Apply Limit ................................................................................................................ 9-40
Copier/Printer Count ................................................................................................ 9-40
Unknown ID Job ............................................................................................................... 9-41
10
Troubleshooting ....................................................................................10-1
Regular Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 10-2
Cleaning ................................................................................................................... 10-2
Toner Container Replacement ................................................................................. 10-6
Waste Toner Box Replacement ............................................................................... 10-9
Replacing Staples .................................................................................................. 10-12
Disposing of the Punch Waste ............................................................................... 10-16
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................. 10-18
Solving Malfunctions .............................................................................................. 10-18
Responding to Messages ....................................................................................... 10-23
Adjustment/Maintenance ........................................................................................ 10-36
Clearing Paper Jams .............................................................................................. 10-39
Clearing a Staple Jam ............................................................................................ 10-63
11
Appendix ................................................................................................11-1
Optional Equipment ......................................................................................................... 11-2
Overview of Optional Equipment .............................................................................. 11-2
Optional Applications ............................................................................................... 11-8
Character Entry Method ................................................................................................. 11-10
Entry Screens ......................................................................................................... 11-10
Entering Characters ............................................................................................... 11-12
Paper ............................................................................................................................... 11-13
Basic Paper Specifications ..................................................................................... 11-13
Choosing the Appropriate Paper ............................................................................ 11-14
Special Paper ......................................................................................................... 11-17
Specifications ................................................................................................................. 11-22
Common functions ................................................................................................. 11-22
Copy functions ....................................................................................................... 11-24
Printer functions ..................................................................................................... 11-25
Scanner functions .................................................................................................. 11-25
Document Processor (Option) ................................................................................ 11-26
Paper Feeder (500-sheet x 2) (Option) .................................................................. 11-26
Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet x 2) (Option) ................................................ 11-27
Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) (Option) ....................................................................... 11-27
1,000-sheet Finisher (Option) ................................................................................ 11-28
4,000-sheet Finisher (Option) ................................................................................ 11-29
xx
Hole Punch Unit (Option) ....................................................................................... 11-29
Mailbox (Option) ..................................................................................................... 11-30
Center-Folding Unit (Option) .................................................................................. 11-30
Inner Job Separator (Option) ................................................................................. 11-31
Inner Job Separator (JS-732) (Option) ................................................................... 11-31
Right Job Separator (Option) ................................................................................. 11-32
Banner Tray (Option) ............................................................................................. 11-32
Glossary .......................................................................................................................... 11-33
Index ............................................................................................................................. Index-1
xxi
> Menu Map
Menu Map
(The names displayed on the touch panel are used here. These may differ from the referenced titles.)
or
Copy
Org./Paper/Finishing
Original Size (page 6-11)
Paper Selection (page 6-12)
Mixed Size Originals (page 6-14)
Original Orientation (page 6-16)
Fold (page 6-17)
Collate/Offset (page 6-18)
Staple/Punch
Staple (page 6-19)
Punch (page 6-20)
Paper Output (page 6-22)
Image Quality
Density (page 6-22)
Original Image (page 6-23)
EcoPrint (page 6-24)
Sharpness (page 6-25)
Background Density Adj. (page 6-25)
Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-26)
Layout/Edit
Zoom (page 6-27)
Combine (page 6-31)
Margin/Centering (page 6-33)
Border Erase (page 6-34)
Booklet (page 6-36)
Duplex (page 6-39)
Cover (page 6-42)
Form Overlay (page 6-43)
xxii
> Menu Map
Layout/Edit
Page # (page 6-44)
Memo Page (page 6-46)
Image Repeat (page 6-47)
Text Stamp (page 6-48)
Bates Stamp (page 6-50)
Advanced Setup
Continuous Scan (page 6-52)
Auto Image Rotation (page 6-53)
Negative Image (page 6-53)
Mirror Image (page 6-53)
Job Finish Notice (page 6-54)
File Name Entry (page 6-54)
Priority Override (page 6-55)
Repeat Copy (page 6-55)
DP Read Action (page 6-56)
Skip Blank Page (page 6-56)
Program (page 5-6)
xxiii
> Menu Map
or
Send
Destination
Address Book (page 5-26)
E-mail Addr Entry (page 5-29)
Folder Path Entry (page 5-31)
FAX No. Entry (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
i-FAX Address Entry (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
WSD Scan/DSM Scan (page 5-37)
Org./Sending Data Format
Original Size (page 6-11)
Mixed Size Originals (page 6-14)
2-sided/Book Original (page 6-57)
Original Orientation (page 6-16)
Sending Size (page 6-58)
File Format (page 6-59)
File Separation (page 6-62)
Long Original (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Color/Image Quality
Density (page 6-22)
Original Image (page 6-23)
Scan Resolution (page 6-62)
FAX TX Resolution (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Color Selection (page 6-24)
Sharpness (page 6-25)
Background Density Adj. (page 6-25)
Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-26)
xxiv
> Menu Map
Advanced Setup
Zoom (page 6-27)
Centering (page 6-33)
Border Erase (page 6-34)
FAX Delayed Transmission (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Continuous Scan (page 6-52)
Job Finish Notice (page 6-54)
File Name Entry (page 6-54)
E-mail Subject/Body (page 6-62)
i-FAX Subject/Body (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
FAX Direct Transmission (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
FAX Polling RX (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Send and Print (page 6-63)
Send and Store (page 6-63)
FTP Encrypted TX (page 6-64)
Text Stamp (page 6-48)
Bates Stamp (page 6-50)
File Size Confirmation (page 6-64)
FAX TX Report (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Program (page 5-6)
xxv
> Menu Map
Custom Box
Custom Box
Store File
Functions
Original Size (page 6-11)
Mixed Size Originals (page 6-14)
2-sided/Book Original (page 6-57)
Original Orientation (page 6-16)
Storing Size (page 6-65)
Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-26)
Density (page 6-22)
Original Image (page 6-23)
Scan Resolution (page 6-62)
Color Selection (page 6-24)
Sharpness (page 6-25)
Background Density Adj. (page 6-25)
Zoom (page 6-27)
Centering (page 6-33)
Border Erase (page 6-34)
Continuous Scan (page 6-52)
Job Finish Notice (page 6-54)
File Name Entry (page 6-54)
Program (page 5-6)
Detail (page 5-47)
xxvi
> Menu Map
Custom Box
Open
Print
Functions
Paper Selection (page 6-12)
Collate/Offset (page 6-18)
Staple/Punch (page 6-19)
Staple (page 6-19)
Punch (page 6-20)
Paper Output (page 6-22)
Combine (page 6-31)
Margin/Centering (page 6-33)
Booklet (page 6-36)
Printing (page 6-41)
Cover (page 6-42)
Form Overlay (page 6-43)
Page # (page 6-44)
Job Finish Notice (page 6-54)
File Name Entry (page 6-54)
Delete after Printed (page 6-64)
Priority Override (page 6-55)
EcoPrint (page 6-24)
Zoom (page 6-27)
Fold (page 6-17)
Text Stamp (page 6-48)
Bates Stamp (page 6-50)
Image Quality
Density (page 6-22)
Original Image (page 6-23)
Sharpness (page 6-25)
Background Density Adj. (page 6-25)
Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-26)
Program (page 5-6)
xxvii
> Menu Map
Custom Box
Open
Send
Destination (page 5-26)
Functions
Sending Size (page 6-58)
File Format (page 6-59)
FAX TX Resolution (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Centering (page 6-33)
FAX Delayed Transmission
(refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Job Finish Notice (page 6-54)
File Name Entry (page 6-54)
E-mail Subject/Body (page 6-62)
i-FAX Subject/Body
(refer to FAX Operation Guide)
FTP Encrypted TX (page 6-64)
Delete after Transmitted (page 6-64)
Zoom (page 6-27)
File Separation (page 6-62)
Text Stamp (page 6-48)
Bates Stamp (page 6-50)
File Size Confirmation (page 6-64)
FAX TX Report (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Color/Image
Quality
Density (page 6-22)
Original Image (page 6-23)
Resolution (page 6-62)
Color Selection (page 6-24)
Sharpness (page 6-25)
Background Density Adj. (page 6-25)
Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-26)
Program (page 5-6)
Join (page 5-61)
Move/Copy (page 5-59)
Delete (page 5-66)
Store File (page 5-55)
Search(Name) (page 5-47)
Page Selection (page 5-47)
Detail (page 5-47)
Preview (page 5-50)
Search(No.) (page 5-47)
Search(Name) (page 5-47)
Add/Edit Box (page 5-52)
xxviii
> Menu Map
Job Box
Job Box
Private Print/Stored Job (page 4-14)
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold (page 4-16)
Repeat Copy (page 6-55)
Form for Form Overlay (page 5-65)
Removable
Memory
Removable Memory
Print
Functions
Paper Selection (page 6-12)
Collate/Offset (page 6-18)
Staple/Punch (page 6-19)
Staple (page 6-19)
Punch (page 6-20)
Paper Output (page 6-22)
Margin (page 6-33)
Duplex (page 6-39)
Job Finish Notice (page 6-54)
Priority Override (page 6-55)
EcoPrint (page 6-24)
Fold (page 6-17)
Text Stamp (page 6-48)
Bates Stamp (page 6-50)
Encrypted PDF Password (page 6-65)
JPEG/TIFF Print (page 6-66)
XPS Fit to Page (page 6-66)
xxix
> Menu Map
Removable Memory
Store File
Functions
Original Size (page 6-11)
Mixed Size Originals (page 6-14)
2-sided/Book Original (page 6-57)
Original Orientation (page 6-16)
Storing Size (page 6-65)
Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-26)
Density (page 6-22)
Original Image (page 6-23)
Scan Resolution (page 6-62)
Color Selection (page 6-24)
Sharpness (page 6-25)
Background Density Adj. (page 6-25)
Zoom (page 6-27)
Centering (page 6-33)
Border Erase (page 6-34)
Continuous Scan (page 6-52)
Job Finish Notice (page 6-54)
File Name Entry (page 6-54)
File Format (page 6-59)
File Separation (page 6-62)
Text Stamp (page 6-48)
Bates Stamp (page 6-50)
Delete (page 5-48)
Detail (page 5-47)
Memory Information (page 5-70)
Remove Memory (page 5-71)
FAX Box (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
xxx
> Menu Map
or
Status/
Job Cancel
Printing Jobs (page 7-4)
Sending Jobs (page 7-6)
Storing Jobs (page 7-7)
Device/Communication (page 7-17)
Paper/Supplies (page 7-20)
xxxi
> Menu Map
or
System
Menu
Quick Setup Wizard
FAX Setup (page 2-28)
Energy Saver Setup (page 2-28)
Cassette/MP Tray Settings
Cassette 1 (page 8-7)
Cassette 2 (page 8-7)
Cassette 3 (page 8-7)
Cassette 4 (page 8-7)
Cassette 5 (page 8-7)
MP Tray Setting (page 8-8)
Common Settings
Language (page 8-9)
Default Screen (page 8-9)
Sound
Buzzer (page 8-9)
FAX Speaker Volume (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
FAX Monitor Volume (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Keyboard Layout (page 8-10)
Original/Paper Settings
Custom Original Size (page 8-10)
Custom Paper Size (page 8-10)
Media Type Setting (page 8-10)
Default Paper Source (page 8-11)
Auto Detect Original Size (page 8-11)
Media for Auto (B&W) (page 8-11)
Paper Source for Cover (page 8-12)
Special Paper Action (page 8-12)
Measurement (page 8-14)
xxxii
> Menu Map
Common Settings
Error Handling
Duplexing Error (page 8-14)
Finishing Error (page 8-14)
No Staple Error (page 8-14)
Finished Pages Exceeded (page 8-14)
Punch Waste Full Error (page 8-15)
Paper Mismatch Error (page 8-15)
Inserted Paper Mismatch (page 8-15)
Paper Jam before Staple (page 8-15)
Paper Jam before Staple (page 8-15)
Paper Output (page 8-16)
Orientation Confirmation (page 8-16)
Function Defaults
Original Orientation (page 8-17)
Original Image (Copy) (page 8-17)
Org. Image (Send/Store) (page 8-17)
Scan Resolution (page 8-17)
FAX TX Resolution (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Color Selection (page 8-17)
File Format (page 8-17)
File Separation (page 8-17)
Backgrnd Density (Copy) (page 8-17)
BackgrndDens.(Send/Store) (page 8-17)
Prevent Bleed-thru (Copy) (page 8-17)
Prevent Bleed(Send/Store) (page 8-17)
Zoom (page 8-17)
Border Erase Default (page 8-17)
Border Erase to Back Page (page 8-17)
Margin Default (page 8-18)
Auto Image Rotation (Copy) (page 8-18)
EcoPrint (page 8-18)
Toner Save Level (EcoPrint) (page 8-18)
High Comp. PDF Image (page 8-18)
xxxiii
> Menu Map
Common Settings
Function Defaults
Color TIFF Compression (page 8-18)
Image Quality (File Format) (page 8-18)
Collate/Offset (page 8-18)
JPEG/TIFF Print (page 8-18)
XPS Fit to Page (page 8-18)
PDF/A (page 8-18)
Cont. Scan (Except FAX) (page 8-18)
Continuous Scan (FAX) (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
File Name Entry (page 8-18)
E-mail Subject/Body (page 8-19)
i-FAX Subject/Body (page 8-19)
DP Read Action (page 8-19)
OCR Text Recognition (page 8-19)
Primary OCR Language (page 8-19)
Auto Image Rotation (OCR) (page 8-19)
Repeat Copy (page 8-20)
Skip Blank Page (page 8-20)
USB Keyboard Type (page 8-20)
System Stamp (page 8-20)
Manual Staple (page 8-24)
Offset Documents by Job (page 8-24)
Low Toner Alert Level (page 8-25)
Display Status/Log (page 8-25)
Message Banner Print (page 8-25)
Customize Status Display (page 8-26)
Function Key Usage (page 8-26)
Message Board Settings (page 8-27)
Remote Printing (page 8-27)
Home
Customize Desktop (page 3-5)
Customize Taskbar (page 3-5)
Wallpaper (page 3-5)
xxxiv
> Menu Map
Copy
Paper Selection (page 8-28)
Auto Image Rotation Action (page 8-28)
Auto Paper Selection (page 8-28)
Auto % Priority (page 8-28)
Paper Size for Small Original (page 8-28)
Preset Limit (page 8-28)
Reserve Next Priority (page 8-29)
Quick Setup Registration (page 8-29)
Send
Quick Setup Registration (page 8-29)
Dest. Check before Send (page 8-29)
Color Type (page 8-29)
Entry Check for New Dest. (page 8-29)
Default Screen (page 8-29)
Send and Forward (page 8-30)
New Destination Entry (page 8-30)
Recall Destination (page 8-30)
OCR Text Recognition Act. (page 8-30)
HighCompressionPDF Mode (page 8-30)
Document Box/Removable
Memory
Custom Box (page 5-52)
FAX Box (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Job Box
Quick Copy Job Retention (page 8-34)
Repeat Copy Job Retention (page 8-34)
Deletion of Job Retention (page 8-34)
Polling Box (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Quick Setup Registration (page 8-34)
FAX (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
xxxv
> Menu Map
Printer
Emulation (page 8-35)
EcoPrint (page 8-35)
Toner Save Level (EcoPrint) (page 8-35)
Override A4/Letter (page 8-35)
Duplex (page 8-35)
Copies (page 8-35)
Orientation (page 8-36)
Form Feed Timeout (page 8-36)
LF Action (page 8-36)
CR Action (page 8-36)
Job Name (page 8-36)
User Name (page 8-36)
Paper Feed Mode (page 8-36)
KIR (page 8-36)
Report
Print Report
Status Page (page 8-37)
Font List (page 8-37)
Network Status (page 8-37)
Service Status (page 8-38)
Optional Network Status (page 8-38)
Admin Report Settings
Outgoing FAX Report (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Incoming FAX Report (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Result Report Settings
Send Result Report (page 8-38)
FAX RX Result Report (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Job Finish Notice Setting (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
RX Result Report Type (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Sending Log History
Auto Sending (page 8-39)
Sending Log History (page 8-39)
Destination (page 8-39)
Job Log Subject (page 8-39)
Personal Information (page 8-39)
xxxvi
> Menu Map
Report
Login History Settings
Login History (page 8-40)
Auto Sending (page 8-40)
Destination (page 8-40)
Subject (page 8-40)
Log Reset (page 8-40)
Device Log History
Settings
Device Log History (page 8-41)
Auto Sending (page 8-41)
Destination (page 8-41)
Subject (page 8-41)
Secure Comm. Error Log
Secure Comm. Error Log (page 8-42)
Auto Sending (page 8-42)
Destination (page 8-42)
Subject (page 8-42)
System/Network
Network
Host Name (page 8-43)
TCP/IP Setting
TCP/IP (page 8-43)
IPv4 (page 8-43)
IPv6 (page 8-44)
Bonjour (page 8-44)
IPSec (page 8-44)
Protocol Settings
SMTP (E-mail TX) (page 8-45)
POP3 (E-mail RX) (page 8-45)
FTP Client (Transmission) (page 845)
FTP Server (Reception) (page 8-45)
SMB Client (Transmission): (page 845)
NetBEUI (page 8-45)
WSD Scan (page 8-45)
WSD Print (page 8-45)
i-FAX (page 8-45)
DSM Scan (page 8-45)
ThinPrint (page 8-45)
LPD (page 8-45)
Raw (page 8-45)
IPP (page 8-45)
IPP over SSL (page 8-45)
HTTP (page 8-46)
HTTPS (page 8-46)
xxxvii
> Menu Map
System/Network
Network
Protocol Settings
LDAP (page 8-46)
SNMPv1/v2c (page 8-46)
SNMPv3 (page 8-46)
Enhanced WSD (page 8-46)
Enhanced WSD over SSL (page 846)
Security Settings (page 8-46)
LAN Interface (page 8-46)
Restart Network (page 8-46)
Proxy (page 8-47)
Optional Network
Network Interface (Send) (page 8-49)
Wireless Network (page 8-48)
Network Interface (Send) (page 8-49)
Security Level (page 8-49)
Interface Block Setting
USB Host (page 8-50)
USB Device (page 8-50)
USB Storage (page 8-50)
Optional Interface 1 (page 8-50)
Optional Interface 2 (page 8-50)
Data Security (page 8-50)
Document Guard (page 8-51)
Optional Function (page 8-52)
Restart Entire Device (page 8-52)
Edit Destination
Address Book (page 3-45)
One Touch Key (page 3-53)
Print List (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Address Book Defaults
Sort (page 8-53)
Narrow Down (page 8-53)
Address Book Type (page 8-53)
xxxviii
> Menu Map
User Login/Job Accounting
User Login Setting
User Login (page 9-4)
Authentication Security
User Account Lockout Set. (page 96)
Password Policy Settings (page 9-7)
Local User List (page 9-8)
Local Authorization (page 9-15)
Group Authorization Set.
Group Authorization (page 9-15)
Group List (page 9-16)
Guest Authorization Set.
Guest Authorization (page 9-18)
Guest Property (page 9-18)
Obtain NW User Property (page 9-21)
Simple Login Settings
Simple Login (page 9-23)
Simple Login Key (page 9-23)
ID Card Settings
Keyboard Login (page 9-26)
Password Login (page 9-26)
Job Accounting Setting
Job Accounting (page 9-29)
Job Accounting Access (page 9-30)
Job Accounting (Local)
Print Accounting Report (page 9-31)
Total Job Accounting (page 9-38)
Each Job Accounting (page 9-39)
Accounting List (page 9-32)
Default Setting (page 9-36)
Apply Limit (page 9-40)
Copier/Printer Count (page 9-40)
Unknown ID Job (page 9-41)
User Property (page 9-11)
xxxix
> Menu Map
Date/Timer/Energy Saver
Date/Time (page 8-54)
Date Format (page 8-54)
Time Zone (page 8-54)
Auto Panel Reset (page 8-54)
Auto Sleep (page 8-54)
Auto Error Clear (page 8-54)
Low Power Timer (page 8-55)
Panel Reset Timer (page 8-55)
Sleep Timer (page 8-55)
Interrupt Clear Timer (page 8-55)
Error Job Skip (page 8-55)
Error Clear Timer (page 8-55)
Unusable Time (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Sleep Level (page 8-55)
EnergySaver RecoveryLevel (page 8-56)
Weekly Timer Settings (page 8-56)
Adjustment/Maintenance
Density Adjustment
Copy (page 8-57)
Send/Box (page 8-57)
FAX (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Background Density Adj.
Copy (Auto) (page 8-57)
Send/Box (Auto) (page 8-57)
Correcting Black Lines (page 8-57)
System Initialization (page 8-57)
Display Brightness (page 8-57)
Silent Mode (page 8-57)
Memory Diagnostics (page 8-57)
Auto Color Correction (page 8-58)
Tone Curve Adjustment (page 8-58)
Drum Refresh 1 (page 8-58)
Drum Refresh 2 (page 8-58)
Developer Refresh (page 8-58)
Color Calibration Cycle (page 8-58)
Calibration (page 8-59)
Correct Paper Curl (page 8-59)
Internet (page 8-60)
xl
> Menu Map
xli
1
Legal and
Safety Information
Please read this information before using your machine. This chapter provides information on the following topics.
Notice ................................................................................................................................................................. 1-2
Safety Conventions in This Guide ........................................................................................................... 1-2
Environment ............................................................................................................................................. 1-3
Precautions for Use ................................................................................................................................. 1-4
Laser Safety (Europe) .............................................................................................................................. 1-5
SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA) .......................................................................................................... 1-6
Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power ..................................................................... 1-7
WARNING ................................................................................................................................................ 1-7
Radio Tag Technology ............................................................................................................................. 1-7
Other precautions (for users in California, the United States) .................................................................. 1-7
Warranty (the United States and Canada) ............................................................................................... 1-8
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning ................................................................................................... 1-9
Legal Information ................................................................................................................................... 1-10
Energy Saving Control Function ............................................................................................................ 1-16
Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function ......................................................................................................... 1-16
Resource Saving - Paper ....................................................................................................................... 1-16
Environmental benefits of "Power Management" ................................................................................... 1-16
Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program .............................................................................................. 1-17
1-1
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
Notice
Safety Conventions in This Guide
The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect the user,
other individuals and surrounding objects, and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine. The symbols and their
meanings are indicated below.
WARNING: Indicates that serious injury or even death may result from insufficient
attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.
CAUTION: Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage may result from
insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.
Symbols
The U symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings. Specific points of attention are indicated
inside the symbol.
... [General warning]
... [Warning of high temperature]
The
symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions. Specifics of the prohibited
action are indicated inside the symbol.
... [Warning of prohibited action]
... [Disassembly prohibited]
The z symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed. Specifics of
the required action are indicated inside the symbol.
... [Alert of required action]
... [Remove the power plug from the outlet]
... [Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground connection]
Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this Operation Guide are
illegible or if the guide itself is missing (fee required).
NOTE
An original which resembles a bank note closely may not be copied properly in some rare cases because this
machine is equipped with a counterfeiting prevention function.
1-2
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
Environment
The service environmental conditions are as follows:
•
Temperature: 50 to 90.5 °F (10 to 32.5 °C)
(But humidity should be 70% or less when temperature is 90.5 °F (32.5 °C).)
•
Humidity: 15 to 80%
(But temperature should be 86 °F (30 °C) or less when humidity is 80%.)
Use coated paper at a temperature of 80.6 °F (27°C) or less and a humidity of 60% or less.
Adverse environmental conditions may affect the image quality. It is recommended to use the machine at a temperature:
around 60.8 to 80.6 °F or less (16 to 27 °C), humidity: around 36 to 65%. In addition, Avoid the following locations when
selecting a site for the machine.
The machine automatically detects and displays the following message when the environmental temperature is too high
or too low.
Message: "Warning for high temperature. Adjust the room temperature." or "Warning for low temperature. Adjust the
room temperature."
To use the machine under optimum conditions, adjust the temperature and the humidity of your room if the message is
displayed.
•
Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight.
•
Avoid locations with vibrations.
•
Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations.
•
Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air.
•
Avoid poorly ventilated locations.
If the floor is delicate against casters, when this machine is moved after installation, the floor material may be damaged.
During copying, some ozone is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one's health. If, however, the
machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely large number of
copies, the smell may become unpleasant. To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work, it is suggested that
the room be properly ventilated.
1-3
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
Precautions for Use
Cautions when handling consumables
CAUTION
Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.
Keep parts which contain toner out of the reach of children.
If toner happens to spill from parts which contain toner, avoid inhalation and ingestion, as well as contact with your eyes
and skin.
•
If you do happen to inhale toner, move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of water. If
coughing develops, contact a physician.
•
If you do happen to ingest toner, rinse your mouth with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the contents of
your stomach. If necessary, contact a physician.
•
If you do happen to get toner in your eyes, flush them thoroughly with water. If there is any remaining tenderness,
contact a physician.
•
If toner does happen to get on your skin, wash with soap and water.
Do not attempt to force open or destroy parts which contain toner.
Other precautions
Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner
container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.
Store the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight.
Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40 °C while avoiding sharp changes of temperature
and humidity.
If the machine will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the paper from the cassette and the Multi Purpose
(MP) Tray, return it to its original package and reseal it.
1-4
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
Laser Safety (Europe)
Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body. For this reason, laser radiation emitted inside this machine is
hermetically sealed within the protective housing and external cover. In the normal operation of the product by user, no
radiation can leak from the machine.
This machine is classified as Class 1 laser product under IEC/EN 60825-1:2007.
Caution: Performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation
exposure.
These labels are attached to the laser scanner unit inside the machine and are not in a user access area.
The label shown below is attached on the right side of the machine.
1-5
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA)
1. Safety of laser beam
This machine has been certified by the manufacturer to Class 1 level under the radiation performance standards
established by the U.S.DHHS (Department of Health and Human Services) in 1968. This indicates that the product is
safe to use during normal operation and maintenance. The laser optical system, enclosed in a protective housing and
sealed within the external covers, never permits the laser beam to escape.
2. The CDRH Act
A laser-product-related act was implemented on Aug. 2, 1976, by the Center for Devices and Radiological Health
(CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA). This act prohibits the sale of laser products in the U.S. without
certification, and applies to laser products manufactured after Aug. 1, 1976. The label shown below indicates
compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States. On this
machine, the label is on the right.
d-Copia 3500MF plus
d-Copia 4500MF plus
d-Copia 4500MF plus
3. Optical unit
When checking the optical unit, avoid direct exposure to the laser beam, which is invisible. Shown at below is the label
located on the cover of the optical unit.
4. Maintenance
For safety of the service personnel, follow the maintenance instructions in the other section of this manual.
5. Safety switch
The power to the laser unit is cut off when the front cover is opened.
1-6
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of
Power
Caution: The power plug is the main isolation device! Other switches on the equipment are only functional switches and
are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source.
Attention: Le débranchement de la fiche secteur est le seul moyen de mettre l'appareil hors tension. Les interrupteurs
sur l'appareil ne sont que des interrupteurs de fonctionnement: ils ne mettent pas l'appareil hors tension.
WARNING
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try
to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
•
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
•
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
•
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
•
The use of a non-shielded interface cable with the referenced device is prohibited.
CAUTION — The changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This device contains the module (FCC ID: E522K3A0512, IC: 1059B-2K3A0512), which complies with Part 15 of FCC
Rules and RSS-Gen of IC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Radio Tag Technology
In some countries the radio tag technology used in this equipment to identify the toner container may be subject to
authorization and the use of this equipment may consequently be restricted.
Other precautions
(for users in California, the United States)
Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
1-7
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning
It may be prohibited to copy/scan copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner.
Copying/Scanning the following items is prohibited and may be penalized by low. It may not be limited to these items. Do
not knowingly copy/scan the items that are not to be copied/scanned.
•
Paper money
•
Bank note
•
Securities
•
Stamp
•
Passport
•
Certificate
Local laws and regulations may prohibit or restrict copying/scanning of other items not mentioned above.
EN ISO 7779
Maschinenlärminformations-Verordnung 3. GPSGV, 06.01.2004: Der höchste Schalldruckpegel beträgt 70 dB (A) oder
weniger gemäß EN ISO 7779.
EK1-ITB 2000
Das Gerät ist nicht für die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen. Um
störende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden, darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld
platziert werden.
1-8
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
Legal Information
Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this guide without the prior written consent of Olivetti Document
Solutions Inc. is prohibited.
Regarding Trade Names
•
PRESCRIBE is a registered trademark of Kyocera Corporation.
•
KPDL is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation.
•
Microsoft, Windows, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008, Windows 7,
Windows Server 2012, Windows 8 and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and/or other countries.
•
PCL is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
•
Adobe Acrobat, Adobe Reader and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
•
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
•
IBM and IBM PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
•
AppleTalk, Bonjour, Macintosh, and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
•
Helvetica, Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype GmbH.
•
ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Bookman, ITC ZapfChancery and ITC ZapfDingbats are registered trademarks of
International Typeface Corporation.
•
UFST™ MicroType® fonts by Monotype Imaging Inc. are installed in this machine.
•
This machine contains the software having modules developed by Independent JPEG Group.
•
ThinPrint is a trademark of Cortado AG in Germany and other countries.
•
This product contains NetFront Browser of ACCESS CO., LTD.
•
ACCESS, ACCESS logo and NetFront are trademarks or registered
trademarks of ACCESS CO., LTD. in the United States, Japan and
other countries.
•
© 2011 ACCESS CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
•
Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks designations ™ and ® will not be used in
this Operation Guide.
1-9
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
GPL/LGPL
This product contains GPL (http://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html) and/or LGPL (http://www.gnu.org/licenses/lgpl.html)
software as part of its firmware. You can get the source code, and you are permitted to copy, redistribute and modify it
under the terms of GPL/LGPL.
OpenSSL License
Copyright (c) 1998-2006 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.
(http://www.openssl.org/)"
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without prior written permission.
For written permission, please contact [email protected].
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without
prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software
developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR
ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Original SSLeay License
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected]) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young ([email protected]). The implementation was written so
as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are adhered to. The
following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the
SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the
holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]).
Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed.
If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used.
This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the
package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
1-10
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement:
"This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected])"
The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-).
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must
include an acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected])"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e.
this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]
Monotype Imaging License Agreement
1 Software shall mean the digitally encoded, machine readable, scalable outline data as encoded in a special format as
well as the UFST Software.
2 You agree to accept a non-exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights, styles and
versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols (Typefaces) solely for your own customary business or
personal purposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype Imaging. Under the terms of
this License Agreement, you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three printers. If you need to have access to the
fonts on more than three printers, you need to acquire a multiuser license agreement which can be obtained from
Monotype Imaging. Monotype Imaging retains all rights, title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights
are granted to you other than a License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement.
3 To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging, you agree to maintain the Software and other proprietary
information concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable procedures regulating access
to and use of the Software and Typefaces.
4 You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces, except that you may make one backup copy. You
agree that any such copy shall contain the same proprietary notices as those appearing on the original.
5 This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces, unless sooner terminated. This License
may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not
remedied within thirty (30) days after notice from Monotype Imaging. When this License expires or is terminated, you
shall either return to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the Software and Typefaces and documentation as
requested.
6 You agree that you will not modify, alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or decompile the Software.
7 Monotype Imaging warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery, the Software will perform in accordance with
Monotype Imaging-published specifications, and the diskette will be free from defects in material and workmanship.
Monotype Imaging does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs, errors and omissions.
The parties agree that all other warranties, expressed or implied, including warranties of fitness for a particular
purpose and merchantability, are excluded.
8 Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Monotype Imaging in connection with the Software and Typefaces is
repair or replacement of defective parts, upon their return to Monotype Imaging.
In no event will Monotype Imaging be liable for lost profits, lost data, or any other incidental or consequential
damages, or any damages caused by abuse or misapplication of the Software and Typefaces.
9 Massachusetts U.S.A. law governs this Agreement.
1-11
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
10 You shall not sublicense, sell, lease, or otherwise transfer the Software and/or Typefaces without the prior written
consent of Monotype Imaging.
11 Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data
and Computer Software clause at FAR 252-227-7013, subdivision (b)(3)(ii) or subparagraph (c)(1)(ii), as appropriate.
Further use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in
FAR 52.227-19 (c)(2).
12 You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement, understand it, and agree to be bound by its terms and
conditions. Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation not contained in this Agreement. No
change in this Agreement is effective unless written and signed by properly authorized representatives of each party.
By opening this diskette package, you agree to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement.
Knopflerfish License
This product includes software developed by the Knopflerfish Project.
http://www.knopflerfish.org
Copyright 2003-2010 The Knopflerfish Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
- Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
- Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
- Neither the name of the KNOPFLERFISH project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Apache License (Version 2.0)
Apache License
Version 2.0, January 2004
http://www.apache.org/licenses/
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
1. Definitions.
"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by Sections 1
through 9 of this document.
"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License.
"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or are
under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, "control" means (i) the power, direct or
indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of
fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.
"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License.
"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software source
code, documentation source, and configuration files.
1-12
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form, including
but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media types.
"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the License, as
indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example is provided in the Appendix
below).
"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from) the
Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a whole, an
original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain
separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof.
"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any modifications or
additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work
by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For
the purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent to the
Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code
control systems, and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of
discussing and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise
designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a Contribution."
"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been
received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work.
2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to
You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to reproduce,
prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such
Derivative Works in Source or Object form.
3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a
perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent
license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such license
applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their
Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was
submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit)
alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent
infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date
such litigation is filed.
4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with
or without modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the following conditions:
(a)You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and
(b)You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and
(c)You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark,
and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of
the Derivative Works; and
(d)If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute
must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices
that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text
file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or documentation, if provided along with the
Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices
normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the
License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an
addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be
construed as modifying the License.
You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license
terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such Derivative Works as
a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated
in this License.
1-13
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally submitted for
inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License, without any
additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any
separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions.
6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service marks, or product
names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and
reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.
7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and
each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of TITLE, NONINFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible
for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your
exercise of permissions under this License.
8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or
otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in writing,
shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential
damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work (including
but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other
commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose
to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights
consistent with this License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only on Your own behalf and on
Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold
each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your
accepting any such warranty or additional liability.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work.
To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by brackets
"[]" replaced with your own identifying information. (Don't include the brackets!) The text should be enclosed in the
appropriate comment syntax for the file format. We also recommend that a file or class name and description of
purpose be included on the same "printed page" as the copyright notice for easier identification within third-party
archives.
Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in compliance with the
License. You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS
IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for
the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License.
1-14
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
Energy Saving Control Function
The device comes equipped with a Low Power Mode where energy consumption is reduced after a certain amount of
time elapses since the device was last used, as well as a Sleep where printer and fax functions remain in a waiting state
but power consumption is still reduced to a minimum when there is no activity with the device within a set amount of
time.
Low Power Mode
The device automatically enters Low Power Mode when 2 minutes have passed since the device was last used. The
amount of time of no activity that must pass before Low Power Mode is activated may be lengthened. For more
information refer to Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode (page 3-14).
Sleep
The device automatically enters Sleep when 45 minutes (for d-Copia 3500MF plus), or 60 minutes (for d-Copia 4500MF plus or
d-Copia 5500MF plus) have passed since the device was last used. The amount of time of no activity that must pass before
Sleep is activated may be lengthened. For more information see Sleep and Auto Sleep (page 3-15).
Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function
This device includes 2-sided copying as a standard function. For example, by copying two 1-sided originals onto a single
sheet of paper as a 2-sided copy, it is possible to lower the amount of paper used. For more information refer to Duplex
(page 6-39).
Printing in duplex mode reduces paper consumption and contributes to the conservation of forest resources. Duplex
mode also reduces the amount of paper that must be purchased, and thereby reduces cost. It is recommended that
machines capable of duplex printing be set to use duplex mode by default.
Resource Saving - Paper
For the preservation and sustainable use of forest resources, it is recommended that recycled as well as virgin paper
certified under environmental stewardship initiatives or carrying recognised ecolabels, which meet EN 12281:2002* or
an equivalent quality standard, be used.
This machine also supports printing on 64 g/m2 paper. Using such paper containing less raw materials can lead to
further saving of forest resources.
* : EN12281:2002 "Printing and business paper - Requirements for copy paper for dry toner imaging processes"
Your sales or service representative can provide information about recommended paper types.
Environmental benefits of "Power Management"
To reduce power consumption when idle, this machine is equipped with a power management function that
automatically activates energy-saving mode when the machine is idle for a certain period of time.
Although it takes the machine a slight amount of time to return to READY mode when in energy-saving mode, a
significant reduction in energy consumption is possible. It is recommended that the machine be used with the activation
time for energy-saving mode set to the default setting.
1-15
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program
We have determined as a participating company in the International Energy Star Program that this
product is compliant with the standards laid out in the International Energy Star Program.
ENERGY STAR® is a voluntary energy efficiency program with the goal of developing and promoting the
use of products with high energy efficiency in order to help prevent global warming. By purchasing
ENERGY STAR® qualified products, customers can help reduce emissions of greenhouse gases during
product use and cut energy-related costs.
1-16
2
Installing and Setting up
the Machine
This chapter provides information for the administrator of this machine, such as part names, cable connection, and
software installation.
Part Names ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-2
Machine Exterior ...................................................................................................................................... 2-2
Connectors/Interior .................................................................................................................................. 2-4
With Optional Equipments Attached ........................................................................................................ 2-5
Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables .............................................................................. 2-6
Connection Example ................................................................................................................................ 2-6
Preparing Necessary Cables ................................................................................................................... 2-7
Connecting Cables ............................................................................................................................................. 2-8
Connecting LAN Cable ............................................................................................................................ 2-8
Connecting USB Cable ............................................................................................................................ 2-9
Connecting the Power Cable ................................................................................................................... 2-9
Power On/Off ................................................................................................................................................... 2-10
Power On ............................................................................................................................................... 2-10
Power Off ................................................................................................................................................ 2-11
Installing Software ............................................................................................................................................ 2-13
Software on DVD (Windows) ................................................................................................................. 2-13
Installing Printer Driver in Windows ....................................................................................................... 2-14
Uninstalling the Software ....................................................................................................................... 2-16
Installing Printer Driver in Macintosh ..................................................................................................... 2-17
Setting TWAIN Driver ............................................................................................................................. 2-19
Setting WIA Driver ................................................................................................................................. 2-20
Login/Logout .................................................................................................................................................... 2-21
Login ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-21
Logout .................................................................................................................................................... 2-22
Default Settings of the Machine ....................................................................................................................... 2-23
Setting Date and Time ........................................................................................................................... 2-23
Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) ............................................................................................... 2-25
Quick Setup Wizard ............................................................................................................................... 2-28
Checking the Counter ............................................................................................................................ 2-30
Additional Preparations for the Administrator ................................................................................................... 2-31
To Send Documents to a PC .................................................................................................................. 2-31
To E-mail Scanned Images .................................................................................................................... 2-31
To Strengthen the Security ..................................................................................................................... 2-31
Embedded Web Server RX .............................................................................................................................. 2-33
Accessing Embedded Web Server RX .................................................................................................. 2-34
Changing Security Settings ................................................................................................................... 2-35
Changing Host Name ............................................................................................................................ 2-36
Sending E-mail ...................................................................................................................................... 2-37
Registering Destinations ........................................................................................................................ 2-40
Registering a Custom Box ..................................................................................................................... 2-41
Data Migration from Other Olivetti Products .................................................................................................... 2-42
Migrating the Address Book ................................................................................................................... 2-42
2-1
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names
Part Names
Machine Exterior
1
2
3
4 5 6
7 8
9
10
13
14 15
19
16
17 18 19
1 Document Processor (Option)
11 Platen
2 Original Loaded Indicator
12 Operation Panel
3 Original Width Guides
13 Front Cover
4 Cleaning Cloth Compartment
14 Cassette 1
5 Original Table
15 Cassette 2
6 Original eject table
16 Main Power Switch
7 Original stopper
17 Inner Tray
8 USB Port (A1)
18 Paper stopper
9 Slit Glass
19 Handles
10 Original Size Indicator Plates
Optional Equipment (page 11-2)
2-2
11 12
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
20 Paper Width Adjusting Tab
21 Paper Length Guide
22 (Paper Width Guide) Lock
23 Clip Holder
24 Right Cover 1 Lever
25 Right Cover 1
26 Right Cover 2 Lever
27 Right Cover 2
28 Paper Width Guide
29 Multi Purpose Tray
30 Support Tray Section of the Multi Purpose Tray
31 Right Cover 3 Lever
32 Right Cover 3
2-3
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names
Connectors/Interior
5
1
2
3
6
4
7
8
9
10
1 Network Interface Connector
2 USB Port (A2)
3 USB Interface Connector (B1)
4 Option Interface
5 Toner Container (Black)
6 Toner Container Release Lever
7 Waste Toner Tray
8 Waste Toner Box
9 Release Button
10 Cleaning Brush
2-4
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names
With Optional Equipments Attached
6
2
1
3
5-c
5-a
5-b
4
5-d
1 Platen Cover
2 Mailbox
3 Document Finisher
4 Folding Unit
5 Cassette 3 to 5
• 5-a: Cassette 3 • 5-b: Cassette 4 • 5-c: Cassette 5
• 5-d: Cassette 4 • 5-e: Cassette 3
Optional Equipment (page 11-2)
6 Control Section of the Finisher
Manual Staple (page 5-72)
2-5
5-e
5
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables
Determining the Connection Method and
Preparing Cables
Check the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network, and prepare the necessary cables for your environment.
Connection Example
Determine the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network by referring to the illustration below.
Connecting a scanner to your PC network with a network cable (1000BASE-T, 100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T)
Embedded Web Server RX
Administrator's
PC
Network
Network settings,
Send E-mail
Sends the image data of
scanned originals to the
desired recipient as a file
attached to an E-mail
message.
Scanner default settings,
User and destination
registration
MFP
Printing
USB
Network
Send SMB
Saves the scanned image as
a data file on your PC.
Network
Network
Network FAX
(Option)
Network
FAX
(Option)
Send FTP
Sends the scanned image as
a data file on the FTP.
Network
Network
TWAIN Scanning
WIA Scanning
TWAIN and WIA are standardized interface for
communication between software applications
and image acquisition devices.
NOTE
If you are using the machine with the optional wireless interface kit attached, you do not need to connect the LAN cable.
Optional Network (page 8-47)
2-6
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables
Preparing Necessary Cables
Prepare the necessary cables according to the interface you use.
Available Standard Interfaces
Connection Environment
*
Function
Necessary Cable
Connect a LAN cable to the
machine.
Printer/Scanner /Network FAX*
Network Interface LAN (10BASE-T or
100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T Shielded)
Connect a USB cable to the
machine.
Printer
USB2.0 compatible cable (Hi-Speed USB
compliant, Max. 5.0 m, Shielded)
Function available when using optional fax kit. For more information on using the Network FAX, refer to the FAX Operation Guide.
2-7
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting Cables
Connecting Cables
Connecting LAN Cable
IMPORTANT
If the power is on, turn the main power switch off.
Power Off (page 2-11)
1
Connect the machine.
1 Connect the LAN cable to the network interface connector.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the hub.
2
Set up the machine.
Power on the machine and configure the network.
For details, refer to Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) on page 2-25.
2-8
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting Cables
Connecting USB Cable
IMPORTANT
If the power is on, turn the main power switch off.
Power Off (page 2-11)
1
Connect the machine.
1 Connect the USB cable to the USB interface connector (B1) located on the left side of the
body.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the PC.
Connecting the Power Cable
Connect one end of the supplied power cable to the machine and the other end to a power outlet.
IMPORTANT
Only use the power cable that comes with the machine.
2-9
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Power On/Off
Power On/Off
Power On
When the main power indicator is lit... (Recovery from sleep)
Main Power indicator
Press the [Power] key.
When the main power indicator is off...
Turn the main power switch on.
IMPORTANT
When turning off the main power switch, do not turn on the main power switch again
immediately. Wait more than 5 seconds, and then turn on the main power switch.
NOTE
If the optional Data Security Kit is activated, a message might display indicating the security
function is being activated and time may be taken to start up when the power is turned on.
2-10
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Power On/Off
Power Off
When not turning off the main power switch... (sleep)
Main Power indicator
Press the [Power] key. The [Power] key light will go out, and the Main Power indicator will
light up.
Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode (page 3-14)
Sleep and Auto Sleep (page 3-15)
When turning off the main power switch...
Note that when the main power switch is turned off, the machine will be unable to automatically receive print data from
computers or faxes.
IMPORTANT
When the [Processing] indicator or [Memory] indicator is lit up or blinked, the machine is operating. Turning
off the main power switch while the machine is operating may cause it to malfunction.
1
Press the [Power] key.
Check that the indicators are off.
Verify that the [Power] key light has gone out and that the Main Power indicator is lit up.
2-11
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Power On/Off
2
Turn the main power switch off.
In case of not using the machine for an extended period of time...
CAUTION
If this machine will be left unused for an extended period (e.g. overnight), turn it off at the main power switch.
If the machine will not be used for an even longer period of time (e.g. vacation), remove the power plug from
the outlet as a safety precaution. If the optional Fax kit is installed, note that turning the machine off at the
main power switch disables fax transmission and reception.
IMPORTANT
Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage bag to protect it from humidity.
2-12
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Installing Software
Install appropriate software on your PC from the included DVD (Product Library) if you want to use the printer function of
this machine or perform TWAIN / WIA transmission or Network FAX transmission from your PC.
Software on DVD (Windows)
You can use either [Express Install] or [Custom Install] can be selected for the installation method. The software that
can be installed and the printer port selection method vary depending on which method is selected.
Installation method
● : Standard installation
○:
Software
KX DRIVER
Function
Print
Description
This driver enables files on a computer to be printed by the
machine. Multiple page description languages (PCL XL, KPDL,
etc.) are supported by a single driver. This printer driver allows
you to take full advantage of the features of the machine.
Allows selection of
the components to
be installed
Express
Install
Custom
Install
●
○
Use this driver to print PDF files.
KX XPS DRIVER
This printer driver supports the XPS (XML Paper Specification)
format developed by Microsoft Corporation.
-
○
KPDL mini-driver/
This is a Microsoft MiniDriver that supports PCL and KPDL.
There are some restrictions on the machine features and
option features that can be used with this driver.
-
○
This driver enables scanning on the machine using a TWAINcompliant software application.
●
○
WIA (Windows Imaging Acquisition) is a function of Windows
that enables reciprocal communication between an imaging
device such as a scanner and an image processing software
application. An image can be acquired using a WIA-compliant
software application, which is convenient when a TWAINcompliant software application is not installed in the computer.
-
○
PCL mini-driver
TWAIN
Driver
Scan
The machine has two types of TWAIN drivers: one for scanning
a document placed in the machine, and one for reading
document data stored in a user box.
WIA
Driver
FAX Driver
FAX
This makes it possible to send a document created in a
computer software application as a fax via the machine.
-
○
File Management
Utility
Utility
This makes it possible to send and save a scanned document
to a specified network folder.
-
○
Network Tool for
Direct Printing
This makes it possible to print a PDF file without starting Adobe
Acrobat/Reader.
-
○
Network Print
Monitor
This is a utility that enables monitoring of the machine on the
network.
-
○
These are display fonts that enable the machine's built-in fonts
to be used in a software application.
●
○
FONTS
-
2-13
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
NOTE
Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
Plug and Play is disabled on this device when in Sleep. To continue the installation, press the [Power] key to wake the
device from Low Power Mode or Sleep before continuing.
The optional Fax Kit is required in order to make use of fax functionality.
WIA driver and KX XPS DRIVER cannot be installed on Windows XP.
Installing Printer Driver in Windows
The following procedure is an example for installing the software in Windows 7 using [Express Install].
You can use either [Express Install] or [Custom Install] can be selected for the installation method. [Express Install]
automatically detects connected machines and installs the required software. Use [Custom Install] if you want to
specify the printer port and select the software to be installed. For details, refer to Custom Installation in the Printer
Driver User Guide on the DVD.
1
Insert the DVD.
NOTE
Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box displays, select
[Cancel].
If the autorun screen is displayed, click [Run Setup.exe].
If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] ([Allow]).
2
Display the screen.
Click [View License Agreement] and read the License Agreement.
2-14
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
3
Install using [Express Install].
Packages include the following software:
• Driver Package
KX DRIVER, Fonts
• Scan Package
TWAIN Driver
You can also select [Use host name for port name] and set to use the host name of the
standard TCP/IP port. (A USB connection cannot be used.)
NOTE
The machine cannot be detected unless it is on. If the computer fails to detect the machine,
verify that it is connected to the computer via a network or USB cable and that it is turned on
and click
(Reload).
If the Windows security window appears, click [Install this driver software anyway].
4
Finish the installation.
NOTE
When you have selected [Device settings] in Windows XP, the dialog box for device setting
will appear after [Finish] is clicked. Configure the settings for options installed on the
machine. Device settings can be configured after the installation is completed. For details,
refer to the Device Settings in the Printer Driver User Guide on the DVD.
If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by following the screen prompts.
This completes the printer driver installation procedure.
The TWAIN driver can be installed if the machine and computer are connected via a network.
If you are installing the TWAIN driver, continue by configuring the Setting TWAIN Driver (page
2-19).
2-15
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Uninstalling the Software
Perform the following procedure to delete the Software from your computer.
NOTE
Uninstallation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
1
Display the screen.
2
Uninstall the software.
3
Finish uninstalling.
Click [Start] button on the Windows and then select [All Programs], [Olivetti],
and [Uninstall Olivetti Product Library] to display the Uninstall Wizard.
Place a check in the check box of the software to be deleted.
If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by following the screen prompts.
This completes the software uninstallation procedure.
NOTE
The software can also be uninstalled using the Product Library.
In the Product Library installation screen, click [Uninstall], and follow the on-screen
instructions to uninstall the software.
2-16
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Installing Printer Driver in Macintosh
The machine's printer functionality can be used by a Macintosh computer.
NOTE
Installation on MAC OS must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
When printing from a Macintosh computer, set the machine's emulation to [KPDL] or [KPDL(Auto)].
For details, refer to Printer on page 8-35.
If connecting by Bonjour, enable Bonjour in the machine's network settings.
For details, refer to Bonjour Settings on page 2-27.
In the Authenticate screen, enter the name and password used to log in to the operating system.
1
Insert the DVD.
Double-click the [ Olivetti] icon.
2
Display the screen.
OLI
_LI
B
Double-click [Olivetti OS X vx.x ] depending on your Mac OS version.
3
Install the Printer Driver.
Install the printer driver as directed by the instructions in the installation software.
This completes the printer driver installation.
If a USB connection is used, the machine is automatically recognized and connected.
If an IP connection is used, the settings below are required.
2-17
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
4
Configure the printer.
1 Display the window.
2
1
2 Click the IP icon for an IP connection and then enter the IP address and printer name.
1
2
The number entered in "Address" will automatically
appear in "Name". Change if needed.
3
NOTE
When using a Bonjour connection, select [Default] and click the item that appears in "Printer
Name". The driver with the same name as the machine automatically appears in "Driver".
3 Select the options available for the machine and click Continue.
1
2
4 The selected machine is added.
2-18
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Setting TWAIN Driver
Register this machine to the TWAIN Driver. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 7.
1
Display the screen.
1 Select [Start] button on the Windows, [All Programs], [Olivetti] and then [TWAIN Driver
Setting]. TWAIN Driver screen appears.
In Windows 8, select [Search] in charms, [Apps], and then [TWAIN Driver Setting].
2 Click [Add].
2
Configure TWAIN Driver.
Enter the machine name.
1
4
When a model name without "(BOX)" is selected, the unit option
appears. Set units of measurement.
2
3
Select this machine from the list.To scan a document stored in a
custom box in this machine, select a model name with (Box) from
"Model".
Enter the machine's IP address or host name.
When user login administration is enabled
5
Select the checkbox beside [Authentication],
and enter Login User Name (up to 321
characters) and Password (up to 64
characters).
6
When job accounting is enabled, select the
checkbox beside [Account], and enter the
account ID as many as eight digits.
7
When using SSL, select the checkbox beside SSL.
NOTE
When the machine's IP address is unknown, contact Administrator.
3
Finish registering.
NOTE
Click [Delete] to delete the added machine. Click [Edit] to change names.
2-19
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Setting WIA Driver
Register this machine to the WIA Driver. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 7.
1
Display the screen.
1 Click [Start] button on the Windows and enter [Scanner] in [Program and File Search].
Click [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras
screen appears.
In Windows 8, click [Search] in charms, and then [Settings], and enter "Scanner" in the search box.
Click [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras screen
appears.
2 Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and press [Properties].
1
2
2
Configure WIA Driver.
Enter the machine IP
addresses or host name.
When using SSL, select
the checkbox beside
SSL.
Set units of measurement.
1
2
3
4
5
6
When user login administration is enabled
Select the checkbox beside [Authentication], and enter Login User
Name (up to 321 characters) and Password (up to 64 characters).
When job accounting is enabled, select the checkbox beside
[Account], and enter the account ID as many as eight digits.
2-20
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Login/Logout
Login/Logout
If you are setting a function that requires administrator rights, or if user login administration is enabled, you must enter
your login user name and login password.
NOTE
• The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
d-Copia 3500MF plus
3500
3500
d-Copia 4500MF plus
4500
4500
d-Copia 5500MF plus
5500
5500
You will be unable to login if you forget your login user name or login password. In this event, login with administrator
privileges and change your login user name or login password.
• If the guest authentication setting is enabled, the [Authentication/Logout] key must be pressed when logging in.
For details, refer to the Guest Authorization Set. on page 9-18.
Login
Normal login
1
Enter the login user name and login password to login.
Enter login user name and password.
Login to:
1
Login
User Name
2
Login
Password
Local
abcdef
# Keys
********
# Keys
Check Counter
Cancel
3
ID Card
Login
Login
Character Entry Method (page 11-10)
If this screen is displayed during operations, press [Login User Name] to enter the login user
name.
Alternatively, you can login by pressing [Login Password] and entering the login password.
NOTE
[# Keys] can be pressed to enter the number with the numeric keys on the operation panel.
If [Network Authentication] is selected as the user authentication method, either [Local] or
[Network] can be selected as the authentication destination.
To authenticate by ID card, press [ID Card Login].
2-21
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Login/Logout
Simple Login
Select the user to login.
01
02
03
A
B
C
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
No.
1/2
Keyboard
Login
If this screen is displayed during operations, select a user and log in.
NOTE
If a login password is required, an input screen will be displayed.
Simple Login (page 9-23)
Logout
To logout from the machine, press the [Authentication/Logout] key to return to the login user
name/login password entry screen.
Users are automatically logged out in the following circumstances:
•
When the machine is put to Sleep by pressing the [Power] key.
•
When the Auto Sleep function is activated.
•
When the auto panel reset function is activated.
•
When Auto Low Power Mode is activated.
•
When the machine is placed in Low Power Mode by pressing the [Energy Saver] key.
2-22
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
Default Settings of the Machine
The default settings of the machine can be changed in System Menu. Before using this machine, configure such settings
as date and time, network configuration, and energy saving functions as needed.
NOTE
For settings that are configurable from System Menu, refer to Setup and Registration (System Menu) (page 8-1).
Setting Date and Time
Follow the steps below to set the local date and time at the place of installation.
When you send an E-mail using the transmission function, the date and time as set here will be printed in the header of
the E-mail message. Set the date, time and time difference from GMT of the region where the machine is used.
NOTE
If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges.
If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter a login user name and
password, and press [Login].
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
d-Copia 3500MF plus
3500
3500
d-Copia 4500MF plus
4500
4500
d-Copia 5500MF plus
5500
5500
Be sure to set the time difference before setting the date and time.
If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you will no longer be able to use the
application.
Optional Applications (page 11-8)
1
Display the screen.
Press the [System Menu] key and select [Date/Timer/Energy Saver].
System Menu
1
Edit Destination
User Property
Adjustment/Maintenance
User Login/Job Accounting
3
Date/Timer/Energy Saver
Internet
Application
2
2/2
Close
Press [ ] or [ ] to
scroll up and down.
2-23
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
2
Configure the settings.
1 Set the time zone.
Date/Timer/Energy Saver - Time Zone
Date/Timer/Energy Saver
Date/Time:
Time Zone:
1
Auto Sleep:
Change
Date Format:
Change
Change
Auto Panel Reset:
Change
㪪㪼㫋㩷㫋㫀㫄㪼㩷㫑㫆㫅㪼㪅
㪪㪼㫃㪼㪺㫋㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫃㫆㪺㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫅㪼㪸㫉㪼㫊㫋㩷㫐㫆㫌㪅
2
Time Zone
-12:00 International Date Line West
Change
Auto Error Clear:
-11:00 Samoa
Change
-11:00 Universal Coordinated Time-11
Low Power Timer:
Change
Panel Reset Timer:
Change
1/16
-10:00 Hawaii
-09:00 Alaska
Sleep Timer:
Change
3
-08:00 Baja California
1/2
Cancel
Close
OK
Press [ ] or [ ] to
scroll up and down.
2 Set the summer time.
Date/Timer/Energy Saver - Time Zone
Set time zone.
Select the location nearest you.
Time Zone
-08:00 Pacific Time (US & Canada)
1
-07:00 Arizona
-07:00 Chihuahua, La Paz, Mazatlan
Summer Time
2/16
-07:00 Mountain Time (US & Canada)
Off
-06:00 Guadalajara, Mexico City, Monterrey
On
-06:00 Saskatchewan
Cancel
OK
2
NOTE
If you select a region that does not utilize summer time, the summer time setting screen will
not appear.
3 Set the date and time.
Date/Timer/Energy Saver - Date/Time
Date/Timer/Energy Saver
1
Set the date and time.
Change
Date Format:
Change
Time Zone:
Change
Auto Panel Reset:
Change
Auto Sleep:
Change
Auto Error Clear:
Change
Low Power Timer:
Change
Date/Time:
2013
Sleep Timer:
Change
Panel Reset Timer:
Change
2
Year
02
Month
02
Day
Off
10
Hour
10
Minute
31
Second
3
1/2
Cancel
Close
Press [+] or [-] in each setting.
2-24
OK
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection)
The machine is equipped with network interface, which is compatible with network protocols such as TCP/IP (IPv4),
TCP/IP (IPv6), IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, and IPSec. It enables network printing on the Windows, Macintosh, UNIX, NetWare
and other platforms.
This section explains the procedure of IPv4 and Bonjour settings for TCP/IP settings. For other network settings, refer to
the Network on page 8-43.
NOTE
If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges.
If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter a login user name and
password, and press [Login].
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
d-Copia 3500MF plus
3500
3500
d-Copia 4500MF plus
4500
4500
d-Copia 5500MF plus
5500
5500
TCP/IP Settings
IPv4 setting
Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the Windows network.
The default settings are "TCP/IP Protocol: On, DHCP: On, Auto-IP: On".
NOTE
• Ask your network administrator for the IP address in advance, and have it ready when you configure this setting.
In the following cases, set the IP address of DNS server on the Embedded Web Server RX.
• When using the host name with "DHCP" setting set to "Off"
• When using the DSN server with IP address that is not assigned by DHCP automatically.
Refer to the Embedded Web Server RX User Guide.
1
Display the screen.
1 Press the [System Menu] key and select [System/Network].
1
System Menu
2
Quick Setup Wizard
Cassette/MP Tray Settings
Common Settings
Home
Copy
Send
Document Box/Removable
Memory
FAX
Printer
Report
System/Network
1/2
Close
2-25
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
2 Select "Network" and then "TCP/IP Setting".
System/Network - Network
System/Network
1
Network:
Network Interface (Send):
Interface Block Setting:
Document Guard:
Restart Entire Device:
Next
Optional Network:
Next
Host Name:
Change
Security Level:
Change
Protocol Settings:
Next
Data Security:
Next
LAN Interface:
Change
Optional Function:
TCP/IP Setting:
2
Next
Change
Security Settings:
Next
Change
Restart Network:
Start
Next
Start
Close
Close
2
Configure the settings.
System/Network - IPv4
System/Network - TCP/IP Setting
TCP/IP:
Change
IPv4:
Change
IPv6:
Next
Bonjour:
Change
IPSec:
Set TCP/IP (IPv4).
* The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network.
2
3
4
Change
1
Off
DHCP
Close
IP Address
0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask
On
0.0.0.0
Default
Gateway
0.0.0.0
On
5
Auto-IP
Cancel
When using DHCP server
[DHCP]: Set to [On].
When setting the static IP address
[DHCP]: Set to [Off].
[IP Address]: Enter the address.
[Subnet Mask]: Enter the address.
[Default Gateway]: Enter the address.
IMPORTANT
After changing the setting, restart the network from System Menu, or turn the
machine OFF and then ON.
Restart Network (page 8-46)
2-26
OK
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
Bonjour Settings
Configure the settings for Bonjour.
1
Display the screen.
1 Press the [System Menu] key and select [System/Network].
1
System Menu
2
Quick Setup Wizard
Cassette/MP Tray Settings
Common Settings
Home
Copy
Send
Document Box/Removable
Memory
FAX
Printer
Report
System/Network
1/2
Close
2 Select "Network" and then "TCP/IP Setting".
System/Network - Network
System/Network
1
2
Optional Network:
Next
Host Name:
Network Interface (Send):
Change
Security Level:
Change
Protocol Settings:
Change
Security Settings:
Next
Interface Block Setting:
Next
Data Security:
Next
LAN Interface:
Change
Restart Network:
Start
Document Guard:
Restart Entire Device:
Change
Optional Function:
TCP/IP Setting:
Next
Start
Close
Close
2
Next
Next
Network:
Configure the settings.
System/Network - TCP/IP Setting
System/Network - Bonjour
TCP/IP:
Change
IPv4:
IPv6:
Next
Bonjour:
IPSec:
Change
Change
1
Use Bonjour.
* The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network.
Change
2
Off
Close
On
Cancel
IMPORTANT
After changing the setting, restart the network from System Menu, or turn the
machine OFF and then ON.
Restart Network (page 8-46)
2-27
OK
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
Quick Setup Wizard
For Energy Saver and FAX functions, the following settings can be configured in a wizard-style screen.
Energy Saver Setup
Configures sleep mode and low-power mode.
Sleep Timer
1. Sleep Mode
Sleep Level
2. Auto Low Power Mode
Low Power Timer
3. Recovery Mode
Energy Saver Recovery Level
4. Weekly Timer Settings
Weekly Timer Settings
Schedule
Retry Times
Retry Interval
FAX Setup
Configures basic fax settings.
This function is displayed when the optional fax is installed.
Refer to the FAX Operation Guide.
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and press [Login].
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
1
Login User Name
Login Password
d-Copia 3500MF plus
3500
3500
d-Copia 4500MF plus
4500
4500
d-Copia 5500MF plus
5500
5500
Display the screen.
1
System Menu
2
Quick Setup Wizard
Cassette/MP Tray Settings
Common Settings
Home
Copy
Send
Document Box/Removable
Memory
FAX
Printer
Report
System/Network
1/2
Close
2-28
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
2
Select a function.
Quick Setup Wizard
Next
FAX Setup:
Energy Saver Setup:
Next
Close
3
Configure the settings.
Energy Saver Setup
. Sleep Mode
. Low Power Mode
. Recovery Mode
Set the energy saving control functions.
. Weekly Timer
End
Next
Start the wizard. Follow the instructions on the screen to configure settings.
NOTE
If you experience difficulty configuring the settings, refer to Help Screen on page 3-12.
Control
Description
End
Exits the wizard. Settings configured so far are applied.
Previous
Returns to the previous item.
Skip
Advances to the next item without setting the current item.
Next
Advances to the next screen.
Back
Returns to the previous screen.
Complete
Register the settings and exit the wizard.
2-29
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
Checking the Counter
Press the [Counter] key to check the number of sheets printed and scanned.
Counter
Printed Pages
Copy
Black&White:
Printer
300
FAX
600
Total
100
1000
Scanned Pages
Copy
Originals:
Print
Status Page
FAX
600
Printed Pages
by Paper Size
Others
200
Total
1000
Printed Pages
by Layout
1800
Close
You can check the number of pages printed in each paper size by pressing [Printed Pages by Paper Size].
2-30
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Additional Preparations for the Administrator
Additional Preparations for the Administrator
In addition to the information provided in this chapter, the administrator of this machine should check the following, and
configure the settings as needed.
To Send Documents to a PC
To send a document that has been loaded, you need to create a folder to receive the document on your computer.
For details, refer to Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC on page 3-35.
To E-mail Scanned Images
When sending documents by E-mail or to FTP, it may be useful to store the destinations in the Address Book. For each
registration method, refer to Registering Destinations in the Address Book on page 3-45.
To Strengthen the Security
This machine is shipped with two default users registered ó one with Machine Administrator rights, and another with
Administrator rights. Logging in as this user will allow you to configure all settings; therefore, please change the login
user name and password.
In addition, this machine is equipped with user authentication function, which can be configured to limit the access to this
machine to only those who have a registered login name and password. For each setting procedure, refer to User
Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) (page 9-1).
I want to...
Restrict the users of the machine.
Function
Reference page
User Login
page 9-2
Authentication Security
page 9-6
Auto Panel Reset
page 8-54
ID Card Settings*1
page 9-26
Local Authorization
page 9-15
Group Authorization Set.
page 9-15
Guest Authorization Set.
page 9-18
Prevent another user from handling the
documents stored in the machine.
Custom Box
page 5-52
Output the document sent to the machine at the
time when the machine is operated.
Remote Printing
page 8-27
Prevent the data stored in the machine from
being leaked.
Data Wipe*2
Encryption*2
Refer to the Data
Security Kit (E)
Operation Guide.
PDF Encryption Functions
page 6-61
Document Guard*3
page 8-51
Completely delete the data on the hard disk
before disposing of the machine.
Data Sanitization
page 8-50
Record the operation history of users.
Login History Settings
page 8-40
Device Log History Settings
page 8-41
Secure Comm. Error Log
page 8-42
Restrict the basic functions that can be used.
2-31
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Additional Preparations for the Administrator
I want to...
Protect the transmission from interception and
wiretapping.
Verify the software in the machine.
*1
The optional Card Authentication Kit is required.
*2
The optional Data Security Kit is required.
*3
The optional Printed Document Guard Kit is required.
Function
Reference page
IPP over SSL
page 8-45
HTTPS
page 8-46
LDAP Security
Refer to the
Embedded Web
Server RX User Guide.
SMTP Security
Refer to the
Embedded Web
Server RX User Guide.
POP3 Security
Refer to the
Embedded Web
Server RX User Guide.
FTP Encrypted TX
page 6-64
Enhanced WSD (SSL)
page 8-46
IPSec
page 8-44
SNMPv3
page 8-46
Software Verification
page 8-50
2-32
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Embedded Web Server RX
Embedded Web Server RX
If the machine is connected to the network, you can configure various settings using Embedded Web Server RX.
The settings that are configurable with Embedded Web Server RX are as follows.
Some configurable settings are restricted according to the access rights of the logged-in user.
Setting
Description
Device
Information
The machine's structure can be checked.
Job Status
Displays all device information, including print and scan jobs, storing jobs,
scheduled jobs, and job log history.
Administrator
User
❍
❍
❍
❍
[Configuration], [Counter], [About Embedded Web Server RX]
[Printing Jobs Status], [Printing Job Log], [Sending Job Status],
[Scheduled Jobs], [Sending Job Log], [Storing Job Status],
[Storing Job Log]
Document Box
Add or delete document boxes, or delete documents within a document box.
[Custom Box], [FAX Box]*, [Polling Box]*, [Job Box Settings]
❍
❍
Address Book
Create, edit, or delete addresses and address groups.
[Machine Address Book], [External Address Book Settings],
[One Touch Key]
❍
❍
Device Settings
Configure the advanced settings of the machine.
[Paper/Feed/Output], [Original Settings], [Energy Saver/Timer], [Date/Time],
[System]
❍
-
Function Settings
Configure the advanced function settings.
[Common/Job Defaults], [Copy], [Printer], [E-mail], [Scan to Folder],
[DSM Scan], [FAX / i-FAX]*, [Send and Forward]*, [RX/Forward Rules],
[Operation Panel]
❍
-
Network Settings
Configure the network advanced settings.
[General], [TCP/IP], [Protocol]
❍
-
Security Settings
Configure the security advanced settings.
❍
-
❍
-
[Device Security], [Send Security], [Network Security], [Certificates]
Management
Settings
*
Configure the advanced management settings.
[Job Accounting], [Authentication], [ID Card], [Notification/Report],
[History Settings], [SNMP], [System Stamp], [Message Board], [Reset]
Displayed only when the optional fax kit is installed.
This section explains how to access Embedded Web Server RX and change security settings and host name.
For details on Embedded Web Server RX, refer to the Embedded Web Server RX User Guide.
NOTE
The optional Fax Kit is required in order to make use of fax functionality.
Here, information on the FAX settings has been omitted. For more information on using the FAX, refer to the FAX
Operation Guide.
To fully access the features of the Embedded Web Server RX pages, enter the User Name and Password and click Login.
Entering the predefined administrator password allows the user to access all pages, including Document Box,
Address Book, and Settings on the navigation menu. The factory default setting for the default user with administrator
privileges is shown below.
Login User Name
Admin
Login Password
Admin
* Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).
2-33
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Embedded Web Server RX
Accessing Embedded Web Server RX
1
Display the screen.
1 Launch your Web browser.
2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.
Examples:
192.168.48.21/ (for IP address)
MFP001 (if the host name is "MFP001")
The web page displays basic information about the machine and Embedded Web Server RX
as well as their current status.
NOTE
When connecting to Embedded Web Server RX, a message may appear that reads "There is a
problem with the security certificate of this website". To prevent this message appearing,
install the device certificates of the machine to the Web browser. For details, refer to
Embedded Web Server RX User Guide.
2
Configure the function.
Select a category from the navigation bar on the left of the screen. When you log in to the
machine as an administrator, you will see [Device Settings], [Function Settings],
[Network Settings], [Security Settings], and [Management Settings].
2-34
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Embedded Web Server RX
Changing Security Settings
This section explains how to change the security settings.
1
Display the screen.
2
Configure the Security Settings.
Access Embedded Web Server RX by referring to Accessing Embedded Web Server RX on page 2-34.
From the [Security Settings] menu, select the setting you want to configure. The configurable
settings are [Device Security], [Send Security], [Network Security], and [Certificates].
NOTE
The configurable settings within [Device Security], [Send Security], and
[Network Security] can also be configured from the machine's System Menu.
For details, see Setup and Registration (System Menu) (page 8-1).
For details on settings related to certificates, refer to the Embedded Web Server RX User
Guide.
2-35
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Embedded Web Server RX
Changing Host Name
Change the host name of the machine.
1
Display the screen.
1 Access Embedded Web Server RX by referring to Accessing Embedded Web Server RX on page 2-34.
2 From the [Device Settings] menu, press [System].
2
Specify the host name.
Under "Device Settings", enter the host name in "Host Name", and then click [Submit].
IMPORTANT
After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
To restart the network interface card, click [Reset] in the [Management Settings]
menu, and then click [Restart Network] in “Restart”.
2-36
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Embedded Web Server RX
Sending E-mail
By configuring the SMTP settings, you can send E-mail notifications on completed jobs.
To use this function, this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol.
In addition, check the following.
•
The network environment used to connect this machine to the mail server
A full-time connection via a LAN is recommended.
•
SMTP settings
Use Embedded Web Server RX to register the IP address or host name of the SMTP server.
•
If limits have been set on the size of E-mail messages, it may not be possible to send very large E-mails.
The procedure for specifying the SMTP settings is explained below.
1
Display the screen.
1 Access Embedded Web Server RX by referring to Accessing Embedded Web ServerRX on page 2-34.
2 From the [Function Settings] menu, click [E-mail].
2-37
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Embedded Web Server RX
2
Configure the settings.
Enter the appropriate values to each field.
Setting
SMTP
Description
Set to send e-mail from the machine.
SMTP Protocol
Set SMTP protocol. Set the "SMTP (E-mail TX)" setting to [On] on
the [Protocol Settings] page.
SMTP Server
Name
Enter the host name or IP address of the SMTP server.
SMTP Port
Number
Specify the port number to be used for SMTP. Use the SMTP
default port 25.
SMTP Server
Timeout
Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds.
Authentication
Protocol
Set whether SMTP authentication is used. To use authentication,
enter the user information for authentication.
SMTP Security
Set SMTP security.
Turn on "SMTP Security" in "SMTP (E-mail TX)" on the
[Protocol Settings] page.
POP before
SMTP Timeout
Specify the time in seconds until the connection to the POP server
times outs. This can be set when [POP before SMTP] is selected
in "Authentication Protocol".
Connection Test
Tests to confirm that the settings are correct.
Domain
Restriction
Set whether or not domains are restricted. Click the [Domain List]
and enter the domain names of addresses to be allowed or
rejected. Restriction can also be specified by e-mail address.
POP3
Set to receive e-mail at the machine.
POP3 Protocol
Set POP3 protocol. Set the "POP3 (E-mail RX)" setting to [On] on
the [Protocol Settings] page.
Check Interval
Specify the interval for checking for incoming e-mail in minutes.
Run once now
Click [Receive] to connect to the POP3 server immediately and
check for incoming E-mails.
Domain
Restriction
Set whether or not domains are restricted. Click the [Domain List]
and enter the domain names of addresses to be allowed or
rejected. Restriction can also be specified by e-mail address.
POP3 User
Settings
Configure the settings for POP3 user accounts and the POP3
server. You can configure up to three users.
2-38
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Embedded Web Server RX
Setting
E-mail
Send
Settings
3
Description
E-mail Size Limit
Enter the maximum size of E-mail that can be sent in kilobytes.
When E-mail size is greater than this value, an error message
appears and E-mail sending is cancelled. Use this setting if you
have set E-mail Size Limit for SMTP server. If not, enter a value of
0 (zero) to enable E-mail sending regardless of the size limit.
Sender Address
Enter the E-mail address of the person responsible for the
machine, such as the machine administrator, so that a reply or
non-delivery report will go to a person rather than to the machine.
The sender address must be entered correctly for SMTP
authentication. The maximum length of the sender address is 128
characters.
Signature
Enter the signature. The signature is free form text that will appear
at the end of the E-mail body. It is often used for further
identification of the machine. The maximum length of the
signature is 512 characters.
Function
Defaults
Change the function default settings in [Common/Job Default
Settings] page.
Click [Submit].
2-39
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Embedded Web Server RX
Registering Destinations
You can register destinations to the machine's Address Book, from Embedded Web Server RX.
1
Display the screen.
1 Access Embedded Web ServerRX by referring to Accessing Embedded Web Server RX on page 2-34.
2 From the [Address Book] menu, click [Machine Address Book].
3 Click [Add].
2
Populate the fields.
1 Enter the destination information.
Enter the information for the destination you want to register. The fields to populate are the same as
when registering on the machine.
Registering Destinations in the Address Book (page 3-45)
2 Click [Submit].
2-40
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Embedded Web Server RX
Registering a Custom Box
You can register a custom box from Embedded Web Server RX.
1
Display the screen.
1 Access Embedded Web Server RX by referring to Accessing Embedded Web Server RX on page. 2-34
2 From the [Document Box] menu, click [Custom Box].
3 Click [Add].
2
Configure the Custom Box.
1 Enter the box details.
Enter the information for the custom box you want to register. The fields to populate are the same as
when registering on the machine.
Creating a New Custom Box (Add/Edit Box) (page 5-52)
2 Click [Submit].
2-41
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Data Migration from Other Olivetti Products
Data Migration from Other Olivetti Products
By using the machine's utility, you can smoothly migrate address books when the machine is to be replaced.
This section explains how to migrate data between Olivetti products.
Migrating the Address Book
The Address Book registered on the machine can be backed up or migrated using the Network Print Monitor
on the included DVD.
For details on operating the Network Print Monitor, refer to the Network Print Monitor User Guide.
Backing Up Address Book Data to PC
1
Launch the Network Print Monitor.
2
Create a backup.
1 Right-click on the model name from which you want to back up the Address Book, and
select [Advanced] - [Set multiple devices].
1
2
2 Click [Next].
3 Select [Device Address Book] and click [Next].
1
2
2-42
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Data Migration from Other Olivetti Products
4 Select [Create from device] and remove the checkmark from
[Overwrite settings on target device], and then click [Next].
1
2
3
5 Select the model you want to back up, and click [Next].
1
2
NOTE
If the "Admin Login" screen appears, enter the "Admin Login" and "Login Password", and
then click [OK]. The default settings are as follows:
Login User Name
Admin
Login Password
Admin
* Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).
6 Click on [Save to file].
7 Specify the location to save the file, enter the file name, and then click [Save].
For "Save as type", make sure to select "XML File".
2-43
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Data Migration from Other Olivetti Products
8 After saving the file, always click [Cancel] to close the screen.
Please note that selecting [Finish] will write the data to the machine's Address Book.
Writing Address Book Data to the Machine
1
Launch the Network Print Monitor.
2
Load the Address Book data.
1 Right-click on the model name to which you want to transfer the Address Book, and select
[Advanced] - [Set multiple devices].
1
2
2 Click [Next].
3 Select [Device Address Book] and click [Next].
1
2
2-44
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Data Migration from Other Olivetti Products
4 Select [Create from file] and remove the checkmark from [Overwrite settings on target
device], and then click [Next].
1
2
3
Selecting the [Overwrite settings on target device] checkbox will overwrite the machine's Address
Book from entry No.1.
5 Click [Browse] and select the backup Address Book file, and then click [Next].
1
2
6 Click [Finish].
The write process of the Address Book data starts.
7 Once the write process is complete, click [Close].
2-45
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Data Migration from Other Olivetti Products
2-46
3
Preparation before Use
This chapter explains the following operations.
Using the Operation Panel ................................................................................................................................. 3-2
Operation Panel Keys .............................................................................................................................. 3-2
Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle ....................................................................................................... 3-3
Touch Panel Display .......................................................................................................................................... 3-4
Home Screen ........................................................................................................................................... 3-4
Display for Originals and Paper ............................................................................................................... 3-8
Display of keys that cannot be set ........................................................................................................... 3-8
Original Preview ....................................................................................................................................... 3-9
Enter key and Quick No. Search key ...................................................................................................... 3-11
Help Screen ........................................................................................................................................... 3-12
Accessibility Functions (Magnifying the View) ....................................................................................... 3-13
Energy Saver function ...................................................................................................................................... 3-14
Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode ....................................................................................... 3-14
Sleep and Auto Sleep ............................................................................................................................ 3-15
Loading Paper .................................................................................................................................................. 3-16
Before Loading Paper ............................................................................................................................ 3-17
Loading in the Cassettes ....................................................................................................................... 3-18
Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray ............................................................................................... 3-26
Paper stopper ........................................................................................................................................ 3-29
Specifying Paper Size and Media .......................................................................................................... 3-30
Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC .................................................................................................. 3-35
Making a note of the computer name and full computer name .............................................................. 3-35
Making a note of the user name and domain name .............................................................................. 3-36
Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder ............................................................... 3-37
Configuring Windows Firewall (for Windows 7) ..................................................................................... 3-41
Registering Destinations in the Address Book ................................................................................................. 3-45
Adding a Destination (Address Book) .................................................................................................... 3-45
Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) ................................................................... 3-53
3-1
Preparation before Use > Using the Operation Panel
Using the Operation Panel
Operation Panel Keys
Displays the Home screen.
Puts the machine into
Sleep Mode. Recovers
from Sleep if in Sleep
Mode.
Displays the System Menu
screen.
Displays the Counter
screen.
Displays the Status/Job
Cancel screen.
Displays the Copy screen.
Displays the help guidance.
Displays the screen for
sending. You can change it
to display the Address
Book screen.
Switches the touch panel
display on the Copy screen
and the Send screen to a
magnified view.
Displays the FAX screen.
Puts the machine into Low
Power Mode.
Authenticates user
switching, and exits the
operation for the current
user (i.e. log out).
Displays the Interrupt
Copy screen.
Lit when the machine's
main power is on.
Touch panel.
Displays buttons for
configuring machine settings.
Lights when there is paper
in the job separator tray.
Lights or blinks when an error occurs
and a job is stopped.
Blinks while printing
or sending/receiving.
Numeric keys.
Enter numbers and
symbols.
Blinks while the machine is accessing the hard disk,
fax memory or USB memory (general purpose item).
Clears entered numbers and
characters.
Returns settings to their
default states.
Specifies registered information
such as address numbers, user IDs
and program numbers by number.
Cancels or pauses the job
in progress.
Finalizes numeric key entry, and
finalizes details during setting of
functions. Operates linked with the
on-screen [OK].
Starts copying and
scanning operations and
processing for setting
operations.
3-2
Preparation before Use > Using the Operation Panel
Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle
Adjust the angle of the operation panel in two as shown by releasing the operation panel lock lever.
2
1
3-3
Preparation before Use > Touch Panel Display
Touch Panel Display
Home Screen
This screen is displayed by pressing the [Home] key on the operation panel. Touching an icon will display the
corresponding screen.
You can change the icons to display on the Home screen as well as its background.
Editing the Home Screen (page 3-5)
3
1
Admin
Logout
2
Select the function.
4
Send
Copy
FAX
Custom Box
5
5
Job Box
6
Status/
Job Cancel
Device
Information
Removable
Memory
Accessibility
Screen
FAX Box
Language
System
Menu
Internet Browser
Help
Program
*
Message
Board
02/02/2013 10:10
Status
The appearance may differ from your actual screen, depending on your configuration and option settings.
No.
Item
Description
1
Login User Name
Displays the logged-in user name. This is displayed when user login
administration is enabled. Pressing "Login User Name" will display
the information of the logged-in user.
2
[Logout]
Logs out the current user. This is displayed when user login
administration is enabled.
3
Message
Displays the message depending on the status.
4
Desktop
Displays a maximum of 40 function icons* including the functions
registered in program. Icons that are not displayed on the first page
will appear by changing the page.
5
Screen-switching
keys
Use these buttons to switch between desktop pages.
NOTE
You can also switch views by touching the screen and moving the
finger sideways (i.e. swiping).
Admin
Logout
Select the function.
FAX
Custom Box
Copy
Send
FAX Box
Internet Browser
Job Box
Removable
Memory
Status/
Job Cancel
6
Taskbar
Device
Information
Accessibility
Screen
Language
age
a
System
Menu
Help
Program
Message
Board
Displays a maximum of 8 task icons.
* When the optional fax kit is installed, a maximum of 42 icons can be displayed. A maximum of 5 icons can be displayed for installed
applications.
3-4
Preparation before Use > Touch Panel Display
Editing the Home Screen
You can change the background of the Home screen as well as which icons are displayed.
1
Display the screen.
Press the [System Menu] key and select [Home].
System Menu
Quick Setup Wizard
Cassette/MP Tray Settings
2
Common Settings
1
Home
Copy
Send
Document Box/Removable
Memory
FAX
Printer
Report
System/Network
1/2
Close
NOTE
You can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
2
Login User Name
Login Password
d-Copia 3500MF plus
3500
3500
d-Copia 4500MF plus
4500
4500
d-Copia 5500MF plus
5500
5500
Configure the settings.
The available settings are shown below.
Item
Customize Desktop
Description
Specify the function icons to display on the desktop.
Press [Add] to display the screen for selecting the function to display. Select
the function to display and press [OK].
Select an icon and press [Previous] or [After] to change the display position
of the selected icon on the Desktop.
To delete a icon from desktop, select the desired one and press [Delete].
For details, refer to Available Functions to Display on Desktop on page 3-6.
Customize Taskbar
Specify the task icons to display on the taskbar.
For details, refer to Available Functions to Display on Taskbar on page 3-7.
Wallpaper
Configure the wallpaper of the Home screen.
Value: Images 1 to 8
3-5
Preparation before Use > Touch Panel Display
Available Functions to Display on Desktop
Function
Icon
Description
Reference
page
Copy*1
Displays the Copy screen.
page 5-16
Send*1
Displays the Send screen.
page 5-19
FAX*2
Displays the FAX screen.
Refer to the
FAX
Operation
Guide.
Custom Box*1
Displays the Custom Box screen.
page 5-48
Job Box*1
Displays the Job Box screen.
page 4-14
page 5-62
Removable Memory*1
Displays the Removable Memory screen.
page 5-63
FAX Box*2
Displays the FAX Box screen.
Refer to the
FAX
Operation
Guide.
Internet Browser
Displays the Internet Browser screen.
page 5-12
Send to Me
(E-mail)
Displays the Send screen. The E-mail
address of the logged-in user is set as the
destination.
page 6-67
Send to Me from Box
(E-mail)
Displays the Custom Box screen. The Email address of the logged-in user is set
as the destination.
page 6-67
Program
Calls up the registered program. The icon
will change according to the function of
the program.
page 5-6
*1
Selected at the time of shipment from factory.
*2
Displayed when the corresponding optional component is attached.
3-6
Preparation before Use > Touch Panel Display
Available Functions to Display on Taskbar
Function
Icon
Status/Job Cancel
/
Device Information
Accessibility/Standard
Description
Reference
page
Displays the Status screen. If an error
occurs, the icon will show "!". Once the
error clears, the display will return to
normal.
-
Displays the Device Information screen.
Check the system and network
information.
-
Magnifies the text and icons on the
screen. Pressing the Accessibility icon
switches the icon to the Standard icon.
Press the Standard icon to return to the
previous view.
page 3-13
Language
Displays the Language setting screen in
System Menu.
page 8-9
System Menu
Displays the System Menu screen.
page 8-2
Help
Displays the Help screen.
page 3-12
Program
Displays the program list screen.
page 5-6
Message Board
Displays the Message Board screen.
page 8-27
/
NOTE
To use this function, set "Message
Board" to [ON] in System Menu.
Message Board Settings on page 827
3-7
Preparation before Use > Touch Panel Display
Display for Originals and Paper
The copy screen displays the selected paper source and output tray.
Copies
Original
position
Copy
Image
Preview
Output
tray
Shortcut 2
Place original.
Paper
source
Auto
Size/orientation
of original and
paper
Shortcut 1
100%
Shortcut 3
Normal 0
Shortcut 4
Paper
Selection
Original : A4
: --Original
Zoom
: 100%
Zoom
: 100%
Paper
: --Paper
: A4
Cancel
Quick Setup
Zoom
Shortcut 5
1-sided
>>1-sided
Detail
Off
Duplex
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Density
Off
Image Quality
Shortcut 6
Staple
/Punch
Combine
Layout/Edit
Advanced
Setup
Program
02/02/2013 10:10
Status
Remaining amount
of toner
Clock
Display of keys that cannot be set
Keys of features that cannot be used due to feature combination restrictions or non-installation of options are in a nonselectable state.
Normal
㪦㪽㪽
Grayed out
㪦㪽㪽
㪚㫆㫄㪹㫀㫅㪼
㪦㪽㪽
㪦㪽㪽
㪚㫆㫄㪹㫀㫅㪼
Staple
/Punch
Hidden
㪦㪽㪽
Staple
/Punch
In the following cases, the key
is grayed out and cannot be
selected.
•
Cannot be used in
combination with a feature
that is already selected.
•
Use prohibited by user
control.
•
[Preview] has been
pressed.
(Refer to Original Preview
on page 3-9)
㪦㪽㪽
㪚㫆㫄㪹㫀㫅㪼
Staple
/Punch
Cannot be used because an
option is not installed.
Example: When a finisher is
not installed, [Staple/
Punch] does not
appear.
NOTE
If a key that you wish to use is grayed out, the settings of the previous user may still be in effect. In this case, press the
[Reset] key and try again.
If the key is still grayed out after the [Reset] key is pressed, it is possible that you are prohibited from using the
function by user control. Check with the administrator of the machine.
3-8
Preparation before Use > Touch Panel Display
Original Preview
You can display a preview image of the scanned document on the panel.
NOTE
To view a preview of an image stored in a Custom Box, refer to Previewing Documents/Checking Document Details
on page 5-50.
The procedure described here is for copying a single-page original.
1 On the Home screen, press [Copy] or [Send], and then place the original.
or
Send
Copy
2 Press [Preview].
Copies
Copy
Image
Preview
Shortcut 1
Shortcut 2
Place original.
Shortcut 3
Auto
100%
Normal 0
Shortcut 4
Paper
Selection
Original : A4
: --Original
Zoom
: 100%
Zoom
: 100%
Paper
: --Paper
: A4
1-sided
>>1-sided
Preview
Preview
Quick Setup
Zoom
Shortcut 5
Off
Duplex
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Density
Off
Staple
/Punch
Combine
Image Quality
Layout/Edit
Advanced
Setup
Shortcut 6
Program
The machine starts scanning the original. When scanning is completed, the preview image appears
on the panel.
3 Pressing [Detail] will display the Preview screen so that you can check the finished image
in greater detail.
Copies
Copy
Image
Preview
Shortcut 1
Shortcut 2
Place original.
Shortcut 3
Auto
100%
Normal 0
Shortcut 4
Paper
Selection
Original : A4
: --Original
Zoom
: 100%
: 100%
Zoom
Paper
: --: A4
Paper
1-sided
>>1-sided
Detail
Cancel
Quick Setup
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Zoom
Density
Shortcut 5
Off
Duplex
Image Quality
Off
Combine
Layout/Edit
Staple
/Punch
Advanced
Setup
Shortcut 6
Program
NOTE
To change the quality or the layout, press [Cancel] or the [Stop] key.
Change the settings and press [Preview] again to see a preview image with the new
settings.
3-9
Preparation before Use > Touch Panel Display
In magnified view, you can
move the range of display.
Preview:
Zoom out.
Zoom in.
2007040410574501
No.
Size
: A4
Resol.
: 300x300dpi
Color
: Full Color
1/6
Close
In multiple-page
documents, you can
change pages by
entering the desired
page number.
In multiple-page
documents, you can use
these buttons to change
pages.
Close the Preview
screen.
NOTE
Depending on the function you are using, even if you scan a multi-page original, only the
first page can be previewed.
4 If there is no problem with the preview image, press the [Start] key.
Copying starts.
Using the Preview Screen
When the Preview screen is displayed, you can do the following by moving the finger that is touching the touch panel.
Function
Description
Drag
With the finger touching the touch panel, slide the finger to move the position of the displayed preview.
Pinch in
Pinch out
With two fingers touching the touch panel, widen or tighten the space between the two fingers to zoom
in and out on the view.
3-10
Preparation before Use > Touch Panel Display
Enter key and Quick No. Search key
This section explains how to use the [Enter] key and [Quick No. Search] key on the operation panel.
Using the [Enter] key (
)
The [Enter] key has the same function as the key with the Enter mark ( ), such as the [ OK] key and the [ Close].
Copies
Paper Selection
Auto
Cassette
A4
Plain
A3
Plain
Original
Zoom
Paper
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Preview
MP Tray
A4
Plain
A4
Plain
MP Tray
A4
Plain
Paper Set.
Add Shortcut
Using the [Quick No. Search] key (
Cancel
OK
)
The [Quick No. Search] key performs the same action as the [No.] displayed on the touch panel. Use the Quick No.
Search keys to perform an action by simply entering a number directly using the numeric keys. For example, you can
specify the speed dial for a transmission destination or recall a stored program by its program number.
For more information on speed dialing, refer to Specifying Destination on page 5-26.
Destination
Place original.
Destination
Detail
Address
Book
[email protected]
A OFFICE
1/1
B OFFICE
Enter One Touch key number
using # keys.
C OFFICE
Folder Path
Entry
(0001 - 1000)
On Hook
Direct
E-mail
Addr Entry
0011
FAX No.
Entry
0001
AAA
BBB
Cancel
0006
FFF
0007
GGG
Destination
Quick Setup
3-11
HHH
i-FAX
Addr Entry
OK
0009
0008
III
Org./Sending
Data Format
0010
1/100
JJJ
Color/
Image Quality
Advanced
Setup
WSD Scan
/DSM Scan
Program
Preparation before Use > Touch Panel Display
Help Screen
If you have difficulty operating the machine, you can check how to operate it using the touch panel.
To show the Help screen, press the [Help] key on the operation panel. The Help screen shows explanations of functions
and how to use them.
Help titles
Selecting Paper Source
Scrolls up and down when
the help text cannot be
displayed in its entirety on a
single screen.
Select paper source by choosing a
Cassette or MP Tray.
Displays information
about functions and
machine operation.
Show the screen of the
tab that includes the
function explained in
Help. (In the case of this
screen, the screen that
appears after step 1 of
Setting Procedure is
performed will appear.)
Setting Procedure
1. Press [Org./Paper/Finishing].
2. Press [Paper Selection].
1/2
Try It
Other Help
End
Displays the Help list.
NOTE
To show the Help list, press the [Help] key on the Home screen.
3-12
Closes the Help screen and
returns to the original
screen.
Preparation before Use > Touch Panel Display
Accessibility Functions (Magnifying the View)
You can magnify the text and keys displayed on the touch panel. You can also select items and move to the next screen
using the numeric keys.
NOTE
This function can be used on the Home screen and on the functions that were registered via Copy/Send Quick Setup.
To configure any functions that are not displayed on the Accessibility screen, you need to return to the original view.
Press the [Accessibility Display] key again.
While using the Copy or Send functions, press the [Accessibility Display] key.
Large keys and text appear on the touch panel.
Copies
You can also control the screen using the numeric key corresponding to the number in circle. (Example: Press the [2]
key on the numeric key pad to zoom.)
Control the functions according to the display on the screen.
3-13
Preparation before Use > Energy Saver function
Energy Saver function
Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode
Low Power Mode
To activate Low Power Mode, press the [Energy Saver] key. Touch panel and all indicators on the operation panel will
go out to save power except the [Energy Saver], [Power], and Main Power indicators. This status is referred to as Low
Power Mode.
When the [Power] key is pressed in low power mode, the machine enters the sleep state.
Main Power
indicator
If print data is received during Low Power Mode, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing. Also when fax
data arrives while the machine is in Low Power Mode when using the optional fax, the machine automatically wakes up
and starts printing.
To resume, perform one of the following actions.
•
Press the [Energy Saver] key. (Full Recovery)
•
Press a key other than [Power] and [Energy Saver] keys. (Power Saving Recovery)
•
Open the platen cover or the optional document processor. (Power Saving Recovery)
•
Place originals in the optional document processor. (Power Saving Recovery)
The machine will be ready to operate within 10 seconds.
Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more slowly.
Auto Low Power Mode
Auto Low Power Mode automatically switches the machine into Low Power Mode if left idle for a preset time.
The default preset time is 2 minutes.
For information on the Low Power Mode settings, refer to Low Power Timer on page 8-55.
Energy Saver Recovery Level
This machine can reduce power consumption when recovering from Energy Saver Mode.
For EnergySaver RecoveryLevel, "Full Recovery", "Normal Recovery" or "Power Saving Recovery" can be selected.
The factory default is "Normal Recovery".
For more information on Energy Saver Mode settings, refer to EnergySaver RecoveryLevel on page 8-56.
3-14
Preparation before Use > Energy Saver function
Sleep and Auto Sleep
Sleep
To enter Sleep, press the [Power] key. Touch panel and all indicators on the operation panel will go out to save a
maximum amount of power except the Main Power indicator. This status is referred to as Sleep.
Main Power
indicator
If print data is received during Sleep, the print job is performed while the touch panel remains unlit.
When using the optional fax, received fax data is printed out while the operation panel also remains unlit.
• Press the [Power] key. (Full Recovery)
• Press a key other than [Power] keys. (Power Saving Recovery)
The machine will be ready to operate within 16 seconds.
Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more slowly.
Auto Sleep
.
Auto Sleep automatically switches the machine into Sleep if left idle for a preset time in the Low Power Mode.
The default preset time are 45 minutes for d-Copia 3500MF plus, and 60 minutes for d-Copia 4500MF plus/d-Copia 5500MF plus.
To change the preset Sleep Time, refer to Sleep Timer on page 8-55
Sleep Level (Energy Saver)
This mode reduces power consumption even more than normal Sleep mode, and allows Sleep Mode to be set
separately for each function. Printing from a computer connected with a USB cable is not available while the machine is
asleep. The time required for the machine to wake up from power save mode and resume normal operation will be
longer than for normal Sleep Mode.
For more information on Energy Saver Mode settings, refer to Sleep Level on page 8-55.
Energy Saver Recovery Level
This machine can reduce power consumption when recovering from Energy Saver Mode.
For EnergySaver RecoveryLevel, "Full Recovery", "Normal Recovery" or "Power Saving Recovery" can be selected.
The factory default is "Normal Recovery".
For more information on Energy Saver Mode settings, refer to EnergySaver RecoveryLevel on page 8-56.
3-15
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
Loading Paper
Paper can be loaded in the two standard cassettes and the multi purpose tray. A paper feeder is also available as an
option. (Refer to Optional Equipment on page 11-2.)
For the paper load methods for each cassette, refer to the page below.
2
4
1
3
Cassettes
Standard
Option
*
Name
No.
Page
Cassette 1,
Cassette 2
Standard cassettes
1
page 3-18
Multi Purpose
Tray
Multi Purpose Tray
2
page 3-26
Cassette 3,
Cassette 4
Side Feeder (500-sheet x 2)*
1
page 3-18
Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet x 2)
3
page 3-21
Cassette 5
Side Feeder (3,000-sheet)
4
page 3-25
The paper feed method is the same as standard cassettes.
NOTE
The number of sheets that can be held varies depending on your environment and paper type.
You should not use inkjet printer paper or any paper with a special surface coating. (Such paper may cause
paper jams or other faults.)
3-16
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
Before Loading Paper
When you open a new package of paper, fan the sheets to separate them slightly prior to loading in the following steps.
1 Bend the whole set of sheets to swell them in the middle.
2 Hold the stack at both ends and stretch it while keeping the entire stack swelled.
3 Raise the right and left hands alternately to create a gap and feed air between the papers.
4 Finally, align the papers on a level, flat table.
If the paper is curled or folded, straighten it before loading. Paper that is curled or folded may
cause a jam.
IMPORTANT
If you copy onto used paper (paper already used for printing), do not use paper that is
stapled or clipped together. This may damage the machine or cause poor image
quality.
NOTE
Note that some paper types have a tendency to curl and may jam in the paper eject unit.
If you use special paper such as letterhead, paper with holes or paper with pre-prints like
logo or company name, refer to Paper on page 11-13.
Avoid exposing opened paper to high temperatures and high humidity as dampness can be
a cause of problems. Seal any remaining paper after loading in the multi purpose tray or
cassettes back in the paper storage bag.
If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period, protect all paper from humidity by
removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag.
3-17
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
Loading in the Cassettes
Standard cassettes
The standard cassettes can hold plain paper, recycled paper or color paper.
Cassette 1 and 2 hold up to 500 sheets of plain paper (80 g/m2) (or up to 550 sheets of 64 g/m2 plain paper).
The following paper sizes are supported: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Folio, Ledger, Legal, Oficio II,
12 x 18", Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, 8K, 16K, 16K-R, and 216 x 340 mm, Custom (140 x 182 mm - 304 x 457 mm).
IMPORTANT
When using media types other than plain paper (such as recycled or colored paper), always specify the media
type and paper weight settings.
Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes (page 3-30)
Media Type Setting (page 8-13)
The cassettes can hold paper with weight between 60 - 220 g/m2. If you are using a paper weight of 106 g/m2
or more, set the media type to Thick and set the weight of the paper you are using.
Do not load thick paper that is heavier than 256 g/m2 in the cassettes. Use the multi purpose tray for paper
that is heavier than 256 g/m2.
If you wish to use 330 x 210 mm to 356 x 220 mm paper, contact a service technician.
1
Pull the cassette out toward you until it stops.
NOTE
Do not pull out more than one cassette at a time.
2
Adjust the cassette size.
1 Squeeze the ends of the bottom of the paper length guide and move the guide to fit the
length of the paper.
Paper sizes are marked on the cassette.
3-18
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
2 Press the (Paper Width Guide) Lock to release the lock. Grasp the paper width adjusting
tab and move the paper width guides to fit the paper.
Example: For A4
3
Load paper.
1 Align the paper flush against the right side of the cassette.
IMPORTANT
• If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guide,
the paper may skew or become jammed.
• Load the paper with the print side facing up.
• After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the
multi-purpose tray. (Refer to Before Loading Paper on page 3-17.)
• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled
or folded may cause paper jams.
• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration
below).
2 Be sure that the paper length and width guides rest securely against the paper. If there is a
gap, readjust the guides to fit the paper.
3-19
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
3 Press the (Paper Width Guide) Lock to lock.
4
Gently push the cassette back in.
NOTE
• If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period, protect all paper from humidity by
removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag.
• Select the media type (plain, recycled, etc.) loaded in the cassette.
Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes (page 3-30)
3-20
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
The Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet x 2) (Option)
The Optional cassettes will each hold plain paper, recycled paper or color paper.
The Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet x 2) holds up to 3,000 sheets (1,500-sheet x 2) of plain paper (80 g/m2)
(or up to 3,500 sheets (1,750-sheet x 2) of 64 g/m2 plain paper).
The following paper sizes are supported: A4, B5 and Letter.
IMPORTANT
When using media types other than plain paper (such as recycled or colored paper), always specify the media
type and paper weight settings.
Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes (page 3-30)
Media Type Setting (page 8-10)
The cassettes can hold paper with weights up to 256 g/m2. If you are using a paper weight of 106 g/m2 or
more, set the media type to Thick and set the weight of the paper you are using.
Do not load thick paper that is heavier than 256 g/m2 in the cassettes. Use the multi purpose tray for paper
that is heavier than 256 g/m2.
1
Pull the cassette out toward you until it stops.
2
Adjust the cassette size.
1 Rotate the Paper Size Guide (A) clamp and remove. Pull the Paper Size Guide (A) up and out.
2
Clamp
1
2
Paper Size Guide (A)
3-21
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
2 Insert the Paper Size Guide (A) into the slot (bottom of cassette) for the paper size to be
used.
1
2
1
Make sure that the top of the paper size guide (A) matches the paper size to be used, attach the
clamp, and rotate the clamp to lock it.
Gently try moving the Paper Size Guide (A) to verify that it is fixed.
3 With the bottom of the cassette pressed all the way down, press the hook on the side of the
Paper Size Guide (B) to release it and pull out the Paper Size Guide (B).
1
2
3
1
Paper Size Guide (B)
4 Adjust the Paper Size Guide (B) to the paper size.
A4
Insert the Paper Size Guide (B) into the slot marked A4 (on the bottom of the cassette), and
lock the hook (it will make a "click" sound).
Gently try moving the Paper Size Guide (A) to verify that it is fixed.
CLICK!
2
1
3-22
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
B5
Open the Paper Size Guide (B) as shown, insert into the slot marked B5 (on the bottom of the
cassette), and lock the hook (it will make a "click" sound).
Gently try moving the Paper Size Guide (A) to verify that it is fixed.
3
CLICK!
2
1
Letter
The Paper Size Guide (B) is not attached.
With the bottom of the cassette pressed all the way down, press the hook on the side of the
Paper Size Guide (C) to release it and pull out the Paper Size Guide (C).
2
1
3
Paper Size
Guide (C)
3
Load paper.
3-23
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
IMPORTANT
• Load the paper with the print side facing up.
• After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the
multi-purpose tray.
Before Loading Paper (page 3-17)
• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled
or folded may cause paper jams.
• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration
below).
4
Gently push the cassette back in.
NOTE
• If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period, protect all paper from humidity by
removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag.
• Select the media type (plain, recycled, etc.) loaded in the cassette.
Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes (page 3-30)
3-24
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) (Option)
The optional side feeder hold up to 3,000 sheets of plain paper (80 g/m2).
The following paper sizes are supported: A4, B5 and Letter.
Pull the cassette out toward you until it stops and insert the paper into the cassette. After loading paper, gently push the
cassette back in.
NOTE
The default paper size setting is A4. If you need the paper size changed to B5 or Letter, contact your service
representative.
IMPORTANT
• When loading the paper, keep the print side facing down.
• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled or folded may cause
paper jams.
• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration above).
3-25
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray
The multi purpose tray will hold up to 150 sheets of A4 or smaller plain paper (80 g/m2) (or up to 165 sheets of 64 g/m2
plain paper) or up to 50 sheets of plain paper (80 g/m2) (or up to 55 sheets of 64 g/m2 plain paper) lager than A4.
The multi purpose tray accepts paper sizes from A3 to A6-R and Hagaki and from Ledger to Statement-R, 12 x 18", 8K,
16K and 16K-R. Be sure to use the multi purpose tray when you print on any special paper.
IMPORTANT
When using media types other than plain paper (such as recycled or colored paper), always specify the media
type and paper weight settings.
Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray (MP Tray Setting) (page 3-33)
Media Type Setting (page 8-13)
If you are using a paper weight of 106 g/m2 or more, set the media type to Thick and set the weight of the
paper you are using.
The capacity of the multi purpose tray is as follows.
•
A4 or smaller plain paper (80 g/m2), recycled paper or color paper: 150 sheets (64 g/m2 plain paper : 165 sheets)
•
B4 or larger plain paper (80 g/m2), recycled paper or color paper: 50 sheets (64 g/m2 plain paper : 55 sheets)
•
Hagaki: 30 sheets
•
OHP film: 10 sheets
•
Envelope DL, Envelope C4, Envelope C5, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10), Envelope #9 (Commercial #9),
Envelope #6 (Commercial #6), Monarch, Youkei 4, Youkei 2: 10 sheets
•
Banner paper: 470.1 mm (18.51") to a maximum of 1220.0 mm (48"): 1 sheet (manual feed), 10 sheets (when
optional banner tray is attached)
NOTE
When you load custom size paper, enter the paper size by referring to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the
Multi Purpose Tray (MP Tray Setting) on page 3-33.
When you use special paper such as transparencies or thick paper, select the media type by referring to Specifying
Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray (MP Tray Setting) on page 3-33.
1
Open the multi purpose tray.
When loading paper sizes 12 x 18" and from A3 to B4 and Ledger to Legal, extend the support
tray section of the multi purpose tray until the "∆" mark is fully appeared.
3-26
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
2
Adjust the multi purpose tray size.
3
Load paper.
Insert the paper along the paper width guides into the tray until it stops.
After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the multipurpose tray.
Before Loading Paper (page 3-17)
IMPORTANT
• When loading the paper, keep the print side facing down.
• Curled paper must be uncurled before use.
• Straighten the top edge if it is curled.
• When loading paper into the multi purpose tray, check that there is no paper left
over in the tray from a previous job before loading the paper. If there is just a small
amount of paper left over in the multi purpose tray and you want to add more, first
remove the left-over paper from the tray and include it with the new paper before
loading the paper back into the tray.
• If there is a gap between the paper and the paper width guides, readjust the guides
to fit the paper in order to prevent skewed feeding and paper jams.
• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration
above).
3-27
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multi purpose tray
Load the paper with the print side facing down. For the procedure for printing, refer to the Printer Driver User Guide.
Example: When printing the address.
Close the flap.
Return postcard Cardstocks
(Oufukuhagaki) (Hagaki)
Portrait
form
envelopes
Open the flap.
Landscape
form
envelopes
IMPORTANT
• Use unfolded return postcard (Oufukuhagaki).
• How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of envelope. Be sure to
load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face.
NOTE
When you load envelopes in the multi purpose tray, select the envelope type by referring to Specifying Paper Size and
Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray (MP Tray Setting) on page 3-33.
3-28
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
When you load index paper in the multi purpose tray
Load the paper with the print side facing down and the tab further side from the machine. For the procedure for printing,
refer to the Printer Driver User Guide.
Index paper must meet the following conditions.
Item
Description
Paper size
A4/Letter
Paper weight
136 to 256 g/m2
Number of tabs
1 to 15
Length of tabs
30 mm or less
Paper stopper
To use the sheet ejection stopper, open as shown below. (Example: A3, B4, Ledger, Legal)
3-29
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
Specifying Paper Size and Media
The default paper size setting for cassettes 1 and 2, for the multi purpose tray and for the optional paper feeder
(cassettes 3 to 5) is "Auto", and the default media type setting is "Plain".
To fix the type of paper to be used in cassettes, specify the paper size and media type setting. (Refer to Specifying
Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 3-30.) To fix the type of paper to be used in multi purpose tray,
specify the paper size setting. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray (MP Tray
Setting) on page 3-33.)
Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes
To fix the type of paper to be used in cassettes 1 or 2 or the optional paper feeders (cassettes 3 to 5), specify the paper
size. Also, if you use a media type other than plain paper, specify the media type setting.
Selection Item
Paper Size
Media type
Selectable Size/Type
Auto
Paper size is automatically detected and selected.
Values: Metric, Inch
Standard Sizes 1*1
Available options are as follows:
Values:
Metric models: A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R, Folio, 216 x 340 mm
Inch models: Ledger, Letter, Letter-R, Legal, Statement, 12 x 18", Oficio II
Standard Sizes 2*1
Select from standard size except Standard Sizes 1.
Values:
Metric models: Ledger, Letter, Letter-R, Legal, Statement, 12 x 18", Oficio II, 8K,
16K, 16K-R
Inch models: A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R, Folio, 216x340 mm, 8K, 16K, 16K-R
Size Entry*2
Enter a size not displayed in the standard sizes.
Values:
Metric
X : 182 to 457 mm (in 1 mm increments),
Y : 140 to 304 mm (in 1 mm increments),
Inch
X : 7.17 to 18.00" (in 0.01" increments)
Y : 5.51 to 12.00" (in 0.01" increments)
Select the media type.
Values: Plain (60 - 105 g/m2), Rough, Vellum (60 - 105 g/m2), Recycled,
Preprinted*3, Bond*3, Color, Prepunched*3, Letterhead*4,
Thick (106g/m2 or more)*4, High Quality, Custom 1 - 8*4
*1 When using the optional Large Capacity Feeders (1,500-sheet x 2), you can only specify A4, Letter, or B5.
*2 Can be set when cassette 1 or cassette 2 is selected.
*3 To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to Special Paper Action on page 8-12.
*4 To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Media Type Setting on page 8-10. When the paper weight settings shown
below are selected, the media indicated for each setting cannot be selected.
Rough: "Heavy 4" or "Heavy 5
Preprinted: "Heavy 4" or "Heavy 5"
Letterhead: "Heavy 4" or "Heavy 5"
Thick: "Heavy 4" or "Heavy 5"
Bond: "Heavy 4"
Custom 1 to 8: "Heavy 4", "Heavy 5", or "Extra Heavy"
3-30
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
NOTE
If the optional FAX kit is installed, the available media types for printing received faxes are as shown below.
Plain, Recycled, Bond, Vellum, Color, Thick, High Quality, Rough and Custom 1 to 8
Set the paper size of the cassette used for fax reception as follows:
Inch models:
Press [Auto] and then [Inch].
Metric models: Press [Auto] and then [Metric].
If the above setting is changed, it will not be possible to print faxes.
1
Display the screen.
1 Press the [System Menu] key.
2 Press [Cassette/MP Tray Settings].
2
Configure the settings.
1 In "Cassette Setting", select one of [Cassette 1] - [Cassette 5], and press [Next]. Then in
"Paper Size", press [Change].
2 For automatic detection of the paper size, press [Auto] and select [Metric] or [Inch] as the unit.
To select the paper size, press [Standard Sizes 1] or [Standard Sizes 2] and select the paper size.
Cassette/MP Tray Settings - Paper Size
㪪㪼㫋㩷㪺㪸㫊㫊㪼㫋㫋㪼㩷㫇㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㫊㫀㫑㪼㪅
1
㪘㫌㫋㫆
㪘㪊
㪘㪋
㪘㪋
㪘㪌
㪪㫋㪸㫅㪻㪸㫉㪻
㪪㫀㫑㪼㫊㩷㪈
㪙㪋
㪙㪌
㪙㪌
㪉㪈㪍㫏㪊㪋㪇㫄㫄
㪪㫋㪸㫅㪻㪸㫉㪻
㪪㫀㫑㪼㫊㩷㪉
㪪㫀㫑㪼㩷㪜㫅㫋㫉㫐
2
Cancel
OK
When cassette 1 or 2 is selected, a size not displayed in the standard sizes can be set.
Select [Size Entry], press [+], [-] to enter "X" (horizontal) and "Y" (vertical) dimensions. By pressing [#
Keys], you can use the numeric keys.
Cassette/MP Tray Settings - Paper Size
Set cassette paper size.
1
Auto
Standard
Sizes 1
X(182 - 457)
Y(140 - 304)
mm
Standard
Sizes 2
mm
Size Entry
# Keys
# Keys
2
Cancel
OK
NOTE
[Cassette 3] to [Cassette 5] are shown when the optional paper feeder is installed.
3-31
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
3 Press [OK].
The previous screen reappears.
4 Press [Change] of "Media Type" to select the media type and press [OK].
Common Settings - Media Type
Select type of paper in Cassette 1.
1
Plain
Recycled
Rough
Preprinted
Vellum
Bond
Prepunched
Letterhead
Custom 1
Custom 2
Custom 3
Custom 6
Custom 7
Custom 8
Color
Thick
High Quality
Custom 4
Custom 5
2
Cancel
3-32
OK
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray (MP Tray Setting)
To fix the type of paper to be used in the multi purpose tray, specify the paper size. When using other than a plain paper,
specify the media type.
Item
Paper Size
Description
Auto
Paper size is automatically detected and selected.
Values: Metric, Inch
Standard Sizes 1
Available options are as follows:
Values:
Metric models: A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, A6-R, B4, B5, B5-R, B6-R, Folio, 216 x 340 mm
Inch models: Ledger, Letter, Letter-R, Legal, Statement, Executive, 12x18",
Oficio II
Standard Sizes 2
Select from the standard sizes*1 not included in Standard Sizes 1.
Values:
Metric models: Ledger, Letter, Letter-R, Legal, Statement, Executive, 12 x 18",
Oficio II,8K, 16K, 16K-R
Inch models: A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, A6-R, B4, B5, B5-R, B6-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16KR, 216 x 340 mm
Others
Select from special standard sizes and custom sizes.
Values: ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch,
Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4, Hagaki, Oufuku hagaki, Youkei4, Youkei2
Size Entry
Enter a size not displayed in the standard sizes.
Value
Metric
X : 148 to 457 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Y : 98 to 304 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Inch
X : 5.83 to 18.00" (in 0.01" increments)
Y : 3.86 to 12.00" (in 0.01" increments)
Media Type
Select the media type.
Values: Plain (60 - 105 g/m2), Rough, Transparency, Vellum (60 - 105 g/m2),
Labels, Recycled, Preprinted*2, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched*2,
Letterhead*2, Envelope, Thick (106 g/m2 or more), Coated, High Quality,
Index Tab Dividers*3, Custom 1-8
*1 To change to a media type other than "Plain", refer to Media Type Setting on page 8-10.
*2 To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to Special Paper Action on page 8-12.
*3 If you print from the printer driver, you can enter text on the tab. For details, refer to the Printer Driver User Guide.
NOTE
If the optional FAX kit is installed, the available media types for printing received faxes are as shown below.
Plain, Labels, Recycled, Bond, Vellum, Color, Coated, Cardstock, Envelope, Thick, High Quality, Rough and Custom 1 to 8
1
Display the screen.
1 Press the [System Menu] key.
2 Press [Cassette/MP Tray Settings], [Next] of "MP Tray Setting", and then [Change] of
"Paper Size".
3-33
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
2
Configure the settings.
1 For automatic detection of the paper size, press [Auto] and select [Metric] or [Inch] as the
unit.
Cassette/MP Tray Settings - Paper Size
Set the multi-purpose tray paper size.
Auto
Standard
Sizes 1
Standard
Sizes 2
A3
A4
A4
A5
A6
B4
B5
B5
B6
216x340mm
Others
Size Entry
Cancel
OK
To select the paper size, press [Standard Sizes 1], [Standard Sizes 2], [Others] or [Size Entry] and
select the paper size.
Cassette/MP Tray Settings - Paper Size
Set the multi-purpose tray paper size.
2
Auto
Standard
Sizes 1
X(148 - 457)
297
Standard
Sizes 2
1
Y(98 - 304)
210
mm
mm
Others
# Keys
# Keys
Size Entry
3
Cancel
OK
If you select [Size Entry], press [+], [-] to enter "X" (horizontal) and "Y" (vertical) dimensions. By
pressing [# Keys], you can use the numeric keys.
2 Press [OK].
The previous screen reappears.
3 Press [Change] of "Media Type" to select the media type and press [OK].
Cassette/MP Tray Settings - Media Type
Select type of paper in Multi-Purpose Tray.
1
Plain
Transparency
Rough
Vellum
Labels
Recycled
Prepunched
Preprinted
Bond
Cardstock
Color
Letterhead
Envelope
Thick
Coated
High Quality
Index Tab
Dividers
Custom 1
Custom 2
Custom 3
Custom 4
Custom 5
Custom 6
Custom 7
Custom 8
Cancel
3-34
2
OK
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC
Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC
Check the information that needs to be set on the machine and create a folder to receive the document on your
computer. Screens of Windows 7 are used in the following explanation. The details of the screens will vary in other
versions of Windows.
NOTE
Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
Making a note of the computer name and full
computer name
Check the name of the computer name and full computer name.
1
Display the screen.
From [Start] button on the Windows, select [Computer] and then [System Properties].
In Windows XP, right-click [My Computer] and select [Properties]. The [System Properties]
dialog box appears. Click the [Computer Name] tab in the window that appears.
In Windows 8, select the desktop in the Start screen, right-click [Computer] from [Libraries],
and then select [Properties].
2
Check the computer name.
Check the computer name and full computer name.
Screen example:
Computer name: PC001
Full computer name: PC001.abcdnet.com
Windows XP:
If the full computer name does not have a dot (.), the full computer name and the computer
name are the same.
If the full computer name has a dot (.), the text string in front of the dot (.) in the full computer
name is the computer name.
Example:
PC001.abcdnet.com
PC001 is the computer name
PC001.abcdnet.com is the full computer name
After checking the computer name, click the
"System Properties" screen.
[Close] button to close the
In Windows XP, after checking the computer name, click the [Cancel] button to close the
"System Properties" screen.
3-35
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC
Making a note of the user name and domain name
Check the domain name and user name for logging onto Windows.
1
Display the screen.
From [Start] button on the Windows, select [All Programs] (or [Programs]), [Accessories]
and then [Command Prompt].
In Windows 8, display [Apps] on [Search] in charms on the Start screen, and select
[Command Prompt].
The Command Prompt window appears.
2
Check the domain name and user name.
At the Command Prompt, enter "net config workstation" and then press [Enter].
Check the user name and domain name.
Screen example:
User Name:
james.smith
Domain Name: ABCDNET
3-36
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC
Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder
Create a shared folder to receive the document in the destination computer.
NOTE
If there is a workgroup in System Properties, configure the settings below to limit folder access to a specific user or group.
1 From [Start] button on the Windows, select [Control Panel], [Appearance and
Personalization], and then [Folder Options].
In Windows XP, click [My Computer] and select [Folder Options] in [Tools].
In Windows 8, select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel], [Appearance
and Personalization], and then [Folder Options].
2
1
Make sure that the [View] tab is selected.
2
3
Remove the checkmark from [Use Sharing Wizard (Recommended)] in "Advanced settings".
In Windows XP, click the [View] tab and remove the checkmark from
[Use Simple File Sharing (Recommended)] in "Advanced settings".
1
Create a folder.
1 Create a folder on your computer.
For example, create a folder with the name "scannerdata" on the desktop.
3-37
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC
2 Right-click the "scannerdata" folder and click [Share] and [Advanced sharing]. Click the
[Advanced Sharing] button.
1
Make sure that the [Sharing] tab is selected.
2
In Windows XP, right-click the "scannerdata" folder and select [Sharing and Security] (or [Sharing]).
2
Configure permission settings.
1 Select the [Share this folder] checkbox and click the [Permissions] button.
1
Make a note of the [Share name].
2
In Windows XP, select [Share this folder] and click the [Permissions] button.
2 Click the [Add] button.
3-38
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC
3
1
3
2
Enter the user name that you made a note of on page
Making a note of the user name and domain name on
page 3-36 in the text box, and click the [OK] button.
If the computer name that you made a note of on page
Making a note of the computer name and full computer
name on page 3-35 is the same as the domain name:
If the computer name is not shown in "From this
location", click the [Locations] button, select the
computer name, and click the [OK] button.
Example: PC001
If the computer name that you made a note of on page
Making a note of the computer name and full computer
name on page 3-35 is not the same as the domain name:
If the text after the first dot (.) in the full computer name
that you made a note of does not appear in "From this
location", click the [Locations] button, select the text
after the dot (.), and click the [OK] button.
Example: abcdnet.com
4
1
Select the user you entered.
2
3
Select the [Allow] checkbox of the "Change" and "Read" permissions and press [OK].
In Windows XP, go to step 6.
NOTE
"Everyone" gives sharing permission to everyone on the network. To strengthen security, it
is recommended that you select "Everyone" and remove the "Read" [Allow] checkmark.
5 Click the [OK] button in the "Advanced Sharing" screen to close the screen.
3-39
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC
6
1
Select the [Security] tab.
2
Select the user you entered.
3
4
Make sure that checkmarks appear on [Allow] checkbox for the "Modify" and "Read & execute"
permissions, and click the [Close] button.
In Windows XP, make sure that checkmarks appear on [Allow] checkbox for the "Modify" and
"Read & execute" permissions, and click the [OK] button.
3-40
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC
Configuring Windows Firewall (for Windows 7)
Permit sharing of files and printers and set the port used for SMB transmission.
NOTE
Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
1
Check file and printer sharing.
1 From [Start] button on the Windows, select [Control Panel], [System and Security], and
[Allow a program through Windows Firewall].
NOTE
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the [Continue] button.
2
1
2
3
Select the [File and Printer Sharing] checkbox.
3-41
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC
2
Add a port.
1 From [Start] button on the Windows, select [Control Panel], [System and Security],
and [Check firewall status].
2
3
4
5
1
2
3-42
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC
6
1
2
3
Select [Specific local ports], and enter "445".
7
1
2
8
1
2
Make sure all checkboxes are selected.
3-43
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC
9
1
2
Enter "Scan to SMB" in "Name" and click [Finish].
In Windows XP or Windows Vista
1 In Windows XP, from [Start] button on the Windows, select [Control Panel], and then
[Windows Firewall].
In Windows Vista, from [Start] button on the Windows, select [Control Panel], [Security],
and then [Turn Windows Firewall on or off].
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the [Continue] button.
2 Click the [Exceptions] tab and then the [Add port...] button.
3 Specify Add a Port settings.
Enter any name in "Name" (example: Scan to SMB). This will be the name of the new port.
Enter "445" in "Port Number". Select [TCP] for "Protocol".
4 Click [OK] button.
In Windows 8
1 In charms on Desktop, click [Settings], [Control Panel], [System and Security], and then
[Windows Firewall].
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the [Continue] button.
2 Configure the settings, refer to Configuring Windows Firewall (for Windows 7) on page 341.
3-44
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Save frequently used destinations to the Address Book or One Touch Keys. The saved destinations can be changed.
The destinations are available for Send as E-mail, Send to Folder, and Fax Transmission (optional).
NOTE
• Registering and editing of the Address Book can also be done in Embedded Web Server RX.
Registering Destinations (page 2-40)
Adding a Destination (Address Book)
Add a new destination to the Address Book. There are two registering methods, contacts and groups. When adding a
group, enter the group name and select group members from the Address Book.
NOTE
If user login administration is enabled, you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in with
administrator privileges.
Contact
A maximum of 2,000 contact addresses can be registered. Each address can include the information such as
destination name, E-mail address, FTP server folder path, computer folder path, and FAX No. (optional).
1
Display the screen.
1 Press the [System Menu] key.
2 Press in the following sequence: [
[Add], [Contact], and then [Next].
3-45
], [Edit Destination], [Add/Edit] in "Address Book",
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
2
Add the name.
Address: james.smith
Name
E-mail
SMB
FTP
FAX
i-FAX
Address Number
:
0033
㪚㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼
Name
:
james.smith
㪚㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼
Cancel
Back
Save
1 To specify the "Address Number", press [Change] in Address Number.
2 Use [+] / [-] or the numeric keys to enter an address number (1 to 2500).
To have the number assigned automatically, enter "0000".
NOTE
Address Number is an ID for a destination. You can select any available number out of
2,000 numbers for contacts and 500 numbers for groups.
If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears when
you press [Save] and the number cannot be registered. If you set "0000" as the address
number, the address is registered under the lowest available number.
3 Press [OK].
The screen shown in step 1 reappears.
4 Press [Change] of "Name".
5 Enter the destination name (up to 32 characters) to be displayed on the Address Book and
press [OK].
The screen shown in step 1 reappears.
NOTE
Refer to the Character Entry Method on page 11-10 for details on entering characters.
3-46
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
3
Add the address.
1 Press [E-mail] to add an E-mail address, [SMB] to add a folder on the PC, or [FTP] to add
an FTP folder.
The procedure differs depending on the transmission method selected.
Address: james.smith
Name
E-mail
SMB
㪪㪼㪸㫉㪺㪿㩷㪝㫆㫃㪻㪼㫉
㪽㫉㫆㫄㩷㪥㪼㫋㫎㫆㫉㫂
FTP
FAX
i-FAX
Search Folder
by Host Name
Next
Connection
Test
Next
Host Name
: PC4050.abc:445
㪚㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼
Path
: \\pc4050\scannerdata
㪚㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼
Login User Name
: james.smith
㪚㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼
: ********
㪚㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼
Login Password
Cancel
Back
Save
E-mail Address
Press [Change] of "E-mail Address", enter the E-mail address and press [OK].The table below
explains the items to be entered.
NOTE
Refer to the Character Entry Method on page 11-10 for details on entering characters.
3-47
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
The Folder (SMB) Address
Press [Change] of "Host Name", "Path", "Login User Name" and "Login Password", enter the
information for each item and press [OK].
The table below explains the items to be entered.
NOTE
For the computer name, share name, domain name, and user name, enter the information
that you noted when you created the shared folder. For details on creating shared folders,
refer to Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC on page 3-35.
Item
Description
Max. No. of
Characters
Host Name*
Computer name
Up to
64 characters
Path
Share name
Up to
128 characters
For example: scannerdata
If saving in a folder in the shared folder:
"share name\folder name in shared folder"
Login User Name
If the computer name and domain name are the same:
User Name
Up to
64 characters
For example: james.smith
If the computer name and domain name are different:
Domain name\User name
For example: "abcdnet\james.smith"
Login Password
Windows logon password
(Not case sensitive.)
*
Up to
64 characters
To specify a port number different from the default (445), enter using the format
"Host name: port number" (Example: SMBhostname:140).
To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].
(Example: [3ae3:9a0:cd05:b1d2:28a:1fc0:a1:10ae]:140)
To search for a folder on a PC on the network, press [Next] of "Search Folder from Network" or
"Search Folder by Host Name".
If you selected "Search Folder from Network", you can enter the "Domain/Workgroup", and
"Host Name" to search PCs on the network for the destination.
If you pressed "Search Folder by Host Name", you can search all PCs on the network for a
destination.
A maximum of 500 addresses can be displayed. Select the host name (PC name) that you
want to specify in the screen that appears, and press [Next]. The login user name and login
password entry screen appears.
NOTE
Refer to the Character Entry Method on page 11-10 for details on entering characters.
Press [Connection Test] to check the connection to the server you chose. If the connection
fails, check the entries you made.
3-48
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
2 Check if the destination entry is correct and press [Save]. The destination is added to the
Address Book.
To register the registered address in a one-touch key, press [Yes] in the pop-up screen that appears
after [Save] is pressed.
NOTE
To register a new One Touch Key, refer to Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One
Touch Key) on page 3-53.
The Folder (FTP) Address
Press [Change] of "Host Name", "Path", "Login User Name" and "Login Password", enter the
information for each item and press [OK].
The table below explains the items to be entered.
Item
*
Descriptions
Max. No. of
Characters
Host Name*
Host name or IP address of FTP server
Up to
64 characters
Path
Path for the file to be stored
For example, "User\ScanData".
If no path is entered, the file is stored in the home
directory.
Up to
128 characters
Login User Name
FTP server login user name
Up to
64 characters
Login Password
FTP server login password
Up to
64 characters
If you specify a port number other than the default (21), use the "Host name: port number"
(Example: FTPhostname:140).
To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].
(Example: [3ae3:9a0:cd05:b1d2:28a:1fc0:a1:10ae]:140)
NOTE
• Refer to the Character Entry Method on page 11-10 for details on entering characters.
• Press [Connection Test] to check the connection to the FTP server you chose. If the
connection fails, check the entries you made.
3-49
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Group
Compile two or more contacts into a group. Designations in the group can be added at the same time. When adding a
group, a maximum of 500 groups can be added in the Address Book.
NOTE
To add a group, you need individually added destinations. Register one or more individual destinations as needed
before proceeding. Up to 100 destinations for the E-mail, 500 destinations for the FAX, and a total of 10 destinations
for the FTP and SMB can be registered per group.
1
Display the screen.
1 Press the [System Menu] key.
2 Press [
2
], [Edit Destination], [Add/Edit] of "Address Book", [Add], [Group]; and then [Next].
Add the name.
Address: ABCABC
Name
Member
Address Number
:
0022
㪚㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼
Name
:
ABCABC
㪚㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼
Cancel
Back
Save
1 To specify the "Address Number", press [Change] in Address Number.
2 Use [+] / [-] or the numeric keys to enter an address number (1 to 2,500).
To have the number assigned automatically, set "0000".
NOTE
Address Number is an ID for a group. You can select any available number out of
2,000 numbers for contacts and 500 numbers for groups.
If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears when
you press [Save] and the number cannot be registered. If you set "0000" as the address
number, the address is registered under the lowest available number.
3 Press [OK]. The "Add Group" screen reappears.
4 Press [Change] of "Name".
5 Enter the group name displayed on the Address Book not more than 32 characters and
press [OK].
3-50
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
3
Select the members (destinations).
1 Press [Member] and then [Add].
Address:
Name
Member
1
Member: 1dest.
Destination
CCC
Detail
0123456789
1/1
Detail
2
Delete
Cancel
Add
Back
Save
2 Select destinations (contacts) to add to the group.
NOTE
Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number. For details,
refer to Specifying Destination on page 5-26.
3 Press [OK].
If you have more destinations to add, repeat Steps 2 to 4.
4 Check if the selected destination was added to the group and press [Save]. Now the group
is added to the Address Book.
To register the registered address in a one-touch key, press [Yes] in the pop-up screen that appears
after [Save] is pressed.
NOTE
To register a new One Touch Key, refer to Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One
Touch Key) on page 3-53.
3-51
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Editing and Deleting Address Book Entries
Edit and delete the destinations (contacts) you added to the Address Book.
1
Display the screen.
1 Press the [System Menu] key.
2 Press [
], [Edit Destination] and then [Add/Edit] of "Address Book".
3 Select a destination or group to edit.
NOTE
Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number. For details,
refer to Specifying Destination on page 5-26.
4 Press [Detail].
The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited.
2
Edit or delete a favorite.
Editing a Contact
1 Change "Address Number", "Name" and destination type and address. Refer to Contact on
page 3-45 for the details.
2 After you have completed the changes, press [Save].
3 Press [Yes] in the change confirmation screen to register the changed destination.
Editing a Group
1 Change "Address Number" and "Name". Refer to Group on page 3-50 for the details.
2 Press [Member].
3 To delete any destination from the group, select the destination and press [Delete]. Press
[Yes] on the screen to confirm the deletion.
To add the destination, press [Add].
4 After you have completed the changes, press [Save].
5 Press [Yes] in the change confirmation screen to register the changed group.
Deleting a Contact or Group
Press [Delete]. Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the deletion.
3-52
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key)
One Touch Key Add a new destination (contact or group). A maximum of 1,000 destinations can be registered.
NOTE
• Refer to Specifying Destination on page 5-26 for use of One Touch Key.
• You can add One Touch keys and change their settings on Embedded Web Server RX.
Registering Destinations (page 2-40)
1
Display the screen.
1 Press the [System Menu] key.
2 Press in the following sequence: [
2
], [Edit Destination], and then [Add/Edit] in "One Touch Key".
Add One Touch Keys.
1 Select a One Touch Key number (0001 to 1000) for the destination, and press [Add/Edit].
Pressing [Quick No. Search] key or [No.] enables direct entry of a One Touch Key number.
Select a One Touch Key with no registered destination.
Edit Destination - One Touch Key
Add a One Touch key.
1
0001
AAA
0002
BBB
0003
0004
0005
No.
2
CCC
Add/Edit
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
Delete
1/50
Detail
Close
2 Press [Change] of "Display Name".
3 Enter the One Touch Key name (up to 24 characters) displayed in the send base screen,
and press [OK].
NOTE
Refer to the Character Entry Method on page 11-10 for details on entering characters.
4 Press [Change] of "Destination". The address book appears.
5 Select a destination (contact or group) to add to the One Touch Key number, and press [OK].
Pressing [Detail] shows the detailed information of the selected destination.
NOTE
Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number.
For details, refer to Specifying Destination on page 5-26.
6 Press [Save].
The destination will be added to the One Touch Key.
3-53
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Editing and Deleting One Touch Key
Edit/delete the destinations you added to One Touch Key.
1
Display the screen.
1 Press the [System Menu] key.
2 Press [
], [Edit Destination] and then [Add/Edit] of "One Touch Key".
3 Select a One Touch Key number (0001 to 1000) for the destination.
Pressing [Quick No. Search] key or [No.] enables direct entry of a One Touch Key number.
The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited.
2
Edit and delete the destinations you added to One Touch Key.
Changing the Registered Information
1 Press [Add/Edit].
2 Select a new destination (Contact or group). Pressing [Detail] shows the detailed
information of the selected destination.
NOTE
Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number. For details,
refer to Specifying Destination on page 5-26.
3 Press [OK].
4 Press [Yes] on the screen to add the destination to the One Touch Key.
Deleting the Registered Information
1 Press [Delete].
2 Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the deletion of the data registered in the One Touch Key.
3-54
4
Printing from PC
This chapter explains the following topics:
Printing from PC ................................................................................................................................................. 4-2
Printer driver print settings screen ........................................................................................................... 4-5
Printer Driver Help ................................................................................................................................... 4-6
Changing the default printer driver settings (Windows 7) ........................................................................ 4-6
Canceling printing from a computer ......................................................................................................... 4-6
Banner printing ................................................................................................................................................... 4-7
Printing Data Saved on the Printer ................................................................................................................... 4-14
Private Print/Stored Job ......................................................................................................................... 4-14
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold ................................................................................................................... 4-16
4-1
Printing from PC > Printing from PC
Printing from PC
Follow the steps below to print documents from applications.
NOTE
• To print the document from applications, install the printer driver on your computer from the supplied DVD
(Product Library).
• In some environments, the current settings are displayed at the bottom of the printer driver.
• When printing the cardstock or envelopes, load the cardstock or envelopes before performing the following
procedure.
(Refer to When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multi purpose tray on page 3-28.)
1
Display the screen.
2
Configure the settings.
Click [File] and select [Print] in the application.
1 Select the machine from the "Name" menu and click the [Properties] button.
4-2
Printing from PC > Printing from PC
2 Select the [Basic] tab.
3 Click "Print size" menu and select the paper size to use for printing.
To load the paper of size that is not included in print sizes of the machine such as cardstock or
envelopes, the paper size needs to be registered.
Registering the Original Size (page 4-3)
To print on the special paper such as thick paper or transparency, click "Media type" menu and select
the media type.
When a document length from 470.1 mm (18.51") to a maximum of 1220.0 mm (48") is specified for
printing, the print job is treated as banner printing.
Banner printing (page 4-7)
4 Click [OK] button to return to the Print dialog box.
3
Start printing.
Click the [OK] button.
Registering the Original Size
If you loaded a paper size that is not included in the print sizes of the machine, register the paper size in the [Basic] tab
of the print settings screen of the printer driver.
The registered size can be selected from the "Print size" menu.
NOTE
To execute printing at the machine, set the paper size and type in Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the
Cassettes on page 3-30.
1
Display the print settings screen.
2
Register the paper size.
1 Click the [Basic] tab.
2 Select [Custom] in the "Print size" menu.
3 Click the [New] button.
4 Enter the name of the paper.
4-3
Printing from PC > Printing from PC
5 Enter the paper size.
When a document length from 470.1 mm (18.51") to a maximum of 1220.0 mm (48") is specified for
printing, refer to Banner printing on page 4-7.
6 Click the [OK] button.
7 In the "Print size" menu, select the paper size (name) that you registered in steps 4 to 7.
8 Click [MP tray] in the "Source" menu.
9 Select the type of paper in the "Media type" menu.
NOTE
• If you loaded a postcard or envelope, select [Cardstock] or [Envelope] in the "Media type" menu.
• To select the 4,000-sheet Finisher tray or 1,000-sheet Finisher tray for the output tray when printing envelopes,
select the following:
4,000-sheet Finisher
Print paper size
Output tray
Envelopes other than Envelope C4
Tray C (facedown)
Envelope C4
Tray B (facedown)
1,000-sheet Finisher
Print paper size
All envelopes
Output tray
Finisher Top Tray (facedown)
4-4
Printing from PC > Printing from PC
Printer driver print settings screen
The printer driver print settings screen allows you to configure a variety of print-related settings. For more information,
refer to the Printer Driver User Guide on the DVD.
No.
1
Description
[Quick Print] tab
Provides icons that can be used to easily configure frequently used functions. Each time you click an icon, it
changes to an image resembling the print results and applies the settings.
[Basic] tab
This tab groups basic functions that are frequently used. You can use it to configure the paper size,
destination, and duplex printing.
[Layout] tab
This tab lets you configure settings for printing various layouts, including booklet printing, combine mode,
poster printing, and scaling.
[Finishing] tab
This tab lets you configure settings related to finishing of printed media, including binding and stapling.
[Imaging] tab
This tab lets you configure settings related to the quality of the print results.
[Publishing] tab
This tab lets you create covers and inserts for print jobs and put inserts between sheets of OHP film.
[Job] tab
This tab lets you configure settings for saving print data from the computer to the machine. Regularly used
documents and other data can be saved to the machine for easy printing later. Since saved documents can
be printed directly from the machine, this function is also convenient when you wish to print a document that
you don't want others to see.
[Advanced] tab
This tab lets you configure settings for adding text pages or watermarks to print data.
2
[Profiles]
Printer driver settings can be saved as a profile. Saved profiles can be recalled at any time, so it's a
convenient practice to save frequently used settings.
3
[Reset]
Click to revert settings to their initial values.
4-5
Printing from PC > Printing from PC
Printer Driver Help
The printer driver includes Help. To learn about print settings, open the printer driver print settings screen and display
Help as explained below.
•
Click the [?] button in the upper right corner of the screen and then click the item you want to know about.
•
Click the item you want to know about and press the [F1] key on your keyboard.
Changing the default printer driver settings (Windows 7)
The default printer driver settings can be changed. By selecting frequently used settings, you can omit steps when
printing. For the settings, refer to Printer Driver User Guide.
1 Click [Start] button on the Windows, and then click [Devices and Printers].
2 Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of
the printer driver.
3 Click the [Basic] button on the [General] tab.
4 Select the default settings and click the [OK] button.
Canceling printing from a computer
To cancel a print job executed using the printer driver before the printer begins printing, do the following:
NOTE
When canceling printing from this machine, refer to Canceling Jobs on page 5-18.
1 Double-click the printer icon (
) displayed on the taskbar at the bottom right of the
Windows desktop to display a dialog box for the printer.
2 Click the file for which you wish to cancel printing and select [Cancel] from the "Document"
menu.
4-6
Printing from PC > Banner printing
Banner printing
When a document length from 470.1 mm (18.51") to a maximum of 1220.0 mm (48") is specified for printing, the print job
is treated as banner printing.
*
Max. number of sheets
1 sheet (manual feed), 10 sheets (when optional banner tray is attached*)
Paper width
210 to 304.8 mm (8.26" to 12")
Paper length
Max. 1220 mm (48")
Paper weight
136 to 163 g/m2
Media type
Heavy 2
When the banner tray (option) is used, up to 10 sheets of banner paper can be fed continuously. (Refer to Using the
Banner Tray (Option) on page 4-10.)
Follow the steps below to set banner paper in the printer driver.
1
Display the screen for registering the original size.
1
2
1 Click the [Basic] tab.
2 Select [Custom] in the "Print size" menu.
2
Register the original size.
2
1
3
1 Click the [New] button.
2 Enter the name, length (470.1 mm (18.51") or longer), and width of the custom paper size
being registered.
3 Click the [OK] button.
4-7
Printing from PC > Banner printing
3
Setting the print paper size.
1 Select the custom paper size that you registered in the "Print size" menu.
2 Click the [OK] button.
NOTE
When KPDL is used for "PDL" Settings of the printer driver, a length setting of 470.5 mm (18.53") or longer is handled
as banner print.
When you execute printing in this case, a message appears on the machine's operation panel. Place the paper in the
multipurpose tray, continue to support it so that it does not fall, and press [Continue]. To cancel printing, press [Cancel].
Job No.:
Job Name:
User Name:
Use MP tray to print on the following paper.
Set paper and press [Continue].
210x800mm
Custom 1
Cancel
Continue
4-8
Printing from PC > Banner printing
IMPORTANT
If an output tray that cannot be used for banner printing such as Mailbox (option) is selected in the printer driver, the
output tray automatically changes to a tray that can be used.
To print on multiple sheets using the multi purpose tray, place each sheet after the previous sheet is printed, and press
[Continue].
After pressing [Continue], support the paper with both hands so that it feeds in correctly.
After printing starts, catch the paper when it is output so that it does not fall. When using the inner tray as the output
location, do not stand up the stopper.
4-9
Printing from PC > Banner printing
Using the Banner Tray (Option)
When the banner tray (option) is used, up to 10 sheets of banner paper can be fed continuously.
NOTE
The paper length supported in banner tray is 900 to 1220 mm.
1
Open the multi purpose tray.
Open the multi purpose tray until it stops.
Do not extend the multi purpose auxiliary tray.
2
Attach the banner tray.
1 Release the paper width guide lock on the banner tray and open to the maximum width.
4-10
Printing from PC > Banner printing
2 Attach the banner tray to the multi purpose tray.
Opening
Fit the openings on the sides of the banner tray onto the tabs on the sides of the multi purpose tray,
and press into place.
3
Load paper.
1 Open the paper width guides on the multi purpose tray to the maximum width.
Make sure that the banner tray is attached so that the paper width guides on the banner tray are
outside the paper width guides on the multi purpose tray.
2 Load banner paper so that it passes under the paper clamp bar.
Paper clamp
4-11
Printing from PC > Banner printing
3 Loop the banner paper back and place the end on the paper support.
4 Adjust the paper width guides to the width of the paper.
IMPORTANT
If there is a gap between the paper and the paper width guides, readjust the guides
to fit the paper in order to prevent skewed feeding and paper jams.
5 Adjust the paper width guides on the banner tray to the same width as the paper width
guides on the multi purpose tray and lock.
1
1
2
2
4-12
Printing from PC > Banner printing
IMPORTANT
Remove the paper when banner printing finishes, or when you are not using the banner tray.
NOTE
The print confirmation screen can be set in System Menu to not appear when the banner tray is attached. This will
allow continuous printing on multiple sheets. (Refer to Message Banner Print on page 8-25.)
4-13
Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved on the Printer
Printing Data Saved on the Printer
If you configure settings in the [Job] tab of the printer driver and then print, the print job will be saved in the Job Box
(memory) and printing can be executed at the machine.
Private Print/Stored Job
Private Print/Stored Job Box stores the print data which is printed by using the printer driver as a Private Print/Stored
Job. Refer to the Printer Driver User Guide on how to print a job as Private Print or Stored Job using the printer driver.
Printing and Deleting the Document
Print/delete the documents stored in a Private Print/Stored Job box.
The procedure is as follows.
1
Display the screen.
1 Press [Job Box] in the home screen.
Job Box
2 Select [Private Print/Stored Job] and press [Open].
1
Name
Files
Private Print/Stored Job
21
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold
21
Repeat Copy
21
Form for Form Overlay
21
1/1
2
Open
2
Print and delete the document.
Printing the document
1 Select the creator of the document and press [Open].
Private Print/Stored Job
1
User Name
Files
1 User
5
2 User
2
3 User
1
4 User
1
5 User
1/2
1
2
Open
Close
4-14
Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved on the Printer
2 Select the document to print and press [Print].
User: User 1
File Name
2
Size
Date and Time
1File
02/02/2013 09:40
21 MB
2File
02/02/2013 09:45
30 MB
3File
02/02/2013 09:50
36 MB
4File
02/02/2013 09:55
21 MB
5File
02/02/2013 10:00
30 MB
1
2/3
Detail
Delete
Print
Close
NOTE
If the document is protected by an access code, the password entry screen will be
displayed. Enter the password using the numeric keys.
3 Specify the number of copies to print as desired.
4 Press [Start Print].
Printing starts.
Upon completion of printing, the Private Print job is automatically deleted.
Deleting the document
User: User 1
File Name
Date and Time
Size
1File
02/02/2013 09:40
21 MB
2File
02/02/2013 09:45
30 MB
3File
02/02/2013 09:50
36 MB
4File
02/02/2013 09:55
21 MB
5File
02/02/2013 10:00
30 MB
1
2/3
Detail
2
Delete
Print
Close
1 Select the document to delete and press [Delete].
NOTE
If the document is protected by an access code, the password entry screen will be
displayed. Enter the password using the numeric keys.
2 Press [Yes] in the confirmation screen.
4-15
Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved on the Printer
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold box stores the print data which is printed by using the printer driver as a Quick Copy or Proof
and Hold Print job. Refer to the Printer Driver User Guide on how to print a job as Quick Copy or Proof and Hold Print
job using the printer driver.
NOTE
To maintain free space on the hard disk, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs. For details, refer to Quick
Copy Job Retention on page 8-34.
Printing and Deleting the Document
You can print/delete the documents stored in the Quick Copy/Proof and Hold box.
The procedure is as follows.
1
Display the screen.
1 Press [Job Box] in the home screen.
Job Box
2 Select [Quick Copy/Proof and Hold].
Name
Files
Private Print/Stored Job
21
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold
21
Repeat Copy
21
Form for Form Overlay
21
1
1/1
2
Open
3 Press [Open].
4-16
Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved on the Printer
2
Print and delete the document.
Printing the document
1 Select the creator of the document and press [Open].
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold
User Name
Files
1 User
5
2 User
2
3 User
1
4 User
1
5 User
1
1
1/2
2
Open
Close
2 Select the document to print and press [Print].
User: User 1
File Name
Size
Date and Time
1File
02/02/2013 09:40
21 MB
2File
02/02/2013 09:45
30 MB
3File
02/02/2013 09:50
36 MB
4File
02/02/2013 09:55
21 MB
02/02/2013 10:00
30 MB
5File
2
1
2/3
Detail
Delete
Print
Close
3 Specify the number of copies to print as desired.
4 Press [Start Print].
Printing starts.
Deleting the document
1 Select the document to delete and press [Delete].
User: User 1
File Name
Date and Time
Size
1File
02/02/2013 09:40
21 MB
2File
02/02/2013 09:45
30 MB
3File
02/02/2013 09:50
36 MB
4File
02/02/2013 09:55
21 MB
5File
02/02/2013 10:00
30 MB
1
2/3
Detail
2
Delete
Print
Close
2 Press [Yes] in the confirmation screen.
The document is deleted.
4-17
Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved on the Printer
4-18
5
Operation on the Machine
This chapter explains the following topics:
Loading Originals ............................................................................................................................................... 5-2
Placing Originals on the Platen ................................................................................................................ 5-2
Loading Originals in the Document Processor ........................................................................................ 5-3
Checking the Equipment's Serial Number ......................................................................................................... 5-5
Program ............................................................................................................................................................. 5-6
Registering Programs .............................................................................................................................. 5-7
Recalling Programs ................................................................................................................................. 5-7
Editing and Deleting Programs ................................................................................................................ 5-9
Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings) .................................................................. 5-10
Adding Shortcuts .................................................................................................................................... 5-10
Editing and Deleting Shortcuts ............................................................................................................... 5-11
Using the Internet Browser .............................................................................................................................. 5-12
Launching and Exiting the Browser ....................................................................................................... 5-12
Using the Browser Screen ..................................................................................................................... 5-13
Canceling Jobs ................................................................................................................................................ 5-14
Canceling Jobs ...................................................................................................................................... 5-14
Canceling printing from a computer ....................................................................................................... 5-15
Copying ............................................................................................................................................................ 5-16
Basic Operation ..................................................................................................................................... 5-16
Reserve Next ......................................................................................................................................... 5-17
Interrupt Copy ........................................................................................................................................ 5-18
Sending ............................................................................................................................................................ 5-19
Basic Operation ..................................................................................................................................... 5-20
Specifying Destination ........................................................................................................................... 5-22
Checking and Editing Destinations ........................................................................................................ 5-30
Confirmation Screen of Destinations ..................................................................................................... 5-31
Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) ................................................................... 5-32
WSD Scan/DSM Scan ........................................................................................................................... 5-33
Scanning using TWAIN .................................................................................................................................... 5-37
Scanning a document placed in the machine ........................................................................................ 5-37
Scanning a document stored in a custom box ....................................................................................... 5-39
Scanning with FMU Connection ....................................................................................................................... 5-41
Using FMU Connection to scan an original ........................................................................................... 5-41
What is Document Box? .................................................................................................................................. 5-42
Basic Operation for Document Box ....................................................................................................... 5-43
Using a Custom Box ........................................................................................................................................ 5-48
Creating a New Custom Box (Add/Edit Box) ......................................................................................... 5-48
Editing Custom Box ............................................................................................................................... 5-50
Storing Documents (Store File) .............................................................................................................. 5-51
Printing Documents (Print) ..................................................................................................................... 5-52
Sending Documents (Send) ................................................................................................................... 5-53
Editing Documents ................................................................................................................................. 5-55
Deleting Documents ............................................................................................................................... 5-59
Job Box ............................................................................................................................................................ 5-60
Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs ................................................................................................................ 5-60
Form for Form Overlay .......................................................................................................................... 5-61
Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory ................................................................................. 5-63
Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) ......................................................................................... 5-65
Check the USB memory information ................................................................................................................ 5-66
Removing USB Memory .................................................................................................................................. 5-67
Manual Staple .................................................................................................................................................. 5-68
5-1
Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals
Loading Originals
Placing Originals on the Platen
You may place books or magazines on the platen in addition to ordinary sheet originals.
Align it flush against
the original size
indicator plates with
the back left corner
as the reference
point.
Put the scanning
side facedown.
NOTE
For details on Original Orientation, refer to Original Orientation on page 6-16.
CAUTION
Do not leave the platen cover or the optional document processor open as there is a danger of personal
injury.
IMPORTANT
Do not push the platen cover or the optional document processor forcefully when you close it. Excessive
pressure may crack the platen glass.
When placing books or magazines on the machine, do so with the platen Cover or the optional document
processor in the open position.
5-2
Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals
Loading Originals in the Document Processor
The optional document processor automatically scans each sheet of multiple originals. Both sides of two-sided originals
are scanned.
Originals Supported by the Document Processor
The document processor supports the following types of originals.
Document Processor
(Automatic 2-Sided)
Detail
Weight
45 to 160 g/m2 (duplex: 50 to120 g/m2)
Document Processor (Dual scan DP)
35 to 220 g/m2 (duplex: 50 to 220 g/m2)
Sizes smaller than B6-R are 50 to 105 g/m2
(one-side/duplex)
Sizes
Maximum A3 to Minimum A5-R
Maximum Ledger to Minimum Statement-R
Maximum A3 to Minimum A6-R
Maximum Ledger to Minimum Statement-R
No. of sheets
Plain paper (80 g/m2), Colored paper, Recycled
paper, High Quality:
100 sheets (Mixed size originals: 30 sheets)
Thick paper (157 g/m2): 50 sheets
Thick paper (120 g/m2): 66 sheets
Art paper:
1 sheet
Plain paper (80 g/m2), Colored paper, Recycled
paper, High Quality:
175 sheets (Mixed size originals: 30 sheets)
Thick paper (157 g/m2): 89 sheets
Thick paper (120 g/m2): 116 sheets
Art paper:
1 sheet
Originals Not Supported by the Document Processor
Do not use the document processor for the following types of originals.
•
Soft originals such as vinyl sheets
•
Transparencies such as OHP film
•
Carbon paper
•
Originals with very slippery surfaces
•
Originals with adhesive tape or glue
•
Wet originals
•
Originals with correction fluid which is not dried
•
Irregularly shaped (non-rectangular) originals
•
Originals with cut-out sections
•
Crumpled paper
•
Originals with folds (Straighten the folds before loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam.)
•
Originals bound with clips or staples (Remove the clips or staples and straighten curls, wrinkles or creases before
loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam.)
How to Load Originals
IMPORTANT
• Before loading originals, be sure that there are no originals left on the original eject table. Originals left on
the original eject table may cause the new originals to jam.
• Do not make an impact on the document processor top cover, such as aligning the originals on the top
cover. It may cause an error in the document processor.
5-3
Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals
1
Adjust the original width guides.
2
Place the originals.
Original placement
indicator
Put the side to be scanned (or the first side of two-sided originals) face-up. Slide the leading
edge into the document processor as far as it will go. The original loaded indicator lights when
the original is placed correctly.
NOTE
For details on Original Orientation, refer to Original Orientation on page 6-16.
IMPORTANT
Confirm that the original width guides exactly fit the originals. If there is a gap,
readjust the original width guides. The gap may cause the originals to jam.
Ensure that loaded originals do not exceed the level indicator. Exceeding the
maximum level may cause the originals to jam.
Originals with punched holes or perforated lines should be placed in such a way that
the holes or perforations will be scanned last (not first).
5-4
Operation on the Machine > Checking the Equipment's Serial Number
Checking the Equipment's Serial Number
The equipment's serial number is printed in the location shown in the figure.
d-Copia 5500MF plus
NOTE
You'll need the equipment's serial number when contacting your Service Representative. Please check the number
before contacting your Service Representative.
5-5
Operation on the Machine > Program
Program
By registering sets of frequently used functions as a single program, you can simply press the program number as
needed to recall those functions. You can also name the programs for easy identification when recalling.
The programs below have been preregistered. The registered contents can be re-registered for easier use in your
environment.
Number
Program name
Description
Default Registration
01
ID Card Copy
Use this when you want to copy a
driver's license or an insurance
card.
When you scan the front and back
of the card, both sides will be
combined and copied onto a single
sheet.
Copying Functions
Combine: [2 in 1]
Continuous Scan: [On]
Original Size: A5-R
Paper Selection: Cassette 1
Zoom: Auto Zoom
02
Eco Copy
Use this to save toner consumption
when printing.
This lightens the density to reduce
toner consumption.
Copying Functions
EcoPrint: [On] (Level [5])
03
Newspaper Copy
Use this when you want to copy a
newspaper article, or other
originals printed on a colored
substrate.
This adjusts the image quality so
that the color of the substrate or
the text on the reverse side will not
show on the copy.
Copying Functions
Prevent Bleed-thru: [On]
Background Density Adj.: [Auto]
04
Technical Drawing Copy
Use this when you want to copy a
drawing that contains shapes
drawn with lines, and graphics.
Copying Functions
Original Image: [Text]
Sharpness (All): [+3]
Background Density Adj.: [Auto]
NOTE
Up to 50 functions combining copying and sending can be registered in the program.
If user login administration is enabled, you can only register functions by logging in with administrator privileges.
5-6
Operation on the Machine > Program
Registering Programs
Use the procedure below to register a program.
The following procedure is an example of registering the copying function.
1
Display the screen.
1 Press [Copy] on the Home screen.
Copy
2 Press the [Program] tab while the copy mode is accessed.
2
Register the program.
1 Press [Add] and press a number (01 to 50) for the program number.
NOTE
If you select a program number already registered, the currently registered functions can be
replaced with a new set of functions.
2 Press [Next].
3 Enter the new program name and press [Save].
The program is registered.
To display a registered program on the Home screen, press [Yes] on the confirmation screen that
appears, proceed to step 2-4.
4 Specify the position in which you want to display the icon of registered program.
5 Press [Save].
Recalling Programs
Use the procedure below to recall a registered program.
1
Recall the program.
1 Press [Program] in the Home screen, or the key of the registered program.
Admin
Logout
Select the function.
Status/
Job Cancel
Copy
Send
Custom Box
Job Box
Removable
Memory
FAX
Internet Browser
ID Card Copy
Device
Information
Accessibility
Screen
Language
System
Menu
Help
Program
Message
Board
Pressing the key of the registered program will recall the program. If you pressed [Program],
proceed to step 1-2.
5-7
Operation on the Machine > Program
2 Press the key for the program number you want to recall.
Press the [Quick No. Search] key or [No.] to enter the program number (01 to 50) directly for
recalling.
01 ID Card Copy
02 Eco Copy
03 Newspaper Copy
04 Technical Drawing
Copy
05 Send 2
06 FAX 1
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
No.
Edit
NOTE
If the program cannot be recalled, the Document Box or the form overlay specified in the
program might have been deleted. Check the Document Box.
2
Execute the program.
Place the originals and press the [Start] key.
NOTE
[Program] can be pressed in each function to call up the program registered for the function.
No.
01 ID Card Copy
02 Eco Copy
03 Newspaper Copy
04 Technical Drawing
Copy
05 Send 1
06 FAX 1
07
08
09
Add
10
11
12
Edit
13
14
15
Quick Setup
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Image Quality
Layout/Edit
5-8
Advanced
Setup
Program
Operation on the Machine > Program
Editing and Deleting Programs
You can change program number and program name, or delete program.
Use the procedure below to edit or delete a program.
NOTE
To modify the settings of a registered program, recall the program you want to change, change its settings, then refer
to Registering Programs on page 5-7 to re-register the changed program.
1
Display the screen.
1 Press [Program] on the Home screen.
Program
2 Press [Edit].
2
Edit the program.
To edit a program
1 Press the key(s) corresponding to the program number (01 to 50) to change.
2 Press [Edit], and refer to Registering Programs on page 5-7 to change the program number
and program name.
3 Press [Save].
4 Press [Yes] in the confirmation screen.
To delete
1 Press the key(s) corresponding to the program number (01 to 50) to delete.
2 Press [Delete].
3 Press [Yes] in the confirmation screen.
5-9
Operation on the Machine > Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings)
Registering Shortcuts
(Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings)
You can register shortcuts in the Quick Setup screen for easy access to the frequently used functions. The settings for the
selected function can also be registered. A function name linked to a registered shortcut can be changed as necessary.
You can register up to 6 shortcuts for copying functions, sending functions, and functions set for document box.
Adding Shortcuts
Shortcut registration is performed in the setup screen of each function. Shortcuts can be registered for all functions in
which [Add Shortcut] appears on the screen.
Use the procedure below to register a shortcut.
1
In each function, display the configuration screen you want to
register.
2
Register the shortcuts.
1 Select the setting you want to add.
2 Press [Add Shortcut].
Copies
Memo Page
Layout
Off
Layout A
Top
L to R
Top
R to L
None
Layout B
Border Line
Original
Zoom
Paper
: A4
: 50%
: A4
Top
L to B
Top Edge
on Top
Top
R to B
Original
Orientation
Preview
Add Shortcut
Cancel
OK
3 Press the keys corresponding to the shortcut number (01 to 06) to register.
NOTE
If you select a shortcut number already registered, the currently registered shortcut can be
replaced with a new one.
4 Enter the shortcut name and press [Save].
Copies
Copy
Image
Preview
Memo Page
Shortcut 2
Place original.
Shortcut 3
Auto
100%
Normal 0
Shortcut 4
Original : A4
: --Original
Zoom
: 100%
Zoom
: 100%
Paper
: --Paper
: A4
Paper
Selection
1-sided
>>1-sided
Preview
Preview
Quick Setup
Zoom
Shortcut 5
Off
Duplex
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Density
Off
Staple
/Punch
Combine
Image Quality
Layout/Edit
Advanced
Setup
The shortcut is registered.
5-10
Shortcut 6
Program
Operation on the Machine > Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings)
Editing and Deleting Shortcuts
Follow the steps shown below to change a shortcut number/name or delete a shortcut.
1
In the setup screen of each function, press [Add Shortcut] in
the bottom of the screen.
2
Edit the shortcut.
1 Press [Edit].
2 Press the shortcut key you want to edit/delete.
To edit a shortcut
3 Press [Change] of "Shortcut No." or "Shortcut Name".
4 Change the settings, and press [OK].
5 Press [Save].
To delete
3 Press [Delete this Shortcut].
4 Press [Yes] in the confirmation screen.
5-11
Operation on the Machine > Using the Internet Browser
Using the Internet Browser
If the machine is connected to the network, you can browse the Internet on the touch panel.
NOTE
To use the internet browser, "Internet Browser Setting" must be set to [On] in Internet on page 8-60.
Launching and Exiting the Browser
Use the procedure below to launch and exit the Internet browser.
Display the screen.
1 Press [Internet Browser] on the Home screen.
Internet Browser
The Internet browser starts up.
2 Use the browser screen to browse web pages.
For information on how to use the browser screen, refer to Using the Browser Screen on page 5-17.
3 To exit the browser, press [X] (Close) and then press [Yes] in the exit confirmation screen.
NOTE
You can specify preferences such as the way the Internet browser screen is displayed. For
details, refer to Browser Environment on page 8-60.
5-12
Operation on the Machine > Using the Internet Browser
Using the Browser Screen
The operations available in the Internet browser screen are shown below.
NOTE
Pressing the [Reset] key while the Internet browser is displayed will exit the browser and return you to the application
list screen without displaying the browser exit.
5-13
Operation on the Machine > Canceling Jobs
Canceling Jobs
Follow the steps below to cancel any print or send job being executed.
Canceling Jobs
You can also cancel jobs by pressing the [Stop] key.
Printing jobs
1
Press the [Stop] key with the copy screen or send screen displayed.
2
To cancel printing, select [Cancel], and then press [Yes] in the
confirmation screen.
Cancelling job screen appears. The current print job is temporarily interrupted.
Job Cancel
1
Select job to cancel and press [Cancel]. Press [Close] to resume other jobs.
Job No.
Accepted Time
Job Name
Type
User Name
Status
438
14:44
doc20070225144435
Waiting
439
14:45
doc20070225144511
Waiting
440
14:45
doc20070225144527
Waiting
441
14:46
doc20070225144633
Waiting
1/2
2
Cancel
Printing Jobs
Detail
Sending Jobs
Storing Jobs
Close
Sending jobs
1
Press the [Stop] key with the copy screen or send screen
displayed.
Job Cancel appears.
NOTE
Pressing the [Stop] key will not temporarily stop a job that you have already started sending.
2
To cancel printing, select [Cancel], and then press [Yes] in the
confirmation screen.
NOTE
If Reserve Next Priority on page 8-29 is set to [Off], the Copying screen appears in the touch
panel. In such case, pressing the [Stop] key or [Cancel] will cancel the printing job in progress.
Copies
Job No.:
000021
Job Name:
doc20081010101034
Scanner Setting
User Name:
-----
Printer Setting
Scanned Pages
Copies
A4
A4
100%
2-sided
2-sided
Collate
Plain
Top Edge on Top
Tray A
Cancel
5-14
Reserve Next
Operation on the Machine > Canceling Jobs
Canceling printing from a computer
To cancel a print job executed using the printer driver before the printer begins printing, do the following:
1 Double-click the printer icon (
) displayed on the taskbar at the bottom right of the
Windows desktop to display a dialog box for the printer.
2 Click the file for which you wish to cancel printing and select [Cancel] from the "Document"
menu.
5-15
Operation on the Machine > Copying
Copying
Basic Operation
Follow the steps as below for basic copying.
1
Press [Copy] on the Home screen.
Copy
2
Place the originals.
NOTE
For loading instructions, refer to Loading Originals on page 5-2.
3
Select the functions.
Copies
Copy
Image
Preview
Shortcut 1
Shortcut 2
Place original.
Shortcut 3
Auto
100%
Normal 0
Shortcut 4
Original : A4
: --Original
Zoom
: 100%
Zoom
: 100%
Paper
: --Paper
: A4
Paper
Selection
1-sided
>>1-sided
Preview
Preview
Quick Setup
Zoom
Shortcut 5
Off
Duplex
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Density
Image Quality
Off
Staple
/Punch
Combine
Layout/Edit
Advanced
Setup
Shortcut 6
Program
Select the copier functions to use.
Press tabs to display other functions.
Copy (page 6-2)
4
Use the numeric keys to enter the copy quantity.
5
Press the [Start] key.
Specify the desired number up to 999.
Copying begins.
5-16
Operation on the Machine > Copying
Reserve Next
This function allows you to reserve the next job during printing. Using this function, the original will be scanned while the
machine is printing. When the current print job ends, the reserved copy job is printed. The procedure differs depending
on the Reserve Next Priority (refer to Reserve Next Priority on page 8-29).
If "Reserve Next Priority" is set to [On]
The Copy function default screen appears on the touch panel during printing.
1
Place the originals onto the machine for reserving copy, and
configure the copy settings.
Copies
Shortcut 1
Copy
Image
Preview
Shortcut 2
Place original.
Shortcut 3
Auto
100%
Normal 0
Shortcut 4
Paper
Selection
Original : A4
: --Original
Zoom
: 100%
Zoom
: 100%
Paper
: --Paper
: A4
1-sided
>>1-sided
Preview
Preview
Quick Setup
2
Zoom
Shortcut 5
Off
Duplex
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Density
Off
Image Quality
Shortcut 6
Staple
/Punch
Combine
Layout/Edit
Advanced
Setup
Program
Press the [Start] key.
The machine starts scanning the originals.
When the current print job ends, the reserved copy job is printed.
If "Reserve Next Priority" is set to [Off]
The Copying screen appears on the touch panel during printing.
1
Press [Reserve Next].
Copies
Job No.:
000021
Job Name:
doc20081010101034
Scanner Setting
User Name:
-----
Printer Setting
Scanned Pages
Copies
A4
A4
100%
2-sided
2-sided
Collate
Plain
Top Edge on Top
Tray A
Cancel
Reserve Next
The default screen for copying appears.
2
Place the originals onto the machine for reserving copy, and
configure the copy settings.
3
Press the [Start] key.
The machine starts scanning the originals.
When the current print job ends, the reserved copy job is printed.
5-17
Operation on the Machine > Copying
Interrupt Copy
This function allows you to pause the current jobs in progress when you need to make copies immediately.
When the interruption copy ends, the machine resumes the paused print jobs.
NOTE
• If the machine is left unused for 60 seconds in interrupt copy mode, interrupt copying is automatically cancelled and
printing resumes.
You can change the delay until interrupt copying is canceled. Change the delay as required.
Interrupt Clear Timer (page 8-55)
• The interrupt copy function may be unavailable depending on the status of document finisher usage. In this case, try
the interrupt copy.
Priority Override (page 6-55)
1
Configure the settings.
1 Press the [Interrupt] key.
Copies
Copy
Image
Preview
Shortcut 1
Shortcut 2
Place original.
Shortcut 3
Auto
100%
Normal 0
Shortcut 4
Original : A4
: --Original
Zoom
: 100%
Zoom
: 100%
Paper
: --Paper
: A4
Paper
Selection
1-sided
>>1-sided
Preview
Preview
Quick Setup
Zoom
Shortcut 5
Off
Duplex
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Density
Image Quality
Off
Combine
Layout/Edit
Staple
/Punch
Advanced
Setup
Shortcut 6
Program
The current print job is temporarily interrupted.
2 Place the originals onto the machine for interrupt copy, and configure the copy settings.
2
Press the [Start] key.
3
When interrupt copying ends, press the [Interrupt] key.
Interrupt copying begins.
The machine resumes the paused print jobs.
5-18
Operation on the Machine > Sending
Sending
This machine can send a scanned image as an attachment of an E-mail message or to a PC linked to the network. In
order to do this, it is necessary to register the sender and destination (recipient) address on the network.
A network environment which enables the machine to connect to a mail server is required in order to send E-mail. It is
recommended that a Local Area Network (LAN) be used to assist with transmission speed and security issues.
At the same time as you send a scanned image, you can also print the image or send it to the Job Box.
To use the transmission function, verify the following:
•
Program the settings, including the E-mail setting on the machine.
•
Use Embedded Web Server RX (the internal HTML web page) to register the IP address, the host name of the SMTP
server, and the recipient.
•
Register the destination in the Address Book or One Touch keys.
•
Create a share folder in the destination computer, when a folder (SMB/FTP) is selected as the destination.
Consult your network administrator concerning destination folder sharing settings.
•
Create/Register a Custom Box (Using a custom box for sending).
•
Select detailed transmission settings (to select a Document Box as the destination or to print and send the image at
the same time).
Follow the steps below for basic sending. The following five options are available.
•
Send as E-mail (E-mail Addr Entry): Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment. (Refer to page 5-29.)
•
Send to Folder (SMB): Stores a scanned original image in a shared folder of any PC. (Refer to page 5-32.)
•
Send to Folder (FTP): Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server. (Refer to page 5-33.)
•
Send to Custom Box: Sends a document stored in a document box on this machine. (Refer to page 5-57.)
•
Image Data Scanning with TWAIN / WIA: Scan the document using a TWAIN or WIA compatible application program.
(Refer to page 5-41.)
NOTE
Different sending options can be specified in combination. Refer to Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi
Sending) on page 5-36.
The fax function can be used when the optional fax kit has been installed. For details about this function, refer to the
FAX Operation Guide.
5-19
Operation on the Machine > Sending
Basic Operation
1
Press [Send] on the Home screen.
Send
2
Place the originals.
Loading Originals (page 5-2)
3
Specify the destination.
Destination
Destination
Detail
ABCD
[email protected]
TUVW
192.168.188.120
Group1
On Hook
㪘㪻㪻㫉㪼㫊㫊
㪙㫆㫆㫂
1/1
Group1
Direct
Chain
㪜㪄㫄㪸㫀㫃
㪘㪻㪻㫉㩷㪜㫅㫋㫉㫐
Folder Path
Entry
Detail/Edit
Delete
Recall
㪝㪘㪯㩷㪥㫆㪅
㪜㫅㫋㫉㫐
0001
AAA
0002
BBB
0006
FFF
CCC
0007
GGG
㪛㪼㫊㫋㫀㫅㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅
0003
㪨㫌㫀㪺㫂㩷㪪㪼㫋㫌㫇
0004
DDD
0008
HHH
0005
Org./Sending
Data Format
i-FAX
Addr Entry
EEE
0009
III
No.
0010
1/100
JJJ
㪚㫆㫃㫆㫉㪆
㪠㫄㪸㪾㪼㩷㪨㫌㪸㫃㫀㫋㫐
㪘㪻㫍㪸㫅㪺㪼㪻
㪪㪼㫋㫌㫇
WSD Scan
/DSM Scan
㪧㫉㫆㪾㫉㪸㫄
Select the destination to which to send an image.
Specifying Destination (page 5-26)
5-20
Operation on the Machine > Sending
4
Select the functions.
Destination
Destination
Detail
ABCD
TUVW
192.168.188.120
Group1
Group1
On Hook
㪘㪻㪻㫉㪼㫊㫊
㪙㫆㫆㫂
[email protected]
Direct
Chain
1/1
㪜㪄㫄㪸㫀㫃
㪘㪻㪻㫉㩷㪜㫅㫋㫉㫐
Folder Path
Entry
Detail/Edit
Delete
Recall
㪝㪘㪯㩷㪥㫆㪅
㪜㫅㫋㫉㫐
0001
AAA
0002
BBB
0006
FFF
CCC
0007
GGG
㪛㪼㫊㫋㫀㫅㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅
0003
㪨㫌㫀㪺㫂㩷㪪㪼㫋㫌㫇
0004
DDD
0008
HHH
Org./Sending
Data Format
No.
0010
1/100
i-FAX
Addr Entry
EEE
0009
III
0005
JJJ
㪚㫆㫃㫆㫉㪆
㪠㫄㪸㪾㪼㩷㪨㫌㪸㫃㫀㫋㫐
㪘㪻㫍㪸㫅㪺㪼㪻
㪪㪼㫋㫌㫇
Press tabs to display other functions.
Send (page 6-4)
5
Press the [Start] key.
Sending starts.
5-21
WSD Scan
/DSM Scan
㪧㫉㫆㪾㫉㪸㫄
Operation on the Machine > Sending
Specifying Destination
Select the destination using either of the following methods:
• Choosing from the Address Book (page 5-26)
• Choosing from the One Touch Key (page 5-28)
• Choosing from the Speed Dial (page 5-29)
• Entering a New E-mail Address (page 5-29)
• Specifying a New PC Folder (page 5-31)
NOTE
You can set the machine up so that the address book screen appears when you press the [Send] key. For details,
refer to Default Screen on page 8-9.
When the optional fax kit has been installed, you can specify the fax destination. Enter the other party number using
the numeric keypad.
Choosing from the Address Book
Select a destination registered in the Address Book.
For more information about how to register destinations in the Address Book, refer to Registering Destinations in the
Address Book on page 3-45.
1
In the basic screen for sending, press [Address Book].
Destination
On Hook
Destination
Detail
㪘㪻㪻㫉㪼㫊㫊
㪙㫆㫆㫂
1/1
㪜㪄㫄㪸㫀㫃
㪘㪻㪻㫉㩷㪜㫅㫋㫉㫐
Folder Path
Entry
On Hook
Direct
Chain
Detail/Edit
Delete
Recall
㪝㪘㪯㩷㪥㫆㪅
㪜㫅㫋㫉㫐
0001
0002
AAA
BBB
0006
GGG
㪛㪼㫊㫋㫀㫅㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅
0004
CCC
0007
FFF
2
0003
DDD
0008
㪨㫌㫀㪺㫂㩷㪪㪼㫋㫌㫇
III
Org./Sending
Data Format
No.
0010
1/100
EEE
0009
HHH
0005
i-FAX
Addr Entry
JJJ
㪚㫆㫃㫆㫉㪆
㪠㫄㪸㪾㪼㩷㪨㫌㪸㫃㫀㫋㫐
㪘㪻㫍㪸㫅㪺㪼㪻
㪪㪼㫋㫌㫇
WSD Scan
/DSM Scan
㪧㫉㫆㪾㫉㪸㫄
Select the destinations.
Address Book
Addr Book
Dest.
No.
Address Book
Type
Name
Sort
Name
Detail
0001
ABCD
[email protected]
0002
TUVW
[email protected]
0003
Group1
0004
Group2
0005
Group3
Search(Name)
ABC
DEF
E-mail
GHI
JKL
Search(No.)
1/2
Add/Edit
Address Book
Detail
MNO
Folder
PQRS TUV
FAX
WXYZ
0-9
Group
i-FAX
Cancel
OK
Press the checkbox to select the desired destination from the list. You may choose multiple
destinations. The selected destinations are indicated by a checkmark in the check box. To use
an address book on the LDAP server, select [Ext Address Book] from the "Addr Book" pulldown menu.
You can change the order in which the destinations are listed by selecting [Name] or [No.] from
the "Sort".
5-22
Operation on the Machine > Sending
NOTE
To deselect, press the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.
For details on the External Address Book, refer to Embedded Web Server RX User Guide.
Destination Search
Destinations registered in the Address Book can be searched. Advanced search by type or by
initial letter is also available.
Address Book
Addr Book
Dest.
1
2
3
4
No.
Address Book
Type
Name
Sort
Name
Detail
0001
ABCD
[email protected]
0002
TUVW
[email protected]
0003
Group1
0004
Group2
0005
Group3
Search(Name)
ABC
DEF
GHI
E-mail
JKL
Search(No.)
1/2
Detail
MNO
Folder
PQRS TUV
WXYZ
0-9
FAX
Group
i-FAX
Cancel
Keys used
Add/Edit
Address Book
Search type
OK
Subjects searched
1
Search by name
Search by registered name.
2
Search by number
Search by registered address number.
3
Advanced search by
initial letter
Advanced search by initial letter of registered name.
4
Advanced search by
destination
Advanced search by type of registered destination (Email, Folder (SMB/FTP), FAX, i-FAX or Group). (FAX:
Only when the optional fax kit is installed. i-FAX: Only
when the optional Internet FAX Kit is installed.)
You can set this function up so that destination types are
selected when the address book is displayed. For
details, refer to Narrow Down on page 8-53.
The procedures for using the different search modes are explained below.
Search by name
Press [Search(Name)] and enter the required name.
Search by number
Press [Search(No.)] and enter the address number you wish to search.
Advanced search by destination
Press any of [E-mail], [Folder], [FAX], [i-FAX] or [Group]. The destinations registered by that type are
displayed.
Advanced search by initial letter
Press the key for the required initial letter.
5-23
Operation on the Machine > Sending
3
Accept the destination, and press [OK].
Address Book
Addr Book
Dest.
Address Book
No.
Type
Name
Sort
Name
Detail
0001
ABCD
[email protected]
0002
TUVW
[email protected]
0003
Group1
0004
Group2
0005
Group3
Search(Name)
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
E-mail
Search(No.)
1/2
Add/Edit
Address Book
Detail
MNO
PQRS TUV
Folder
WXYZ
FAX
0-9
Group
i-FAX
Cancel
OK
NOTE
To delete the destination, select the destination you want to delete and press [Delete].
You can set the default "Sort" settings. For details, refer to Sort on page 8-53.
Choosing from the One Touch Key
Select the destination using the One Touch Keys.
In the basic screen for sending, press the One Touch Keys where the destination is registered.
NOTE
If the One Touch Keys for the desired destination is hidden on the touch panel, press [ ] or [ ] to scroll and view next
or previous One Touch Keys. This procedure assumes that One Touch Keys have already been registered.
Refer to Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) on page 3-53 for more information on adding One
Touch keys.
Destination
On Hook
Destination
Detail
㪘㪻㪻㫉㪼㫊㫊
㪙㫆㫆㫂
1/1
㪜㪄㫄㪸㫀㫃
㪘㪻㪻㫉㩷㪜㫅㫋㫉㫐
Folder Path
Entry
On Hook
Direct
Chain
Detail/Edit
Delete
Recall
㪝㪘㪯㩷㪥㫆㪅
㪜㫅㫋㫉㫐
0001
AAA
0002
BBB
0006
FFF
㪛㪼㫊㫋㫀㫅㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅
0003
CCC
0007
GGG
㪨㫌㫀㪺㫂㩷㪪㪼㫋㫌㫇
0004
DDD
0008
HHH
Org./Sending
Data Format
No.
0010
1/100
EEE
0009
III
0005
i-FAX
Addr Entry
JJJ
㪚㫆㫃㫆㫉㪆
㪠㫄㪸㪾㪼㩷㪨㫌㪸㫃㫀㫋㫐
㪘㪻㫍㪸㫅㪺㪼㪻
㪪㪼㫋㫌㫇
5-24
WSD Scan
/DSM Scan
㪧㫉㫆㪾㫉㪸㫄
Operation on the Machine > Sending
Choosing from the Speed Dial
Access the destination by specifying the 4-digit (0001 to 1000) One Touch Key number (speed dial).
In the basic screen for sending, press the [Quick No. Search] key or [No.] and use the numeric keys to enter the One
Touch key number in the numeric entry screen.
NOTE
if you entered the speed dial in 1 to 3-digit, press [OK].
Destination
On Hook
Destination
Detail
㪘㪻㪻㫉㪼㫊㫊
㪙㫆㫆㫂
1/1
㪜㪄㫄㪸㫀㫃
㪘㪻㪻㫉㩷㪜㫅㫋㫉㫐
Folder Path
Entry
On Hook
Direct
Chain
Detail/Edit
Delete
Recall
㪝㪘㪯㩷㪥㫆㪅
㪜㫅㫋㫉㫐
0001
0002
AAA
0003
BBB
CCC
0006
0008
GGG
㪛㪼㫊㫋㫀㫅㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅
HHH
㪨㫌㫀㪺㫂㩷㪪㪼㫋㫌㫇
0005
DDD
0007
FFF
0004
No.
EEE
0009
i-FAX
Addr Entry
0010
III
1/100
JJJ
Org./Sending
Data Format
㪚㫆㫃㫆㫉㪆
㪠㫄㪸㪾㪼㩷㪨㫌㪸㫃㫀㫋㫐
㪘㪻㫍㪸㫅㪺㪼㪻
㪪㪼㫋㫌㫇
WSD Scan
/DSM Scan
㪧㫉㫆㪾㫉㪸㫄
Entering a New E-mail Address
Enter the desired E-mail address.
NOTE
Access the Embedded Web Server RX beforehand and specify the settings required for sending E-mail. For details, refer to
Sending E-mail on page 2-37.
1
In the basic screen for sending, press [E-mail Addr Entry].
Destination
On Hook
Destination
Detail
㪘㪻㪻㫉㪼㫊㫊
㪙㫆㫆㫂
1/1
㪜㪄㫄㪸㫀㫃
㪘㪻㪻㫉㩷㪜㫅㫋㫉㫐
Folder Path
Entry
On Hook
Direct
Chain
Detail/Edit
Delete
Recall
㪝㪘㪯㩷㪥㫆㪅
㪜㫅㫋㫉㫐
0001
AAA
0002
BBB
0006
FFF
㪛㪼㫊㫋㫀㫅㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅
0003
CCC
0007
GGG
㪨㫌㫀㪺㫂㩷㪪㪼㫋㫌㫇
0004
DDD
0008
HHH
0005
EEE
0009
III
Org./Sending
Data Format
No.
i-FAX
Addr Entry
0010
1/100
JJJ
㪚㫆㫃㫆㫉㪆
㪠㫄㪸㪾㪼㩷㪨㫌㪸㫃㫀㫋㫐
5-25
㪘㪻㫍㪸㫅㪺㪼㪻
㪪㪼㫋㫌㫇
WSD Scan
/DSM Scan
㪧㫉㫆㪾㫉㪸㫄
Operation on the Machine > Sending
2
Enter destination E-mail address.
1 Press [E-mail Address], and enter the address.
Destination
Enter Destination.
E-mail Address Entry
E-mail
Address
㪘㪻㪻㩷㪸㩷㫅㪼㫎㩷㪼㪄㫄㪸㫀㫃㩷㪻㪼㫊㫋㫀㫅㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㪅
㪧㫉㪼㫊㫊㩷㪲㪜㪄㫄㪸㫀㫃㩷㪘㪻㪻㫉㪼㫊㫊㪴㪃㩷㫋㪿㪼㫅㩷㪼㫅㫋㪼㫉
㫋㪿㪼㩷㪸㪻㪻㫉㪼㫊㫊㩷㫌㫊㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫂㪼㫐㪹㫆㪸㫉㪻㩷㫊㪺㫉㪼㪼㫅㪅
Add to Addr Book
Next Dest.
Cancel
OK
The maximum length of the E-mail address is 128 characters.
Entering Characters (page 11-12)
2 Press [OK].
3
Press [OK].
Destination
Enter Destination.
E-mail Address Entry
E-mail
Address
[email protected]
㪘㪻㪻㩷㪸㩷㫅㪼㫎㩷㪼㪄㫄㪸㫀㫃㩷㪻㪼㫊㫋㫀㫅㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㪅
㪧㫉㪼㫊㫊㩷㪲㪜㪄㫄㪸㫀㫃㩷㪘㪻㪻㫉㪼㫊㫊㪴㪃㩷㫋㪿㪼㫅㩷㪼㫅㫋㪼㫉
㫋㪿㪼㩷㪸㪻㪻㫉㪼㫊㫊㩷㫌㫊㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫂㪼㫐㪹㫆㪸㫉㪻㩷㫊㪺㫉㪼㪼㫅㪅
Add to Addr Book
Next Dest.
Cancel
OK
To enter multiple destinations, press [Next Destination] and enter the next destination.
Up to 100 E-mail addresses can be specified.
You can register the entered mail address in the Address Book by pressing [Add to Address
Book]. You can also replace the information for a previously registered destination.
Destinations can be changed later. Refer to Checking and Editing Destinations on page 5-34.
5-26
Operation on the Machine > Sending
Specifying a New PC Folder
Specify either the desired shared folder on a computer or an FTP server as the destination.
NOTE
Refer to Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder on page 3-37 for details on how to share a
folder.
Be sure that SMB Protocol or FTP in the Embedded Web Server RX is On. For details, refer to the Embedded Web Server RX
User Guide.
1
In the basic screen for sending, press [Folder Path Entry].
Destination
On Hook
Destination
Detail
㪘㪻㪻㫉㪼㫊㫊
㪙㫆㫆㫂
1/1
㪜㪄㫄㪸㫀㫃
㪘㪻㪻㫉㩷㪜㫅㫋㫉㫐
Folder Path
Entry
On Hook
Direct
Chain
Detail/Edit
Delete
Recall
㪝㪘㪯㩷㪥㫆㪅
㪜㫅㫋㫉㫐
0001
AAA
0002
BBB
0006
FFF
CCC
0007
GGG
㪛㪼㫊㫋㫀㫅㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅
2
0003
0004
DDD
0008
HHH
㪨㫌㫀㪺㫂㩷㪪㪼㫋㫌㫇
Org./Sending
Data Format
No.
0010
1/100
EEE
i-FAX
Addr Entry
0009
III
0005
JJJ
㪚㫆㫃㫆㫉㪆
㪠㫄㪸㪾㪼㩷㪨㫌㪸㫃㫀㫋㫐
㪘㪻㫍㪸㫅㪺㪼㪻
㪪㪼㫋㫌㫇
WSD Scan
/DSM Scan
㪧㫉㫆㪾㫉㪸㫄
Enter the destination information.
Destination
Enter Destination.
Folder Path Entry
㪪㪼㪸㫉㪺㪿㩷㪝㫆㫃㪻㪼㫉
㪹㫐㩷㪟㫆㫊㫋㩷㪥㪸㫄㪼
Search Folder
from Network
SMB
Next
Next
Connection
Test
FTP
Host Name
1
2
Path
Login
User Name
Login
Password
Add to Addr Book
Next Dest.
Cancel
OK
1 Press [SMB] or [FTP].
2 Enter the destination information.
Press the key of each item to first display the entry screen.
Enter the destination data and press [OK].
Entering Characters (page 11-12)
The table below explains the items to be entered.
5-27
Operation on the Machine > Sending
For send to folder (SMB)
Item
Detail
Max.
characters
Host Name*
Computer name
Up to
64 characters
Path
Share name
Up to
128 characters
For example: scannerdata
If saving in a folder in the shared folder:
"share name\folder name in shared folder"
Login User Name
If the computer name and domain name are the same:
User Name
Up to
64 characters
For example: james.smith
If the computer name and domain name are different:
Domain name\User name
For example: "abcdnet\james.smith"
Login Password
Windows logon password
(Not case sensitive.)
*
Up to
64 characters
To specify a port number different from the default (445), enter using the format
"Host name: port number" (Example: SMBhostname:140).
To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].
(Example: [3ae3:9a0:cd05:b1d2:28a:1fc0:a1:10ae]:140)
To search for a folder on a PC on the network, press [Next] of "Search Folder from Network" or
"Search Folder by Host Name".
If you selected "Search Folder from Network", you can enter the "Domain/Workgroup", and
"Host Name" to search PCs on the network for the destination.
If you pressed "Search Folder by Host Name" you can search all PCs on the network for a
destination.
A maximum of 500 addresses can be displayed. Select the host name (PC name) that you
want to specify in the screen that appears, and press [Next]. The login user name and login
password entry screen appears.
After you enter the login user name and login password name of the destination PC, the
shared folders appear. Select the folder that you want to specify and press [Next]. The
address of the selected shared folder is set.
Select the folder from the Search Results list.
5-28
Operation on the Machine > Sending
For send to folder (FTP)
Item
Data to be entered
Max.
characters
Host Name*
Host name or IP address of FTP server
Up to 64
characters
Path
Path to the receiving folder
Up to 128
characters
For example, "\User\ScanData".
Otherwise the data will be saved in the home
directory.
Login User Name
FTP server login user name
Up to 64
characters
Login Password
FTP server login password
Up to 64
characters
(Not case sensitive.)
*
3
To specify a port number different from the default (21), enter using the format
"Host name: port number" (Example: FTPhostname:140).
To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].
(Example: [3ae3:9a0:cd05:b1d2:28a:1fc0:a1:10ae]:140)
Check the status.
1 Check the information.
Change the delay as required.
Destination
Enter Destination.
Folder Path Entry
㪪㪼㪸㫉㪺㪿㩷㪝㫆㫃㪻㪼㫉
㪹㫐㩷㪟㫆㫊㫋㩷㪥㪸㫄㪼
Search Folder
from Network
SMB
Next
Next
Connection
Test
FTP
Host Name
PC4050
Path
\\pc4050\scannerdata
Login
User Name
james.smith
Login
Password
********
Add to Addr Book
Next Dest.
Cancel
OK
2 Press [Connection Test] to check the connection.
Destination
Enter Destination.
Folder Path Entry
㪪㪼㪸㫉㪺㪿㩷㪝㫆㫃㪻㪼㫉
㪹㫐㩷㪟㫆㫊㫋㩷㪥㪸㫄㪼
Search Folder
from Network
SMB
Next
Next
Connection
Test
FTP
Host Name
Path
PC4050
\\pc4050\scannerdata
Login
User Name
james.smith
Login
Password
********
Add to Addr Book
Next Dest.
Cancel
OK
"Connected." appears when connection to the destination is correctly established. If "Cannot
connect." appears, review the entry.
To enter multiple destinations, press [Next Destination] and enter the next destination. You can
specify a combined total of up to 10 SMB and FTP destination folders.
You can register the entered information in the Address Book by pressing [Add to Address Book].
5-29
Operation on the Machine > Sending
4
Accept the destination.
Press [OK].
Destination
Enter Destination.
Folder Path Entry
㪪㪼㪸㫉㪺㪿㩷㪝㫆㫃㪻㪼㫉
㪹㫐㩷㪟㫆㫊㫋㩷㪥㪸㫄㪼
Search Folder
from Network
SMB
Next
Connection
Test
Next
FTP
Host Name
Path
PC4050
\\pc4050\scannerdata
Login
User Name
james.smith
Login
Password
********
Add to Addr Book
Next Dest.
Cancel
OK
Destinations can be changed later. Refer to Checking and Editing Destinations on page 5-34.
Checking and Editing Destinations
Check and edit a selected destination.
1
Display the screen.
2
Check and edit the destination.
Referring to Specifying Destination on page 5-26, specify the destination.
Destination
Destination
Detail
ABCD
[email protected]
TUVW
192.168.188.120
Group1
On Hook
㪘㪻㪻㫉㪼㫊㫊
㪙㫆㫆㫂
1/1
Group1
Direct
Chain
㪜㪄㫄㪸㫀㫃
㪘㪻㪻㫉㩷㪜㫅㫋㫉㫐
Folder Path
Entry
Detail/Edit
Delete
Recall
㪝㪘㪯㩷㪥㫆㪅
㪜㫅㫋㫉㫐
0001
AAA
0002
BBB
0006
FFF
CCC
0007
GGG
㪛㪼㫊㫋㫀㫅㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅
0003
㪨㫌㫀㪺㫂㩷㪪㪼㫋㫌㫇
0004
DDD
0008
HHH
0005
Org./Sending
Data Format
i-FAX
Addr Entry
EEE
0009
III
No.
0010
1/100
JJJ
㪚㫆㫃㫆㫉㪆
㪠㫄㪸㪾㪼㩷㪨㫌㪸㫃㫀㫋㫐
㪘㪻㫍㪸㫅㪺㪼㪻
㪪㪼㫋㫌㫇
WSD Scan
/DSM Scan
㪧㫉㫆㪾㫉㪸㫄
Select a destination and press [Detail/Edit] to check and edit it. Edit the delay as required.
Select a destination and press [Delete] to remove the destination from the list.
NOTE
When selecting [On] for Entry Check for New Destination (Entry Check for New Dest. on
page 8-29), the confirmation screen appears. Enter the same host name and path again,
and press [OK].
When selecting [On] for Destination Check before Send (Dest. Check before Send on page
8-29), the confirmation screen appears after pressing the [Start] key. For details, refer to
Confirmation Screen of Destinations on page 5-35.
5-30
Operation on the Machine > Sending
Confirmation Screen of Destinations
When selecting [On] for Destination Check before Send (Dest. Check before Send on page 8-29), the confirmation
screen of destinations appears after pressing the [Start] key.
Follow the steps below to confirm the destinations.
Destination
Check the destination list through the last page.
After checking the list, press [Check] and then Start key.
Destination
A OFFICE
1
Detail
1234567890
Detail
Delete
2
Check
Cancel
1 Press [
] or [
] to confirm all destination.
Pressing [Detail] shows the detailed information of the selected destination.
To delete the destination, select the destination you want to delete and press [Delete]. Press [Yes] in
the confirmation screen. The destination is deleted.
To add the destination, press [Cancel] and then return to the destination screen.
2 Press [Check].
NOTE
Be sure to confirm all destination by displaying them on the touch panel. You cannot press
[Check] unless you have confirmed all destination.
5-31
Operation on the Machine > Sending
Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending)
You can specify destinations that combine E-mail addresses, folders (SMB or FTP) and fax numbers*. This is referred to
as Multi Sending. This is useful for sending to different types of destination (E-mail addresses, folders, etc.) in a single
operation.
* Requires the optional fax kit.
No. of broadcast items
E-mail: Up to 100
Folders (SMP, FTP): Total of 10 SMB and FTP
FAX: Up to 500
i-FAX: Up to 100
Also, depending on the settings, you can send and print at the same time.
Procedures are the same as used in specifying the destinations of respective types. Continue to enter E-mail address or
folder path so that they appear in the destination list. Press the [Start] key to start transmission to all destinations at one
time.
NOTE
If the destinations include a fax, the images sent to all destinations will be black and white.
5-32
Operation on the Machine > Sending
WSD Scan/DSM Scan
WSD Scan
WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer.
NOTE
To use WSD Scan, confirm that the computer used for WSD scanning and the machine is network-connected, and
WSD Scan on page 8-45 is set to [On] in the network settings.
For information on operating the computer, refer to the computer's help or the operation guide of your software.
Installing Driver Software (for Windows 7)
1
Click the [Start] button on the Windows, and then click
[Network].
In Windows 8, select the Desktop in the Start screen and click [Libraries], and then
[Network].
NOTE
When [Network] does not appear in the Start menu, perform the following procedure.
1 Right-click [Start] and click [Property] in the menu that appears.
2 Select the [[Start] menu] tab in the "Task bar and [Start] menu properties" screen, and
click [Customize].
3 When the "Customize [Start] menu" screen appears, select the "Network" check box
and click [OK].
2
Install the driver.
Right-click the machine's icon (Olivetti:d-Copia XXX:XXX) and then click [Install].
NOTE
If the "User Account Control" window appears, click [Continue].
If the "Found New Hardware" window appears, click [Cancel].
During the installation, double-click the icon shown on the task bar to display the "Driver
Software Installation" screen. When "Your devices are ready to use" is displayed on the
[Driver Software Installation] screen, the installation is completed.
5-33
Operation on the Machine > Sending
WSD scan
1
Press [Send] on the Home screen.
Send
2
Place the originals.
Loading Originals (page 5-2)
3
Display the screen.
Press [WSD Scan/DSM Scan].
If DSM Scan on page 8-45 is set to [Off] in the network settings, press [WSD Scan] and go to
step 4.
4
Scan the originals.
Procedure using this machine
1 Select [From Operation Panel] and press [Next].
2 Select the destination computer and press [OK].
Press [Reload] to reload the computer list.
WSD Scan - Selecting Computer
Select the destination computer and press [OK].
1
Computer Name
pc000101
Reload
pc000102
pc000103
1/1
Detail
pc000104
pc000105
2
Cancel
Back
OK
You can view information on the selected computer by pressing [Detail].
5-34
Operation on the Machine > Sending
3 Set the type of original, file format, etc., as desired.
4 Press the [Start] key.
Sending begins and the software installed on the computer is activated.
Procedure from Your Computer
1 Press [From Computer] and press [Next].
2 Use the software installed on the computer to send the images.
DSM Scan (Windows Server 2008 R2 or Windows Server 2012 Only)
A scanned document can be automatically saved in any format or sent to any destination by reading a scan process
from Active Directory.
NOTE
If you are performing DSM scan, check the items below.
• The machine is connected to an Active Directory on the network that the scan process can reference.
• "DSM Scan" and "LDAP" are set to [On] in Protocol Settings (page 8-45) in Network.
• "SSL" is set to [On] in Security Settings (page 8-46) in Network.
• [Network Authentication] is set in User Login (page 9-4).
If the Active Directory that the scan process can reference is not on the network authentication server, DSM must be
set in Embedded Web Server RX. For details, refer to the Embedded Web Server RX User Guide.
1
Press [Send] on the Home screen.
Send
NOTE
Depending on the settings, the address book screen may appear. In this event, press
[Cancel] to display the screen for sending.
2
Place the originals.
Loading Originals (page 5-2)
5-35
Operation on the Machine > Sending
3
Press [WSD Scan/DSM Scan].
If WSD Scan on page 8-45 is set to [Off] in the network settings, press [DSM Scan] and go to
step 5.
4
Select [DSM Scan] and press [Next].
5
Select the scan process to be used and press [OK].
DSM Scan - Selecting Scan Process
Select the scan process and press [OK].
Scan Process Name
Reload
ScanProcess001
ScanProcess002
ScanProcess003
1/1
Detail
ScanProcess004
ScanProcess005
Cancel
Back
OK
Press [Reload] to reload the computer list.
To check the settings, press [Detail].
6
Change the settings and add destinations as needed.
7
Press the [Start] key.
Only E-mail addresses can be added as destinations.
In the send base screen, press [Detail/Edit], [Destination], and then [Address Book] or [E-mail
Addr Entry], and add a destination.
In some scan processes, it may not be possible to change settings or add destinations.
Sending starts.
5-36
Operation on the Machine > Scanning using TWAIN
Scanning using TWAIN
This section explains how to scan an original using TWAIN. The machine's TWAIN/WIA can be used for two types of
scanning: scanning a document placed in the machine, and scanning a document that has been stored in a custom box.
The procedure for scanning using the TWAIN driver is explained as an example. The WIA driver is used in the same
way.
Scanning a document placed in the machine
1
Display the screen.
1 Activate the TWAIN compatible application software.
2 Select the machine using the application and display the TWAIN dialog box.
NOTE
For selecting the machine, see the Operation Guide or Help for each application software.
2
Configure the scan settings.
Select scanning settings in the TWAIN dialog box that opens.
5-37
Operation on the Machine > Scanning using TWAIN
The settings that appear in the TWAIN dialog box are as follows.
Item
Basic
Imaging
Advanced
Original Size
This setting sets the size of the scan area. The available sizes
vary based on the scanner model and the size of the original.
Feed Method
This setting specifies the feed method of the original. Select the
feed method from the list.
Original
Orientation
This setting specifies the orientation of the original.
Sending Size
This setting specifies the image size. The available sizes vary
based on the scanner model and the scan area selected in the
preview panel.
Color Settings
This setting specifies the type of color for the image.
Resolution
This setting specifies the dpi (dots per inch), or sharpness, for the
image.
Image Quality
This setting specifies the overall image quality. Make sure your
selection matches the original that you are scanning.
Exposure Level
This setting specifies the sharpness and clarity of the image. If the
"Auto" check box is selected, then the slider bar and edit box are
unavailable, and the exposure level is automatically set to the
default setting.
Contrast
This setting specifies the contrast between light and dark areas of
the image. This feature cannot be used when [Black & White] is
selected in the [Color Settings].
Reverse Image
This setting scans images like a photo negative, reversing the
black and white areas of the image.
Prevent Bleedthrough
This setting prevents the image on one side of the paper from
showing through to the other side when scanned.
Scan Profiles
3
Detail
This is used to check current settings and store frequently used
settings. When the [Configuration] button is clicked, a setting
screen opens with buttons for [Add], [Edit], and [Delete].
Add
The current settings can be saved as a Scan Profile.
Edit
The name and comments of the selected Scan Profile can be
changed.
Delete
Delete saved Scan Profiles.
Place the originals.
Loading Originals (page 5-2)
4
Scan the originals.
Click the [Scan] button. The document data is scanned.
5-38
Operation on the Machine > Scanning using TWAIN
Scanning a document stored in a custom box
NOTE
To scan a document stored in a custom box, select a model name with (Box) from "Model" in
the TWAIN driver settings screen.
1
Display the TWAIN dialog box.
1 Activate the TWAIN compatible application software.
2 Select the machine using the application and display the TWAIN dialog box.
NOTE
For selecting the machine, see the Operation Guide or Help for each application software.
2
Display list of documents.
1 Select the Custom Box containing the document file to be scanned from [Box List].
If a password has been set for the box, the password entry screen appears. Enter the password and
click the [OK] button. When you select a box, the document files in the Custom Box appear in
[Document List].
2 Set how to display the document data. Click the [Setting] button to select each item.
Item
Detail
View
Change the display in the Document List field to List or Thumbnails.
Delete
After scanning the document data, delete the data from the Custom Box.
Invert
Invert the document data color to start scanning.
3 Click [OK] button.
5-39
Operation on the Machine > Scanning using TWAIN
3
Scan the originals.
1 Select the document data to be scanned from [Document List].
Enter the document data name in the Search (Name) to find the data having the same document data
name or the document data name with the same beginning.
Click the [Detail] button to display the selected document data. When the document data includes
multiple pages, select the checkbox beside the pages you want to scan. The selected pages will be
scanned.
NOTE
In this case, the scanned page or the selected document data will not be deleted from the
Custom Box.
2 Click the [Acquire] button.
The document data is scanned.
5-40
Operation on the Machine > Scanning with FMU Connection
Scanning with FMU Connection
"FMU Connection" is installed on the machine as a standard application.
FMU Connection can be used to scan an original according to the settings configured with "File Management Utility" on
the provided DVD, and save the image data and scanning information on a specified server or in a specified folder.
Unlike regular transmission functions, this application lets you use metadata such as the scan date and time and the
data format.
NOTE
The first time you use FMU Connection, you must enable it in System Menu. For details, refer to Application on page
8-60.
To use FMU Connection, you must install File Management Utility on your computer and configure settings for the
multifunction machine to be used, scanning conditions, and the file save location. To install File Management Utility,
refer to Installing Software on page 2-13.
For information on using File Management Utility, see File Management Utility User Guide on the DVD.
Using FMU Connection to scan an original
1
Make sure that File Management Utility is running on the
computer (or server) on which File Management Utility is
installed.
2
Place the original.
3
Press [FMU Connection].
4
Follow the on-screen instructions to enter the necessary
information and press [Next].
5
When the scan settings screen appears, press each item and
configure the necessary settings.
FMU Connection starts.
The features that can be set depend on File Management Utility.
6
Press the [Start] key.
Sending starts.
5-41
Operation on the Machine > What is Document Box?
What is Document Box?
Document Box contains four types of component boxes which provide the following functions.
The following types of document boxes are available.
Custom Box (page 5-52)
Custom Box is a component box which you can create within the Document Box and store data for later retrieval. You
can create or delete a Custom Box, and manipulate data in various ways as described below:
Creating a New Custom Box (Add/Edit Box) (page 5-52)
Storing Documents (Store File) (page 5-55)
Printing Documents (Print) (page 5-56)
Sending Documents (Send) (page 5-57)
Editing Documents (page 5-59)
Deleting Documents (page 5-63)
Job Box
Job Box is a generic name for the "Private Print/Stored Job Box", "Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Box", "Repeat Copy Box",
and "Form for Form Overlay Box". These Job Boxes cannot be created or deleted by a user.
NOTE
You can set up the machine so that temporary documents in job boxes are automatically deleted. For details, refer to
Deletion of Job Retention on page 8-34.
Private Print/Stored Job Box (page 4-14)
In Private Printing, you can specify that a job is not to be printed until you operate the machine. When sending the job
from the application software, specify a 4-digit access code in the printer driver. The job is released for printing by
entering the access code on the operation panel, ensuring confidentiality of the print job. The data will be deleted upon
completion of the print job or after the main power switch is turned off.
In Stored Job, the print data sent from the application is saved to the machine. You can set up an access code as
necessary. If you set up an access code, enter the access code when printing. Print data will be stored in the hard disk
after printing. This will allow printing of the same print data repeatedly.
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Box (page 4-16)
Quick Copy feature facilitates additional prints of a document already printed. Activating Quick Copy and printing a
document using the printer driver allow the print data to be stored in the Quick Copy Job Box. When additional copies
are required, you can reprint the required number of copies from the operation panel. By default, up to 32 documents
can be stored. When power is turned off, all stored jobs will be deleted.
NOTE
When you attempt to store documents in excess of the above maximum, the oldest document data will be overwritten
by the latest document data.
The Proof and Hold feature produces only a single proof print of multiple-print job and holds printing of the remaining
copies. Printing a multiple-print job in Proof and Hold using the printer driver allows only a single copy to be printed while
maintaining the document data in the Job Box. To continue to print the remaining copies, use the operation panel. You
can change the number of copies to print.
5-42
Operation on the Machine > What is Document Box?
Repeat Copy Box (page 5-65)
Repeat Copy feature stores the copied original document data in the Job Box and allows you to print additional copies
later. By default, up to 32 documents can be stored. When power is turned off, all stored jobs will be deleted.
NOTE
Repeat Copy function is not available when the optional Data Security Kit is installed.
Form for Form Overlay Box (page 5-64)
Image Overlay feature copies the original document overlaid with a form or image. This Job Box is used to store the
forms or images for overlaying.
Removable Memory Box (page 5-67)
A USB memory stick can be connected to the USB port (A1) on the machine to print a saved PDF file. You can print PDF
data directly from the USB memory without a PC. Image files scanned using this machine can also be saved to USB
memory in the PDF, TIFF, JPEG, XPS or high compression PDF format (Scan to USB).
Fax Box
Fax Box stores the fax data received. For details, refer to the FAX Operation Guide.
Basic Operation for Document Box
This section explains basic operations for document boxes, using examples where tasks are carried out with custom
boxes.
NOTE
In the following explanation, it is assumed that user login administration is enabled. For details on User Logon
privileges, refer to Editing Custom Box on page 5-54.
Box List
Listing the boxes by name
in alphabetical order.
Listing the boxes by number in
ascending/descending order.
Listing the boxes by owner in
alphabetical order.
A box can be searched for
by Box Name.
No.
0001
Name
Owner
SALES
Used
Anonymous
----
Search(Name)
Search(No.)
1/1
Saves the document in the
selected box.
Store File
Custom Box
Detail
Open
Add/Edit Box
A box can be searched for
by Box No.
Registers new boxes and
checks, modifies or deletes box
information.
Opens the selected box.
Program
Displays the details for
the selected box.
5-43
Operation on the Machine > What is Document Box?
Document List
The document list is a list of the documents stored in the custom box. Documents can be listed either by name or as
thumbnails. The list can be used as shown below.
List
Listing the documents by
name in alphabetical order.
Selecting more than
one document at a
time.
Selecting documents
by checking
checkboxes.
Listing the documents by time of update
in ascending/descending order.
Switches between list display and
thumbnail display.
Box:
File Name
Date and Time
Listing the documents by size in
ascending/descending order.
Size
0001
2008101010574501
02/02/2013 09:40
21 MB
0002
2008101010574511
02/02/2013 09:50
21 MB
0003
2008101010574521
02/02/2013 10:00
21 MB
Search(Name)
1/1
Page Selection
Detail
Preview
Print
Send
Join
Move/Copy
Delete
Store File
Close
Select a document in the
Document List and press [Page
Selection] to display the selected
document.
Select a document in the
Document List and press [Detail] to
display the details for the selected
document.
Previews the selected document.
Thumbnail
Box:
Selecting more than
one document at a
time.
SALES
Search(Name)
200810101057....
200810101057....
Prints, sends, joins, moves, copies
or deletes the selected documents.
200810101057....
Highlighting a
document to display
its details with [Detail].
1/1
Detail
Detail
Preview
Print
Send
㪡㫆㫀㫅
Move/Copy
Delete
Store File
Saves the document in the open box.
Close
Selecting documents
by checking
checkboxes.
NOTE
You can select multiple documents by pressing the respective document checkboxes. However, note that you cannot
select multiple documents when you are sending documents.
5-44
Operation on the Machine > What is Document Box?
Viewing/Editing Box Details
You can check and modify box information.
Use the procedure below.
1
Press [Add/Edit Box] in the box list screen.
2
Highlight the box whose box details you wish to check or edit
and press [Detail/Edit].
Document Box/Removable Memory - Add/Edit Box
No.
Name
0001
ABC
1
Used
Owner
Anonymous
----
Search(Name)
Search(No.)
㪘㪻㪻
1/1
2
㪛㪼㫋㪸㫀㫃㪆㪜㪻㫀㫋
㪛㪼㫃㪼㫋㪼
Close
NOTE
If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.
3
Check the box details.
Box:
123456
Box No.:
Change
0001
Box Name:
Change
SALES
Box Password:
Usage Restriction:
Change
200 MB
Change
********
Auto File Deletion:
Change
30 day(s)
Free Space:
30 GB
Overwrite Setting:
Change
Permit
Delete after Printed:
Change
Off
Cancel
Save
To edit details, press [Change] of the detail you wish to edit. Edit the detail as desired and
press [OK].
4
If you have changed the details, press [Save] and then press
[Yes] in the confirmation screen.
If you do not change the details, press [No].
5
Press [Close].
The display returns to the default Document Box screen.
5-45
Operation on the Machine > What is Document Box?
Previewing Documents/Checking Document Details
You can use this function to preview the documents stored in a document box or display the document details for
checking.
1
Select (highlight) a document to preview and then press
[Preview] or [Detail].
2
Preview the document or check the document details.
The operations available in the preview screen are shown below.
Zoom out.
When you have zoomed in,
you can use these keys to
move the displayed area.
Preview:
Zoom in.
2007040410574501
No.
Size
: A4
Resol.
: 300x300dpi
Color
: Full Color
In multiple-page
documents, you can
change pages by
entering the desired
page number.
1/6
Select Pages to Process
Close
In multiple-page
documents, you can
use these buttons to
change pages.
Press to select any page of the open document and
print, send or copy to removable memory.
Selecting a page (page 5-51)
NOTE
The preview display can be controlled by moving your finger(s) on the touch panel.
Using the Preview Screen (page 3-10)
3
Confirm the document(s) and press [Close].
5-46
Operation on the Machine > What is Document Box?
Selecting a page
When printing, sending, or copying a document within a Custom Box, you can specify any pages at will.
Press [Page Selection] in the document list screen of the Custom Box, or [Select Pages to Process] in the Preview
screen, to display the page selection screen.
Select the pages you want to work with, and press [Print], [Send], or [Copy to Memory].
Selecting more than one
document at a time.
Displaying the number of
pages selected.
File:
Highlighting the
selected document.
1
Selected Pages:
pages
Select Range
Enter Pages
Selecting documents by
checking checkboxes.
Selected pages can be
printed, sent, or copied
to custom box.
1/1
Print
Send
Copy to
Memory
Cancel
Printing Documents (Print) (page 5-56)
Sending Documents (Send) (page 5-57)
Moving a Document/Copying a Document (Move/Copy) (page 5-59)
5-47
You can specify a
range of selection
by pressing
[Select Range].
You can specify the
pages you want to
select by pressing
[Enter Pages].
Operation on the Machine > Using a Custom Box
Using a Custom Box
Creating a New Custom Box (Add/Edit Box)
NOTE
If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
d-Copia 3500MF plus
3500
3500
d-Copia 4500MF plus
4500
4500
d-Copia 5500MF plus
5500
5500
If user login administration is enabled, log in with administrator privileges to perform the following operations. They
cannot be performed with user privileges.
• Creating a box
• Deleting a box of which owner is another user.
1
Press [Custom Box] on the Home screen.
Custom Box
2
Press [Add/Edit Box].
No.
0001
Name
Owner
SALES
Used
Anonymous
----
Search(Name)
Search(No.)
1/1
Store File
Custom Box
Detail
Add/Edit Box
Open
Program
3
Select [Add].
4
Press [Change] for each item.
5-48
Operation on the Machine > Using a Custom Box
5
Enter the information and then press [OK].
The table below lists the items to be set.
Item
*
6
Description
Box No.
Enter the box number by pressing [+], [-] or number keys. The box number can be
from 0001 to 1000. A Custom Box should have a unique number. If you enter 0000,
the smallest number available will be automatically assigned.
Owner*
Set the owner of the box. Select the owner from the user list that appears.
Box Name
Enter a box name consisting of up to 32 characters. Refer to Entering Characters
on page 11-12 for details on entering characters.
Usage
Restriction
To preserve the hard disk capacity, the storage capacity for a box can be restricted.
To enable a capacity restriction enter a value for the storage capacity of the Custom
Box in megabytes by pressing [-], [+] or number keys. You can enter a limit between
1 and 30,000 (MB).
Box Password
User access to the box can be restricted by specifying a password to protect the
box. Entering a password is not mandatory. Enter the same password of up to 16
characters in both [Password] and [Confirm Password].
Permission*
Select whether to share the box.
Auto File
Deletion
Automatically deletes stored documents after a set period of time. Press [On] to
enable automatic deletion and then use [+] and [-] or the numeric keys to enter the
number of days for which documents are stored. You can enter any number
between 1 and 31 (day(s)). To disable automatic file deletion, press [Off].
Overwrite
Setting
Specifies whether or not old stored documents are overwritten when new
documents are stored. To overwrite old documents, press [Permit]. To retain old
documents, press [Prohibit].
Free Space
Displays the free space on the box.
Delete after
Printed
Automatically delete a document from the box once printing is complete. To delete
the document, press [On]. To retain the document, press [Off].
Displayed when the user login administration is enabled.
Check the details you have entered and then press [Save].
The Custom Box is created.
5-49
Operation on the Machine > Using a Custom Box
Editing Custom Box
1
Referring to Creating a New Custom Box (Add/Edit Box) on
page 5-52, display the screen for editing the custom box.
2
Select the box you want edit, and press [Detail/Edit].
NOTE
When you have logged in as a user, you can only delete the box whose owner is set to that
user.
When you have logged in as administrator, you can edit all boxes.
3
Edit the custom box.
When user login administration is enabled, the settings that can be changed varies depending
on the privileges of the logged in user.
Privileges
Administrator
Settings that can be changed
Box No.
Owner
Box Name
Usage Restriction
Box Password
Permission
Auto File Deletion
Overwrite Setting
Delete after Printed
User
Box Name
Box Password
Permission
Auto File Deletion
Overwrite Setting
Delete after Printed
For details, refer to Creating a New Custom Box (Add/Edit Box) on page 5-52.
5-50
Operation on the Machine > Using a Custom Box
Storing Documents (Store File)
The procedure for storing documents in a custom box is explained below.
1
Press [Custom Box] on the Home screen.
Custom Box
2
Place the originals.
3
Select the box where the document will be stored and then
press [Store File].
No.
1
0001
Name
Owner
SALES
Used
Anonymous
----
Search(Name)
Search(No.)
1/1
2
Custom Box
4
Store File
Detail
Add/Edit Box
Open
Program
Select the type of originals, scanning density, etc., as
necessary.
For the features that can be selected, refer to Custom Box (Store File, Printing, Send) (page 6-6).
5
Press the [Start] key.
The original is scanned and the data is stored in the specified Custom Box.
NOTE
Enter up to 32 characters as the file name.
5-51
Operation on the Machine > Using a Custom Box
Printing Documents (Print)
The procedure for printing documents in a custom box is explained below.
1
Display the screen.
1 Press [Custom Box] on the Home screen.
Custom Box
2 Select the box containing the document you want to print.
3 Press [Open].
NOTE
If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.
2
Print the document.
1 Select the document you wish to print by checking the checkbox.
Box:
File Name
1
Date and Time
Size
0001
2008101010574501
02/02/2013 09:40
21 MB
0002
2008101010574511
02/02/2013 09:50
21 MB
0003
2008101010574521
02/02/2013 10:00
21 MB
Search(Name)
1/1
Page Selection
Detail
Preview
2
Print
Send
Join
Move/Copy
Delete
Store File
Close
The document is marked with a checkmark.
NOTE
To deselect, press the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.
2 Press [Print].
5-52
Operation on the Machine > Using a Custom Box
3 Set the paper selection, duplex printing, etc., as desired.
For the features that can be selected, refer to Custom Box (Store File, Printing, Send) (page 6-6).
If a document stored from a computer is selected, the print settings selection screen appears.
•
To use the settings used at the time of printing (when the document was saved), press
[Print As Is]. Press [Start Print] to start printing.
•
To change the print settings, press [Print after Change Settings] and change the print
settings.
After a document saved in the machine is selected, the [Use File Settings] key may
appear in the setting screen for the feature to be used.
•
To use the settings saved with the document, press [Use File Settings].
•
If you need to change the print settings, press [Print after Change Settings].
4 Press the [Start] key. Printing of the selected document begins.
Sending Documents (Send)
The procedure for sending documents in a custom box is explained below.
1
Display the screen.
1 Press [Custom Box] on the Home screen.
Custom Box
2 Select the box containing the document you want to send.
3 Press [Open].
NOTE
If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.
2
Send the document.
1 Select the document you wish to send by checking the checkbox.
Box:
1
File Name
Date and Time
Size
0001
2008101010574501
02/02/2013 09:40
21 MB
0002
2008101010574511
02/02/2013 09:50
21 MB
0003
2008101010574521
02/02/2013 10:00
21 MB
Search(Name)
1/1
Page Selection
Detail
Preview
Print
2
Send
Join
Move/Copy
Delete
Store File
Close
The document is marked with a checkmark.
NOTE
You cannot select and send multiple documents.
To deselect, press the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.
5-53
Operation on the Machine > Using a Custom Box
2 Press [Send].
The screen for sending appears.
NOTE
Depending on the settings, the address book screen may appear.
3 Set the destination.
NOTE
For more information on selecting destinations, refer to Specifying Destination on page 5-26.
4 Set the sending size, original image, etc., as desired.
For the features that can be set, refer to Custom Box (Store File, Printing, Send) (page 6-6).
5 Press the [Start] key.
Sending of the selected document begins.
5-54
Operation on the Machine > Using a Custom Box
Editing Documents
This function allows you to move or copy documents stored in custom boxes into other boxes or to join multiple
documents together. You can also copy documents to USB memory connected to this machine.
Moving a Document/Copying a Document (Move/Copy)
The procedure for moving or copying documents is explained below.
1
Display the screen.
1 Press [Custom Box] on the Home screen.
Custom Box
2 Select the box containing the document you want to move or copy.
3 Press [Open].
NOTE
If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.
2
Move or copy documents.
1 Select the document in the list that you want to move or copy by pressing the checkbox.
Box:
1
File Name
Date and Time
Size
0001
2008101010574501
02/02/2013 09:40
21 MB
0002
2008101010574511
02/02/2013 09:50
21 MB
0003
2008101010574521
02/02/2013 10:00
21 MB
Search(Name)
1/1
Page Selection
Detail
2
Print
Send
Join
Preview
Move/Copy
Delete
Store File
Close
The document is marked with a checkmark.
NOTE
To deselect, press the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.
2 Press [Move/Copy].
5-55
Operation on the Machine > Using a Custom Box
3 Select the function you want to execute.
To move the document, press [Move to Custom Box].
To copy the document, press [Copy to Custom Box] or [Copy to Memory].
4 Press [Next].
Move/Copy
Select the required operation and press [Next].
1
Copy to
Custom Box
Move to
Custom Box
Copy to
Memory
2
Cancel
Back
Next
5 Select the destination of copy or move.
Move to Custom Box
Select the destination box and press [Move].
Document
No.
Name
Owner
Used
0001
Document1
Administrator
2 MB
0002
Document2
Administrator
3 MB
0003
Document3
Administrator
3 MB
0004
Document4
Administrator
5 MB
Cancel
Back
Up
Open
Move
To copy or move the document to a custom box, select the destination box.
To copy the document to USB memory, select the destination folder and press [Next]. If necessary,
set the saved file size and the file format, etc.
6 Press [Move] or [Copy] and then press [Yes] in the confirmation screen.
The selected document is moved or copied.
NOTE
If the box to which the document is to be moved or copied is protected by a password, enter
the correct password.
5-56
Operation on the Machine > Using a Custom Box
Joining Documents (Join)
You can join documents within a custom box into one file.
NOTE
You can only join a document to other documents in the same custom box. If necessary, move the documents to be
joined beforehand.
1
Display the screen.
1 Press [Custom Box] on the Home screen.
Custom Box
2 Select the box containing the documents you want to join and press [Open].
NOTE
If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.
2
Join the document.
1 Select the documents in the list that you wish to join by pressing the checkbox.
Box:
1
File Name
Date and Time
Size
0001
2008101010574501
02/02/2013 09:40
21 MB
0002
2008101010574511
02/02/2013 09:50
21 MB
0003
2008101010574521
02/02/2013 10:00
21 MB
Search(Name)
1/1
Page Selection
Detail
2
Print
Send
Preview
Join
Move/Copy
Delete
Store File
Close
The document is marked with a checkmark.
You can join up to 10 documents.
NOTE
To deselect, press the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.
2 Press [Join].
5-57
Operation on the Machine > Using a Custom Box
3 Arrange the documents into the order in which they are to be joined.
Join
Confirm the order of documents to combine.
1
File Name
2008101010574501
Date and Time
02/02/2013 09:40
Size
21 MB
2008101010574511
02/02/2013 09:50
21 MB
2008101010574521
02/02/2013 10:10
21 MB
2
1/1
Up
Down
Cancel
Next
Highlight the document you want to rearrange and press [Up] or [Down] to move it to the correct place
in the sequence.
4 Press [Next].
5 Press [File Name], enter the file name for the joined document and press [OK].
NOTE
Enter up to 64 characters as the file name.
6 Press [Join] and then press [Yes] in the confirmation screen.
The documents are joined.
NOTE
After joining, the original documents are left unchanged. Delete the documents if they are no
longer needed.
5-58
Operation on the Machine > Using a Custom Box
Deleting Documents
The procedure for deleting documents in a custom box is explained below.
1
Display the screen.
1 Press [Custom Box] on the Home screen.
Custom Box
2 Select the box containing the document you want to delete and press [Open].
NOTE
If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.
2
Delete the document.
1 Select the document you wish to delete by checking the checkbox.
Box:
1
File Name
Date and Time
Size
0001
2008101010574501
02/02/2013 09:40
21 MB
0002
2008101010574511
02/02/2013 09:50
21 MB
0003
2008101010574521
02/02/2013 10:00
21 MB
Search(Name)
1/1
Page Selection
Detail
Print
Send
Join
Move/Copy
2
Preview
Delete
Store File
Close
The document is marked with a checkmark.
NOTE
[Delete] is disabled until a document is selected.
To deselect, press the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.
2 Press [Delete].
The delete confirmation screen appears.
3 Press [Yes].
The document is deleted.
5-59
Operation on the Machine > Job Box
Job Box
This section explains the Repeat Copy Box and the Form for Form Overlay Box. For Private Print/Stored Job Box and
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Box, refer to Private Print/Stored Job on page 4-14 and Quick Copy/Proof and Hold on page
4-16.
Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs
Repeat Copy feature stores the copied original document data in the Job Box and allows you to print additional copies
later. By default, up to 32 documents can be stored. When power is turned off, all stored jobs will be deleted. This
section explains how to print documents saved by the Repeat Copy function.
Repeat Copy (page 6-55)
1
Display the screen.
1 Press [Job Box] on the Home screen.
Custom Box
2 Select [Repeat Copy] box, and press [Open].
Name
1
Files
Private Print/Stored Job
21
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold
21
Repeat Copy
21
Form for Form Overlay
21
2
2
1/1
Open
Print the document.
1
Repeat Copy
Name
2008101000101002
Date and Time
Size
21 MB
02/02/2013 10:10
1/1
Detail
2
Print
Delete
Close
1 Select the document to print and press [Print].
If the document is protected by a password, enter the password using the numeric keys.
2 Specify the number of copies to print as desired.
3 Press [Start Print].
Printing begins.
The Repeat Copy box job will be deleted when the main power switch is turned off.
5-60
Operation on the Machine > Job Box
Form for Form Overlay
Image Overlay feature copies the original document overlaid with a form or image. This Job Box is used to store the
forms or images for overlaying.
Storing a Form
You can store forms to be used for the form overlay in the job box. One page can be registered in one form.
1
Place the original in the document processor or on the platen.
2
Display the screen.
1 Press [Job Box] on the Home screen.
Custom Box
2 Select [Form for Form Overlay] and press [Open].
Name
1
Files
Private Print/Stored Job
21
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold
21
Repeat Copy
21
Form for Form Overlay
21
2
3
1/1
Open
Store the forms.
1 Press [Store File].
Form for Form Overlay
Name
Date and Time
Size
2008101009530900
02/02/2013 09:00
21 MB
2008101000530910
02/02/2013 09:10
30 MB
2008101000530920
02/02/2013 09:20
30 MB
1/1
Detail
Print
Delete
Store File
Close
2 If necessary, select the image quality of original, scanning density, etc. before the original is
scanned.
3 Press the [Start] key.
The original is scanned and stored in the [Form for Form Overlay] box.
5-61
Operation on the Machine > Job Box
Deleting a Form Stored
You can delete the form stored in the job box
1
Display the screen.
1 Press [Job Box] on the Home screen.
Custom Box
2 Select [Form for Form Overlay] and press [Open].
Name
Files
Private Print/Stored Job
21
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold
21
Repeat Copy
21
Form for Form Overlay
21
2
2
1
1/1
Open
Delete the forms.
1 Select the form to delete and press [Delete].
Form for Form Overlay
Name
Date and Time
Size
2008101009530900
02/02/2013 09:00
21 MB
2008101000530910
02/02/2013 09:10
30 MB
2008101000530920
02/02/2013 09:20
30 MB
1
1/1
Detail
Print
2
Delete
Store File
Close
The delete confirmation screen appears.
2 Press [Yes].
The form is deleted.
5-62
Operation on the Machine > Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory
Printing Documents Stored in Removable
USB Memory
Plugging USB memory directly into the machine enables you to quickly and easily print the files stored in the USB
memory without having to use a computer.
The following file types can be printed:
•
PDF file (Version 1.7 or older)
•
TIFF file (TIFF V6/TTN2 format)
•
JPEG file
•
XPS file
•
Encrypted PDF file
•
PDF files you wish to print should have an extension (.pdf).
•
Files to be printed should be saved no further down than the top 3 folder levels, including the root folder.
•
Use USB memory properly formatted by this machine.
•
Plug the USB memory directly into the USB Port (A1).
1
Plug the USB memory.
1 Plug the USB memory into the USB Port (A1).
2 When the machine reads the USB memory, "Removable Memory is recognized. Displaying
files. Are you sure?" may appear. Press [Yes].
Displays the removable memory screen.
IMPORTANT
Use USB memory properly formatted by this machine. If a USB memory formatted by
any other device is used, "The removable memory is not formatted." may appear. To
format the USB memory, refer to Device/Communication on page 7-17.
NOTE
If the message does not appear, press [Removable Memory].
2
Print the document.
1 Select the folder containing the file to be printed and press [Open].
The machine will display documents in the top 3 folder levels, including the root folder.
NOTE
1,000 documents can be displayed.
To return to a higher level folder, press [Up].
5-63
Operation on the Machine > Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory
2 Select the file to be printed and press [Print].
Removable Memory
Name
Size
1 MB
2 Document
02/02/2013 09:40
3 MB
3 Document
02/02/2013 09:50
4 MB
4 Document
02/02/2013 10:00
1 MB
Memory
Information
02/02/2013 10:05
2 MB
Remove
Memory
5 Document
Print
1
Date and Time
02/02/2013 09:30
1 Document
2
Delete
Detail
Open
Up
001/999
Store File
3 Change the number of copies, duplex printing, etc. as desired.
For the features that can be selected, refer to Removable Memory (Store File, Printing Documents)
(page 6-9).
After a document saved in the machine is selected, [Use File Settings] may appear in the setting
screen for the feature to be used.
•
To use the settings saved with the document, press [Use File Settings].
•
If you need to change the print settings, select the desired feature.
4 Press the [Start] key.
Printing of the selected file begins.
5-64
Operation on the Machine > Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB)
Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB)
This function allows you to store scanned image files in USB memory connected to the machine. You can store files in
PDF, TIFF, JPEG, XPS or high-compression PDF format.
NOTE
The maximum number of the storable files is 100.
1
Place the originals.
Refer to Loading Originals on page 5-2.
2
Plug the USB memory.
Plug the USB memory into the USB Port (A1).
When the machine reads the USB memory, "Removable Memory is recognized. Displaying
files. Are you sure?" may appear. Press [Yes] to display the removable memory screen.
IMPORTANT
Use USB memory properly formatted by this machine. If a USB memory formatted by
any other device is used, "The removable memory is not formatted." may appear. To
format the USB memory, refer to Device/Communication on page 7-17.
When [Format] is pressed, all data in the external media is erased.
NOTE
If the message does not appear, press [Removable Memory].
5-65
Operation on the Machine > Check the USB memory information
3
Store the document.
1 Select the folder where the file will be stored and press [Open].
The machine will display the top 3 folder levels, including the root folder.
2 Press [Store File].
Removable Memory
Name
Date and Time
Size
02/02/2013 09:30
1 MB
2 Document
02/02/2013 09:40
3 MB
3 Document
02/02/2013 09:50
4 MB
4 Document
02/02/2013 10:00
1 MB
Memory
Information
02/02/2013 10:05
2 MB
Remove
Memory
Up
1 Document
5 Document
Print
Delete
Detail
Open
001/999
Store File
3 Set the type of original, file format, etc., as desired.
For the features that can be set, refer to Removable Memory (Store File, Printing Documents) (page
6-9).
4 Press the [Start] key.
The original is scanned and the data is stored in the USB memory.
Check the USB memory information
You can check the USB memory information.
In the removable memory screen, press [Memory Information].
Memory Information
Capacity:
16 GB
Free Space:
2.5 GB
Used Area:
13.5 GB
Close
Once you confirm the information, press [Close].
5-66
Operation on the Machine > Removing USB Memory
Removing USB Memory
Follow the steps below to remove the USB memory.
IMPORTANT
Be sure to follow the proper procedure to avoid damaging the data or USB memory.
1
Press [Removable Memory].
2
Press [Remove Memory].
Removable Memory
Name
Date and Time
Size
02/02/2013 09:30
1 MB
2 Document
02/02/2013 09:40
3 MB
3 Document
02/02/2013 09:50
4 MB
4 Document
02/02/2013 10:00
1 MB
Memory
Information
2 MB
Remove
Memory
Up
1 Document
5 Document
02/02/2013 10:05
Delete
Print
Detail
Open
001/999
Store File
Press [OK], and remove the USB memory after "Removable Memory can be safely removed."
is displayed.
NOTE
USB memory can also be removed after checking the status of the device. Refer to
Removing the USB Memory on page 7-18.
5-67
Operation on the Machine > Manual Staple
Manual Staple
You can staple copied paper manually without any copying operation. It is useful when you have forgotten to set the
staple sort mode before starting copying, or when you want to staple originals.
NOTE
If there are no staples when manual stapling is performed, the stapling position lamps and stapling position key LEDs all
blink. Add staples. For details, refer to Replacing Staples on page 10-12.
Manual stapling cannot be executed when the machine is in operation.
Maximum number of sheets available for manual stapling
Paper weight
Paper size
- 90 g/m2
(- 24.0 lb. Bond)
91 - 105 g/m2
(24.3 - 28.0 lb. Bond)
A4, A4-R, B5, Letter, 16K
65 sheets
50 sheets
A3, B4, Folio
30 sheets
30 sheets
Use the keys on the control section of the Finisher (optional) for manual stapling.
Stapling position lamps
Stapling position key
Stapling key / lamp
1
Press the stapling position key on the stapling control section.
2
Set the staple position.
The shutter of the paper exit area is opened and this equipment enters into the manual staple
mode.
Press the stapling position key to select the stapling position
(Back
/ Front
/ 2 Points
).
Operation is not possible while the stapling position lamps are blinking. Operate after the
lamps light solidly.
5-68
Operation on the Machine > Manual Staple
3
Load the paper.
Straighten the edges of the paper well and place
the paper front side down in the shutter opening
of the output unit.
If the near side of the paper ( ) will be stapled,
place the paper against the front guide (A).
If the far side of the paper ( ) will be stapled,
place the paper against the back guide (B).
B
A
If the edge of the paper ( ) will be stapled at
two points, place the paper with the center aligned to the center point between the two side
guides (A and B).
CAUTION
Do not insert your hand inside the open shutter.
NOTE
4
•
Press the stapling position key before you place the paper. Once the paper is placed, the stapling
position key cannot be used.
•
The stapling lamp lights when the paper is properly placed. If it does not light, replace the paper.
Staple the paper.
Let go of the paper, and then press the stapling key.
Stapling starts. Stapling finishes and the output is delivered to tray A.
CAUTION
Be sure that your hands are away from the paper while stapling is in progress.
Finishing the manual staple mode
Press the stapling position key several times until the stapling position lamps turn off. The shutter of the paper exit area
closes. It means that manual stapling is finished.
If no operation is performed for approx. 10 seconds, the manual staple mode will be automatically finished.
NOTE
The time after which manual staple mode is automatically exited can be changed. For details, refer to Manual Staple
on page 8-24.
5-69
Operation on the Machine > Manual Staple
5-70
6
Using Various Functions
This chapter explains the following topics:
2-sided/Book Original ....................................
Sending Size .................................................
File Format ....................................................
File Separation ..............................................
Scan Resolution, Resolution .........................
E-mail Subject/Body ......................................
Send and Print ..............................................
Send and Store .............................................
FTP Encrypted TX .........................................
File Size Confirmation ...................................
Delete after Printed .......................................
Delete after Transmitted ................................
Storing Size ...................................................
Encrypted PDF Password .............................
JPEG/TIFF Print ............................................
XPS Fit to Page .............................................
Functions Available in the Home Screen ...........
Send to Me (E-mail) ......................................
Send to Me from Box (E-mail) .......................
Functions Available on the Machine .................... 6-2
Copy ................................................................ 6-2
Send ................................................................ 6-4
Custom Box (Store File, Printing, Send) ......... 6-6
Removable Memory (Store File, Printing
Documents) ..................................................... 6-9
Functions ............................................................. 6-11
Original Size ................................................... 6-11
Paper Selection ............................................. 6-12
Mixed Size Originals ..................................... 6-14
Original Orientation ....................................... 6-16
Fold ............................................................... 6-17
Collate/Offset ................................................ 6-18
Staple/Punch ................................................. 6-19
Paper Output ................................................. 6-22
Density .......................................................... 6-22
Original Image ............................................... 6-23
EcoPrint ........................................................ 6-24
Color Selection .............................................. 6-24
Sharpness ..................................................... 6-25
Background Density Adj. ............................... 6-25
Prevent Bleed-thru ........................................ 6-26
Zoom ............................................................. 6-27
Combine ........................................................ 6-31
Margin/Centering, Margin, Centering ............ 6-33
Border Erase ................................................. 6-34
Booklet .......................................................... 6-36
Duplex ........................................................... 6-39
Cover ............................................................ 6-42
Form Overlay ................................................ 6-43
Page # ........................................................... 6-44
Memo Page ................................................... 6-46
Image Repeat ............................................... 6-47
Text Stamp .................................................... 6-48
Bates Stamp .................................................. 6-50
Continuous Scan ........................................... 6-52
Auto Image Rotation ..................................... 6-53
Negative Image ............................................. 6-53
Mirror Image .................................................. 6-53
Job Finish Notice .......................................... 6-54
File Name Entry ............................................ 6-54
Priority Override ............................................ 6-55
Repeat Copy ................................................. 6-55
DP Read Action ............................................ 6-56
Skip Blank Page ............................................ 6-56
6-1
6-57
6-58
6-59
6-62
6-62
6-62
6-63
6-63
6-64
6-64
6-64
6-64
6-65
6-65
6-66
6-66
6-67
6-67
6-67
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Functions Available on the Machine
Copy
To configure the settings for functions, select the tab and press the function key.
Preview
Original
Size
Paper
Selection
Mixed Size
Originals
Original
Orientation
Fold
Collate/
Offset
Staple
/Punch
Paper Output
Function key
Original
Zoom
Send
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Preview
Tab
Quick Setup
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Image Quality
Layout/Edit
Advanced
Setup
Program
For details on each function, see the table below.
Tab
Function key
Reference
page
Original Scan
Specify the original size to be scanned.
page 6-11
Paper Selection
Select the cassette or multi-purpose tray that contains
the required paper size.
page 6-12
Mixed Size Originals
Scans all sheets in the document processor, even if
they are of different sizes.
page 6-14
Original Orientation
Select the orientation of the original document top
edge to scan correct direction.
page 6-16
Fold
Folds the finished documents.
page 6-17
Collate/Offset
Offsets the output by page or set.
page 6-18
Staple/Punch
Staples or punches printed documents.
page 6-19
Paper Output
Set paper output to document finisher or job separator tray.
page 6-22
Density
Adjust density using 7 or 13 levels.
page 6-22
Original Image
Select original image type for best results.
page 6-23
EcoPrint
EcoPrint saves toner when printing.
page 6-24
Sharpness
Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines.
page 6-25
Background Density
Adj.
Removes dark background from originals, such as
newspapers.
page 6-25
Prevent Bleed-thru
Hides background colors and image bleed-through
when scanning thin original.
page 6-26
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Configure the settings
for originals, paper,
and finishing such as
collate and staple.
Description
Image Quality
Configure the settings
for density, quality of
copies, and color
balance.
6-2
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Tab
Function key
Description
Reference
page
Zoom
Adjusts the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image.
page 6-27
Combine
Combines 2 or 4 original sheets into 1 printed page.
page 6-31
Margin/Centering
Margin:
page 6-33
Add margins (white space). In addition,
you can set the margin width and the back
page margin.
Centering: Centers the original image on the paper
when copying onto paper different from the
original size.
Layout/Edit
Configure the settings
for duplex printing and
stamp.
Advanced
Setup
Configure the settings
for continuous
scanning, mirror
image copies, and
Skip Blank Page
function.
Border Erase
Erases the black border that forms around the image.
page 6-34
Booklet
Prints documents to 2-sided open book sheets.
page 6-36
Duplex
Produces two-sided copies.
You can also create single-sided copies from two-sided
originals or originals with facing pages such as books.
page 6-39
Cover
Adds a cover to the finished documents.
page 6-42
Form
Prints the original document overlaid with a form or
image.
page 6-43
Page #
Adds page numbers to the finished documents.
page 6-44
Memo Page
Delivers copies with a space for adding notes.
page 6-46
Image Repeat
Tiles the original image on one sheet of paper.
page 6-47
Text Stamp
You can add a text stamp on the documents.
page 6-48
Bates Stamp
You can add a bates stamp on the documents.
page 6-50
Continuous Scan
Scans a large number of originals in separate batches
and then produce as one job.
page 6-52
Auto Image Rotation
Automatically rotates the image 90 degrees when the
sizes of the original and the loaded paper matches but
the orientations are different.
page 6-53
Negative Image
Inverts black and white portions of the image for
printing.
page 6-53
Mirror Image
Copies the mirrored image of the original.
page 6-53
Job Finish Notice
Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete.
page 6-54
File Name Entry
Adds a file name.
page 6-54
Priority Override
Suspends the current job and gives a new job top
priority.
page 6-55
Repeat Copy
Enables additional copies in the desired quantity as
necessary after a copy job is completed.
page 6-55
DP Read Action
When the document processor is used, select the
scanning operation for the document processor.
page 6-56
Skip Blank Page
When there are blank pages in a scanned document,
this function skips the blank pages and prints only
pages that are not blank.
page 6-56
6-3
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Send
To configure the settings for functions, select the tab and press the function key.
Destination
Sending Image
Original
Size
Mixed Size
Originals
2-sided/Book
Original
Original
Orientation
Sending Size
File Format
File
Separation
Long
Original
Function key
Original
Zoom
Send
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Preview
Tab
Destination
Quick Setup
Org./Sending
Data Format
Color/
Image Quality
Advanced
Setup
Program
For details on each function, see the table below.
Tab
Org./Sending
Data Format
Configure the settings
for original type and
file format.
Color/
Image Quality
Configure the settings
for density, quality of
copies, and color
balance.
Function key
Description
Reference
page
Original Size
Specify the original size to be scanned.
page 6-11
Mixed Size Originals
Scans all sheets in the document processor, even if
they are of different sizes.
page 6-14
2-sided/Book
Original
Select the type and orientation of the binding based on
the original.
page 6-57
Original Orientation
Select the orientation of the original document top
edge to scan correct direction.
page 6-16
Sending Size
Select size of image to be sent.
page 6-58
File Format
Specify the image file format. Image quality level can
also be adjusted.
page 6-59
File Separation
Creates several files by dividing scanned original data
page by page before sending the files.
page 6-62
Long Original
Reads long-sized original documents using a
document processor.
Refer to the
FAX Operation
Guide.
Density
Adjust density using 7 or 13 levels.
page 6-22
Original Image
Select original image type for best results.
page 6-23
Scan Resolution
Select fineness of scanning resolution.
page 6-62
FAX TX Resolution
Select fineness of images when sending FAX.
Refer to the
FAX Operation
Guide.
Color Selection
Select the color mode setting.
page 6-24
Sharpness
Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines.
page 6-25
Background Density
Adj.
Removes dark background from originals, such as
newspapers.
page 6-25
Prevent Bleed-thru
Hides background colors and image bleed-through
when scanning thin original.
page 6-26
6-4
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Tab
Advanced
Setup
Configure the settings
for transmission copy,
encrypted
transmission, and file
size confirmation.
Function key
Description
Reference
page
Zoom
Adjusts the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image.
page 6-27
Centering
Centering: Centers the original image on the paper
when copying onto paper different from the
original size.
page 6-33
Border Erase
Erases the black border that forms around the image.
page 6-34
FAX Delayed
Transmission
Set a send time.
Refer to the
FAX Operation
Guide.
Continuous Scan
Scans a large number of originals in separate batches
and then produce as one job.
page 6-52
Job Finish Notice
Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete.
page 6-54
File Name Entry
Adds a file name.
page 6-54
E-mail Subject/Body
Adds subject and body when sending a document.
page 6-62
i-FAX Subject/Body
Adds subject and body when sending a document by
i-FAX.
Refer to the
FAX Operation
Guide.
FAX Direct
Transmission
Sends FAX directly without reading original data into
memory.
Refer to the
FAX Operation
Guide.
FAX Polling RX
Automatically makes a machine with a stored
document send the document to your machine.
Refer to the
FAX Operation
Guide.
Send and Print
Allows you to print a copy of the document being sent.
page 6-63
Send and Store
Allows you to store a copy of the document being sent
in a Custom Box.
page 6-63
FTP Encrypted TX
Encrypts images when sending via FTP.
page 6-64
Text Stamp
You can add a text stamp on the documents.
page 6-48
Bates Stamp
You can add a bates stamp on the documents.
page 6-50
File Size
Confirmation
Checks the file size before sending/storing the original.
page 6-64
FAX TX Report
Prints a report when transmission of a document is
successful, or when an error occurs and transmission
fails.
Refer to the
FAX Operation
Guide.
6-5
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Custom Box (Store File, Printing, Send)
To configure the settings for functions, select the tab and press the function key.
Free Space
200.0MB
Storing Image
Function key
Original
Zoom
Store
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Original
Size
Mixed Size
Originals
2-sided/Book
Original
Original
Orientation
Storing Size
Prevent
Bleed-thru
Density
Original
Image
Scan
Resolution
Color
Selection
Sharpness
Background
Density Adj.
Preview
Tab
Quick Setup
1/2
Functions
Program
Back to List
For details on each function, see the table below.
Store File
Tab
Functions
Configure the color
settings when storing
the document in the
Custom Box.
Function key
Description
Reference
page
Original Size
Specify the original size to be scanned.
page 6-11
Mixed Size Originals
Scans all sheets in the document processor, even if
they are of different sizes.
page 6-14
2-sided/Book
Original
Select the type and orientation of the binding based on
the original.
page 6-57
Original Orientation
Select the orientation of the original document top
edge to scan correct direction.
page 6-16
Storing Size
Select size of image to be stored.
page 6-65
Prevent Bleed-thru
Hides background colors and image bleed-through
when scanning thin original.
page 6-26
Density
Adjust density using 7 or 13 levels.
page 6-22
Original Image
Select original image type for best results.
page 6-23
Scan Resolution
Select fineness of scanning resolution.
page 6-62
Color Selection
Select the color mode setting.
page 6-24
Sharpness
Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines.
page 6-25
Background Density
Adj.
Removes dark background from originals, such as
newspapers.
page 6-25
Zoom
Adjusts the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image.
page 6-27
Centering
Centering: Centers the original image on the paper
when copying onto paper different from the
original size.
page 6-33
Border Erase
Erases the black border that forms around the image.
page 6-34
Continuous Scan
Scans a large number of originals in separate batches
and then produce as one job.
page 6-52
Job Finish Notice
Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete.
page 6-54
File Name Entry
Adds a file name.
page 6-54
6-6
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Print
Tab
Function key
Description
Reference
page
Paper Selection
Select the cassette or multi-purpose tray that contains
the required paper size.
page 6-12
Collate/Offset
Offsets the output by page or set.
page 6-18
Staple/Punch
Staples or punches printed documents.
page 6-19
Paper Output
Set paper output to document finisher or job separator tray.
page 6-22
Combine
Combines 2 or 4 original sheets into 1 printed page.
page 6-31
Margin/Centering
Margin:
page 6-33
Add margins (white space). In addition,
you can set the margin width and the back
page margin.
Centering: Centers the original image on the paper
when copying onto paper different from the
original size.
Functions
Configure the settings
for paper selection
and duplex printing
when printing from the
Custom Box.
Image Quality
Configure the settings
for density, quality of
copies, and color
balance.
Booklet
Prints documents to 2-sided open book sheets.
page 6-36
Duplex
Produces two-sided copies.
You can also create single-sided copies from two-sided
originals or originals with facing pages such as books.
page 6-41
Cover
Adds a cover to the finished documents.
page 6-42
Form Overlay
Copies the original document overlaid with a form or image.
page 6-43
Page #
Adds page numbers to the finished documents.
page 6-44
Job Finish Notice
Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete.
page 6-54
File Name Entry
Adds a file name.
page 6-54
Delete after Printed
Automatically deletes a document from the box once
printing is complete.
page 6-64
Priority Override
Suspends the current job and gives a new job top priority.
page 6-55
EcoPrint
EcoPrint saves toner when printing.
page 6-24
Zoom
Adjusts the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image.
page 6-27
Fold
Folds the finished documents.
page 6-17
Text Stamp
You can add a text stamp on the documents.
page 6-48
Bates Stamp
You can add a bates stamp on the documents.
page 6-50
Density
Adjust density using 7 or 13 levels.
page 6-22
Original Image
Select original image type for best results.
page 6-23
Sharpness
Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines.
page 6-25
Background Density
Adj.
Removes dark background from originals, such as
newspapers.
page 6-25
Prevent Bleed-thru
Hides background colors and image bleed-through
when scanning thin original.
page 6-26
6-7
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Send
Tab
Functions
Configure the settings
for file format and FAX
transmission when
sending from the
Custom Box.
Color/
Image Quality
Configure the settings
for density, quality of
copies, and color
balance.
Function key
Description
Reference
page
Sending Size
Select size of image to be sent.
page 6-58
File Format
Specify the image file format. Image quality level can
also be adjusted.
page 6-59
FAX TX Resolution
Select fineness of images when sending FAX.
Refer to the
FAX Operation
Guide.
Centering
Centers the original image on the paper when copying
onto paper different from the original size.
page 6-33
FAX Delayed
Transmission
Set a send time.
Refer to the
FAX Operation
Guide.
Job Finish Notice
Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete.
page 6-54
File Name Entry
Adds a file name.
page 6-54
E-mail Subject/Body
Adds subject and body when sending a document.
page 6-62
i-FAX Subject/Body
Adds subject and body when sending a document by iFAX.
Refer to the
FAX Operation
Guide.
FTP Encrypted TX
Encrypts images when sending via FTP.
page 6-64
Delete after
Transmitted
Automatically deletes a document from the box once
transmission is complete.
page 6-64
Zoom
Adjusts the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image.
page 6-27
File Separation
Creates several files by dividing scanned original data
page by page before sending the files.
page 6-62
Text Stamp
You can add a text stamp on the documents.
page 6-48
Bates Stamp
You can add a bates stamp on the documents.
page 6-50
File Size
Confirmation
Checks the file size before sending/storing the original.
page 6-64
FAX TX Report
Prints a report when transmission of a document is
successful, or when an error occurs and transmission
fails.
Refer to the
FAX Operation
Guide.
Density
Adjust density using 7 or 13 levels.
page 6-22
Original Image
Select original image type for best results.
page 6-23
Resolution
Select fineness of scanning resolution.
page 6-62
Color Selection
Select the color mode setting.
page 6-24
Sharpness
Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines.
page 6-25
Background Density
Adj.
Removes dark background from originals, such as
newspapers.
page 6-25
Prevent Bleed-thru
Hides background colors and image bleed-through
when scanning thin original.
page 6-26
6-8
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Removable Memory (Store File, Printing Documents)
To configure the settings for functions, select the tab and press the function key.
Free Space
200.0MB
Storing Image
Function key
Original
Zoom
Store
: A4
: 100%
: A4
Original
Size
Mixed Size
Originals
2-sided/Book
Original
Original
Orientation
Storing Size
Prevent
Bleed-thru
Density
Original
Image
Scan
Resolution
Color
Selection
Sharpness
Background
Density Adj.
Preview
Tab
Quick Setup
1/2
Functions
RemoveMemory
Back to List
For details on each function, see the table below.
Store File
Tab
Functions
Configure the settings
for color selection and
document name when
storing the document
in the removable
memory.
Function key
Description
Reference
page
Original Size
Specify the original size to be scanned.
page 6-11
Mixed Size Originals
Scans all sheets in the document processor, even if
they are of different sizes.
page 6-14
2-sided/Book
Original
Select the type and orientation of the binding based on
the original.
page 6-57
Original Orientation
Select the orientation of the original document top
edge to scan correct direction.
page 6-16
Storing Size
Select size of image to be stored.
page 6-65
Prevent Bleed-thru
Hides background colors and image bleed-through
when scanning thin original.
page 6-26
Density
Adjust density using 7 or 13 levels.
page 6-22
Original Image
Select original image type for best results.
page 6-23
Scan Resolution
Select fineness of scanning resolution.
page 6-62
Color Selection
Select the color mode setting.
page 6-24
Sharpness
Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines.
page 6-25
Background Density
Adj.
Removes dark background from originals, such as
newspapers.
page 6-25
Zoom
Adjusts the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image.
page 6-27
Centering
Centers the original image on the paper when copying
onto paper different from the original size.
page 6-33
Border Erase
Erases the black border that forms around the image.
page 6-34
Continuous Scan
Scans a large number of originals in separate batches
and then produce as one job.
page 6-52
Job Finish Notice
Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete.
page 6-54
File Name Entry
Adds a file name.
page 6-54
File Format
Specify the image file format. Image quality level can
also be adjusted.
page 6-59
File Separation
Creates several files by dividing scanned original data
page by page before sending the files.
page 6-62
Text Stamp
You can add a text stamp on the documents.
page 6-48
Bates Stamp
You can add a bates stamp on the documents.
page 6-50
6-9
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Printing Documents
Tab
Function key
Description
Reference
page
Paper Selection
Select the cassette or multi-purpose tray that contains
the required paper size.
page 6-12
Collate/Offset
Offsets the output by page or set.
page 6-18
Staple/Punch
Staples or punches printed documents.
page 6-19
Paper Output
Set paper output to document finisher or job separator
tray.
page 6-22
Margin
Add margins (white space). In addition, you can set the
margin width and the back page margin.
page 6-33
2-sided
Print a document to 1-sided or 2-sided sheets.
page 6-41
Job Finish Notice
Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete.
page 6-54
Priority Override
Suspends the current job and gives a new job top
priority.
page 6-55
EcoPrint
EcoPrint saves toner when printing.
page 6-24
Fold
Folds the finished documents.
page 6-17
Text Stamp
You can add a text stamp on the documents.
page 6-48
Bates Stamp
You can add a bates stamp on the documents.
page 6-50
Encrypted PDF
Password
Enter the preassigned password to print the PDF data.
page 6-65
JPEG/TIFF Print
Select the image size when printing JPEG or TIFF
files.
page 6-66
XPS Fit to Page
Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the
selected paper size when printing XPS file.
page 6-66
Functions
Configure the settings
for paper selection
and duplex printing
when printing from the
removable memory.
6-10
Using Various Functions > Functions
Functions
Original Size
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Copy
Send
Org./Sending
Data Format
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
Specify the original size to be scanned.
Press [Standard Sizes 1], [Standard Sizes 2], [Others] or [Size Entry] to select the original size.
Item
Value
Description
Standard Sizes 1
Metric models: Auto, A3, A4, A4-R, A5, A5-R, A6-R, B4-R, B5,
B5-R, B6, B6-R, Folio, 216x340 mm
Inch models: Auto, Ledger, Letter, Letter-R, Legal, Statement,
Statement-R, 11 x 15", Oficio II
Standard Sizes 2
Metric models: Ledger, Letter, Letter-R, Legal-R, Statement,
Statement-R, 11 x 15", Oficio II, 8K, 16K, 16K-R
Have the size of original detected
automatically, or select from the standard
sizes.
Select from standard sizes except Standard
Sizes 1.
Inch models: A3, A4, A4-R, A5, A5-R, A6-R, B4, B5, B5-R, B6,
B6-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R, 216 x 340 mm
Others
Hagaki, Oufuku hagaki, Custom 1 to 4*1
Select from envelope, postcard or the
custom sized originals*1.
Size Entry
Metric
Enter the size not included in the standard
sizes 1 and 2.*2
X: 50 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Y: 50 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)
When you have selected [Size Entry], press
[+] or [-] to set the sizes of "X" (horizontal)
and "Y" (vertical). Press [# Keys] to use the
numeric keys for entry.
Inch
X: 2.00 to 17.00" (in 1" increments)
Y: 2.00 to 11.69" (in 1" increments)
*1
For instructions on how to specify the custom original sizes (Custom 1 to 4), refer to Custom Original Size on page 8-10. If "Custom Original Size"
is set to [Off], this does not appear.
*2
The input units can be changed in System Menu. For details, refer to Measurement on page 8-14.
NOTE
Be sure to always specify the original size when using custom size originals.
6-11
Using Various Functions > Functions
Paper Selection
Copy
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
Select the cassette or multi-purpose tray that contains the required paper size.
Select from [1] (Cassette 1) to [5] (Cassette 5) to use the paper contained in that cassette.
If [Auto] is selected, the paper matching the size of the original is selected automatically.
NOTE
• Specify in advance the size and type of the paper loaded in the cassette (refer to Cassette/MP Tray Settings on page 8-7).
• When printing on paper that is wider than the paper previously used, dirt on the conveying guide may soil the edges of the
paper infrequently. If you find that the paper is soiled, use the provided cleaning cloth to clean the conveying guide.
Conveying Guide (page 10-4)
• Cassette 3 to Cassette 5 are displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed.
To select [MP tray], press [Paper Settings] and specify the paper size and the media type. The available paper sizes and
media types are shown in the table below.
Item
Paper
Settings
Standard
Sizes 1
Value
Metric models: A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, A6-R, B4, B5, B5-R, B6-R, Folio,
216 x 340 mm
Description
Select from the standard
size.
Inch models: Ledger, Letter, Letter-R, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II
Standard
Sizes 2
Metric models: Ledger, Letter, Letter-R, Legal-R, Statement, Executive,
Oficio II, 8K, 16K, 16K-R
Select from standard sizes
except Standard Sizes 1.
Inch models: A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, A6-R, B4, B5, B5-R, B6-R, Folio, 8K,
16K, 16K-R, 216 x 340 mm
Others
ISO B5, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10), Envelope #9 (Commercial #9),
Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4), Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL,
Envelope C5, Envelope C4, Hagaki, Oufuku hagaki, Youkei 4, Youkei 2
and Custom 1 to 4*1
Select from special standard
sizes and custom sizes.
Size Entry
Metric
Enter the size not included in
the standard size.*2
X: 148 to 457 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Y: 98 to 304 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Inch
X: 5.83 to 18.00" (in 0.01" increments)
Y: 3.86 to 12.00" (in 0.01" increments)
Media type
When you have selected
[Size Entry], press [+] or [-] to
set the sizes of "X"
(horizontal) and "Y" (vertical).
Press [# Keys] to use the
numeric keys for entry.
Plain (105 g/m2 or less), Transparency, Rough, Vellum (60 to 105 g/m2), Labels, Recycled, Preprinted*3,
Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched*3, Letterhead*3, Thick (106 g/m2 and more), Envelope, Coated,
High Quality, Index Tab Dividers, Custom 1-8*3
*1
For instructions on how to specify the custom paper sizes (Custom 1 to 4), refer to Custom Paper Size on page 8-10.
*2
The input units can be changed in System Menu. For details, refer to Measurement on page 8-14.
*3
For instructions on how to specify the custom paper types 1 to 8, refer to Media Type Setting on page 8-13. To print on preprinted or prepunched
paper or on letterhead, refer to Special Paper Action on page 8-12.
IMPORTANT
When paper size and the media type for MP tray is specified, [Paper Settings] is selected. Note that if
[Multipurpose tray] is pressed at this point, the settings will be canceled.
6-12
Using Various Functions > Functions
NOTE
• You can conveniently select in advance the size and type of paper that will be used often and set them as default
(refer to MP Tray Setting on page 8-8).
• If the specified size of paper is not loaded in the paper source cassette or multi purpose tray, a confirmation screen
appears. When [Auto] is selected and the same size of paper as the detected original size is not loaded, a paper
confirmation screen appears. Load the required paper in the multi purpose tray and press [Continue] to start copying.
6-13
Using Various Functions > Functions
Mixed Size Originals
Copy
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Send
Org./Sending
Data Format
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
Scans all sheets in the document processor, even if they are of different sizes.
Copying
Metric Models
Item
Value
Description
Off
Mixed Size
Copies
Original Width
Same Width, Different Width
Select options for the width of set original.
Same Size
Copies
Original Width
Same Width, Different Width
Select options for the width of set original.
Top Page Direction
Long Edge Left, Short Edge Left
Select the original orientation of the first page.
Inch Models
Item
Value
Description
Off
Mixed Size Copies
―
Originals are detected individually for size and
copied to the same size paper as originals.
Same Size
Copies
Long Edge Left, Short Edge Left
Select the original orientation of the first page.
Top Page Direction
Sending/Storing
Item
Mixed Size Originals
Value
Description
Off
Same Width
Scans and sends multiple sheets of the same
width using the document processor.
Different Width
Scans and sends multiple sheets of different
width using the document processor.
Supported Combinations of Originals
Same Width
When the original widths are the same, the combinations of originals that can be placed are as follows.
NOTE
When mixing the original sizes as using the following combination: Folio and A4-R, make sure to set "Auto Detect
Original Size" to [On] for "Folio". For details, refer to Auto Detect Original Size on page 8-11.
•
B4 and B5
•
Ledger and Letter (A3 and A4)
•
Legal and Letter-R (Folio and A4-R)
6-14
Using Various Functions > Functions
Example: B4 and B5
Different Width (Available for metric models only)
The supported combinations of originals are as follows.
NOTE
•
Up to 30 sheets can be placed in the document processor.
•
When mixing the original sizes as using the following combination: A4-R, B5-R, and Folio, make sure to set "Auto Detect
Original Size" to [On] for "Folio". For details, refer to Auto Detect Original Size on page 8-11.
•
A3, B4, A4, B5
•
B4, A4-R, B5
•
A4-R, B5-R, Folio
Example: A3, B4, A4, B5
IMPORTANT
When placing originals of different width, arrange the originals so that their left sides and top sides are
aligned, and place the originals in alignment with the far width guide. If the originals are not aligned in this
way, they may not be scanned correctly, and skewing or original jams may result.
Selecting How to Copy Originals
Set the paper size (copy size) when printing scanned document. Select whether you wish to create individual copies on
different size paper matching the original sizes or to produce all copies on the same size paper.
NOTE
This function is available regardless of whether originals have the same width or not.
Mixed Size Copies
Originals are detected individually for size and copied to the same size paper as originals.
B4
A4-R
B5
B4
B5
B4
A4-R
B5
Same Size Copies
Originals are all copied to the same size paper.
B4
A4-R
6-15
B4
B4
Using Various Functions > Functions
Original Orientation
Copy
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Send
Org./Sending
Data Format
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction.
To use any of the following functions, the document's original orientation must be set.
•
Zoom (XY Zoom)*
•
Page #*
•
Duplex*
•
Booklets*
•
Margin/Centering*
•
Stapling/Punch (optional feature)*
•
Border Erase
•
2-sided/Book Original
•
Combine*
•
Text Stamp*
•
Memo mode*
•
Bates Stamp*
* When making copies
NOTE
If [On] is selected in the setting for Orientation Confirmation (page 8-16) in System Menu, the selection screen for
original orientation appears when you select any of the above functions.
Select original orientation from [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].
Item
Image
Top Edge on Top
Original
Original orientation
Top Edge on Left
Original
Original orientation
NOTE
The default setting for Original Orientation can be changed. Refer to Orientation Confirmation on page 8-16 for details.
6-16
Using Various Functions > Functions
Fold
Copy
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
Folds the finished documents.
Select the fold method.
The following folding options and orientations are available.
Original orientation
Orientation: Landscape
Orientation: Portrait
Item
Bi-Fold
Saddle Stitch
Tri-Fold
Inside
R to L/B to T
L to R/T to B
Outside
R to L/B to T
L to R/T to B
NOTE
Folding requires the optional 4,000-sheet finisher and the folding unit.
For details on paper sizes and numbers of sheets that can be folded, refer to Center-Folding Unit (Option) on page 1130.
6-17
Using Various Functions > Functions
Collate/Offset
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Copy
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
Offsets the output by page or set.
Item
Image
Collate
Offset
Description
Scans multiple originals and delivers complete sets of copies
as required according to page number.
Without Document Finisher (Option)
When offsetting is used, printed copies are produced after
rotating each set (or page*) by 90 degrees.
NOTE
To use offsetting, the same size of paper as the selected paper
tray must be loaded in a different orientation in a different
paper tray.
The paper sizes supported in Offset are A4, B5, Letter and 16K.
With Document Finisher (Option)
When offsetting is used, printed copies are produced after
rotating each set (or page*) by 90 degrees.
NOTE
The optional 1,000-sheet finisher or 4,000-sheet finisher is
required.
The paper sizes supported in Offset are A3, B4, A4, B5, Letter,
Legal, Ledger, Oficio II, 8K, 16K, 216 x 340 mm and Folio.
*
If [Off] is selected for "Collate" setting, [Each Page] appears. When [On] is selected, [Each Set] appears.
6-18
Using Various Functions > Functions
Staple/Punch
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Copy
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
Staple
Staples the finished documents. The staple position can be selected.
Item
Staple
Value
Description
Top Left
Select the staple position. For details on original orientation
and staple position, refer to Original Orientation and Staple
Position on page 6-19.
Top Right
2 staples Left
2 staples Top
2 staples Right
Original
Orientation
Saddle Stitch
Select whether to fold the finished documents in two with staples in
the center.
When placing originals, be sure to place the cover page at the
bottom. For details on saddle stitching, refer to Booklet on page 6-36.
Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left
Select the orientation of the original document top edge to
scan correct direction. Press [Original Orientation] to choose
orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top
Edge on Left]. Then press [OK].
NOTE
Stapling requires the optional 1,000-sheet finisher or 4,000-sheet finisher. Note also that saddle stitching (center stapling)
requires the folding unit.
For details on paper sizes and numbers of sheets that can be stapled, refer to 1,000-sheet Finisher (Option) on page
11-28 or 4,000-sheet Finisher (Option) on page 11-29.
Original Orientation and Staple Position
Original orientation
Top Edge on Top
Paper orientation
Cassette paper load
direction
Cassette paper load
direction
NOTE
B5-R and 16K-R "one staple" is not diagonal.
6-19
Top Edge on Left
Using Various Functions > Functions
Mixed Size Stapling
Even with mixed paper sizes, if the sizes have the same width or same length as shown in the combinations below, the
output can be stapled. Up to 30 sheets can be stapled.
A4
B5
Letter
A3
B4
Ledger
A4
B5
Letter
A3
B4
Ledger
•
A3 and A4
•
B4 and B5
•
Ledger and Letter
•
Ledger and Letter-R
•
8K and 16K
Letter-R Legal
Letter-R Legal
NOTE
When performing Mixed Size Stapling, refer to Mixed Size Originals on page 6-14.
Punch
Punches holes in sets of finished documents.
NOTE
• The optional document finisher (1,000-sheet finisher or 4,000-sheet finisher) and punching unit are required.
• For details on paper sizes that can be punched, refer to Hole Punch Unit (Option) on page 11-29.
• The inch model provides two-hole and three-hole punching. The metric model provides two-hole and four-hole
punching.
Item
Punch
Value
2 holes Left
2 holes Top
Description
Select the position of punch holes. For details on original
orientation and position of punch holes, refer to Original
Orientation and Punch Hole Position on page 6-21.
2 holes Right
3 holes Left
3 holes Top
3 holes Right
4 holes Left
4 holes Top
4 holes Right
Original
Orientation
Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left
Select the orientation of the original document top edge to
scan correct direction. Press [Original Orientation] to choose
orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top
Edge on Left]. Then press [OK].
6-20
Using Various Functions > Functions
Original Orientation and Punch Hole Position
Image
Original
Original orientation
Print results
Glass platen
Document processor
NOTE
The inch model provides two-hole and three-hole punching. The metric model provides two-hole and four-hole
punching.
6-21
Using Various Functions > Functions
Paper Output
Copy
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Functions
Custom
Box
USB
Memory
Functions
Set paper output to document finisher or job separator tray.
Item
*
Description
Inner Tray*
Inner tray of the machine (where copies are stored)
Finisher Left Tray, Finisher Top Tray
Tray of the optional 1,000-sheet finisher
Tray A, Tray B, Tray C
Trays A to C in the optional 4,000-sheet finisher
Right Tray
Optional right job separator
Job Separator*
Optional inner job separator
Tray 1 to 7
Trays 1 to 7 in the optional mailbox (tray 1 is the top tray)
This cannot be selected when the optional 1,000-sheet finisher or 4,000-sheet finisher is installed.
NOTE
• The setting for this function can be configured only when the optional job separator and/or document finisher
(1,000-sheet finisher or 4,000-sheet finisher) are installed.
• The default setting for Paper Output can be changed. For details, refer to Paper Output on page 8-16.
• When [Heavy 3] (164 g/m2 -) or higher is set in Paper Weight and Mailbox (Option) is set for the output destination,
the output destination is automatically changed to a tray that can be used.
Density
Copy
Image Quality
Send
Color/
Image Quality
Custom
Box
Functions
Image Quality
USB
Memory
Adjust density using 7 or 13 levels.
Adjust density pressing [-3] (Lighter) to [+3] (Darker). You can change the density level
[-3] (Lighter) to [+3] (Darker) in half-steps.
6-22
Functions
Using Various Functions > Functions
Original Image
Copy
Image Quality
Send
Color/
Image Quality
Custom
Box
Functions
Image Quality
USB
Memory
Functions
Select original image type for best results.
Copying/Printing
Item
Value
Text+Photo*
Printer Output
Best for mixed text and photo documents printed on this machine originally.
Book/Magazine
Best for mixed text and photos printed in a magazine, etc.
Printer Output
Best for photos printed on this machine originally.
Book/Magazine
Best for photos printed in a magazine, etc.
Photo Paper
Best for photos taken with a camera.
Off
(Light Text/Fine Line)
Best for documents that are mostly text and were originally printed on this
machine.
On
(Light Text/Fine Line)
Sharply renders pencil text and fine lines.
Printer Output
Best for maps and diagrams printed on this machine originally.
Book/Magazine
Best for maps and diagrams printed in a magazine.
Photo
Text
Graphic/Map
*
Description
If gray text is not printed completely using [Text + Photo], selecting [Text] may improve the result.
Sending/Storing
Item
Text+Photo
Best for mixed text and photo documents.
Photo
Best for photos taken with a camera.
Text
*
Description
*
Sharply renders pencil text and fine lines.
The setting "for OCR" can be configured. (Value: [Off] / [On]) When [On] is selected, scanning produces an image that is suitable for OCR. This
function is only available when Color Selection is set to Black and White. For details, refer to Color Selection on page 6-24.The setting "for OCR"
can be configured. When [On] is selected, scanning produces an image that is suitable for OCR. This function is only available when Color
Selection is set to Black and White.
6-23
Using Various Functions > Functions
EcoPrint
Copy
Image Quality
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
EcoPrint saves toner when printing. Use this function for test prints or any other occasion when high quality print is not
required. Adjustment can be made in 5 levels.
Item
Value
Description
Off
On
[1] (Low) to [5] (High)
Adjust the Toner Save Level.
Color Selection
Send
Color/
Image Quality
Custom
Box
Functions
Color/
Image Quality
USB
Memory
Functions
Select the color mode setting.
Item
Description
Auto Color (Color/Gray)
Automatically recognizes whether the document is color or black and white, and
scan color documents in Full Color and black and white documents in Grayscale.
Auto Color (Color/B & W)
Automatically recognizes whether the document is color or black and white, and
scan color documents in Full Color and black and white documents in Black and
White.
Full Color
Scans the document in full color.
Grayscale
Scans the document in grayscale. Produces a smooth, detailed image.
Black & White
Scans the document in black and white.
6-24
Using Various Functions > Functions
Sharpness
Image Quality
Copy
Send
Color/
Image Quality
Custom
Box
Functions
Color/
Image Quality
Image Quality
USB
Memory
Functions
Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines.
When copying penciled originals with rough or broken lines, clear copies can be taken by adjusting sharpness toward
"Sharpen". When copying images made up of patterned dots such as magazine photos, in which moire* patterns
appear, edge softening and weakening of the moire effect can be obtained by setting the sharpness toward "Blur".
When [All] is selected, press [-3] to [3] (Blur - Sharpen) to adjust the sharpness.
When [Text/Fine Line] is selected, press [0] to [3] (Normal - Sharpen) to adjust the sharpness.
Less Sharp
Item
All
Text/Fine Line
*
Original
More Sharp
Value
Description
1 to 3 (Sharpen)
Emphasizes the image outline.
-1 to -3 (Blur)
Blurs the image outline. Can weaken a Moire* effect.
0 to 3
(Normal - Sharpen)
Makes letters and lines appear sharper.
Only text and fine lines are emphasized.
Patterns that are created by irregular distribution of halftone dots.
Background Density Adj.
Copy
Image Quality
Send
Color/
Image Quality
Custom
Box
Functions
Image Quality
Color/
Image Quality
USB
Memory
Functions
Removes dark background from originals, such as newspapers. This feature is used with full color and auto color.
Background Density Adjust is disabled if Auto Color detects black and white originals.
If the ground color is obtrusive, select [Auto]. If [Auto] does not remove the ground color, select [Manual] and adjust the
density of the ground color.
Item
Description
Off
Does not adjust the ground color.
Auto
Automatically adjusts the background density based on the original.
Manual
Manually adjust the density in 5 levels. When [Manual] is selected, press [1] to [5] (Lighter - Darker) to
adjust the background density.
6-25
Using Various Functions > Functions
Prevent Bleed-thru
Copy
Image Quality
Send
Color/
Image Quality
Custom
Box
Functions
Image Quality
Hides background colors and image bleed-through when scanning thin original.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
6-26
Color/
Image Quality
USB
Memory
Functions
Using Various Functions > Functions
Zoom
Copy
Layout/Edit
Advanced
Setup
Send
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image.
Copying
The following zoom options are available.
Auto
A3: 141%
A4
A5: 70%
Adjusts the image to match the paper size.
Standard Zoom
Reduces or enlarges at preset magnifications.
Model
Inch Models
Zoom Level
(Original Copy)
Auto
Model
Metric Models
Zoom Level
(Original Copy)
Auto
400% (Max.)
400% (Max.)
200% (STMT >>Ledger)
200% (A5 >> A3)
154%(STMT >> Legal)
141% (A4 >> A3, A5 >> A4)
129% (Letter >> Ledger)
127% (Folio >> A3)
121% (Legal >> Ledger)
106% (11×15" >> A3)
100%
100%
78% (Legal >> Letter)
90% (Folio >> A4)
77% (Ledger >> Legal)
75% (11×15" >> A4)
64% (Ledger >> Letter)
70% (A3 >> A4, A4 >> A5)
50% (Ledger >> STMT)
50%
25% (Min.)
25% (Min.)
Metric Models
(Asia Pacific)
Auto
400% (Max.)
200% (A5 >> A3)
141% (A4 >> A3, B5 >> B4)
122% (A4 >> B4, A5 >> B5)
115% (B4 >> A3, B5 >> A4)
100%
86% (A3 >> B4, A4 >> B5)
81% (B4 >> A4, B5 >> A5)
70% (A3 >> A4, B4 >> B5)
50%
25% (Min.)
6-27
Using Various Functions > Functions
Zoom Entry
Manually reduces or enlarges the original image in 1% increments between 25% and 400%.
XY Zoom
Y
X
Select vertical and horizontal magnifications individually. Magnifications can be set in 1%
increments between 25% and 400%.
6-28
Using Various Functions > Functions
Item
Standard Zoom
Value
Description
Metric
Select a preset ratio.
[# Keys] 25 to 400% (in 1% increments)
Press [Auto] to use Auto Zoom.
100%, Auto, 400% Max.,
200% A5>>A3,
141% A4>>A3 B5>>B4,
127% Folio>>A3,
106% 11x15">>A3,
90% Folio>>A4,
75% 11x15" >>A4,
70% A3>>A4 A4>>A5,
50%, 25% Min.
Press [+] or [-] to change the displayed
magnification as desired. Press [# Keys] to use the
numeric keys for entry.
Metric (Asia Pacific)
[# Keys] 25 to 400% (in 1% increments)
100%, Auto, 400% Max.,
200% A5>>A3,
141% A4>>A3 B5>>B4,
122% A4>>B4 A5>>B5,
115% B4>>A3 B5>>A4,
86% A3>>B4 A4>>B5,
81% B4>>A4 B5>>A5,
70% A3>>A4 B4>>B5,
50%, 25% Min.
Inch
[# Keys] 25 to 400% (in 1% increments)
Auto, 100%, 400% Max.,
200% STMT>>Ledger,
154% STMT>>Legal,
129% Letter>>Ledger,
121% Legal>>Ledger,
78% Legal>>Letter,
77% Ledger>>Legal,
64% Ledger>>Letter,
50% Ledger>>STMT,
25% Min.
XY Zoom
X: 25 to 400% (in 1 mm increments)
Y: 25 to 400% (in 1 mm increments)
Select vertical and horizontal magnifications
individually.
Press [+] or [-] to change the displayed
magnifications of "X" (horizontal) and "Y" (vertical).
Press [# Keys] to use the numeric keys for entry.
Original
Orientation
Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left
Select the orientation of the original document top
edge to scan correct direction.
Press [Original Orientation] to choose orientation of
the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge
on Left]. Then press [OK].
6-29
Using Various Functions > Functions
Printing/Sending/Storing
Item
Description
100%
Reproduces the original size.
Auto
Reduces or enlarges original to printing/sending/storing size.
NOTE
• To reduce or enlarge the image, select the paper size, sending size, or storing size.
Paper Selection (page 6-12)
Sending Size (page 6-58)
Storing Size (page 6-65)
• Some combinations of original size and paper size or sending size may cause the image to be positioned at the
edge of the paper. To center the original vertically and horizontally on the page, use the Centering function
described in Margin/Centering, Margin, Centering on page 6-33.
6-30
Using Various Functions > Functions
Combine
Copy
Layout/Edit
Custom
Box
Functions
Combines 2 or 4 original sheets into 1 printed page. You can select the page layout and the type of boundary lines
around the pages.
The following types of the boundary lines are available.
None
Solid Line
Dotted Line
Positioning Mark
Press [2 in 1] or [4 in 1], and select the page layout from "Layout".
Item
Value
Description
Off
2 in 1
Layout
L to R/T to B, R to L/B to T
Select the page layout of scanned originals.
Border Line
None, Solid Line, Dotted Line,
Positioning Mark
Select the boundary line type.
Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left
Select the orientation of the original
document top edge to scan correct direction.
Original Orientation
Press [Border Line] to select the page
boundary line, and press [OK].
Press [Original Orientation] to choose
orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge
on Top] or [Top Edge on Left]. Then press
[OK].
4 in 1
Layout
Right then Down, Left then Down,
Down then Right, Down then Left
Select the page layout of scanned originals.
Border Line
None, Solid Line, Dotted Line,
Positioning Mark
Select the boundary line type.
Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left
Select the orientation of the original
document top edge to scan correct direction.
Original Orientation
Press [Border Line] to select the page
boundary line, and press [OK].
Press [Original Orientation] to choose
orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge
on Top] or [Top Edge on Left]. Then press
[OK].
6-31
Using Various Functions > Functions
Layout image
Item
2 in 1
Image
L to R/T to B
R to L/B to T
4 in 1
Right then Down
Left then Down
Down then Right
Down then Left
NOTE
The paper sizes supported in Combine mode are A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, Folio, 216 x 340 mm, Ledger,
Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Oficio II, 8K, 16K-R and 16K.
When placing the original on the platen, be sure to copy the originals in page order.
6-32
Using Various Functions > Functions
Margin/Centering, Margin, Centering
Copy
Layout/Edit
Send
Advanced
Setup
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
Copying/Printing
Add margins (white space). In addition, you can set the margin width and the back page margin.
Centering: Centers the original image on the paper when copying onto paper different from the original size.
NOTE
The default setting for margin width can be changed. For details, refer to Margin Default on page 8-18.
Item
Value
Description
Off
Margin
Top/Bottom
Metric: -18 mm to +18 mm
(in 1 mm increments)
Inch:
-0.75 to +0.75"
(in 0.01" increments)
Set the margin width.*1
Use [+] or [-] to enter the margins for "Left/
Right" and "Top/Bottom". Press [# Keys] to use
the numeric keys for entry.
Back Page
Auto, Manual
For duplex copying, press [Back Page] and
select [Auto] or [Manual].
Left/Right
When [Auto] is selected, an appropriate margin
is applied automatically on the rear page
depending on a margin specified for the front
page and a binding orientation.
When [Manual] is set, you can set a different
margin than the front on the back. Set the
margin in the screen that is displayed. The
setting selections are the same as for the front.
Original
Orientation
Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left
Select the orientation of the original document
top edge to scan correct direction.
Press [Original Orientation] to choose
orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on
Top] or [Top Edge on Left]. Then press [OK].
Centering*2
Original
Orientation
Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left
Select the orientation of the original document
top edge to scan correct direction.
Press [Original Orientation] to choose
orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on
Top] or [Top Edge on Left]. Then press [OK].
*1
The input units can be changed in System Menu. For details, refer to Measurement on page 8-14.
*2
Not displayed when printing from removable memory.
6-33
Using Various Functions > Functions
Sending/Storing
When you have sent/stored the original after specifying the original size and sending size, depending on these sizes, a
margin is created at the bottom, left, or right side of paper. By using the Centering function, the image is placed with a
margin equally created for all edges.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
Border Erase
Copy
Layout/Edit
Send
Advanced
Setup
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
Erases the black border that forms around the image. The following modes are available.
Border Erase Sheet
Erases black borders around the single sheet original.
Original
Copy
Border Erase Book
Erases black borders around the edges and in the middle of the original such
as a thick book. You can specify the widths individually to erase the borders
around the edges and in the center of the book.
Original
Copy
Individual Border Erase
You can specify border erase widths individually for all edges.
Original
Copy
NOTE
• The default setting for border erase width can be changed. For details, refer to Border Erase Default on page 8-17.
• The default width for back page can be changed. For details, refer to Border Erase to Back Page on page 8-17.
6-34
Using Various Functions > Functions
Item
Border Erase
Sheet
Border
Value
Metric: 0 mm to 50 mm
(in 1 mm increments)
Inch:
Border Erase
Book
Individual Border
Erase
0.00 to 2.00"
(in 0.01" increments)
Description
Set the border erase width.*
Set the value by pressing [+] or [-].
Press [# Keys] to use the numeric keys for
entry.
Back Page
Same as Front Page, Do Not Erase
For 2-sided originals, press [Back Page] and
then press [Same as Front Page] or [Do Not
Erase].
Border
Metric: 0 mm to 50 mm
(in 1 mm increments)
Gutter
Inch:
Set the border erase width.*
Set the value by pressing [+] or [-].
Press [# Keys] to use the numeric keys for
entry.
Back Page
Same as Front Page, Do Not Erase
For 2-sided originals, press [Back Page] and
then press [Same as Front Page] or [Do Not
Erase].
Top
Bottom
Metric: 0 mm to 50 mm
(in 1 mm increments)
Set the border erase width.*
Set the value by pressing [+] or [-].
Press [# Keys] to use the numeric keys for
entry.
Left
Inch:
0.00 to 2.00"
(in 0.01" increments)
0.00 to 2.00"
(in 0.01" increments)
Right
*
Back Page
Same as Front Page, Do Not Erase
For 2-sided originals, press [Back Page] and
then press [Same as Front Page] or [Do Not
Erase].
Original
Orientation
Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left
Select the orientation of the original document
top edge to scan correct direction. Press
[Original Orientation] to choose orientation of
the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top
Edge on Left]. Then press [OK].
The input units can be changed in System Menu. For details, refer to Measurement on page 8-14.
6-35
Using Various Functions > Functions
Booklet
Copy
Layout/Edit
Functions
Custom
Box
The Booklet option allows you to copy sheet originals and produce booklets such as small brochures or pamphlets. A
booklet, such as a magazine, is made by folding at the center.
You can print the cover page onto colored paper or thick paper. Paper for the cover is supplied from the multi purpose
tray. To feed the cover paper from the cassette, refer to Paper Source for Cover on page 8-12.
NOTE
Using the optional 4,000-sheet finisher and the folding unit enables you to saddle stitch your copies (fold them in two
with staples in the center). Supported paper sizes are A3, B4, A4-R, Ledger, Legal, Letter-R, and 8K.
Type of original
*
Original size
Paper size
One-sided original,
Two-sided original
All*
Book Original
A3, B4, A4-R, B5-R, A5-R, Ledger, Letter-R and 8K
A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, Ledger, Legal,
Letter and Letter-R
Except for custom sized originals.
Binding on the left side
The folded copies can be read from left to right.
Original
Copy
Binding on the right side
The folded copies can be read from right to left.
Original
Copy
Top binding
The folded copies can be read from top to bottom.
Original
Copy
6-36
Using Various Functions > Functions
Item
Value
Description
Off
1-sided>>
Booklet
Finishing
Cover
Binding Left,
Binding Right, Binding Top
Select the binding orientation of copies.
Not Print, Front Only,
Back Only, Duplex
Select whether to add the cover. Select the
printing method for the cover to be inserted.
Not Print, Front Only,
Back Only, Duplex
Press [Cover], and then [Cover], and specify
the print setting for the cover to be inserted.
Select from [Not Print], [Back Only], [Front
Only], and [Duplex], and press [OK].
Off
Cover:
Front Cover Print
Setting
Cover:
Back Cover Print
Setting
Staple/Fold
Fold Only, Saddle Stitch
To fold finished copies in half, press [Staple/
Fold] and then press [Fold Only].
To use saddle stitching, press [Staple/Fold]
and then press [Saddle Stitch].
2-sided>>
Booklet
Original Orientation
Top Edge on Top,
Top Edge on Left
Select the orientation of the original document
top edge to scan correct direction. Press
[Original Orientation] to choose orientation of
the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top
Edge on Left]. Then press [OK].
Original
Binding Left/Right,
Binding Top
Select the binding direction of originals.
Finishing
Binding Left,
Binding Right, Binding Top
Select the binding orientation of copies.
Not Print, Front Only,
Back Only, Duplex
Select whether to add the cover. Select the
printing method for the cover to be inserted.
Not Print, Front Only,
Back Only, Duplex
Press [Cover], and then [Cover], and specify
the print setting for the cover to be inserted.
Select from [Not Print], [Back Only], [Front
Only], and [Duplex], and press [OK].
Cover
Off
Cover:
Front Cover Print
Setting
Cover:
Back Cover Print
Setting
Staple/Fold
Fold Only, Saddle Stitch
To fold finished copies in half, press [Staple/
Fold] and then press [Fold Only].
To use saddle stitching, press [Staple/Fold]
and then press [Saddle Stitch].
Original Orientation
Top Edge on Top,
Top Edge on Left
6-37
Select the orientation of the original document
top edge to scan correct direction. Press
[Original Orientation] to choose orientation of
the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top
Edge on Left]. Then press [OK].
Using Various Functions > Functions
Item
Book>>Booklet
Value
Description
Original
Binding Left,
Binding Right
Select the binding direction of originals.
Finishing
Binding Left,
Binding Right
Select the binding orientation of copies.
Cover
Off, Cover
Select whether to add the cover. Press
[Cover] to select [Cover], and press [OK].
Staple/Fold
Fold Only, Saddle Stitch
To fold finished copies in half, press [Staple/
Fold] and then press [Fold Only].
To use saddle stitching, press [Staple/Fold]
and then press [Saddle Stitch].
Original Orientation
Top Edge on Top,
Top Edge on Left
Select the orientation of the original document
top edge to scan correct direction. Press
[Original Orientation] to choose orientation of
the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top
Edge on Left]. Then press [OK].
NOTE
• The number of sheets that can be folded or Saddle Stitch stapled varies depending on paper weight. For details,
refer to Center-Folding Unit (Option) on page 11-30.
• When placing the original on the platen, be sure to place the originals in page order.
6-38
Using Various Functions > Functions
Duplex
Layout/Edit
Copy
Functions
Custom
Box
USB
Memory
Functions
Produces two-sided copies.
You can also create single-sided copies from two-sided originals or originals with facing pages such as books.
The following modes are available.
One-sided to Two-sided
Produces two-sided copies from one-sided originals. In case of an odd
number of originals, the back side of the last copy will be blank.
Original
Copy
A
B
ghi
def
ghi
abc
abc
def
abc
def
Original
The following binding options are available.
ghi
Copy
A Original Left/Right to Binding Left/Right: Images on the second sides are
not rotated.
B Original Left/Right to Binding Top: Images on the second sides are rotated
180 degrees. Copies can be bound on the top edge, facing the same
orientation when turning the pages.
Two-sided to One-sided
Copies each side of a two-sided original onto two individual sheets.
The optional document processor is required.
The following binding options are available.
Original
Copy
• Binding Left/Right: :Images on the second sides are not rotated.
• Binding Top: Images on the second sides are rotated 180 degrees.
Two-sided to Two-sided
Produces two-sided copies from two-sided originals. The optional document
processor is required.
NOTE
Original
Copy
The paper sizes supported in Two-sided to Two-sided mode are A3, B4,
A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Executive,
Statement-R, Oficio II, 216 x 340 mm and Folio.
6-39
Using Various Functions > Functions
Book to One-sided
Produces a 1-sided copy of a 2-sided or open book original.
The following binding options are available.
Binding Left: Originals with facing pages are copied from left to right.
Original
Binding Right: Originals with facing pages are copied from right to left.
Copy
NOTE
The original sizes supported in Book to One-sided mode are Ledger,
Letter-R, A3, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5-R and 8K.
The supported paper sizes are A4, B5, Letter and 16K. You may change
paper size and reduce or enlarge copy to match that size.
Book to Two-sided
Book to
2-sided
Book to
Book
Produces two-sided copies from an open book original with
facing pages.
3
4
2
5
0
3
2
NOTE
The original sizes supported in Book to Two-sided mode
are A3, B4, A4-R, B5-R, A5-R, Ledger, Letter-R and 8K.
The supported paper sizes are A4, B5 and Letter.
3
4
2
3
5
0
2
Original
Copy
6-40
Using Various Functions > Functions
Copying
Prints 1-sided or open book originals to 2-sided, or 2-sided or open book originals to 1-sided. Select the binding
orientation for original and finished documents.
Item
2-sided>>1-sided
2-sided>>2-sided
Book>>1-sided
Book>>2-sided
Description
―
Disables the function.
Finishing
Binding Left/Right, Binding Top
Select the binding orientation of copies.
Original
Orientation
Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left
Select the orientation of the original document
top edge to scan correct direction. Press
[Original Orientation] to choose orientation of
the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top
Edge on Left]. Then press [OK].
Original
Binding Left/Right, Binding Top
Select the binding orientation of originals.
Original
Orientation
Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left
Select the orientation of the original document
top edge to scan correct direction. Press
[Original Orientation] to choose orientation of
the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top
Edge on Left]. Then press [OK].
Original
Binding Left/Right, Binding Top
Select the binding direction of originals.
Finishing
Binding Left/Right, Binding Top
Select the binding orientation of copies.
Original
Orientation
Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left
Select the orientation of the original document
top edge to scan correct direction. Press
[Original Orientation] to choose orientation of
the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top
Edge on Left]. Then press [OK].
Original
Binding Left, Binding Right
Select the binding direction of originals.
Original
Orientation
Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left
Select the orientation of the original document
top edge to scan correct direction.
Original
Binding Left, Binding Right
Select the binding direction of originals.
Finishing
Book>>2-sided, Book>>Book
Select the desired Duplex option.
Original
Orientation
Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left
Select the orientation of the original document
top edge to scan correct direction. Press
[Original Orientation] to choose orientation of
the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top
Edge on Left]. Then press [OK].
1-sided>>1-sided
1-sided>>2-sided
Value
When placing the original on the platen, consecutively replace each original and press the [Start] key.
After scanning all originals, press [Finish Scan] to start copying.
Printing
Print a document to 1-sided or 2-sided sheets.
Item
Value
Description
1-sided
―
Disables the function.
2-sided
Left/Right
Prints a 2-sided document so that the sheets are aligned properly for binding on the left or right.
Top
Prints a 2-sided document so that the sheets are aligned properly for binding on the top.
6-41
Using Various Functions > Functions
Cover
Copy
Layout/Edit
Custom
Box
Functions
Adds a cover to the finished copies. You can print the first page and/or the last page onto colored paper or thick paper
fed from the different paper source than the regular one. The following two options are available. Paper for the cover is
supplied from the multi purpose tray. To feed the cover paper from the cassette, refer to Paper Source for Cover on page
8-12.
The printing method can be set for the covers. Specify a print setting for each cover.
Item
Front Cover
Value
Not Print, Front Only, Back Only,
Duplex
Description
Different paper is inserted for the first page of
the document.
Select [Stop Printing], [Front Only], [Back Only],
or [Duplex] for the print setting of the inserted
paper.
Front and Back
Covers
Front Cover Print
Setting
Not Print, Front Only, Back Only,
Duplex
Different paper is inserted for the first page and
last page of the document.
Back Cover Print
Setting
Not Print, Front Only, Back Only,
Duplex
Select [Stop Printing], [Front Only], [Back Only],
or [Duplex] for the print setting of the inserted
paper.
6-42
Using Various Functions > Functions
Form Overlay
Copy
Layout/Edit
Custom
Box
Functions
Prints the original document overlaid with a form or image. Once you scan and register the form, the form is overlaid
onto the original. You can also use a form that is already registered in the Job Box.
Place the original for the form on top of the other originals. When using the optional document processor, the first page
of the originals should be placed on the top.
Density:
30%
Form
Original
Copy
Density:
100%
Item
Value
Description
Off
Select Stored
Form
Density
10% to 100%
Specify the density of the form to be overlaid.
Press [+] or [-] in "Density".
Finishing Image
Select Form*
Transparent
The form is overlaid on the document.
Form on Original Image
The form is placed on top of the document.
Original Image on Form
The form is placed under the document.
―
Select the form to be overlaid from Job Box.
Press [Select Form] to display the document
boxes that store documents which can be used
as a form. Select the desired form from the list
and press [OK].
Scan New Form
Density
10% to 100%
Specify the density of the form to be overlaid.
Press [+] or [-] in "Density".
Finishing Image
*
Transparent
The form is overlaid on the document.
Form on Original Image
The form is placed on top of the document.
Original Image on Form
The form is placed under the document.
Form must be previously registered in Job Box. For details, refer to Form for Form Overlay on page 5-65.
6-43
Using Various Functions > Functions
Page #
Copy
Layout/Edit
Custom
Box
Functions
Adds page numbers to the finished documents. The available formats for numbering are [-1-], [P.1] and [1/n]. The format
[1/n] prints the total number of pages in the place of "n".
Original
[-1-]
[P.1]
Select the numbering format from [-1-], [P.1] or [1/n].
6-44
[1/n]
Using Various Functions > Functions
Item
Value
Description
Off
-1-, P.1, 1/n
Position
Top Left, Top Middle,
Top Right, Bottom Left,
Bottom Middle,
Bottom Right, Detail
Select the print position of page number.
Press [Detail] to set the stamp position using numeric values,
and to set the stamp position ([Same as Front Page], [Mirror
Front Page]) when a stamp is placed on the back side of the
paper in duplex printing.
1st Page
1 to 10
To start page numbering from a page other than the first page,
press [+] or [-] in "1st Page" to specify the starting page. Press
[# Keys] to use the numeric keys for entry.
Start #
1 to 999
To start the numbering with a number other than 1, press [+] or
[-] in "Start Number" to specify the starting number. Press [#
Keys] to use the numeric keys for entry.
Last Page
-10 to 0
If you do not want page numbering through to the last page,
press [Last Page]. Select [Manual] and use [+] or [-] to specify
the final page to be numbered (a negative number of pages
counting backwards from the last page), and then press [OK].
Specify the desired number up to -10. Press [# Keys] to use
the numeric keys for entry.
Size
Font sizes registered in
Text (Text Stamp) on page
8-20 are displayed.
Set the font size of page number.
Style
None, Bold, Italic,
Bold/Italic
Set the font style of page number.
Font
Courier, Letter Gothic
Set the font of page number.
Color
Black, White
Set the color of page number.
Density
10 to 100%
(in 10% increments)
Set the density of the color of page number.
Set the value by pressing [+] or [-].
Display
Pattern
Transparent, Clipping,
Overwrite
Set the display method of page number.
Denominator#*
Auto, Manual (1 to 999)
The total number of pages "n" in the format [1/n] can be
changed manually. Press [Denominator #] and select [Manual].
Press [+] or [-] to enter the total number of pages and press
[OK]. Press [# Keys] to use the numeric keys for entry.
Original Orientation
Top Edge on Top,
Top Edge on Left
Select the orientation of the original document top edge to
scan correct direction. Press [Original Orientation] to choose
orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top
Edge on Left]. Then press [OK].
Font
*
This item appears when [1/n] is selected.
6-45
Using Various Functions > Functions
Memo Page
Layout/Edit
Copy
Delivers copies with a space for adding notes. You can also print two originals onto the same sheet with a space or add
lines to indicate page boundaries.
Press [Layout A] or [Layout B] and select the page layout from "Layout".
NOTE
The paper sizes supported in Memo mode are A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Ledger, Legal, Oficio II,
216 x 340 mm, Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, Folio, 8K, 16K and 16K-R.
Layout A
Reduces images of each original page for printing onto half of a page,
leaving the other half blank for notes.
Original
Copy
Layout B
Reduces images of two original pages for printing onto half of a page,
leaving the other half blank for notes.
Original
Copy
Item
Value
Description
Off
Layout A
Layout B
Layout
Left/Top, Right/Bottom
Select how to lay out the pages of scanned original.
Border Line
None, Solid Line, Dotted Line,
Positioning Mark
Select the boundary line type. Press [Border Line] to
select the page boundary line, and press [OK].
Original
Orientation
Top Edge on Top,
Top Edge on Left
Select the orientation of the original document top edge
to scan correct direction. Press [Original Orientation] to
choose orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on
Top] or [Top Edge on Left]. Then press [OK].
Layout
Top L to R, Top R to L,
Top L to B, Top R to B
Select how to lay out the pages of scanned original.
Border Line
None, Solid Line, Dotted Line,
Positioning Mark
Select the boundary line type. Press [Border Line] to
select the page boundary line, and press [OK].
Original
Orientation
Top Edge on Top,
Top Edge on Left
Select the orientation of the original document top edge
to scan correct direction. Press [Original Orientation] to
choose orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on
Top] or [Top Edge on Left]. Then press [OK].
6-46
Using Various Functions > Functions
Image Repeat
Copy
Layout/Edit
Tiles the 1 copied sheet with an original image. You can also specify the area of the original to repeat.
Item
Value
Description
Off
Zoom Priority
25 to 400% (in 1% increments)
Specify
Repeat
Area
Off
On:
Start
Original
Set the default screen.
Press [+] or [-] to change the displayed
magnification as desired. Press [# Keys]
to use the numeric keys for entry.
Copy
On:
Area
Metric
X1: 0 to 431 mm
Y1: 0 to 296 mm
Inch
X1: 0.00 to 16.99"
Y1: 0.00 to 11.68"
Metric
X2: 1 to 432 mm
Y2: 1 to 297 mm
Inch
X2: 0.01 to 17.00"
Y2: 0.01 to 11.69"
To set the area of the original to be
repeated, press [On] for "Specify Repeat
Area".
Press [+] or [-] to input the area of the
original to be repeated.*
Press [# Keys] to use the numeric keys
for entry.
Y1: Length from top left of platen to top
edge of repeat area
X1: Length from top left of platen to left
edge of repeat area
Y2: Height of repeat area
X2: Width of repeat area
Double Copy
Makes 2 copies of the same original on
a single sheet.
For example, you can double-copy an
A4 original onto an A3 sheet which you
then cut in half to make 2 copies that are
identical to the original.
―
Original
*
Copy
The input units can be changed in System Menu. For details, refer to Measurement on page 8-14.
6-47
Using Various Functions > Functions
Text Stamp
Copy
Layout/Edit
Send
Advanced
Setup
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
You can add a text stamp on the documents.
NOTE
This cannot be set when Text Stamp is set in the system settings. For details, refer to Print Job Status on page 8-21.
Copying/Printing
Item
Value
Description
Off
On
Stamp
Keyboard, Template 1 to 8
Press [Keyboard] and enter the text string to be
printed, or select a text stamp from the displayed
templates.
NOTE
Templates that have been set will appear.
For details on registering templates, refer to Text
(Text Stamp) on page 8-20.
Stamp Method
Each Print Page,
Each Original Page
Select the stamp method.
Press [Stamp Method] and set the stamp method
for text stamp.
Position
Top Left, Top Middle, Top Right,
Middle Left, Center, Middle Right,
Bottom Left, Bottom Middle,
Bottom Right, Detail
Set the stamp position to be printed.
Size
Registered font sizes are
displayed. For details on
registering font sizes, refer to
Font (Text Stamp) on page 8-20.
Set the font size of text stamp.
Character
Border
Off, Circle, Rectangle, Underline
Set the character border and underline.
Style
None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic
Set the font style of text stamp.
Font
Courier, Letter Gothic
Set the font of text stamp.
Color
Black, White
Set the color of text stamp.
Density
10 to 100% (in 10% increments)
Set the density of text stamp color.
Set the value by pressing [+] or [-].
Display
Pattern
Transparent, Clipping, Overwrite
Set the display method of text stamp.
Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on
Left
Select the orientation of the original document top
edge to scan correct direction. Press [Original
Orientation] to choose orientation of the originals,
either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].
Then press [OK].
Font
Original Orientation
6-48
Press [Position] and select the text stamp position.
Press [Detail] to set the stamp position using
numeric values, and to set the stamp position and
angle when a stamp is placed on the back side of
the paper in duplex printing.
Using Various Functions > Functions
Sending/Storing
Item
Value
Description
Off
On
Stamp
Keyboard, Template 1 to 8
Press [Keyboard] and enter the text string to be
printed, or select a text stamp from the displayed
templates.
NOTE
Templates that have been set will appear.
For details on registering templates, refer to Text
(Text Stamp) on page 8-20.
Position
Font
Top Left, Top Middle, Top Right,
Middle Left, Center, Middle Right,
Bottom Left, Bottom Middle,
Bottom Right, Detail
Set the stamp position to be printed.
Size
Registered font sizes are
displayed. For details on
registering font sizes, refer to
Font (Text Stamp) on page 8-20.
Set the font size of text stamp.
Character
Border
Off, Circle, Rectangle, Underline
Set the character border and underline.
Style
None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic
Set the font style of text stamp.
Font
Courier, Letter Gothic
Set the font of text stamp.
Color
Black, Red, Green, Blue, Cyan,
Magenta, Yellow, White
Set the color of text stamp.
Density
10 to 100%
(in 10% increments)
Set the density of text stamp color.
Set the value by pressing [+] or [-].
Display
Pattern
Transparent, Clipping, Overwrite
Set the display method of text stamp.
Top Edge on Top,
Top Edge on Left
Select the orientation of the original document top
edge to scan correct direction. Press [Original
Orientation] to choose orientation of the originals,
either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].
Then press [OK].
Original Orientation
6-49
Press [Position] and select the text stamp position.
Press [Detail] to set the stamp position using
numeric values, and to set the stamp angle.
Using Various Functions > Functions
Bates Stamp
Copy
Layout/Edit
Send
Advanced
Setup
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
You can add a bates stamp on the documents.
NOTE
This cannot be set when Text Stamp is set in the system settings. For details, refer to Print Job Status on page 8-21.
Copying/Printing
Item
Value
Description
Off
On
Stamp
Date, User Name, Serial Number,
Numbering, Text 1, Text 2
Set the stamp to be printed.
When [Text 1] or [Text 2] is selected, press
[Change] below and enter the text string.
If you selected [Date], press [Date Format] and
select [MM/DD/YYYY], [DD/MM/YYYY], or
[YYYY/MM/DD] to set the date format.
To set [Numbering], press [Numbering Default] and
set the starting sequence number (1 to 9999999).
Position
Font
Top Left, Top Middle, Top Right,
Middle Left, Center, Middle Right,
Bottom Left, Bottom Middle,
Bottom Right, Detail
Set the stamp position to be printed.
Size
Registered font sizes are
displayed. For details on
registering font sizes, refer to
Font (Bates Stamp) on page 8-20.
Set the font size of bates stamp.
Style
None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic
Set the font style of bates stamp.
Font
Courier, Letter Gothic
Set the font of bates stamp.
Color
Black, White
Set the color of the bates stamp.
Density
10 to 100%
(in 10% increments)
Set the density of bates stamp color.
Set the value by pressing [+] or [-].
Display
Pattern
Transparent, Clipping, Overwrite
Set the display method of the bates stamp.
Top Edge on Top,
Top Edge on Left
Select the orientation of the original document top
edge to scan correct direction. Press [Original
Orientation] to choose orientation of the originals,
either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].
Then press [OK].
Original Orientation
6-50
Press [Position] and select the text stamp position.
Press [Detail] to set the stamp position using
numeric values, and to set the stamp position when
a stamp is placed on the back side of the paper in
duplex printing.
Using Various Functions > Functions
Sending/Storing
Item
Value
Description
Off
On
Stamp
Date, User Name, Serial Number,
Numbering, Text 1, Text 2
Set the stamp to be printed.
When [Text 1] or [Text 2] is selected, press
[Change] below and enter the text string.
If you selected [Date], press [Date Format] and
select [MM/DD/YYYY], [DD/MM/YYYY], or
[YYYY/MM/DD] to set the date format.
To set [Numbering], press [Numbering Default] and
set the starting sequence number (1 to 9999999).
Position
Font
Top Left, Top Middle, Top Right,
Middle Left, Center, Middle Right,
Bottom Left, Bottom Middle,
Bottom Right, Detail
Set the stamp position to be printed.
Size
Registered font sizes are
displayed. For details on
registering font sizes, refer to
Font (Bates Stamp) on page 8-20.
Set the font size of bates stamp.
Style
None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic
Set the font style of bates stamp.
Font
Courier, Letter Gothic
Set the font of bates stamp.
Color
Black, Red, Green, Blue, Cyan,
Magenta, Yellow, White
Set the color of bates stamp.
Density
10 to 100%
(in 10% increments)
Set the density of bates stamp color.
Set the value by pressing [+] or [-].
Display
Pattern
Transparent, Clipping, Overwrite
Set the display method of bates stamp.
Top Edge on Top,
Top Edge on Left
Select the orientation of the original document top
edge to scan correct direction. Press [Original
Orientation] to choose orientation of the originals,
either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].
Then press [OK].
Original Orientation
6-51
Press [Position] and select the text stamp position.
Press [Detail] to specify the stamp position using
numeric values.
Using Various Functions > Functions
Continuous Scan
Copy
Advanced
Setup
Send
Advanced
Setup
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
Scans a large number of originals in separate batches and then produce as one job. Originals will be scanned
continuously until you press [Finish Scan].
Select [On] to use continuous scanning. To use Job Build, select [Job Build]. You can set the functions that appear on
the screen during scanning.
Job Build
When [Job Build] is selected when copying or printing, the binding orientation for finished documents can be selected
from [Binding Left], [Binding Right] or [Binding Top].
The following functions can be selected during scanning.
Item
Description
Next Copy: On Back
In duplex copying, prints on the back side if the next page is to be printed on the front side. Press [Next
Copy: On Back] to use this function.
Next Copy: On Front
In duplex copying, prints on the front side if the next page is to be printed on the back side. Press [Next
Copy: On Front] to use this function.
Sheet Insertion
Inserts a blank paper in the next page. Press [Sheet Insertion] to use this function.
6-52
Using Various Functions > Functions
Auto Image Rotation
Copy
Advanced
Setup
Automatically rotates the image 90 degrees when the sizes of the original and the loaded paper matches but the
orientations are different.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
NOTE
• You can select whether to rotate the image automatically in the default settings. For details, refer to Auto Image
Rotation (Copy) on page 8-18.
• When you have enabled this function, you can select how the images are rotated. For details, refer to Auto Image
Rotation Action on page 8-28.
Negative Image
Copy
Advanced
Setup
Inverts black and white portions of the image for printing.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
Mirror Image
Copy
Advanced
Setup
Copies the mirrored image of the original.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
6-53
Using Various Functions > Functions
Job Finish Notice
Copy
Advanced
Setup
Send
Advanced
Setup
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete.
Users can be notified of the completion of a job while working at a remote desk, saving the time spent waiting beside the
machine to finish.
Example of Job Finish Notice:
To:
[email protected]
Subject:
1234 Job end report mail
Job No.:
000002
Result:
OK
End Time:
Sat 02 Feb 2013 10:10:10
File Name:
doc27042005145608
Job Type:
Copy
1234
[00:c0:ee:d0:01:14]
NOTE
PC should be configured in advance so that E-mail can be used. For details, refer to Embedded Web Server RX on page 2-33.
E-mail can be sent to a single destination.
Item
Description
Off
Address Book
Select the notification destination from the address book.
Detail
Information on the selected destination can be viewed.
Address Book
Select the notification destination on the address book screen, then press [OK].
Address Entry
Enter E-mail address directly. Press [E-mail Address], enter the address (up to 128
characters) and press [OK].
File Name Entry
Copy
Advanced
Setup
Send
Advanced
Setup
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
Adds a file name. Additional information such as job number and date and time can also be set. You can check a job
history or job status using the file name, date and time, or job number specified here.
Press [File Name], enter the file name (up to 32 characters), and press [OK].
To add date and time, press [Date and Time]. To add job number, press [Job No.]. The added information will be
displayed in "Additional Info".
6-54
Using Various Functions > Functions
Priority Override
Copy
Advanced
Setup
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
Suspends the current job and gives a new job top priority. The suspended job resumes after the other job is finished.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
NOTE
This function is not available if current job was an override.
Priority override may not be available depending on the status of the current print job and memory usage. In this case,
try the interrupt copy.
Interrupt Copy (page 5-22)
Repeat Copy
Copy
Advanced
Setup
Enables additional copies in the desired quantity as necessary after a copy job is completed. For confidential
documents, you can set up a password for the use of Repeat Copy. In such a case, the correct password must be
entered to perform Repeat Copy.
To register a password, press [# Keys] and enter a 4-digit password.
IMPORTANT
• A Repeat Copy job is cleared when the main power switch is turned off.
• If you forget the password, Repeat Copy cannot be performed for that document. Make a note of the password
beforehand if necessary.
Repeat Copy is not available when the machine is equipped with the optional Data Security Kit.
When the maximum number of Repeat Copy jobs to retain in the document box is set to 0 (zero), this function cannot be
used. (Refer to Repeat Copy Job Retention on page 8-34.)
You can select Repeat Copy as the default setting. For details, refer to Repeat Copy on page 8-20.
Giving a file name to a copy job will facilitate identification of the data when copying. (Refer to File Name Entry on page
6-54.)
Repeat Copy
The Repeat Copy jobs are stored in the Job Box. Refer to Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs on page 5-64 to print out the
Repeat Copy jobs.
6-55
Using Various Functions > Functions
DP Read Action
Copy
Advanced
Setup
When the document processor is used, select the scanning operation for the document processor.
Item
Description
Speed Priority
Gives priority to scanning speed.
Quality Priority
Gives priority to image quality at a slightly slower scan speed.
NOTE
• This function is displayed when the document processor is installed.
• This feature cannot be used when [On] is selected in Document Guard on page 8-51.
Skip Blank Page
Copy
Advanced
Setup
When there are blank pages in a scanned document, this function skips the blank pages and prints only pages that are
not blank. When set to [High], the level at which blank paper is recognized is higher.
The machine detects blank pages, saving unnecessary printing without the need to check for blank pages in the
document.
Select [Low], [Middle] or [High] in "Blank Detection Level".
NOTE
The originals with punched holes or originals printed on a colored substrate may not be recognized as blank pages.
6-56
Using Various Functions > Functions
2-sided/Book Original
Send
Org./Sending
Data Format
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
Select the type and orientation of the binding based on the original.
Item
Book
Description
―
"2-sided/Book Original" is not set.
Binding
Binding Left/Right,
Binding Top
Select the binding orientation of originals.
Original
Orientation
Top Edge on Top,
Top Edge on Left
Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan
correct direction. Press [Original Orientation] to choose orientation of
the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left]. Then
press [OK].
Binding
Binding Left,
Binding Right
Select the binding orientation of originals.
Original
Orientation
Top Edge on Top,
Top Edge on Left
Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan
correct direction. Press [Original Orientation] to choose orientation of
the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left]. Then
press [OK].
1-sided
2-sided
Value
Sample image
Value
2-sided
Image
Binding Left/Right*
Binding Top*
Book
Binding Left
Binding Right
*
Available when the optional document processor is used.
6-57
Using Various Functions > Functions
Sending Size
Send
Org./Sending
Data Format
Custom
Box
Functions
Select size of image to be sent.
Press [Standard Sizes 1], [Standard Sizes 2], or [Others] to select the sending size.
Item
Standard Sizes 1
Value
Metric models: Same as Original Size, A3, A4, A5, A6,
B4, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm
Inch models:
Standard Sizes 2
Select from Same as Original Size or
Standard Size.
Same as Original Size, Ledger, Letter,
Legal, Statement, 11 × 15", Oficio II
Metric models: Ledger, Letter, Legal, Statement, 11 × 15",
Oficio II, 8K, 16K
Inch models:
Others
Description
Select from standard sizes except
Standard Sizes 1.
A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, Folio, 8K, 16K,
216 × 340 mm
Hagaki, Oufuku hagaki
Select from Hagaki.
Relationship between Original Size, Sending Size, and Zoom
Original Size (page 6-11), Sending Size, and Zoom (page 6-27) are related to each other. For details, see the table
below.
Original size and sending size are
the same
different
Original Size (page 6-11)
Specify as necessary.
Specify as necessary.
Sending Size
Select [Same as Original].
Select the desired size.
Zoom (page 6-27)
Select [100%] (or [Auto]).
Select [Auto].
NOTE
When you specify the sending size that is different from the original size, and select the zoom of [100%], you can send
the image as the actual size (No Zoom).
6-58
Using Various Functions > Functions
File Format
Send
Org./Sending
Data Format
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
Specify the image file format. Image quality level can also be adjusted.
Select the file format from [PDF], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XPS], and [High Comp. PDF].
When the color mode in scanning has been selected for Grayscale or Full Color, set the image quality.
If you selected [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF], you can specify encryption or PDF/A settings.
Item
PDF
*1*2
Value
Color mode
1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/Black
and White), Full Color, Grayscale, Black and White
TIFF
1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/Black
and White), Full Color, Grayscale, Black and White
JPEG
1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Full Color, Grayscale
XPS
1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/Black
and White), Full Color, Grayscale, Black and White
High Comp. PDF *1*2
Compression Ratio Priority,
Standard, Quality Priority
Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/Black
and White), Full Color, Grayscale
*1
The file format can be set (Value: [Off] / [PDF/A-1a] / [PDF/A-1b]).
*2
You can create Searchable PDF file by running OCR on the scanned document. For details, refer to OCR Text Recognition (Option) on page 6-60.
NOTE
• When [High Comp. PDF] is selected, you cannot adjust the image quality.
• You can use PDF encryption functions. For details, refer to PDF Encryption Functions on page 6-61.
• If encryption is enabled, PDF/A settings cannot be specified.
6-59
Using Various Functions > Functions
OCR Text Recognition (Option)
When PDF or high compression PDF is selected for the file format, you can create Searchable PDF file by running OCR on
the scanned document. Press [OCR Text Recognition], and then [On], select the language of the document, and press [OK].
Item
Description
Off
Do not create Searchable PDF file.
On
Create Searchable PDF file.
Select the language to extract from the options displayed on the touch panel.
Auto Image
Rotation
Rotates image automatically by recognizing text orientation.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
• This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
Scan extension kit(A) "OCR Scan Activation Kit" (page 11-7)
• If the proper language is not selected, the PDF creation time may be taken or the creation may be failed.
The default language can be changed in System Menu. For details, refer to Primary OCR Language on page 8-19.
• If the original orientation is not correct, texts on the original cannot be recognized as texts or the PDF creation time
may be taken. Check the following:
- The original orientation is correct.
- When setting the originals with the mixed orientation at once, [On] is selected for [Auto Image Rotation].
If you frequently use the originals with the mixed orientation, the default of [Auto Image Rotation] can be changed
in System Menu. For details, refer to Auto Image Rotation (OCR) on page 8-19.
• The accuracy of the text recognition depends on the original condition. The following condition may result in
decreasing the recognition accuracy.
- Repeatedly copied documents (as copied copy)
- Received faxes (with low resolution)
- Originals with the character space too narrow or wide
- Originals with the lines on the text
- Originals with the special fonts
- Binding part of the book
- A handwritten texts
6-60
Using Various Functions > Functions
PDF Encryption Functions
If you have selected PDF or High Comp. PDF for file format, you can restrict the access level for displaying, printing, and
editing PDF's by assigning a secure password.
Select [PDF] or [HighComp.PDF] in [File Format], and press [Encryption].
Items that can be set vary depending on the setting selected in "Compatibility".
When [Acrobat 3.0 or later] is selected
Item
Value
Description
Password to Open Document
Off, On
Enter the password to open the PDF file.
Press [Password], enter a password (up to 256
characters) and then press [OK].
Press [Confirmation] to enter the password again
for confirmation, and press [OK].
Password to Edit/Print Document
Off, On
Enter the password to edit the PDF file.
Press [Password], enter a password (up to 256
characters) and then press [OK].
Press [Confirmation] to enter the password again
for confirmation, and press [OK].
When you have entered the password to edit/print
document, you can specifically limit the operation.
Printing Allowed
Not Allowed, Allowed
Restricts printing of the PDF file.
Changes Allowed
Not Allowed
Disables the change to the PDF file.
Commenting
Can only add commenting.
Page Layout except extracting Pages
Can change the page layout except extracting
the pages of the PDF file.
Any except extracting Pages
Can conduct all operations except extracting the
pages of the PDF file.
Disable, Enable
Restricts the copying of text and objects on the
PDF file.
Detail
Copying of Text/
Images/Others
When [Acrobat 5.0 or later] is selected
Item
Value
Description
Password to Open Document
Off, On
Enter the password to open the PDF file.
Press [Password], enter a password (up to 256
characters) and then press [OK].
Press [Confirmation] to enter the password again
for confirmation, and press [OK].
Password to Edit/Print Document
Off, On
Enter the password to edit the PDF file.
Press [Password], enter a password (up to 256
characters) and then press [OK].
Press [Confirmation] to enter the password again
for confirmation, and press [OK].
When you have entered the password to edit/print
document, you can specifically limit the operation.
Not Allowed
Disables the printing of PDF file.
Allowed (Low Resolution only)
Can print the PDF file only in low resolution.
Allowed
Can print the PDF file in original resolution.
Not Allowed
Disables the change to the PDF file.
Inserting/Deleting/Rotating Pages
Can only insert, delete, and rotate the pages of
the PDF file.
Commenting
Can only add commenting.
Any except extracting Pages
Can conduct all operations except extracting the
pages of the PDF file.
Disable, Enable
Restricts the copying of text and objects on the
PDF file.
Detail
Printing Allowed
Changes Allowed
Copying of Text/
Images/Others
6-61
Using Various Functions > Functions
File Separation
Send
Org./Sending
Data Format
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
Creates several files by dividing scanned original data page by page, and sends the files.
(Value: [Off] / [Each Page])
Press [Each Page] to set File Separation.
NOTE
A three-digit serial number such as "abc_001.pdf, abc_002.pdf..." is attached to the end of the file name.
Scan Resolution, Resolution
Send
Color/
Image Quality
Custom
Box
Functions
Color/
Image Quality
USB
Memory
Functions
Select fineness of scanning resolution.
The selectable resolution is [600 x 600dpi], [400 x 400dpi Ultra Fine], [300 x 300dpi], [200 x 400dpi Super Fine],
[200 x 200dpi Fine], or [200 x 100dpi Normal].
NOTE
The larger the number, the better the image resolution. However, better resolution also means larger file sizes and
longer send times.
E-mail Subject/Body
Send
Advanced
Setup
Custom
Box
Functions
Adds subject and body when sending a document.
Press [Subject] / [Body] to enter the E-mail subject/body.
NOTE
• The subject can include up to 60 characters, and the body can include up to 500 characters.
• Press [Body 1], [Body 2], or [Body 3] to enter stored text for the body text. For details on registering templates, refer
to E-mail Subject/Body on page 8-19.
6-62
Using Various Functions > Functions
Send and Print
Send
Advanced
Setup
Prints a copy of the document being sent.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
Send
Send and Print
Send and Store
Send
Advanced
Setup
Stores a copy of the document being sent in a Custom Box.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
NOTE
When [On] is selected, select the Custom Box in which the copy is to be stored.
If a password entry screen for the Custom Box appears, enter the password.
You can view information on the selected Custom Box by pressing [Detail].
Send
Send and Store
6-63
Using Various Functions > Functions
FTP Encrypted TX
Send
Advanced
Setup
Custom
Box
Functions
Encrypts images when sending via FTP. Encryption secures the document transmission.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
NOTE
You can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
d-Copia 3500MF plus
3500
3500
d-Copia 4500MF plus
4500
4500
d-Copia 5500MF plus
5500
5500
Click [Security Settings], and then [Network Security] in the Embedded Web Server RX. Be sure that "SSL" of Secure
Protocol Settings is "On" and one or more effective encryption are selected in Client side settings.
For details, refer to the Embedded Web Server RX User Guide.
File Size Confirmation
Send
Advanced
Setup
Custom
Box
Functions
Checks the file size before sending the original.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
Delete after Printed
Custom
Box
Functions
Automatically deletes a document from the box once printing is complete.
Delete after Transmitted
Custom
Box
Functions
Automatically deletes a document from the box once transmission is complete.
6-64
Using Various Functions > Functions
Storing Size
Custom
Box
Functions
USB
Memory
Functions
Select size of image to be stored.
Press [Standard Sizes 1], [Standard Sizes 2], or [Others] to select the storing size.
Item
Standard Sizes 1
Value
Metric models: Same as Original Size, A3, A4, A5, A6,
B4, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm
Inch models:
Standard Sizes 2
Select from Same as Original Size or
Standard Size.
Same as Original Size, Ledger, Letter,
Legal, Statement, 11 × 15", Oficio II
Metric models: Ledger, Letter, Legal, Statement, 11 × 15",
Oficio II, 8K, 16K
Inch models:
Others
Description
Select from standard sizes except
Standard Sizes 1.
A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, Folio, 8K, 16K,
216 × 340 mm
Hagaki, Oufuku hagaki
Select from Hagaki.
Relationship between Original Size, Storing Size, and Zoom
Original Size (page 6-11), Storing Size, and Zoom (page 6-27) are related to each other. For details, see the table below.
Original Size and the size you wish to
store as are
the same
different
Original Size (page 6-11)
Specify as necessary.
Specify as necessary.
Storing Size
Select [Same as Original].
Select the desired size.
Zoom (page 6-27)
Select [100%] (or [Auto]).
Select [Auto].
NOTE
When you select Storing Size that is different from Original Size, and select the Zoom [100%], you can store the image
as the actual size (No Zoom).
Encrypted PDF Password
USB
Memory
Functions
Enter the preassigned password to print the PDF data.
Press [Password] to enter the Password, and press [OK].
NOTE
For details on entering the password, refer to Character Entry Method on page 11-10.
6-65
Using Various Functions > Functions
JPEG/TIFF Print
USB
Memory
Functions
Select the image size when printing JPEG or TIFF files.
Select [Fit to Paper Size], [Image Resolution] or [Fit to Print Resolution].
Item
Description
Fit to Paper Size
Fits the image size to the selected paper size.
Image Resolution
Prints at resolution of the actual image.
Fit to Print Resolution
Fits the image size to the print resolution.
JPEG
TIFF
XPS Fit to Page
USB
Memory
Functions
Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the selected paper size when printing XPS file.
XPS
6-66
Using Various Functions > Functions Available in the Home Screen
Functions Available in the Home Screen
Send to Me (E-mail)
When user login is enabled, the document is sent to the E-mail address of the logged in user.
NOTE
• To use this function, the function icon must be displayed in the home screen.
Editing the Home Screen (page 3-5)
• An E-mail address must be set in user login for the user who logs in.
Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-8)
Send to Me from Box (E-mail)
When user login is enabled, documents in the user box are sent to the E-mail address of the logged in user.
NOTE
• To use this function, the function icon must be displayed in the home screen.
Editing the Home Screen (page 3-5)
• An E-mail address must be set in user login for the user who logs in.
Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-8)
• When this function is used, functions other than transmission cannot be used.
6-67
Using Various Functions > Functions Available in the Home Screen
6-68
7
Status/Job Cancel
This chapter explains the following topics:
Checking Job Status .......................................................................................................................................... 7-2
Details of the Status Screens ................................................................................................................... 7-4
Checking Detailed Information of Jobs .................................................................................................... 7-9
Checking Job History ........................................................................................................................................ 7-11
Checking the Detailed Information of Histories ...................................................................................... 7-13
Sending the Log History ........................................................................................................................ 7-13
Pause and Resumption of Jobs ....................................................................................................................... 7-14
Canceling of Jobs ............................................................................................................................................ 7-14
Priority Override for Waiting Jobs .................................................................................................................... 7-15
Reordering Print Jobs ...................................................................................................................................... 7-16
Device/Communication .................................................................................................................................... 7-17
Removing the USB Memory .................................................................................................................. 7-18
Canceling FAX Communication ............................................................................................................. 7-19
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Paper/Supplies) ......................................................... 7-20
7-1
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
Checking Job Status
Check the status of jobs being processed or waiting to be printed.
Available Status Screens
The processing and waiting statuses of jobs are displayed as a list on the touch panel in four different screens - Printing
Jobs, Sending Jobs, Storing Jobs, and Scheduled Jobs.
The following job statuses are available.
Status Display
Print Job Status
Send Job Status
Store Job Status
Scheduled Job
Job status to be displayed
•
Copy
•
Printer
•
FAX reception
•
i-FAX reception
•
E-mail reception
•
Printing from Document Box
•
Printing data from removable memory
•
Application
•
Job Report/List
•
FAX transmission
•
i-FAX transmission
•
E-mail
•
Folder transmission
•
Application
•
Multiple destination
•
Sending Job FAX using Delayed transmission
•
Scan
•
FAX
•
i-FAX
•
Printer
•
Join Box Document
•
Copy Box Document
•
Sending Job FAX using Delayed transmission
7-2
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
Displaying Status Screens
1
Display the screen.
2
Press the tab of the job you want to check.
Press the [Status/Job Cancel] key.
To check the scheduled transmission job, press [Sending Jobs] and then [Scheduled Job].
Status
Scheduled Job
Status
Job Type
Job No.
438
Log
All
Accepted Time Type
14:47
Job Name
User Name
Status
InProcess
[email protected]
1/1
Cancel
Printing Jobs
Priority
Override
Sending Jobs
Detail
Storing Jobs
Device/
Communicate
Paper/
Supplies
Print Job Status Screen (page 7-4)
Send Job Status screen (page 7-6)
Store Job Status screen (page 7-7)
Scheduled Job Status Screen (page 7-8)
7-3
Close
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
Details of the Status Screens
NOTE
You can show the job statuses of all users, or only the statuses of your own jobs. For details, refer to Display Status/
Log on page 8-25. This setting can also be changed from Embedded Web Server RX.
For details, refer to the Embedded Web Server RX User Guide.
Print Job Status Screen
Status
Status
Job Type
Job No.
Log
7
All
Accepted Time Type
Job Name
doc20081010091510
AAAAA
Waiting
doc20081010092015
BBBBB
Waiting
000002 10/10 09:15
000003 10/10 09:20
1 2 3
8
9
Printing Jobs
No.
Status
InProcess
doc20081010091015
Pause All
Print Jobs
User Name
AAAAA
000001 10/10 09:10
4
10
5
11
Priority
Override
Cancel
Sending Jobs
Storing Jobs
6
12
Move Up
Detail
Device/
Communicate
Paper/
Supplies
Item
1/1
Close
Description
1
Job No.
Acceptance No. of job
2
Accepted Time
Accepted Time of job
3
Type
Icons that indicate the job type
Copy job
Printer job
Job from Document Box
FAX reception
i-FAX reception
E-mail reception
Data from removable memory
Application
Report/List
4
Job Name
Job Name or file name
5
User Name
User Name for the executed job
6
Status
7
[
] of "Job Type"
Status of job
InProcess:
The status before starting to print.
Printing:
Printing
Waiting:
Print Waiting
Pause:
Pausing print job or error
Canceling:
Canceling the job
Only selected type of jobs is displayed.
7-4
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
No.
Item
Description
8
[Pause All Print
Jobs]
Pauses all the printing jobs. By pressing this key again, the printing
jobs will be resumed.
9
[Cancel]
Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press this key.
10
[Priority Override]
Select the job to be overridden, and press this key. (Refer to
Priority Override for Waiting Jobs on page 7-15.)
11
[Move Up]
In the list, select the job that you want to move up the job queue
and press this key. (Refer to Reordering Print Jobs on page 7-16.)
12
[Detail]*
Select the job whose detailed information you want to display from
the list, and press this key. (Refer to Checking Detailed Information
of Jobs on page 7-9.)
You can press [Change] in “Copies” in the detailed information
screen to change the number of copies that are printed.
* This item is displayed when user login administration is enabled and the user has logged in as administrator.
NOTE
The job name and user name can be changed to other information if needed. For details, refer to Customize Status
Display on page 8-26. This setting can also be changed from Embedded Web Server RX. For details, refer to the
Embedded Web Server RX User Guide.
7-5
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
Send Job Status screen
Status
Scheduled Job
Status
Job Type
Job No.
438
7
All
Accepted Time Type
14:47
1
Job Name
Log
User Name
Status
InProcess
[email protected]
2 3
4
5
6
1/1
Cancel
Printing Jobs
No.
8
Priority
Override
Sending Jobs
10
9
Detail
Storing Jobs
Paper/
Supplies
Device/
Communicate
Item
Close
Description
1
Job No.
Acceptance No. of job
2
Accepted Time
Accepted Time of job
3
Type
Icons that indicate the job type
Sending Job FAX
Sending Job i-FAX
Sending Job E-mail
Sending Job Folder
Sending Job Application
Multi Sending
4
Destination
Destination (Either destination name, FAX number, E-mail address,
or server name)
5
User Name
User Name for the executed job
6
Status
Status of job
InProcess:
The status before starting sending such as during
scanning originals
Sending:
Sending
Waiting:
Waiting Sending
Canceling:
Canceling the job
Pause:
Pausing the job
7
[
Only selected type of jobs is displayed.
8
[Cancel]
Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press this key.
9
[Priority Override]
Select the job to be overridden, and press this key.*
Only displayed when the optional fax kit is installed.
10
[Detail]*
Select the job whose detailed information you want to display from
the list, and press this key. (Refer to Checking Detailed Information
of Jobs on page 7-9.)
] of "Job Type"
* This item is displayed when user login administration is enabled and the user has logged in as administrator.
NOTE
The address and user name can be changed to other information if needed. For details, refer to Customize Status
Display on page 8-26. This setting can also be changed from Embedded Web Server RX. For details, refer to the
Embedded Web Server RX User Guide.
7-6
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
Store Job Status screen
Status
Status
Job Type
Job No.
Log
7
All
Accepted Time Type
438
1
14:47
Job Name
User Name
Status
doc20070225144758
2 3
InProcess
4
5
6
1/1
Cancel
Printing Jobs
No.
8
Detail
Sending Jobs
Storing Jobs
Paper/
Supplies
Device/
Communicate
Item
9
Close
Description
1
Job No.
Acceptance No. of job
2
Accepted Time
Accepted Time of job
3
Type
Icons that indicate the job type
Storing Job Scan
Storing Job Printer
Storing Job FAX
Storing Job i-FAX
Join Box Document
Copy Box Document
4
Job Name
Job name or file name is displayed.
5
User Name
User Name for the executed job
6
Status
] of "Job Type"
Status of job
InProcess:
The status before starting to save such as during
scanning originals
Storing:
Storing Data
Canceling:
Canceling the job
Pause:
Pausing the job
7
[
Only selected type of jobs is displayed.
8
[Cancel]
Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press this key.
9
[Detail]*
Select the job whose detailed information you want to display from
the list, and press this key. (Refer to Checking Detailed Information
of Jobs on page 7-9.)
* This item is displayed when user login administration is enabled and the user has logged in as administrator.
NOTE
The job name and user name can be changed to other information if needed. For details, refer to Customize Status
Display on page 8-26. This setting can also be changed from Embedded Web Server RX. For details, refer to the
Embedded Web Server RX User Guide.
7-7
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
Scheduled Job Status Screen
Status
Status
Scheduled Job
Job No. Accepted Time Type
0007
Destination
9:30
1
Log
User Name
Start Time
A OFFICE
2 3
12:00
4
5
6
1/1
Cancel
㪧㫉㫀㫅㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㪡㫆㪹㫊
No.
7
Start Now
㪪㪼㫅㪻㫀㫅㪾㩷㪡㫆㪹㫊
8
Detail
㪪㫋㫆㫉㫀㫅㪾㩷㪡㫆㪹㫊
Device/
Communicate
Item
9
㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㪆
㪪㫌㫇㫇㫃㫀㪼㫊
Close
Description
1
Job No.
Acceptance No. of job
2
Accepted Time
Accepted Time of job
3
Type
Icons that indicate the job type
Storing Job FAX
4
Destination
Destination (Either destination name, FAX number, or No. of
broadcast items)
5
User Name
User Name for the executed job
6
Start Time
Time to start the scheduled job
7
[Cancel]
Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press this key.
8
[Start Now]
Select the job you want to send immediately from the list, and
press this key.
9
[Detail]*
Select the job whose detailed information you want to display from
the list, and press this key. (Refer to Checking Detailed Information
of Jobs on page 7-9.)
* This item is displayed when user login administration is enabled and the user has logged in as administrator.
7-8
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
Checking Detailed Information of Jobs
Check the detailed information of each job.
NOTE
This is displayed when user login administration is enabled and the user has logged in as administrator.
1
Display the screen.
2
Check the information.
Referring to Details of the Status Screens on page 7-4, display the screen.
1 Select the job whose details you wish to check from the list, and press [Detail].
Status
Scheduled Job
Status
Job Type
Job No.
Accepted Time Type
438
Log
All
14:47
Job Name
User Name
Status
InProcess
[email protected]
1/1
Cancel
Priority
Override
Printing Jobs
Detail
Sending Jobs
Storing Jobs
Device/
Communicate
Paper/
Supplies
Close
Detailed information of the selected job is displayed.
Detail Job No.:
000080
Job No.:
Status/Destination:
000080
Detail
Processing
Job Type:
Destination:
Sending Job - E-mail
1
User Name:
User1
Job Name:
doc20070404115151
Accepted Time:
1/2
10:10:10
Close
Use [
] or [
Detail Job No.:
] to see the next or previous page of information.
000080
Job No.:
000080
Job Type:
Sending Job - E-mail
Status/Destination:
Detail
Processing
Destination:
1
User Name:
User1
Job Name:
doc20070404115151
Accepted Time:
1/2
10:10:10
Close
In Sending Jobs, you can check the destination by pressing [Detail] in "Destination" or "Status/
Destination".
7-9
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
000081
Detail Job No.:
Job Type
All
Type
Destination
Status
doc20070404131415
Sending
User01
Waiting
1/1
㪛㪼㫋㪸㫀㫃
Close
"Status/Destination" is displayed when address is selected. Press [Detail] to display the list. Press
[ ] or [ ], select a destination and press [Detail]. Information on the selected job is displayed for
checking.
2 To exit from the detailed information, press [Close].
7-10
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History
Checking Job History
Check the history of completed jobs.
NOTE
Job history is also available by Embedded Web Server RX or Network Print Monitor from the computer.
You can show the job log of all users, or only your own job log. For details, refer to Display Status/Log on page 8-25.
This setting can also be changed from Embedded Web Server RX. For details, refer to the Embedded Web Server RX
User Guide.
Available Job History Screens
The job histories are displayed separately in three screens - Printing Jobs, Sending Jobs, and Storing Jobs.
The following job histories are available.
Screen
Print Job Log
Send Job Log
Store Job Log
Job histories to be displayed
•
Copy
•
Printer
•
FAX reception
•
i-FAX reception
•
E-mail reception
•
Printing from Document Box
•
Job Report/List
•
Printing data from removable memory
•
FAX
•
i-FAX
•
E-mail
•
Folder
•
Application
•
Multiple destination
•
Scan
•
FAX
•
i-FAX
•
Printer
•
Join Box Document
•
Copy Box Document
7-11
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History
Displaying Job History Screen
1
Display the screen.
2
Press the tab of the job you want to check, and press the [Log]
tab.
Press the [Status/Job Cancel] key.
Status
Status
Job Type
Job No.
2
Log
All
End Date
000080 01/25 14:14
Type
Job Name
User Name
Result
doc20070225141427
Completed
000081 01/25 14:22
doc20070225142253
Completed
000082 01/25 14:23
doc20070225142310
Completed
000083 01/25 14:24
doc20070225142458
Error
000084 01/25 14:30
doc20070225143034
Completed
1
Printing Jobs
Sending Jobs
Storing Jobs
1/1
Detail
Device/
Communicate
Paper/
Supplies
Close
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password
and press [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. The factory
default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
d-Copia 3500MF plus
3500
3500
d-Copia 4500MF plus
4500
4500
d-Copia 5500MF plus
5500
5500
7-12
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History
Checking the Detailed Information of Histories
Check the detailed information of each history.
1
Display the screen.
2
Check the information.
Referring to Displaying Job History Screen on page 7-12, display the screen.
1 Select the job to check details from the list, and press [Detail].
Detailed information of the selected job is displayed.
Status
Status
Job Type
Job No.
Log
All
End Date
000080 01/25 14:14
Type
Job Name
User Name
Result
doc20070225141427
Completed
000081 01/25 14:22
doc20070225142253
Completed
000082 01/25 14:23
doc20070225142310
Completed
000083 01/25 14:24
doc20070225142458
Error
000084 01/25 14:30
doc20070225143034
Completed
2
1
Printing Jobs
Sending Jobs
Storing Jobs
Device/
Communicate
1/1
Detail
Paper/
Supplies
Close
NOTE
To check the information of the next/previous page, press [
] or [
].
2 To exit from the detailed information, press [Close].
Sending the Log History
You can send the log history by E-mail. You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent automatically
whenever a set number of jobs is reached. For details, refer to Sending Log History on page 8-39.
7-13
Status/Job Cancel > Pause and Resumption of Jobs
Pause and Resumption of Jobs
Pause/resume all printing jobs in printing/waiting.
1
Display the screen.
2
Press [Pause All Print Jobs] on the printing jobs status screen.
Press the [Status/Job Cancel] key.
Printing is paused.
Status
Status
Job No.
Log
All
Job Type
Accepted Time Type
Job Name
doc20081010091510
AAAAA
Waiting
doc20081010092015
BBBBB
Waiting
000002 10/10 09:15
000003 10/10 09:20
Priority
Override
Cancel
Printing Jobs
Status
InProcess
doc20081010091015
Pause All
Print Jobs
User Name
AAAAA
000001 10/10 09:10
Sending Jobs
Storing Jobs
Move Up
Detail
Device/
Communicate
Paper/
Supplies
1/1
Close
When resuming the printing of jobs that have been paused, press [Resume All Print Jobs].
Canceling of Jobs
Cancel all printing jobs in printing/waiting.
1
Display the screen.
2
Select the job to be canceled from the list, and press [Cancel].
Press the [Status/Job Cancel] key.
Status
Status
Job No.
1
Accepted Time Type
Job Name
User Name
Status
000001 10/10 09:10
doc20081010091015
AAAAA
InProcess
000002 10/10 09:15
doc20081010091510
AAAAA
Waiting
000003 10/10 09:20
doc20081010092015
BBBBB
Waiting
Pause All
Print Jobs
2
Printing Jobs
3
Log
All
Job Type
Cancel
Sending Jobs
Priority
Override
Storing Jobs
Move Up
Detail
Device/
Communicate
Paper/
Supplies
1/1
Close
Press [Yes] in the confirmation screen.
7-14
Status/Job Cancel > Priority Override for Waiting Jobs
Priority Override for Waiting Jobs
Priority Override function suspends the current job and prints the job in waiting first.
1
Display the screen.
2
Press [Printing Jobs].
3
Select the job to be given priority, and press [Priority Override].
Press the [Status/Job Cancel] key.
Status
Status
Job Type
Job No.
Log
All
Accepted Time Type
Job Name
doc20081010091510
AAAAA
Waiting
doc20081010092015
BBBBB
Waiting
000002 10/10 09:15
000003 10/10 09:20
Status
InProcess
doc20081010091015
2
User Name
AAAAA
000001 10/10 09:10
1/1
3
1
Pause All
Print Jobs
Printing Jobs
4
Cancel
Sending Jobs
Priority
Override
Storing Jobs
Move Up
Detail
Device/
Communicate
Paper/
Supplies
Close
Press [Yes] in the confirmation screen.
The current job in printing is suspended, and the job for override printing starts.
When the Priority Override is completed, the printing job that has been suspended will be
resumed.
7-15
Status/Job Cancel > Reordering Print Jobs
Reordering Print Jobs
This function allows you to select a queued print job and raise its output priority.
1
Display the screen.
2
Press [Printing Jobs].
3
Select the job to be assigned a higher priority and press
[Move Up].
Press the [Status/Job Cancel] key.
The priority of the selected job is increased by 1.
To further raise the job's priority, press [Move Up] again. Each time you press [Move Up], the
priority increases by 1.
Status
Status
Job Type
Job No.
Log
All
Accepted Time Type
000001 10/10 09:10
Job Name
Status
AAAAA
InProcess
000002 10/10 09:15
doc20081010091510
AAAAA
Waiting
000003 10/10 09:20
doc20081010092015
BBBBB
Waiting
000004 10/10 09:25
doc20081010092515
BBBBB
Waiting
2
1
User Name
doc20081010091015
Pause All
Print Jobs
Printing Jobs
1/1
3
Cancel
Sending Jobs
Priority
Override
Storing Jobs
Move Up
Detail
Device/
Communicate
Paper/
Supplies
7-16
Close
Status/Job Cancel > Device/Communication
Device/Communication
Configure the devices/lines installed or connected to this machine or check their status. You can also control devices
depending on their status.
1
Display the screen.
1 Press the [Status/Job Cancel] key.
2 Press [Device/Communicate].
Status
Scanner
Hard Disk
Ready.
Overwriting...
Printer
Ready.
Removable Memory
2GB/16GB
Format
Remove
FAX Port 2
FAX Port 1
Receiving...
Line Off
Receiving...
Manual RX
FAX
Line Off
i-FAX
Log
Printing Jobs
Sending Jobs
Storing Jobs
Device/
Communicate
Check New FAX
Paper/
Supplies
Close
The screen to check the status or configure the devices is displayed.
2
Check the status.
The items you can check are described below.
"Scanner"
The status of an original scanning or the error information (paper jam, opened cover, etc.) is
displayed.
"Printer"
Error information such as paper jam, out of toner, or out of paper, and status such as waiting or
printing are displayed.
"Hard Disk"
The information such as formatting, overwriting for erasure, and error occurrence is displayed.
"Removable Memory (USB Memory)"
•
The usage and capacity of the external media connected to this machine are displayed.
•
Press [Format] to format external media.
IMPORTANT
When [Format] is pressed, all data in the external media is erased.
•
Press [Remove] to safely remove the external media. For details, refer to Removing the
USB Memory on page 7-18.
7-17
Status/Job Cancel > Device/Communication
"FAX Port 1", "FAX Port 2"
•
The information such as sending/receiving and dialing is displayed.
•
Press [Line Off] to cancel a fax in sending/receiving. For details, refer to Canceling FAX
Communication on page 7-19.
•
Press [Manual RX] to start receiving fax. Use this function when you want to talk to the
sender before receiving the fax originals. For details, refer to the FAX Operation Guide.
•
Press [Log] to display the fax transmission history. For details, refer to the FAX Operation
Guide.
"i-FAX"
When [Check New FAX] is pressed, the machine connects to the mail server and starts
reception of any new i-faxes.
Removing the USB Memory
Follow the steps below to remove USB memory safely.
1
Display the screen.
2
Press the [Device/Communicate] tab.
3
Press [Remove] in "Removable Memory".
Press the [Status/Job Cancel] key.
When "Removable memory can be safely removed." is displayed, remove the USB memory.
Status
Scanner
Hard Disk
Ready.
Overwriting...
Printer
Ready.
Removable Memory
2GB/16GB
Format
Remove
2
FAX Port 2
FAX Port 1
Receiving...
Line Off
FAX
Printing Jobs
Receiving...
Manual RX
1
Log
Sending Jobs
Line Off
Storing Jobs
i-FAX
Device/
Communicate
Paper/
Supplies
7-18
Check New FAX
Close
Status/Job Cancel > Device/Communication
Canceling FAX Communication
Cancel fax communication.
1
Display the screen.
2
Press the [Device/Communicate] tab.
3
Press [Line Off] in "FAX Port 1" or "FAX Port 2".
Press the [Status/Job Cancel] key.
Status
Scanner
Hard Disk
Ready.
Overwriting...
Printer
Ready.
Removable Memory
2GB/16GB
Format
FAX Port 1
Receiving...
Line Off
FAX
Printing Jobs
4
Remove
FAX Port 2
2
Manual RX
Log
Sending Jobs
1
Storing Jobs
2
Receiving...
Line Off
i-FAX
Device/
Communicate
Paper/
Supplies
Check New FAX
Close
Press [Yes] in the confirmation screen.
The line is disconnected, and the fax communication is canceled.
7-19
Status/Job Cancel > Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Paper/Supplies)
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner
and Paper (Paper/Supplies)
Check the remaining amount of toner, paper, and staples on the touch panel.
1
Display the screen.
1 Press the [Status/Job Cancel] key.
2 Press [Paper/Supplies].
Status
Toner Information
Toner
Paper
Printing Jobs
2
Others
Size
Status
Black (K)
Waste Toner OK
100%
Sending Jobs
A3
A3
A4
A4
A4
A4
Type
Status
Plain
Plain
Plain
Plain
Plain
Plain
Storing Jobs
30%
30%
30%
30%
0%
30%
Device/
Communication
Type
Staple A
Paper/Supplies
Status
OK
Close
Check the status.
Check the remaining amount of toner and the status of the waste toner box in "Toner
Information", and the remaining amount of paper in each paper source in "Paper".
The items you can check are described below.
"Toner Information"
Remaining amount of toner
You can check the remaining amount of toner level from 100 to 0%
(1% increments).
Status of the waste toner box
You can check the status of waste toner box.
"Paper"
You can check the size, orientation, type, and remaining amount of paper in each paper
source. The remaining amount of paper is shown by 5 levels as 100, 80, 50, 30, and 0%,
however, the paper in the multi purpose tray is shown by 2 levels as 100% and 0%.
If the remaining amount of paper cannot be detected, "----" appears.
"Others"
You can check the status of staples and punch waste box.
NOTE
If the optional document finisher (1,000-sheet finisher or 4,000-sheet finisher) and punch
unit are installed, the "Others" section provides the status of the punch waste box and
whether or not staples are available.
7-20
8
Setup and Registration
(System Menu)
This chapter explains the following topics:
System Menu ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-2
Operation Method .................................................................................................................................... 8-2
System Menu Settings ............................................................................................................................. 8-4
Cassette/MP Tray Settings ...................................................................................................................... 8-7
Common Settings .................................................................................................................................... 8-9
Home ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-28
Copy ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-28
Send ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-29
Document Box/Removable Memory ...................................................................................................... 8-34
FAX ........................................................................................................................................................ 8-35
Printer .................................................................................................................................................... 8-35
Report .................................................................................................................................................... 8-37
System/Network ..................................................................................................................................... 8-43
Edit Destination ...................................................................................................................................... 8-53
User Login/Job Accounting .................................................................................................................... 8-53
User Property ......................................................................................................................................... 8-54
Date/Timer/Energy Saver ...................................................................................................................... 8-54
Adjustment/Maintenance ....................................................................................................................... 8-57
Internet ................................................................................................................................................... 8-60
Application ............................................................................................................................................. 8-60
8-1
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
System Menu
Configure settings related to overall machine operation.
Operation Method
System Menu is operated as follows:
1
Display the screen.
2
Select a function.
Press the [System Menu] key.
System Menu
Displays the
System Menu
items.
Quick Setup Wizard
Cassette/MP Tray Settings
Common Settings
Home
Copy
Send
Document Box/Removable
Memory
FAX
Printer
Report
System/Network
1/2
Close
Scrolls up and down
when the list of
values cannot be
displayed in its
entirety on a single
screen.
Date/Timer/Energy Saver
Displays setting
items
Press the key of a
function to display
the setting
screen.
Date/Time:
Change
Date Format:
Change
Time Zone:
Change
Auto Panel Reset:
Change
Auto Sleep:
Change
Auto Error Clear:
Change
Low Power Timer:
Change
Sleep Timer:
Change
Panel Reset Timer:
Change
1/2
Close
8-2
Returns to the
previous screen.
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
3
Configure the settings.
Date/Timer/Energy Saver - Time Zone
㪪㪼㫋㩷㫋㫀㫄㪼㩷㫑㫆㫅㪼㪅
㪪㪼㫃㪼㪺㫋㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫃㫆㪺㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫅㪼㪸㫉㪼㫊㫋㩷㫐㫆㫌㪅
Time Zone
-12:00 International Date Line West
Enter a setting by
selecting it.
-11:00 Samoa
-11:00 Universal Coordinated Time-11
1/16
-10:00 Hawaii
-09:00 Alaska
Returns to the
previous screen
without making
any changes.
-08:00 Baja California
Cancel
OK
Accepts the settings
and exits.
NOTE
In order to change settings that require administer privileges, you must log in with
administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
d-Copia 3500MF plus
3500
3500
d-Copia 4500MF plus
4500
4500
d-Copia 5500MF plus
5500
5500
Refer to System Menu Settings on the following page and configure as needed.
8-3
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
System Menu Settings
This section explains the functions that can be configured in System Menu. To configure the settings, select the item in
System Menu and press the setting item. For details on each function, see the table below.
Item
Description
Reference
Page
Quick Setup Wizard
The Quick Setup Wizard configures Fax and Energy Saver settings.
page 2-28
Cassette/MP Tray Settings
Select paper size and media type for Cassettes and multi purpose tray.
page 8-7
Cassette 1 (to 5)
Select type of paper in Cassette 1 (to 5).
page 8-7
MP Tray Setting
Select type of paper in multi purpose tray.
page 8-8
Configure overall machine operation.
page 8-9
Language
Select the language displayed on the touch panel.
page 8-9
Default Screen
Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen).
page 8-9
Sound
Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations.
page 8-9
Originals Setup
Configure settings for originals and paper.
page 8-10
Measurement
Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions.
page 8-14
Error Handling
Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has occurred.
page 8-14
Paper Output
Select output tray respectively for copy jobs, print jobs from Document
Box, computers, and FAX RX data.
page 8-16
Orientation Confirmation
Check the orientation of original.
page 8-16
Function Defaults
Defaults are the values automatically set after the warm-up is completed
or the [Reset] key is pressed.
page 8-17
Common Settings
Set the defaults for available settings such as copying and sending. Setting
the frequently-used values as defaults makes subsequent jobs easier.
IMPORTANT
If you want to enable the changed defaults immediately, move to the
function screen and press the [Reset] key.
Keyboard Layout
Change the layout of the touch panel keyboard used to enter characters.
page 8-20
System Stamp
Configure settings for header, footer, and stamp.
page 8-20
Manual Staple
Configure settings for manual staple.
page 8-24
Offset Documents by Job
Select whether to offset documents by Job.
page 8-24
Low Toner Alert Level
Set the amount of remaining toner to alert low toner.
page 8-25
Offset One Page Documents
Set whether one-page documents are sorted.
page 8-25
Display Status/Log
Set the display method of the Status/Log.
page 8-25
Message Banner Print
Select whether the confirmation screen appears before each sheet is
printed when printing multiple banner sheets.
page 8-25
Customize Status Display
Select the item to use for the printing jobs status.
page 8-26
Function Key Usage
Configure settings for function key on the operation panel.
page 8-26
Message Board Settings
Configure settings for message board.
page 8-27
Remote Printing
Configure settings for remote printing.
page 8-27
Home
Configure settings for Home screen.
page 3-4
Copy
Configure settings for copying functions.
page 8-28
8-4
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Description
Reference
Page
Send
Configure settings for sending functions.
page 8-29
Document Box/Removable Memory
Configure settings related to the Custom Box, Job Box, FAX Box, and
Polling Box. For details on FAX Box and Polling Box, refer to the FAX
Operation Guide.
page 8-34
FAX
Configure settings for fax functions. For details, refer to the FAX
Operation Guide.
―
Printer
When printing from computers, settings are generally made on the
application software screen. However, the following settings are available
for configuring the defaults to customize the machine.
page 8-35
Report
Print reports to check the machine settings, status, and history. Settings
for printing reports can also be configured.
page 8-37
Configure settings for printing reports and histories.
page 8-37
Print Report
Admin Report Settings
Refer to the
FAX
Operation
Guide.
Result Report Settings
page 8-38
Sending Log History
page 8-39
Login History Settings
page 8-40
Device Log History Settings
page 8-41
Secure Comm. Error Log
page 8-42
System/Network
Configure machine system settings.
page 8-43
Network
Configure network settings.
page 8-43
Optional Network
Configure settings for the optional Network Interface Kit or Wireless
Interface Kit.
page 8-47
Network Interface (Send)
Specify the network interface card to be used for send function and
connecting to external address book.
page 8-49
Security Level
The Security Level setting is primarily a menu option used by service
personnel for maintenance work. There is no need for customers to use
this menu.
―
Interface Block Setting
This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with
external devices such as USB hosts or optional interfaces.
page 8-50
Data Security
Configure settings for data stored in the machine's hard disk and memory.
page 8-50
Document Guard
When the optional Printed Document Guard Kit is installed, careless
copying and sending of documents that contain confidential or personal
information is prevented.
page 8-51
Optional Function
You can activate the optional applications installed on this machine.
page 8-52
Restart Entire Device
Restart the CPU without turning the main power switch off. Use this to
deal with any unstable operation by the machine. (Same as the computer
restart.)
page 8-52
Configure settings for Address Book and One Touch Key. For details on
Address Book, refer to Registering Destinations in the Address Book on
page 3-45, and for details on One Touch Key, refer to Adding a
Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) on page 3-53.
page 8-53
Edit Destination
8-5
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Description
Reference
Page
User Login/Job Accounting
Configure settings related to machine management. For details on User
Login, refer to User Login on page 9-4, and for details on Job Accounting,
refer to Job Accounting on page 9-29 .
―
User Property
Check and change information related to the logged in user.
page 8-54
Date/Timer/Energy Saver
Configure settings related to the date and time.
page 8-54
Adjustment/Maintenance
Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance.
page 8-57
Internet
Configure Internet settings for applications.
page 8-60
Application
Configure settings for the optional applications installed on this machine.
page 8-60
8-6
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Cassette/MP Tray Settings
Select paper size and media type for Cassettes and multi purpose tray.
Cassette1 (to 5)
Cassette/MP Tray Settings
To fix the type of paper to be used in cassettes 1 or 2 or the optional paper feeders (cassettes 3 to 5), specify the paper
size.
Selection Item
Paper Size
Auto
Selectable Size/Type
Paper size is automatically detected and selected.
Value: Metric, Inch
Standard Sizes 1*1
Available options are as follows:
Value
Metric models: A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, Folio, 216 x 340 mm
Inch models:
Standard Sizes 2*1
Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement, 12 x 18", Oficio II
Select from standard sizes except Standard Sizes 1.
Value
Metric models: Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement, 12 x 18", Oficio II,
8K, 16K-R, 16K
Inch models:
Size Entry*2
A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, Folio, 216 x 340 mm, 8K,
16K-R, 16K
Enter a size not displayed in the standard sizes.
Value
Metric
X : 182 to 457 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Y : 140 to 304 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Inch
X : 7.17 to 18.00" (in 0.01" increments)
Y : 5.51 to 12.00" (in 0.01" increments)
Media type
Select the media type.
Plain (60 to 105 g/m2), Rough, Vellum, Recycled, Preprinted*3, Bond*4, Color,
Prepunched*3, Letterhead*3, Thick (106 g/m2 and more)*4,
High Quality and Custom 1-8*1
*1 Only A4, Letter, and B5 can be specified when the optional Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet x 2) is used.
*2 Can be set when cassette 1 or cassette 2 is selected.
*3 To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to Special Paper Action on page 8-12.
*4 To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Media Type Setting on page 8-10. When the paper weight settings shown
below are selected, the media indicated for each setting cannot be selected.
Rough: "Heavy 4" or "Heavy 5"
Preprinted: "Heavy 4" or "Heavy 5"
Letterhead: "Heavy 4" or "Heavy 5"
Thick: "Heavy 4" or "Heavy 5"
Bond: "Heavy 4"
Custom 1 to 8: "Heavy 4", "Heavy 5" or "Extra Heavy"
8-7
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
MP Tray Setting
Cassette/MP Tray Settings
To fix the type of paper to be used in the multi purpose tray, specify the paper size.
Item
Paper Size
Auto
Description
Paper size is automatically detected and selected.
Value: Metric, Inch
Standard Sizes 1
Available options are as follows:
Value
Metric models: A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A6-R, B4-R, B5-R, B5, B6-R, Folio,
216 x 340 mm
Inch models:
Standard Sizes 2
Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive,
12 x 18", Oficio II
Select from standard size*1 except Standard Sizes 1.
Value
Metric models: Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive,
12 x 18", Oficio II, 8K, 16K-R, 16K
Inch models:
Others
A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A6-R, B4-R, B5-R, B5, B6-R, Folio, 8K,
16K-R, 16K, 216 x 340 mm
Select from non-standard sizes and custom sizes.
Value: ISO B5, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10), Envelope #9 (Commercial #9),
Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4), Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope
C5, Envelope C4, Hagaki, Oufuku hagaki, Youkei 4, Youkei 2
Size Entry
Enter the size not included in the standard size.
Value
Metric
X: 148 to 457 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Y: 98 to 304 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Inch
X: 5.83 to 18.00" (in 0.01" increments)
Y: 3.86 to 12.00" (in 0.01" increments)
Media type
Select the media type.
Value: Plain (60 to 105 g/m2), Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled,
Preprint*2, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched*2, Letterhead*2, Envelope,
Thick (106 g/m2 and more), Coated, High Quality, Index Tab Dividers,
Custom 1-8
*1 To change to a media type other than "Plain", refer to Media Type Setting on page 8-10.
*2 To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to Special Paper Action on page 8-12.
NOTE
If the optional FAX kit is installed, the available media types for printing received faxes are as shown below.
Plain, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Envelope, Thick, Coated, High Quality and
Custom 1-8
8-8
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Common Settings
Configure overall machine operation.
Language
Common Settings
Item
Language
Description
Select the language displayed on the touch panel.
Default Screen
Common Settings
Item
Default screen
Description
Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen).
Value: Home, Copy, Send, FAX*1, Status, Custom Box, Job Box,
Removable Memory, FAX Box*1, Program, Home (Accessibility), Accessibility Copy,
Accessibility Send, Accessibility FAX*1, Internet Browser*2
NOTE
If a screen other than [Home] is set, [Power Saving Recovery] in [EnergySaverRecoveryLevel]
will not operate if selected.
*1
Displayed only when the optional fax kit is installed.
*2
Referring to Internet on page 8-60 and configure necessary settings for Internet Browser.
.
Sound
Common Settings
Item
Buzzer
Volume
Description
Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations.
Set the buzzer volume level.
Value: 0 (Mute), 1 (Minimum), 2, 3 (Medium), 4, 5 (Maximum)
Key Confirmation
Emit a sound when the operation panel and touch panel keys are pressed.
Value: Off, On
Job Finish
Emit a sound when a print job is normally completed.
Value: Off, On, FAX Reception Only*
Ready
Emit a sound when the warm-up is completed.
Value: Off, On
Warning
Emit a sound when errors occur.
Value: Off, On
USB Keyboard
Emit a sound to confirm keypresses with a sound.
Value: Off, On
*
FAX Speaker Volume*
For details, refer to the FAX Operation Guide.
FAX Monitor Volume*
For details, refer to the FAX Operation Guide.
Displayed only when the optional fax kit is installed.
8-9
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Keyboard Layout
Item
Keyboard Layout
Description
Set the layout of the keyboard.
Value: QWERTY, QWERTZ, AZERTY
Original/Paper Settings
Common Settings
Item
Custom Original Size
Description
Set up frequently-used custom original size.
To register a custom paper size, press [On] and enter the desired size. The custom size options
are displayed on the screen to select original size. Up to four custom original sizes can be
added.*
Value
Custom 1 to 4: Off, On
Size Entry:
Metric
X: 50 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Y: 50 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Inch
X: 2.00 to 17.00" (in 0.01" increments)
Y: 2.00 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)
Custom Paper Size
Set up a maximum of four frequently-used custom paper sizes.
To register a custom paper size, press [On] and enter the desired size. The custom size option
is displayed on the screen to select paper set in the multi purpose tray. Up to four custom paper
sizes can be added.
Select media type for each paper size. Select [Media Type], and select paper type.*
Value
Custom 1 to 4: Off, On
Size Entry:
Metric
X: 148 to 457 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Y: 98 to 304 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Inch
X: 5.83 to 18.00" (in 0.01" increments)
Y: 3.86 to 12.00" (in 0.01" increments)
Media Type: Plain, Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond,
Cardstock,
Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, Envelope, Coated, High Quality, Index Tab
Dividers, Custom 1-8
Media Type Setting
Set weight for each media type.
For Custom 1-8, settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed.
For details on setting value, refer to Media Type Setting on page 8-13.
8-10
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Default Paper Source
Description
Select paper cassette for default setting.
Value: Cassette 1 to 5, Multi Purpose Tray
NOTE
[Cassette 3] to [Cassette 5] are displayed when the following options are installed.
[Cassette 3]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet x 2) or large capacity paper feeder (1,500sheet x 2) is installed
[Cassette 4]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet x 2) or large capacity paper feeder (1,500sheet x 2) is installed
[Cassette 5]: When a side feeder (3,000-sheet) is installed
Auto Switch
When the optional large capacity feeder is selected, the cassette can be switched to another
large capacity feeder depending on your usage.
Value: Off, On
Auto Detect Original Size
Select whether to automatically detect originals of special or non-standard size.
(Available for metric models
only)
A6/Hagaki
As A6 and Hagaki are similar in size, select either one of them for automatic detection.
Value: A6, Hagaki
Folio
Select whether to enable automatic detection of Folio.
Value: Off, On
11 × 15"
Select whether to enable automatic detection of 11×15" size.
Value: Off, On
Media for Auto (B&W)
Select a default media type for auto paper selection when [Auto] is selected of Paper Selection.
If [Plain] is selected, the paper source with plain paper loaded in the specific size is selected.
Select [All Media Types] for the paper source with any kind of paper loaded in the specific size.
Value: All Media Types, Plain, Transparency, Vellum, Rough, Labels, Recycled,
Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick, Coated,
High Quality, Index Tab Dividers, Custom 1-8
8-11
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Paper Source for Cover
Description
Select the paper source in which the cover paper used for the Cover function is placed.*
Value: Cassette 1 to 5, Multi Purpose Tray
NOTE
[Cassette 3] to [Cassette 5] are displayed when the following options are installed.
[Cassette 3]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet x 2) or large capacity paper feeder (1,500sheet x 2) is installed
[Cassette 4]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet x 2) or large capacity paper feeder (1,500sheet x 2) is installed
[Cassette 5]: When a side feeder (3,000-sheet) is installed
Special Paper Action
When printing on Prepunched, Preprint, and Letterhead, punch-holes might not be aligned or
the print direction might be upside-down depending on how originals are set and the
combination of copying functions. In such a case, select [Adjust Print Direction] to adjust the
print direction. When paper orientation is not important, select [Speed Priority].
If [Adjust Print Direction] is selected, load paper according to the steps below.
Example: copying on Letterhead
Original
Paper
Finishing
Cassette
MP Tray
Original
Paper
Finishing
Cassette
MP Tray
Value: Adjust Print Direction, Speed Priority
*
If you want to enable the changed defaults immediately, move to the function screen and press the [Reset] key.
8-12
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Media Type Setting
The following settings can be selected. Y (default): Default setting, Y: Available, N: Not available
Paper
Weight
Light*1
Normal 1*1
Normal 2*1
Normal 3*1
Heavy 1*1
Heavy 2
Heavy 3
Heavy 4
Heavy 5
Extra
Heavy
52 g/m2
to
59 g/m2
60 g/m2
to
74 g/m2
75 g/m2
to
90 g/m2
91 g/m2
to
105 g/m2
106 g/m2
to
135 g/m2
136 g/m2
to
163 g/m2
164 g/m2
to
220 g/m2
221 g/m2
to
256 g/m2
257 g/m2
to
300 g/m2
Transpa
rencies
Plain
N
Y
Y
(default)
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
Rough
N
Y
Y
Y
(default)
Y
Y
Y
Y*2
Y*2
N
Vellum
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
(default)
Y
Y
Y*2
Y*2
N
Labels
N
Y*2
Y*2
Y*2
Y*2
Y*2
(default)
Y*2
Y*2
Y*2
N
Recycled
N
Y
Y
(default)
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
Preprinted
N
Y
Y
(default)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y*2
Y*2
N
Bond
N
Y
Y
Y
(default)
Y
Y
Y
Y*2
N
N
Cardstock
N
N
N
N
Y*2
Y*2
Y*2
Y*2
(default)
Y*2
N
Color
N
Y
Y
Y
(default)
Y
Y
Y
Y*2
Y*2
N
Prepunched
N
Y
Y
(default)
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
Letterhead
N
Y
Y
(default)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y*2
Y*2
N
Envelope
N
N
N
N
Y*2
Y*2
(default)
Y*2
Y*2
Y*2
N
Thick
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
(default)
Y
Y*2
Y*2
N
Coated
N
Y*2
Y*2
Y*2
Y*2
(default)
Y*2
Y*2
Y*2
Y*2
N
High Quality
N
Y
Y
(default)
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
Index Tab
Dividers
N
N
N
N
N
Y*2
Y*2
Y*2
(default)
N
N
Transparencies
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
(default)
Custom 1-8
Y
Y
Y
(default)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y*2
Y*2
Y
Weight (g/m2),
Media Type
*1 The maximum number of sheets that can be stapled varies depending on the paper weight. For details, see 1,000-sheet Finisher
(Option) on page 11-28 and 4,000-sheet Finisher (Option) on page 11-29.
*2 The media type cannot be selected for the cassettes.
8-13
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
For Custom 1-8, settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed.
Item
Duplex Print
Description
Prohibit
Duplex printing not allowed.
Permit
Duplex printing allowed.
Name
Change names for Custom 1-8. Names should be not more than 16 characters. Selecting
media type at multi purpose tray, the name after change will be displayed.
Character Entry Method (page 11-10)
Measurement
Common Settings
Item
Measurement
Description
Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions.
Value: mm, inch
Error Handling
Common Settings
Item
Duplexing Error
Description
Set what to do when duplex printing is not possible for the selected paper sizes and media
types.
Value
1-sided: Printed in 1-sided
Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.
Finishing Error
Set alternative actions when finishing (Staple/Punch/Offset/Fold/Auto Image Rotation) is not
available for the selected paper size or media type.
Value
Ignore: The setting is ignored and the job is printed.
Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.
No Staple Error
Set what to do when staples run out during printing.
Value
Ignore: Printing continues without stapling.
Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.
NOTE
Requires the optional 1,000-sheet finisher or 4,000-sheet finisher.
Finished Pages Exceeded
Set what to do when finishing (stapling or offsetting) capacity is exceeded during printing.
Value
Ignore: Printing continues without finishing.
Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.
NOTE
Requires the optional 1,000-sheet finisher or 4,000-sheet finisher.
8-14
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Punch Waste Full Error
Description
Set what to do when the punch waste box becomes full during printing.
Value
Ignore: Printing continues without punching.
Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.
NOTE
Requires the optional 1,000-sheet finisher or 4,000-sheet finisher.
Paper Mismatch Error
Set what to do when the selected paper size or type does not match paper size or type loaded
in the specified paper source while printing from the computer by specifying the cassette or
multi-purpose tray.
Value
Ignore: The setting is ignored and the job is printed.
Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.
Inserted Paper Mismatch
Set what to do when it is detected that the cassette paper size setting does not match the
actual paper size that is fed.
Value
Ignore: The setting is ignored and the job is printed.
Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.
Paper Jam before Staple
The page from which printing is resumed when a paper jam occurs during a job with stapling
can be selected.
Value
Resume at Top of Page: Resume printing from the first page of the document.
Resume at Jammed Page: Resume printing from the page where the jam occurred.
NOTE
Requires the optional 1,000-sheet finisher or 4,000-sheet finisher.
Skewed or multi originals
When skewed originals while scanning, select whether to print by ignoring the error or display
an error.
Value
Ignore: The error is ignored and the job is printed.
Display Error: Error message to cancel scanning is displayed.
NOTE
This setting is displayed when an optional document processor (dual scan DP) is installed.
8-15
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Paper Output
Common Settings
If you want to enable the changed defaults immediately, move to the function screen and press the [Reset] key.
Item
Paper Output
Description
Select the output tray respectively for copy jobs, print jobs from Document Box, computers, and
FAX RX data.
Value:
Inner Tray: Outputs to the Inner Tray of the machine.
Tray A, Tray B, Tray C:
Outputs to Trays A to C of the optional 4,000-sheet Finisher.
Finisher Left Tray, Finisher Top Tray:
Outputs to the Left Tray or Top Tray of the optional 1,000-sheet Finisher.
Right tray: Outputs to the optional Right Job Separator.
Job Separator: Outputs to the optional Inner Job Separator.
Tray 1 to 7: Outputs to trays 1 to 7 (tray 1 is the uppermost tray) of the optional Mailbox.
NOTE
[Inner Tray] cannot be selected when the optional 1,000-sheet finisher or 4,000-sheet finisher
is installed.
When [Heavy 3] (164 g/m2 - ) or higher is set in Paper Weight and Mailbox (Option) is set for the
output destination, the output destination is automatically changed to a tray that can be used.
FAX RX data output can be specified when the optional fax kit is installed.
Orientation Confirmation
Common Settings
Item
Orientation Confirmation
Description
Select whether to display a screen for selecting the orientation of the originals to be placed on
the platen when using the following functions.
Refer to Original Orientation on page 6-16 for details.
•
Zoom (XY Zoom)
•
Page #
•
Duplex
•
Booklet
•
Margin/Centering
•
Staple/Punch (optional feature)
•
Border Erase
•
2-sided/Book Original
•
Combine
•
Text Stamp
•
Memo Page
•
Bates Stamp
Value: Off, On
8-16
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Function Defaults
Common Settings
If you want to enable the changed defaults immediately, move to the function screen and press the [Reset] key.
Item
Original Orientation
Description
Set the original orientation defaults.
Value: Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left
Original Image (Copy)
Set the default original document type for copying.
Value: Text+Photo (Printer), Text+Photo (Magazine), Photo (Printer), Photo (Magazine),
Photo (Photo Paper), Text, Text (Fine Line), Graphic/Map (Printer), Graphic/Map
(Magazine)
Org. Image (Send/Store)
Set the default original document type for sending/storing.
Value: Text + Photo, Photo, Text, Text (for OCR)
Scan Resolution
Select the default scanning resolution.
Value: 600×600dpi, 400×400dpi Ultra Fine, 300×300dpi, 200×400dpi Super Fine,
200×200dpi Fine, 200×100dpi Normal
FAX TX Resolution*
For details, refer to the FAX Operation Guide.
Color Selection
Select the default color mode for scanning documents.
Value: Auto Color (Color/Gray), Auto Color (Color/B & W), Full Color, Grayscale,
Black & White
File Format
Set the default type of the files.
Value: PDF, TIFF, JPEG, XPS, High Comp. PDF
File Separation
Select the default file separation setting.
Value: Off, Each Page
Backgrnd Density (Copy)
Set the default Backgrnd Density (Copy).
Value: Off, Auto, Manual (Darker 5)
BackgrndDens.(Send/Store)
Set the default Backgrnd Density (Send/Store).
Value: Off, Auto, Manual (Darker 5)
Prevent Bleed-thru (Copy)
Set the default value for preventing bleed-through (Copy).
Value: Off, On
Prevent Bleed(Send/Store)
Set the default Prevent Bleed (Send/Store).
Value: Off, On
Zoom
Select the enlarged/reduced default when paper size/sending size changed after the originals
set.
Value: 100%, Auto
Border Erase Default
Set the default width to be erased as a border.
Value
Metric: 0 to 50 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Inch: 0 to 2" (in 0.01" increments)
NOTE
To specify border erase widths around original, set the value in "Border". To specify border
erase widths in the middle of original, set the value in "Gutter".
Border Erase to Back Page
Select the Border Erase Method for Back Page of a sheet.
Value: Same as Front Page, Do Not Erase
8-17
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Margin Default
Description
Set the default margin.
Value
Metric
Left/Right:
-18 to 18 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Top/Bottom: -18 to 18 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Inch
Left/Right:
-0.75 to 0.75" (in 0.01" increments)
Top/Bottom: -0.75 to 0.75" (in 0.01" increments)
Auto Image Rotation (Copy)
Select the default Auto Image Rotation setting.
Value: Off, On
EcoPrint
Select the EcoPrint default.
Value: Off, On
Toner Save Level (EcoPrint)
Select the default Toner Save Level (EcoPrint).
Value: [1](Low) to [5](High)
NOTE
Raising the level reduces toner consumption, but image quality falls.
High Comp. PDF Image
Select the default quality setting for high compressed PDF files.
Value: Compression Ratio Priority, Standard, Quality Priority
Color TIFF Compression
Select the compression method for sending the color documents in the TIFF format.
Value: [TIFF V6], [TTN2]
Image Quality (File Format)
Select the default PDF/TIFF/JPEG/XPS file quality.
Value: 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to 5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
Collate/Offset
Set the defaults for Collate/Offset.
Value
Collate: Off, On
Offset: Off, Each Set (If [Off] is selected of Collate, it is set to [Each Page].)
JPEG/TIFF Print
Select the image size (resolution) when printing JPEG or TIFF file.
Value: Fit to Paper Size, Image Resolution, Fit to Print Resolution
XPS Fit to Page
Set the default value for the XPS fit to page function.
Value: Off, On
PDF/A
Select the default PDF/A setting.
Value: Off, PDF/A-1a, PDF/A-1b
Cont. Scan (Except FAX)
Set the continuous scan defaults.
Value: Off, On
Continuous Scan (FAX)*
For details, refer to the FAX Operation Guide.
File Name Entry
Set an automatically entered name (default) for jobs. Additional information such as Date and
Time and Job No. can also be set.
Value
File Name: Up to 32 characters can be entered.
Additional Info: None, Date and Time, Job No., Job No. & Date and Time,
Date and Time & Job No.
8-18
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
E-mail Subject/Body
Description
Set the subject and body automatically entered (default subject and body) when sending the
scanned originals by E-mail. Three body messages can be registered, and the initial template
can be used to choose which body message is used.
Value
Subject: Up to 60 characters can be entered.
Body 1 to 3: Up to 500 characters can be entered.
i-FAX Subject/Body
Set the subject and body automatically entered (default subject and body) when sending the
scanned originals by i-FAX.
Value
Subject: Up to 60 characters can be entered.
Body: Up to 500 characters can be entered.
NOTE
This function is displayed when the optional Internet FAX Kit is installed.
Internet FAX Kit(A) "Internet FAX Kit" (page 11-7)
DP Read Action
Set the operation when a document is scanned from the document processor.
Value: Speed Priority, Quality Priority
NOTE
This function is displayed when the optional document processor is installed.
When Document Guard is set to [On], this function will not be displayed.
OCR Text Recognition
Set the default OCR Text Recognition.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
Scan extension kit(A) "OCR Scan Activation Kit" (page 11-7)
Primary OCR Language
Set the default language of the text to be extracted. ([English] is selected as a default.)
Value: English, English+German, English+French, English+Spanish, English+Italian,
English+Dutch, English+Russian, English+Portugal (Brazil), English+Greek,
English+Portugal (Portugal), English+Finnish, English+Hungarian,
English+Catalan, English+Romanian, English+Czech, English+Danish,
English+Swedish, English+Norwegian, English+Polish, English+Turkish,
English+Japanese, English+Korean, English+Chinese(Simplified),
English+Chinese(Traditional)
NOTE
This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
Scan extension kit(A) "OCR Scan Activation Kit" (page 11-7)
Auto Image Rotation (OCR)
Set the default Auto Image Rotation (OCR).
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
Scan extension kit(A) "OCR Scan Activation Kit" (page 11-7)
If you frequently use the originals with the mixed orientation, select [On].
8-19
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Repeat Copy
Description
Select the Repeat Copy default.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function will not be displayed when the optional Data Security Kit is installed.
This function will not be displayed when Repeat Copy Job Retention is set to 0.
Skip Blank Page
Select the default Skip Blank Page settings.
Value: Off, On
*
Displayed only when the optional fax kit is installed.
USB Keyboard Type
Common Settings
Item
USB Keyboard Type
Description
Set the type of USB keyboard that is connected.
Value: US-English, US-English with Euro, French, German
System Stamp
Common Settings
Item
Basic
Description
Configure settings for stamps.
Text (Text Stamp)
Press [Add/Edit] to edit the test string for a template. Up to 8 templates can be registered.
Press [Delete] to delete a template.
Font (Page #)
Set the font size for page numbers when printing them.
Value: 6.0 to 64.0 pt
Font (Bates Stamp)
When a bates stamp is used, set the font sizes that can be set.
Value: 6.0 to 64.0 pt
Font (Text Stamp)
Set the font size for stamps when printing them.
Value: 6.0 to 64.0 pt
8-20
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Description
Print Job Status
Configure settings for stamps when a document is printed.
After configuring the setting, return to the Copying Functions or Custom Box (Printing a
Document) screen from System Menu, and press the [Reset] key.
Text Stamp
Select whether to print a text stamp on all printing jobs.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When [On] is selected, the Text Stamp settings cannot be changed when printing.
Edit Text Stamp
Stamp
Set the default text stamp.
Select a text string to be stamped from templates, or press [Stamp] and enter a maximum of
32 characters for the text string.
NOTE
Templates that have been set will appear. For details on registering templates, refer to Text
(Text Stamp) on page 8-20.
Stamp
Method
Select the stamp method for the text stamp.
Position
Set the text stamp position.
Value: Each Print Page, Each Original Page
Value: Top Left, Top Middle, Top Right, Middle Left, Center, Middle Right, Bottom Left,
Bottom Middle, Bottom Right, Detail
NOTE
Press [Detail] to set the stamp position using numeric values, and to set the stamp position and
angle when a stamp is placed on the back side of the paper in duplex printing.
Font
Set the font of the text stamp.
Value
Size: Font sizes registered in Font (Text Stamp) on page 8-20 are displayed.
Character Border: Off, Circle, Rectangle, Underline
Style: None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic
Font: Courier, Letter Gothic
Color: Black, White
Density: 10 to 100% (in 10% increments)
Display Pattern: Transparent, Clipping, Overwrite
Bates Stamp
Select whether to print a bates stamp on all printing jobs.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When [On] is selected, the Bates Stamp settings cannot be changed when printing.
Edit Bates Stamp
Set the default Bates Stamp.
Value: Date, User Name, Serial Number, Numbering, Text 1, Text 2, Date Format,
Numbering Default, Position, Font
NOTE
To set [Text 1] or [Text 2], press [Change] below and enter a maximum of 32 characters for the
text string.
To set [Date], press [Date Format] and set the date display format.
To set [Numbering], press [Numbering Default] and set the starting sequence number
(1 to 9999999).
Press [Detail] in "Positon" to set the stamp position using numeric values, and to set the stamp
position to be placed on the back side of the paper in duplex printing.
8-21
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Description
Sending Jobs
Configure stamp settings for sending documents.
After configuring the setting, return to the Sending Functions or Custom Box (Sending
Documents) screen from System Menu, and press the [Reset] key.
Text Stamp
Select whether to print a text stamp on all sending jobs.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When [On] is selected, the Text Stamp settings cannot be changed when sending.
Edit Text Stamp
Stamp
Set the default text stamp.
Select a text string to be stamped from templates, or press [Stamp] and enter a maximum of 32
characters for the text string.
NOTE
Templates that have been set will appear. For details on registering templates, refer to Text
(Text Stamp) on page 8-20.
Position
Set the text stamp position.
Value: Top Left, Top Middle, Top Right, Middle Left, Center, Middle Right, Bottom Left,
Bottom Middle, Bottom Right, Detail
NOTE
Press [Detail] to set the stamp position using numeric values, and to set the stamp angle.
Font
Set the font of the text stamp.
Value
Size: Font sizes registered in Font (Text Stamp) on page 8-20 are displayed.
Character Border: Off, Circle, Rectangle, Underline
Style: None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic
Font: Courier, Letter Gothic
Color: Black, Red, Green, Blue, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, White
Density: 10 to 100% (in 10% increments)
Display Pattern: Transparent, Clipping, Overwrite
Bates Stamp
Select whether to print a bates stamp on all sending jobs.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When [On] is selected, the Bates Stamp settings cannot be changed when sending.
Edit Bates Stamp
Set the default Bates Stamp.
Value: Date, User Name, Serial Number, Numbering, Text 1, Text 2, Date Format,
Numbering Default, Position, Font
NOTE
To set [Text 1] or [Text 2], press [Change] below and enter a maximum of 32 characters for the
text string.
To set [Date], press [Date Format] and set the date display format.
To set [Numbering], press [Numbering Default] and set the starting sequence number
(1 to 9999999).
When you press [Detail] in "Position", the stamp position can be specified using numeric
values.
8-22
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Description
Storing Jobs
Configure stamp settings for storing documents in removable memory.
After configuring the setting, return to the Custom Box (Storing Documents) screen from
System Menu, and press the [Reset] key.
Text Stamp
Select whether to print a text stamp on all storing jobs.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When [On] is selected, the Text Stamp settings cannot be changed when storing.
Edit Text Stamp
Stamp
Set the default text stamp.
Select a text string to be stamped from templates, or press [Stamp] and enter a maximum of 32
characters for the text string.
NOTE
Templates that have been set will appear. For details on registering templates, refer to Text
(Text Stamp) on page 8-20.
Position
Set the text stamp position.
Value: Top Left, Top Middle, Top Right, Middle Left, Center, Middle Right, Bottom Left,
Bottom Middle, Bottom Right, Detail
NOTE
Press [Detail] to set the stamp position using numeric values, and to set the stamp angle.
Font
Set the font of the text stamp.
Value
Size: Font sizes registered in Font (Text Stamp) on page 8-20 are displayed.
Character Border: Off, Circle, Rectangle, Underline
Style: None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic
Font: Courier, Letter Gothic
Color: Black, Red, Green, Blue, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, White
Density: 10 to 100% (in 10% increments)
Display Pattern: Transparent, Clipping, Overwrite
Bates Stamp
Select whether to print a bates stamp on all storing jobs.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When [On] is selected, the Bates Stamp settings cannot be changed when storing.
Edit Bates Stamp
Set the default Bates Stamp.
Value: Date, User Name, Serial Number, Numbering, Text 1, Text 2, Date Format,
Numbering Default, Position, Font
NOTE
To set [Text 1] or [Text 2], press [Change] below and enter a maximum of 32 characters for the
text string.
To set [Date], press [Date Format] and set the date display format.
To set [Numbering], press [Numbering Default] and set the starting sequence number
(1 to 9999999).
When you press [Detail] in "Position", the stamp position can be specified using numeric
values.
8-23
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Manual Staple
Common Settings
NOTE
Only displayed when the optional 4,000-sheet finisher is installed.
Item
Manual Staple
Description
Select whether to use Manual Staple.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
If you selected [On], set the time until manual stapling mode is automatically cancelled. The
setting range is 5 to 60 seconds (in 5-second increments).
Staple Position
Set the default Staple Position.
Value: A4 Long Edge, Letter Long Edge
Offset Documents by Job
Common Settings
Item
Offset Documents by Job
Description
Select whether to offset documents by Job.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when an optional 1,000-sheet finisher or 4,000-sheet finisher is
installed.
Offset One Page Documents
Common Settings
Item
Offset One Page Documents
Description
Set whether one-page documents are sorted.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when an optional 1,000-sheet finisher or 4,000-sheet finisher is
installed.
8-24
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Low Toner Alert Level
Common Settings
Item
Low Toner Alert Level
Description
Set the amount of remaining toner to alert low toner.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
Selecting [Off] alerts you low toner when the amount of remaining toner becomes 5%.
If [On] is selected, set the amount of remaining toner to alert. The setting range is 5 to 100% (in
1% increments).
Display Status/Log
Common Settings
Item
Display Status/Log
*
Description
Set the display method of the Status/Log.
Display Jobs
Detail Status
Value: Show All, My Jobs Only, Hide All
Display Jobs Log
Value: Show All, My Jobs Only, Hide All
Display FAX Log*
Value: Show All, Hide All
Displayed only when the optional fax kit is installed.
Message Banner Print
Common Settings
Item
Message Banner Print
Description
Set whether the confirmation screen appears before each sheet is printed when printing
multiple banner sheets.
Value: Off, On
8-25
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Customize Status Display
Common Settings
Item
Customize Status Display
Description
Set the items that appear in the status screens for printing jobs, sending jobs, and storing jobs.
Printing Jobs
Column 1
Value:
Job Name, User Name, Print Pages x Copies, Total Printed Pages
Printing Jobs
Column 2
Value:
Job Name, User Name, Print Pages x Copies, Total Printed Pages
Sending Jobs
Column 1
Value:
Job Name, User Name, Destination, Original Pages, Color/Black & White
Sending Jobs
Column 2
Value:
Job Name, User Name, Destination, Original Pages, Color/Black & White
Storing Jobs
Column 1
Value:
Job Name, User Name, Original Pages, Color/Black & White
Storing Jobs
Column 2
Value:
Job Name, User Name, Original Pages, Color/Black & White
Function Key Usage
Common Settings
Item
Function Key Usage
*
Description
Select whether to enable the Copy Key, Send Key, and FAX Key on the operation panel.
Copy Key
Value: Disable, Enable
Send Key
Value: Disable, Enable
FAX Key*
Value: Disable, Enable
Displayed only when the optional fax kit is installed.
8-26
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Message Board Settings
Common Settings
Item
Message Board
Description
Select whether to use the Message Board.
Value: Off, On
Message List
Configure settings for the registered message board.
Add
Add a new message board.
Device to Show
Select where to show the message.
Value
Hide: Displays no message.
Operation Panel: Displays on the operation panel.
Embedded Web Server: Displays a message in the operation panel.
Panel + Web Server: Displays a message in Embedded Web Server RX.
Message Type
Select the message type.
Value: Normal, Alert, Prohibition
Place to Show
Select where to show the message in the operation panel.
Value:
Login Screen: Login screen of user login administration
Home Screen: Home Screen
Login Screen+Home Screen: Login screen and Home screen of user login administration
Priority Show
Displays the message on the message board.
Value: Off, On
Title
Enter a maximum of 30 characters for the title to display on the message board.
Body
Enter a maximum of 300 characters for the body to display on the message board.
Delete
Deletes the message board selected on the list.
Raise Priority
Raise the priority of the message board selected on the list.
Lower Priority
Lower the priority of the message board selected on the list.
Detail
Display information on the selected message board.
Remote Printing
Common Settings
Item
Remote Printing
Description
Select whether to prohibit printing that is performed without operating the machine. When
[Prohibit] is selected, you can print the document that you have stored in the document box by
operating at the machine. This prevents another person from seeing that document.
Value: Prohibit, Permit
NOTE
If [Prohibit] is selected, printing and storing using Quick Copy and Proof and Hold functions are
disabled. Printing a received FAX (optional) is not prohibited.
8-27
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Home
Home
Configure settings for Home screen.
Editing the Home Screen (page 3-5)
Copy
Copy
Configure settings for copying functions.
Item
Paper Selection
Description
Set the default paper selection.
Value: Auto, Default Paper Source
Auto Image Rotation Action
Set whether the image is rotated when the orientation of the document to be printed is different
from the orientation of the paper.
Value
Unrotated Manual Copy: If a paper source or zoom ratio is specified, the image is not
rotated.
Apply All: Rotates all images.
Follow Image Size: The image is rotated if the rotated image fits on the paper.
NOTE
This function is only enabled when [On] is selected in Auto Image Rotation on page 6-53.
Auto Paper Selection
If [Auto] is selected for Paper Selection, set the paper size selection method when the zoom
changes.*1
Value
Most Suitable Size: Selects paper size based on the current zoom and the size of the
original.
Same as Original Size: Selects paper that matches the size of the original, regardless the
zoom.
Auto % Priority
When a paper source of different size from the original is selected, select whether automatic
zoom (reduce/zoom) is performed.*1
Value: Off, On
Paper Size for Small Original
Specify the paper size to be used for a case where the original is too small to be detected in the
Auto Paper Selection mode.
Value: Default Paper Source, A4, A4-R, A5-R, A6-R, B5, B5-R, B6-R, Letter, Letter-R,
Statement-R
Preset Limit
Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time.
Value: 1 to 999 copies
8-28
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Reserve Next Priority
Description
Specify whether the default screen appears when a subsequent copy job is reserved while
printing is in progress. To have the default screen appear, select [On].
Value: Off, On
Quick Setup Registration
Select the functions to be registered for Quick Setup.
Six keys of the Quick Setup screen are allocated to typical functions but can be changed as
necessary.
Six items in the following options are available.
Value: Paper Selection, Zoom, Staple/Punch*2, Density, Duplex, Combine, Collate/Offset,
Original Image, Original Size, Original Orientation, Continuous Scan, Background
Density Adj.
*1
If you want to enable the changed defaults immediately, move to the function screen and press the [Reset] key.
*2
This setting is displayed when the optional 1,000-sheet finisher or 4,000-sheet finisher is installed. When a punching unit is not installed, this item
name is "Staple".
Send
Send
Configure settings for sending functions.
Item
Quick Setup Registration
Description
Select the functions to be registered for Quick Setup. Six keys of the Quick Setup screen are
allocated to typical functions but can be changed as necessary.
Six items in the following options are available.
Value: Original Size, 2-sided/Book Original*1, Sending Size, Original Orientation, File
Format, Density, Original Image, Scan Resolution, FAX TX Resolution*2, Color Selection,
Zoom, Continuous Scan, Background Density Adj.
Dest. Check before Send
Select whether to display the confirmation screen of destinations after pressing the [Start] key
when performing sending jobs.
Value: Off, On
Color Type
Set the color type when you send color documents.
Value: [RGB], [sRGB]
Entry Check for New Dest.
When adding new destination, select whether to display the entry check screen to check the
entered destination.
Value: Off, On
Default Screen
Set the default screen displayed when you press the [Send] key.
Value: Destination, Address Book
8-29
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Send and Forward
Forward
Description
Select whether to forward the original to another destination when sending images.
Select whether to forward the original.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When selecting [On], select rules to forward from [E-mail], [Folder(SMB)], [Folder(FTP)],
[FAX]*2, [i-FAX(Via server-On)]*3, and [i-FAX(Via server-Off)]*3.
Destination
Set the destination to which the original is forwarded. One destination can be set. Follow the
steps below to register the destination.
•
Address Book
•
Address Entry (E-mail)
•
Address Entry (folder)
Specifying Destination (page 5-22)
Color Setting
Configure the color settings for forwarded original.
Value: Auto Color (Color/Gray), Auto Color (Color/B & W), Full Color, Grayscale,
Black & White
Scan Resolution
Select resolution for stored original.
Value: 600x600dpi, 400x400dpi Ultra Fine, 300x300dpi, 200x400dpi Super Fine,
200x200dpi Fine, 200x100dpi Normal
File Format
Select the file format of forwarded original. For details on setting value, refer to File format for
Send and Forward on page 8-31.
File Separation
Set whether originals are divided into multiple files before being forwarded.
Value: Off, Each Page
E-mail Subject
Enter a maximum of 60 characters for the subject of forwarded E-mail.
Character Entry Method (page 11-10)
FTP Encrypted TX
Set whether originals are encrypted before being forwarded.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when SSL is set to [On] in Security Settings.
Security Settings (page 8-46)
New Destination Entry
Select whether to permit direct entry of destination.
Value: Prohibit, Permit
Recall Destination
Select whether to permit usage of [Recall] on the Send screen.
Value: Prohibit, Permit
OCR Text Recognition Act.
Configure settings for OCR Text Recognition Action.
Value: Compression Ratio Priority, Quality Priority
NOTE
This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
Scan extension kit(A) "OCR Scan Activation Kit" (page 11-7)
HighCompressionPDF Mode
Select the compression method for sending High-Compression PDF.
Value: Text Priority, File Size Priority
*1
*2
*3
When the optional document processor is not installed, this is set to "Book Original".
Displayed only when the optional fax kit is installed.
Displayed only when the optional Internet FAX Kit is installed.
8-30
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
File format for Send and Forward
Send
Send and Forward
Select the file format for forwarded original.
The table below lists the file formats and their details.
File format
*
Adjustable range of image quality
Color setting
PDF*
1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/Black and
White), Full Color, Grayscale, Black and White
TIFF
1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/Black and
White), Full Color, Grayscale, Black and White
JPEG
1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Full Color, Grayscale
XPS
1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/Black and
White), Full Color, Grayscale, Black and White
High Comp. PDF *
Compression Ratio Priority, Standard,
Quality Priority
Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/Black and
White), Full Color, Grayscale
File format can be selected. (Value: [Off] / [PDF/A-1a] / [PDF/A-1b])
NOTE
When [High Comp. PDF] is selected, you cannot adjust the image quality.
8-31
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
PDF Encryption Functions
If you have selected PDF or High Comp. PDF for file format, you can restrict the access level for displaying, printing, and
editing PDF's by assigning a secure password.
Items that can be set vary depending on the setting selected in "Compatibility".
When [Acrobat 3.0 or later] is selected
Send
Send and Forward
Item
PDF/High Comp. PDF
Value
Description
Password to Open Document
Off, On
Enter the password to open the PDF file.
Press [Password], enter a password (up to 256 characters) and
then press [OK].
Press [Confirmation] to enter the password again for
confirmation, and press [OK].
Password to Edit/Print
Document
Off, On
Enter the password to edit the PDF file.
Press [Password], enter a password (up to 256 characters) and
then press [OK].
Press [Confirmation] to enter the password again for
confirmation, and press [OK].
When you have entered the password to edit/print document,
you can specifically limit the operation.
Detail
Printing
Allowed
Not Allowed, Allowed
Restricts printing of the PDF file.
Changes
Allowed
Not Allowed
Disables the change to the PDF file.
Commenting
Can only add commenting.
Page Layout except
extracting Pages
Can change the page layout except extracting the pages of the
PDF file.
Any except extracting
Pages
Can conduct all operations except extracting the pages of the
PDF file.
Disable, Enable
Restricts the copying of text and objects on the PDF file.
Copying of Text/
Images/Others
8-32
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
When [Acrobat 5.0 or later] is selected
Send
Send and Forward
Item
PDF/High Comp. PDF
Value
Description
Password to Open Document
Off, On
Enter the password to open the PDF file.
Press [Password], enter a password (up to 256 characters) and
then press [OK].
Press [Confirmation] to enter the password again for
confirmation, and press [OK].
Password to Edit/Print
Document
Off, On
Enter the password to edit the PDF file.
Press [Password], enter a password (up to 256 characters) and
then press [OK].
Press [Confirmation] to enter the password again for
confirmation, and press [OK].
When you have entered the password to edit/print document,
you can specifically limit the operation.
Detail
Printing
Allowed
Changes
Allowed
Copying of Text/
Images/Others
Not Allowed
Disables the printing of PDF file.
Allowed
(Low Resolution only)
Can print the PDF file only in low resolution.
Allowed
Can print the PDF file in original resolution.
Not Allowed
Disables the change to the PDF file.
Inserting/Deleting/
Rotating Pages
Can only insert, delete, and rotate the pages of the PDF file.
Commenting
Can only add commenting.
Any except extracting
Pages
Can conduct all operations except extracting the pages of the
PDF file.
Disable, Enable
Restricts the copying of text and objects on the PDF file.
8-33
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Document Box/Removable Memory
Document Box/Removable Memory
Item
Custom Box
Description
Configure settings for Custom Box.
Add/Edit Box
For details, refer to Using a Custom Box on page 5-52.
Default Setting
Auto File Deletion Time
Set the time to automatically delete stored documents.
FAX Box*1
For details, refer to the FAX Operation Guide.
Job Box
Configure settings for Job Box.
Quick Copy Job
Retention
To maintain free space on the hard disk, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs.
Value: number between 0 and 300
NOTE
When 0 is set, Quick Copy cannot be used.
Repeat Copy Job
Retention
To maintain free space on the hard disk, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs.
Value: number between 0 and 50
NOTE
This function will not be displayed when the optional Data Security Kit is activated.
When 0 is set, Repeat Copy cannot be used.
Deletion of Job
Retention
This setting specifies that documents, such as Private Printing, Quick Copying, or Proof and
Hold Printing, saved temporarily in the job box are automatically deleted after they have been
saved for a set time.
Value: Off, 1 hour, 4 hours, 1 day, 1 week
NOTE
This function is valid for documents saved after the function is set. Regardless of this function
setting, temporary documents are deleted when the main power switch is turned off.
Polling Box*1
For details, refer to the FAX Operation Guide.
Quick Setup Registration
Select the functions to be registered for Quick Setup. Six keys of the Quick Setup screen are
allocated to typical functions but can be changed as necessary.
Store File
Select the functions to be registered for Store File Quick Setup.
Color Selection, Storing Size, Density, 2-sided/Book Original*2, Scan Resolution, Zoom,
Original Orientation, Original Size, Original Image, Continuous Scan,
Background Density Adj.
Value: Off, Key 1 to 6
Print
Select the functions to be registered for Print Quick Setup.
Paper Selection, Collate/Offset, Staple/Punch*3, Duplex, Combine, Delete after Printed
Value: Off, Key 1 to 6
Send
Select the functions to be registered for Send Quick Setup.
Sending Size, FAX TX Resolution*1, File Format, Delete after Transmitted
Value: Off, Key 1 to 6
*1
Displayed only when the optional fax kit is installed.
*2
When the optional document processor is not installed, this is set to "Book Original".
*3
This setting is displayed when the optional 1,000-sheet finisher or 4,000-sheet finisher is installed. When a punching unit is not installed, this item
name is "Staple".
8-34
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
FAX
FAX
Configure settings for FAX. For details, refer to the FAX Operation Guide.
Printer
Printer
When printing from computers, settings are generally made on the application software screen. However, the following
settings are available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine.
Item
Emulation
Description
Set the emulation for operating this machine by commands oriented to other types of printers.
Value: PCL6, IBM Proprinter, Line Printer, EPSON LQ-850, KPDL, KPDL(Auto)
NOTE
IBM Proprinter, Line Printer, and EPSON LQ-850 are displayed when the optional Emulation
Upgrade Kit is installed.
If you selected [KPDL(Auto)], set "Alternative Emulation", too.
When you have selected [KPDL] or [KPDL(Auto)], set "KPDL Error Report", too.
Alt Emulation
When you have selected [KPDL(Auto)] as emulation mode, you can switch between KPDL and
another emulation mode (alternative emulation) automatically according to the data to print.
Value: PCL6, IBM Proprinter, Line Printer, EPSON LQ-850
NOTE
IBM Proprinter, Line Printer, and EPSON LQ-850 are displayed when the optional Emulation
Upgrade Kit is installed.
KPDL Error Report
When an error has occurred during printing in KPDL emulation mode, set whether the error
report is output.
Value: Off, On
EcoPrint
EcoPrint conserves toner when printing. This is recommended for test copies where lighter
printing is not a problem.
Value: Off, On
Toner Save Level (EcoPrint)
Select the default Toner Save Level (EcoPrint).
Value: 1 (Low) to 5 (High)
NOTE
Raising the level reduces toner consumption, but image quality falls.
Override A4/Letter
Select whether to treat A4 size and Letter, which are similar in size, as the same size when
printing.
Value
Off: A4 and Letter are not regarded as the same in size.
On: A4 and Letter are regarded as the same in size. The machine will use whichever size
is in the paper source.
Duplex
Select binding orientation for duplex mode.
Value: 1-sided, 2-sided(Bind Long Edge), 2-sided(Bind Short Edge)
Copies
Set the default number of copies, from 1 to 999.
Value: 1 to 999 copies
8-35
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Orientation
Description
Set the default orientation, [Portrait] or [Landscape].
Value: Portrait, Landscape
Form Feed Timeout
Receiving print data from the computer, the machine may sometimes wait if there is no
information signaling that the last page does not have any more data to be printed. When the
preset timeout passes, the machine automatically prints the document. The options are
between 5 and 495 seconds.
Value: 5 to 495 seconds
LF Action
Set the line feed action when the machine receives the line feed code (character code 0AH).
Value: LF Only, LF and CR, Ignore LF
CR Action
Set the character return action when the machine receives the character return code (character
code 0DH).
Value: CR Only, LF and CR, Ignore CR
Job Name
Set whether the job name set in the printer driver is displayed.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When selecting [On], select the job name to be displayed from [Job Name], [Job No. & Job
Name], or [Job Name & Job No.].
User Name
Set whether the user name set in the printer driver is displayed.
Value: Off, On
Paper Feed Mode
While printing from the computer, select how to feed paper when the paper source and type are
specified.
Value
Auto: Search the paper source that matches the selected paper size and type.
Fixed: Print on paper loaded in the specified paper source.
KIR
The machine is equipped with the smoothing function, which realizes an excellent printing of
about 9600 dpi (600 dpi × 15 gradation) × 600 dpi.
Value: Off, On
8-36
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Report
Print reports to check the machine settings and status. Default settings for printing the result reports can also be
configured.
Print Report
Report
Item
Status Page
Description
Prints the status page, allowing you to check the information including current settings,
available memory space, and optional equipment installed.
Status Page
Firmware Version
Font List
Prints the font list, allowing you to check the font samples installed in the machine.
Network Status
Prints the network status, allowing you to check the information including network interface
firmware version, network address and protocol.
Network Status Page
Firmware Version
8-37
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Description
Service Status
Prints the service status. More detailed information is available than on the Status Page.
Service personnel usually print the service status pages for maintenance purpose.
Optional Network Status
Prints the optional network status, allowing you to check the information including optional
network interface firmware version, network address and protocol.
NETWORK STATUS PAGE
NOTE
This function is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit is installed.
Admin Report Settings
Report
Configure settings for fax functions. For details, refer to the FAX Operation Guide
Result Report Settings
Report
Item
Send Result Report
E-mail/Folder
Description
Automatically print a report of transmission result when a transmission is complete.
Print a report of E-mail/Folder transmission results.
Value: Off, On, Error Only
FAX*1
For details, refer to the FAX Operation Guide.
Canceled before
Sending
Print a send result report when the job is canceled before being sent.
Recipient Format
Select the Recipient Format for the send result report.
Value: Off, On
Value: Name or Destination, Name and Destination
FAX TX Resolution*1
For details, refer to the FAX Operation Guide.
Job Finish Notice Setting*1
For details, refer to the FAX Operation Guide.
RX Result Report Type*1*2
For details, refer to the FAX Operation Guide.
*1
Displayed only when the optional fax kit is installed.
*2
This is not displayed if you selected [Off] for FAX RX Result Report.
8-38
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Sending Log History
Report
Item
Auto Sending
Description
This function automatically sends the log history to the specified destinations whenever a set
number of jobs has been logged.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
If [On] is selected, specify the number of job histories. The setting range is 1 to 1,500.
Sending Log History
You can also send the log history to the specified destinations manually.
Destination
Set the destination to which log histories are sent. Only E-mail address can be set.
Job Log Subject
Set the subject automatically entered when sending log histories by E-mail.
Value: Up to 60 characters
Personal Information
Select whether to include personal information in the job log.
Value: Include, Exclude
8-39
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Login History Settings
Report
Item
Login History
Description
Select whether to record the Login History.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
If [On] is selected, set the number of histories to be recorded. The setting range is 1 to 1,000.
Auto Sending
Select whether the login history is automatically sent to the set address when the number of
entries reaches the number set in "Login History".
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when "Login History" is set to [On].
Destination
Set the destination to which login histories are sent. E-mail address only can be set as destination.
NOTE
This function is displayed when "Login History" is set to [On].
Subject
Set the subject automatically entered when sending login histories by E-mail.
Value: Up to 60 characters
NOTE
This function is displayed when "Login History" is set to [On].
Log Reset
Resets the recorded login histories.
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and press [Login]. For this,
you need to login with administrator privileges. The factory default login user name and login password are set as
shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
d-Copia 3500MF plus
3500
3500
d-Copia 4500MF plus
4500
4500
d-Copia 5500MF plus
5500
5500
8-40
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Device Log History Settings
Report
Item
Device Log History
Description
Select whether to record the device log history.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
If [On] is selected, set the number of histories to be stored. The setting range is 1 to 1,000.
Auto Sending
Select whether the device log history is automatically sent to the set address when the number
of entries reaches the number set in "Device Log History".
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when "Device Log History" is set to [On].
Destination
Set the destination to which device log histories are sent. E-mail address only can be set as
destination.
NOTE
This function is displayed when "Device Log History" is set to [On].
Subject
Set the subject automatically entered when sending device log histories by E-mail.
Value: Up to 60 characters
NOTE
This function is displayed when "Device Log History" is set to [On].
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and press [Login]. For this,
you need to login with administrator privileges. The factory default login user name and login password are set as
shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
d-Copia 3500MF plus
3500
3500
d-Copia 4500MF plus
4500
4500
d-Copia 5500MF plus
5500
5500
8-41
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Secure Comm. Error Log
Report
Item
Description
Secure Comm. Error Log
Select whether to record the secure communication error log history.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
If [On] is selected, set the number of histories to be stored. The setting range is 1 to 1,000.
Auto Sending
Select whether the secure communication error log history is automatically sent to the set
address when the number of entries reaches the number set in "Secure Comm. Error Log".
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when "Secure Communication Error Log History" is set to [On].
Destination
Set the destination to which secure communication error log histories are sent. E-mail address
only can be set as destination.
NOTE
This function is displayed when "Secure Communication Error Log History" is set to [On].
Subject
Set the subject automatically entered when sending secure communication error log histories
by E-mail.
Value: Up to 60 characters
NOTE
This function is displayed when "Secure Communication Error Log History" is set to [On].
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and press [Login]. For this,
you need to login with administrator privileges. The factory default login user name and login password are set as
shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
d-Copia 3500MF plus
3500
3500
d-Copia 4500MF plus
4500
4500
d-Copia 5500MF plus
5500
5500
8-42
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
System/Network
Configure machine system settings.
Network
System/Network
Configure network settings.
Host Name
Item
Description
Check the host name of the machine. Host name can be changed from Embedded Web Server RX.
Host Name
Changing Host Name (page 2-36)
TCP/IP Setting
Item
TCP/IP
Description
Select whether to use TCP/IP Protocol.
Value: Off, On
IPv4
Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the network. This setting is available when [TCP/IP] is set to
[On].
IP Address
Set the IP addresses.
Value: ###.###.###.###
NOTE
When DHCP is set to [On], this function will be grayed out and the value cannot be entered.
Subnet Mask
Set the IP subnet masks.
Value: ###.###.###.###
NOTE
When DHCP is set to [On], this function will be grayed out and the value cannot be entered.
Default Gateway
Set the IP gateway addresses.
Value: ###.###.###.###
NOTE
When DHCP is set to [On], this function will be grayed out and the value cannot be entered.
DHCP
Select whether to use the DHCP (IPv4) server.
Value: Off, On
Auto-IP
Select whether to use Auto-IP.
Value: Off, On
IMPORTANT
After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
8-43
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
IPv6
Description
Set up TCP/IP (IPv6) to connect to the network. This setting is available when [TCP/IP] is [On].
IPv6
Select whether to use IPv6.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Link Local)] after restarting the network.
RA (Stateless)
Select whether to use RA (Stateless).
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].
Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Stateless)] after restarting the network.
Manual Setting
Manually specify the IP address, prefix length, and gateway address of TCP/IP (IPv6).
Value
IP Address (Manual): (numbers (128 bit in total) separated by colons)
Prefix Length: 0 to 128
Default Gateway: ###.###.###.###
NOTE
This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].
To enter "Default Gateway", set [RA (Stateless)] to [Off].
DHCP
Select whether to use the DHCP (IPv6) server.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].
Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Stateful)] after restarting the network.
Bonjour
Select whether to use Bonjour.
Value: Off, On
IPSec
Select whether to use IPSec.
Value: Off, On
IMPORTANT
After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
8-44
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Protocol Settings
Item
Description
SMTP (E-mail TX)
Select whether to send E-mail using SMTP.
Value: Off, On
POP3 (E-mail RX)
Select whether to receive E-mail using POP3.
Value: Off, On
FTP Client (Transmission)
Select whether to send documents using FTP. When selecting [On], set the FTP Port Number.
Use the default port 21.
Value: Off, On (Port Number: 1 to 65535)
FTP Server (Reception)
Select whether to receive documents using FTP.*1
Value: Off, On
SMB Client (Transmission):
Select whether to send documents using SMB. When selecting [On], set the SMB Port
Number. Use the default port 139.
Value: Off, On (Port Number: 1 to 65535)
NetBEUI
Selects whether to receive documents using NetBEUI.*1
Value: Off, On
WSD Scan
Select whether to use WSD Scan.*1
Value: Off, On
WSD Print
Select whether to use WSD Print.*1
Value: Off, On
i-FAX
Select whether to use i-FAX.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when the optional Internet FAX Kit is activated.
DSM Scan
Select whether to use DSM scan.
Value: Off, On
ThinPrint
Select whether to use ThinPrint. When selecting [On], set the SMB default Port Number. Use
the default port 4000.*1, *2
Value: Off, On (Port Number: 1 to 32767)
NOTE
This function is displayed only when the optional ThinPrint Option is activated.
Thin Print over SSL
To use Thin Print over SSL, press [Thin Print over SSL] and select [On].
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When selecting [On], the certificates must be installed. For details, refer to the Embedded
Web Server RX User Guide.
LPD
Selects whether to receive documents using LPD.*1
Value: Off, On
Raw
Select whether to receive documents using Raw Port.*1
Value: Off, On
IPP
Selects whether to receive documents using IPP. When selecting [On], set the IPP Port
Number. Use the default port 631.*1, *2
Value: Off, On
IPP over SSL
Selects whether to receive documents using IPP over SSL. When selecting [On], set the IPP
default Port Number. Use the default port 443.*1, *2
Value: Off, On (Port Number: 1 to 32767)
NOTE
When selecting [On], the certificates must be installed. For details, refer to the Embedded
Web Server RX User Guide.
8-45
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Description
Select whether to communicate using HTTP.*1
HTTP
Value: Off, On
Select whether to communicate using HTTPS.*1, *2
HTTPS
Value: Off, On
LDAP
Select whether to use LDAP.
Value: Off, On
Select whether to communicate using SNMP.*1
SNMPv1/v2c
Value: Off, On
SNMPv3
Select whether to communicate using SNMPv3.*1
Value: Off, On
Enhanced WSD
Select whether to use Enhanced WSD.*1
Value: Off, On
Enhanced WSD over SSL
Select whether to use Enhanced WSD (SSL).*1, *2
Value: Off, On
NOTE
Selecting [Off] will disable the functionality of WIA, TWAIN and Network FAX drivers.
*1
The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network.
*2
Set "SSL" to [On] in Security Settings on page 8-46.
IMPORTANT
After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
Security Settings
Item
SSL
Description
Select whether to use SSL for communication.
Value: Off, On
LAN Interface
Item
LAN Interface
Description
Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used.
Value: Auto, 10BASE-T Half, 10BASE-T Full, 100BASE-T Half, 100BASE-TX Full, 1000BASE-T
IMPORTANT
After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
Restart Network
Item
Restart Network
Description
Restarts the network.
8-46
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Proxy
Item
Proxy
Description
Set the proxy for connection to the Internet from an application.
Value: Off, On
Use the Same Proxy
Server for All Protocols
Set whether the same proxy server is used for all protocols. To use the same proxy server,
select the [Use the Same Proxy Server for All Protocols] checkbox.
Proxy Server (HTTP)
Set a proxy server (HTTP).
Value: (Enter the proxy address and port number.)
Proxy Server (HTTPS)
Set a proxy server (HTTPS). This setup is available when "Use the Same Proxy Server for All
Protocols" is [Off].
Value: (Enter the proxy address and port number.)
Do Not Use Proxy for
Following Domains
Set domains for which no proxy is used.
Value: (Enter the domain name.)
Optional Network
System/Network
NOTE
This function is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit is installed.
Basic
Item
Host Name
Description
Check the host name of the machine. Host name can be changed from Embedded Web Server RX.
Changing Host Name (page 2-36)
TCP/IP Setting
For details on setting value, refer to TCP/IP Setting on page 8-43.
NetWare
Use NetWare to receive documents.
See the Operation Guide for the optional network interface card for details.
Value: Off, On
AppleTalk
Selects whether to receive documents using AppleTalk.*
Value: Off, On
LAN Interface
Select the LAN Interface type.*
Value: Auto, 10BASE-T Half, 10BASE-T Full, 100BASE-T Half, 100BASE-T Full, 1000BASE-T
NOTE
This function is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit is installed.
MAC Address Filter
Select whether to use MAC Address Filter.
See the Operation Guide for the optional network interface card for details.
Value: Off, On
Restart Network
*
Restarts the network.
The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network.
8-47
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Wireless Network
NOTE
This function is displayed when the optional Wireless Interface Kit is installed.
Item
Description
Connection Status
When the optional Wireless Interface Kit is installed, you can check the wireless LAN status.
Quick Setup Wizard
If the machine will connect to an access point that supports the automatic wireless network setup,
connection settings can be configured by Quick Setup.
Available Network
Displays access points to which the machine can connect.
Push Button Method
If the access point supports the push button method, wireless settings can be configured using
the push button. This setting executes push button, and the connection is started by pressing
the push button on the access point.
PIN Code
Method(Device)
Starts connection using the machine's PIN code. Enter the PIN code into the access point. The
PIN code of the machine is automatically generated.
PIN Code
Method(Terminal)
Starts connection using the PIN code of the access point. Enter the PIN code of the access
point.
Custom Setup
Network Name(SSID)
The detailed settings for wireless LAN can be changed.
Set the SSID (Service Set Identifier) of the wireless LAN to which the machine connects.
NOTE
Up to 32 characters can be entered.
Connection Mode
Set the connection mode.
Value: Ad Hoc, Infrastructure
NOTE
Ad Hoc: Directly communicates with the device without going through an access point. This
method cannot be used to connect to two or more devices.
Infrastructure: Performs communication through an access point.
Channel
Set channel.
Use [-] / [+] or the numeric keys to enter a number.
Value: 1 to 11
Network Authentication
Select network authentication type.
To select other options, open the device home page from a computer.
Value: Open, Shared, WPA-PSK*1, WPA2-PSK*1
Encryption
Select encryption method and enter the Preshared key. The setting values vary depending on the
Network Authentication setting.
When Network Authentication is set to [Open] or [Shared]
Value: Disable, WEP
When Network Authentication is set to [PA-PSK] or [PA-PSK]
Value: TKIP*2, AES, Auto*2, Preshared Key
NOTE
If [WEP] is selected, enter the WEP key. Up to 26 characters can be entered.
If [Preshared Key] is selected, enter the Preshared key. Enter the value in 8 to 64 characters.
*1
Not displayed if you selected [Ad Hoc] for "Connection Mode".
*2
Not displayed if you selected [WPA2-PSK] for "Network Authentication".
8-48
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Network Interface (Send)
System/Network
NOTE
This function is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit is installed.
Item
Network Interface (Send)
Description
Specify the network interface card to be used for send function and connecting to external
address book.
Value: Standard, Optional Network
Security Level
System/Network
Item
Security Level
Description
Specify the security level.
Value:
Low:
This is the mode in which the service personnel performs maintenance work.
Do not set to this mode.
High:
This is the security setting we recommend. Use this setting normally.
Very High: In addition to [High] setting, this setting disables the machine settings to be
changed from external command.
8-49
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Interface Block Setting
System/Network
This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with external devices such as USB hosts or optional
interfaces.
Item
USB Host
Description
This locks and protects the USB port (A1) or USB port (A2) (USB host).
Value: Unblock, Block
USB Device
This locks and protects the USB interface connector (B1) (USB Device).*
Value: Unblock, Block
USB Storage
This locks and protects the USB memory slot (A1).
Value: Unblock, Block
NOTE
This function is available when USB Host is set to [Unblock].
Optional Interface 1
Optional Interface 2
This locks and protects the optional interface slots (OPT1 or OPT2).
Value: Unblock, Block
IMPORTANT
After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
Data Security
System/Network
Configure settings for data stored in the machine's hard disk and memory.
Item
Hard Disk Initialization
Description
Initializes the system and the erasure method for data stored on the machine's hard disk. For
details, refer to the Data Security Kit (E) Operation Guide.
NOTE
This function is displayed when the optional Data Security Kit is activated.
Data Sanitization
Completely erases address information and image data saved in the machine.
NOTE
Up to 8 hours is required to complete this processing, depending on the amount of data stored.
Once in progress, the processing cannot canceled.
Before executing this function, disconnect modular, network, and other cables.
Do not turn off the main power switch while sanitizing the data. If the main power is turned off
during data erasing, erasing will be executed automatically when the power is restored,
however, complete erasure cannot be guaranteed.
Software Verification
Verify the installed software.
Press [Start] to start verification.
If an error occurs during software verification, contact your dealer or service representative.
8-50
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Information erased
Category
Devices/jobs
FAX*
Application/program
*
Data erased
•
Job settings configured by users
•
Network settings
•
Image data saved in Document Box, etc.
•
Data registered in One Touch keys
•
Job histories
•
User information (user list, address book, Document Box registered by the user, etc.)
•
Account information of job accounting
•
Network certificates
•
Initial screen on machine changed by service representative
•
Fax settings configured by users
•
Communication restriction settings
•
Encryption key settings
•
Transmission histories
•
Scheduled jobs
•
Conditional reception/forwarding settings
•
Application/program added by a user or service representative
•
Trial functions
Only when the optional fax kit is installed.
Document Guard
System/Network
NOTE
This function is displayed when the Printed Document Guard Kit is installed.
Item
Document Guard
Description
When the optional Printed Document Guard Kit is installed, careless copying and sending of
documents that contain confidential or personal information is prevented.
The guard pattern can be embedded in a document using the Security Watermark setting,
which is an advanced function of the printer driver. (Refer to the Printer Driver User Guide.)
It is recommended that you check the effects of this function in your usage environment.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When the Document Guard is enabled, restrictions apply to the operation of the machine. For
details, refer to Limitations on page 8-52.
8-51
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Limitations
System/Network
Operation after guard pattern is detected
Item
*
Description
All functions
A message indicating that a confidential document was detected is displayed. Scanning of the
remaining document pages stops.
Copying function
Printed blank from the point where the guard pattern is detected.
Sending Functions
Stops the sending operation.*
Document Box
Documents are not saved on the machine's hard disk.
FAX
The document is not sent.
When sending by file separation, document pages scanned prior to detection are sent. If file separation is not performed, the document is not
sent.
Restrictions
•
The DP Read Action (page 6-56) cannot be selected.
•
Faxes are sent by memory transmission.
Disclaimer
•
This function does not prevent leakage of information.
We do not bear any liability for damages occurring due to use of the function or inability to use the function.
•
The guard pattern may not be detected if printed on paper other than white paper or special paper with a pattern.
•
The integrity of detection is not guaranteed.
If misdetection occurs, contact your service representative.
Optional Function
System/Network
Item
Optional Function
Description
You can use the optional applications installed on this machine.
Optional Applications (page 11-8)
Restart Entire Device
System/Network
Item
Restart Entire Device
Description
Restart the CPU without turning the main power switch off. Use this to deal with any unstable
operation by the machine. (Same as the computer restart.)
8-52
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Edit Destination
Address Book
Edit Destination
Configure settings for address book.
Adding a Destination (Address Book) (page 3-45)
One Touch Key
Edit Destination
Configure settings for One Touch Key.
Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) (page 3-53)
Print list
Edit Destination
For details, refer to the FAX Operation Guide.
Address Book Defaults
Edit Destination
Item
Sort
Description
Select the default sort setting of the address for the address book.
Value: No., Name
Narrow Down
This procedure can be used to filter (narrow down) the types of destination listed when the
address book is displayed.
Value: Off, E-mail, Folder, FAX*, i-FAX*, Group
Address Book Type
Select whether the machine's address book or the External Address Book appears when the
address book is displayed.
Value: Address Book, Ext Address Book
*
Displayed only when the optional fax kit is installed.
User Login/Job Accounting
User Login/Job Accounting
Configure settings related to machine management.
User Login Setting (page 9-2)
Job Accounting Setting (page 9-27)
Unknown ID Job (page 9-41)
8-53
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
User Property
User Property
Allows you to view information about logged in users and edit some of that information.
User Login (page 9-4)
Date/Timer/Energy Saver
Date/Timer/Energy Saver
Configure settings related to the date and time.
Item
Date/Time
Description
Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. If you perform Send as Email, the date and time set here will be displayed on the header.
Value: Year (2000 to 2037), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31), Hour (00 to 23), Minute (00 to
59), Second (00 to 59)
NOTE
If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you will no longer be
able to use the application.
Date Format
Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in Western notation.
Value: Month/Day/Year, Day/Month/Year, Year/Month/Day
Time Zone
Set the time difference from GMT. Choose the nearest listed location from the list. If you select
a region that utilizes summer time, configure settings for summer time.
Setting Date and Time (page 2-23)
Auto Panel Reset
If no jobs are run for a certain period of time, automatically reset settings and return to the
default setting. Select to use Auto Panel Reset or not.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
The time allowed to elapse before the panel is reset is set with the Panel Reset Timer on page
8-55.
Auto Error Clear
If an error occurs during processing, processing stops to wait for the next step to be taken by
the user. In the Auto Error Clear mode, automatically clear the error after a set amount of time
elapses. For details, refer to Responding to Messages on page 10-23
Value: Off, On
.
.
8-54
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Low Power Timer
Description
Set amount of time before entering the Low Power mode.
Value: 1 to 240 minutes (1 minute increments)
Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode (page 3-14)
Panel Reset Timer
If you select [On] for Auto Panel Reset, set the amount of time to wait before Auto Panel Reset.
Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)
NOTE
This function is displayed when [Device Log History] is set to [On].
Sleep Timer
Set amount of time before entering Sleep.
Value: For Europe 1 to 120 minutes (1 minute increments)
Except for Europe 1 to 240 minutes (1 minute increments)
NOTE This function is displayed when [Auto Sleep] is set to [On].
Interrupt Clear Timer
Set the period after which the machine reverts to Normal mode when it has been set to
Interrupt Copy mode and then left unused.
Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)
Error Job Skip
Set whether a job for which a "Add paper in cassette #" or "Add paper in Multi Purpose tray" error
occurred when the job was started is automatically skipped after a set period of time elapses.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
Error Clear Timer
•
When a job is skipped, it is moved to the end of the job queue.
•
If [On] is selected, set the time until the job is skipped. The setting range is 5 to 90
(5 second increments).
If you select [On] for Auto Error Clear, set the amount of time to wait before automatically
clearing errors.
Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)
NOTE
This function is displayed when [Auto Error Clear] is set to [On].
Unusable Time*1
For details, refer to the FAX Operation Guide.
Sleep Level
Select the sleep level.
Set the Energy Saver mode to reduce power consumption even more than normal Sleep mode.
Value: Quick Recovery, Energy Saver
NOTE
This function will not be displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit is installed.
Sleep Rules
Select whether to use the Energy Saver mode for the following functions individually:
•
Network
•
USB Cable
•
Card Reader*2
•
FAX*1
•
NIC*3
•
Application
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When the machine has entered sleep mode with Energy Saver setting, it does not wake from
sleep mode when it receives print data from a PC connected by USB cable.
8-55
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
EnergySaver RecoveryLevel
Description
Select the method of recovery from energy saver.
Value:
Full Recovery:
This mode enables the use of all functions immediately.
However, this mode saves less energy.
Normal Recovery: In this mode, you can select the method from the following:
enabling the use of all functions immediately or enabling the use of
desired functions only.
If you want to use all functions immediately, press the [Power] key
to execute recovery.
Power Saving Recovery: This mode enables the use of desired functions only. This
mode saves energy most effectively.
Weekly Timer Settings
Weekly Timer
Configure settings for switching the machine into Sleep mode and waking it automatically at a
specified time for each day of the week.
Select whether to use Weekly Timer.
Value: Off, On
Schedule
Specify the time for each day of the week at which the machine enters Sleep mode and
recovers.
Retry Times
Set the number of retry to switch the machine into Sleep mode.
Value: Limited Retries, Unlimited Retries
NOTE
If [Limited Retries] is selected, set the number of retry. The setting range is 0 to 10. Retry is not
performed when "0" is set.
If [Unlimited Retries] is selected, retry is performed until the machine enters Sleep mode.
Retry Interval
Set the retry interval.
Use [-] / [+] to enter a number.
Value: 10 to 60 seconds (increments of 10 seconds)
*1
Displayed only when the optional fax kit is installed.
*2
This is displayed when the optional Card Authentication Kit is installed.
*3
Only displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit is installed.
8-56
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Adjustment/Maintenance
Adjustment/Maintenance
Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance.
Item
Density Adjustment
Copy
Description
Adjust density.
Adjust copy density. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels.
Value: -3 (Lighter), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Darker)
Send/Box
Adjust scan density when sending or storing the data in Document Box. Adjustment can be
made in 7 levels.
Value: -3 (Lighter), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Darker)
FAX*
Background Density Adj.
Copy (Auto)
For details, refer to the FAX Operation Guide.
Darkens or lightens overall background density adjustment.
Darkens or lightens overall background density adjustment during copying. Adjustment can be
made in 7 levels.
Value: -3 (Lighter), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Darker)
Send/Box (Auto)
Darkens or lightens overall background density when sending images or storing them in the
Document Box. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels.
Value: -3 (Lighter), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Darker)
Correcting Black Lines
Correct fine lines (streaks caused by contamination), which may appear on the image, when
the document processor is used.
Value
Off: No correction performed.
On (Low): Correction performed. The reproduction of fine lines on the original may
become lighter than when using [Off].
On (High): Select this item if a streak remains after using [On (Low)]. The reproduction
of fine lines on the original may become lighter than when using [On (Low)].
System Initialization
Initialize the hard disk installed on the machine to return it to the factory defaults.
NOTE
This function will not be displayed when the optional Data Security Kit is activated.
Display Brightness
Set the brightness of the touch panel.
Value: 1 (Darker), 2, 3, 4 (Lighter)
Silent Mode
Make after-printing process run more quietly. Select this mode when the running noise is
uncomfortable.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When [On] is selected, preparation for the next printing may take longer.
Memory Diagnostics
*
Perform this function to check the machine memory.
Displayed only when the optional fax kit is installed.
8-57
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Auto Color Correction
Description
This setting allows you to adjust the detection level used by the machine to determine whether
the original is color or black and white in Auto Color Selection Mode. Setting a lower value will
result in more originals being identified as color, while a larger value will tend to increase the
number of originals being identified as black and white.
Value: 1 (Color), 2, 3, 4, 5 (B & W)
Tone Curve Adjustment
After prolonged use, or from the effects of surrounding temperature or humidity, the printed
output tone may differ from the original. Perform this function to ensure consistency with the
original tone.
For the procedure, refer to Tone Curve Adjustment on page 10-36.
Drum Refresh 1
Refresh the drum when image blur appear on images in copies. Takes about 85seconds.
For more information, refer to the Drum Refresh1 on page 10-37.
NOTE
Drum Refresh1 cannot be performed while printing. Execute Drum Refresh1 after the printing is
done.
Drum Refresh 2
Use this mode when white spots appear on images. Takes about 85 seconds. To use [Drum
Refresh2], load Ledger or A3 size paper into the Multi Purpose tray.
When you run [Drum Refresh 2], the machine makes a vibrating sound for about 85 seconds
until drum refreshing is completed. The toner soiling on the ejected paper is normal and does
not indicate a fault.
For more information, refer to the Drum Refresh2 on page 10-37.
NOTE
Drum Refresh2 cannot be performed while printing. Execute Drum Refresh2 after the printing is
done.
Developer Refresh
Adjust the printed image that is too light or incomplete, even though there is enough toner. In
addition, Black or color dots appear on the white background when white original is scanned
can be removed.
For the procedure, refer to Developer Refresh on page 10-38.
NOTE
Waiting time may be longer when the toner is refilled during developer refresh.
Color Calibration Cycle
Set the calibration cycle.
Value:
Short:
Priority is given to image quality.
Standard: Balances image quality and print speed.
Long:
Priority is given to print speed.
NOTE
When [Custom] is displayed as setting item, the setting cannot be changed.
8-58
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item
Calibration
Description
Calibrate the device to ensure consistency with the original grayscale.
For the procedure, refer to Calibration on page 10-38.
NOTE
If you find that the grayscale is not improved by this calibration, use Tone Curve Adjustment
(page 10-36).
Correct Paper Curl
Some paper types and paper stored in certain conditions may curl. This feature can be used to
correct paper curling.
Value: Auto, Reduce Downcurl, Reduce Upcurl
Upcurl
Downcurl
NOTE
This function is displayed when the optional 1,000-sheet finisher or 4,000-sheet finisher is
installed.
8-59
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Internet
Internet
Item
Internet Browser
Description
Select whether to use the Internet browser.
Value: Off, On
Browser Environment
This specifies Internet browser preferences such as your home page setting and how pages
are displayed.
Value:
Home page: (Enter the address for Home page.)
Text Size: Large, Medium, Small
Display Mode: Normal, Just-Fit Rendering, Smart-Fit Rendering
Cookie: Accept All, Reject All, Prompt before Accepting
NOTE
This is not displayed if [Off] is selected in Internet Browser on page 8-60.
NOTE
To use proxy from Internet Browser, refer to Proxy on page 8-47 to configure settings.
8-60
9
User Authentication
and Accounting (User
Login, Job Accounting)
This chapter explains the following topics:
User Login .......................................................................................................................................................... 9-2
First User Login Administration ................................................................................................................ 9-2
User Login Setting ................................................................................................................................... 9-2
User Login ............................................................................................................................................... 9-4
Authentication Security ............................................................................................................................ 9-6
Adding a User (Local User List) ............................................................................................................... 9-8
Changing User Properties ...................................................................................................................... 9-11
Local Authorization ................................................................................................................................ 9-15
Group Authorization Set. ....................................................................................................................... 9-15
Guest Authorization Set. ........................................................................................................................ 9-18
Obtain NW User Property ...................................................................................................................... 9-21
Simple Login Settings ............................................................................................................................ 9-23
ID Card Settings .................................................................................................................................... 9-26
Job Accounting Setting .................................................................................................................................... 9-27
First Job Accounting Setup .................................................................................................................... 9-27
Job Accounting Setting .......................................................................................................................... 9-27
Job Accounting ...................................................................................................................................... 9-29
Login/Logout .......................................................................................................................................... 9-29
Job Accounting Access .......................................................................................................................... 9-30
Job Accounting (Local) .......................................................................................................................... 9-31
Accounting List ...................................................................................................................................... 9-32
Managing Accounts ............................................................................................................................... 9-33
Default Setting ....................................................................................................................................... 9-36
Counting the Number of Pages Printed ................................................................................................. 9-38
Apply Limit ............................................................................................................................................. 9-40
Copier/Printer Count .............................................................................................................................. 9-40
Unknown ID Job ............................................................................................................................................... 9-41
9-1
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > User Login
User Login
User login administration specifies how the user access is administered on this machine. Enter a correct login user
name and password for user authentication to login.
Access are in three levels - User, Administrator, and Machine Administrator. The security levels can be modified only by
the Machine Administrator.
Users that are not able to log in to the machine can be allowed to use the functions of the machine on a restricted basis.
The users can use the machine without performing authentication, and thus this feature is convenient when the majority
of users are managed with the same authority. You can prohibit the box store function in "Guest Authorization Set." so
that the box store function cannot be used unless the user logs in. If "To use this function, press Authentication key and
login" appears while operating the machine, you must press the [Authentication/Logout] key and log in as a user for
whom the function is not prohibited.
First User Login Administration
Follow these steps for the first user login administration.
Enable user login administration. (page 9-4)
T
Add a user. (page 9-8)
T
Log out. (page 2-22)
T
The registered user logs in for operations. (page 9-29)
User Login Setting
1
Display the screen.
1 Press the [System Menu] key.
2 Press [
] and then [User Login/Job Accounting].
System Menu
Edit Destination
2
User Login/Job Accounting
User Property
Date/Timer/Energy Saver
Adjustment/Maintenance
Internet
Application
1
2/2
Close
9-2
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > User Login
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password
and press [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
d-Copia 3500MF plus
3500
3500
d-Copia 4500MF plus
4500
4500
d-Copia 5500MF plus
5500
5500
3 Press [Next] of [User Login Setting].
The user login administration setting screen appears.
User Login/Job Accounting
User Login Setting:
㪥㪼㫏㫋
Unknown ID Job:
㪚㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼
Job Accounting Setting:
㪥㪼㫏㫋
Close
2
Login Password
Configure the settings.
User Login/Job Accounting - User Login Setting
User Login:
㪚㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼
Authentication Security:
㪥㪼㫏㫋
Local User List:
㪘㪻㪻㪆㪜㪻㫀㫋
Local Authorization:
㪚㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼
Group Authorization Set.:
㪥㪼㫏㫋
Guest Authorization Set.:
㪥㪼㫏㫋
Obtain NW User Property:
㪚㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼
Simple Login Settings:
㪥㪼㫏㫋
ID Card Settings:
㪥㪼㫏㫋
Close
User Login (page 9-4)
Authentication Security (page 9-6)
Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-8)
Local Authorization (page 9-15)
Group Authorization Set. (page 9-15)
Guest Authorization Set. (page 9-18)
Obtain NW User Property (page 9-21)
Simple Login (page 9-23)
ID Card Settings (page 9-26)
9-3
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > User Login
User Login
This enables user login administration. Select one of the following authentication methods:
Item
Descriptions
Local Authentication
User authentication based on user properties on the local user list stored in the
machine.
Network Authentication
User authentication based on Authentication Server. Use a user property stored
in Authentication Server to access the network authentication login page.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to User Login Setting on page 9-2, display the user login setting screen.
2 Press [Change] of "User Login".
2
Configure the settings.
User Login/Job Accounting - User Login
1
User login administration.
Select authentication method.
Server Type
㪦㪽㪽
1
Domain
Default Domain
NTLM
Local
Authentication
Add/Edit
Kerberos
Network
Authentication
Ext.
Expansion
Authentication
Host
Host Name
Cancel
OK
2
1 Select [Local Authentication] or [Network Authentication].
Select [Off] to disable user login administration.
If you select [Network Authentication], enter the host name (64 characters or less) and domain name
(256 characters or less) for the Authentication Server. Select [NTLM], [Kerberos] or [Ext.] as the
server type.
When selecting [Ext.] as the server type, enter the port number.
NOTE
Pressing [Add/Edit] of "Domain" displays the domain registration list. In the domain
registration list screen, press [Add/Edit], and enter the domain name. Up to 10 domain
names can be registered.
2 Press [OK].
If [Local Authentication] is selected, "Do you want to add a new function to the home screen?"
appears when [OK] is pressed.
To add a new function, press [Yes]. The selection screen for functions displayed in the home screen
will appear.
Available Functions to Display on Desktop (page 3-6)
9-4
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > User Login
NOTE
If the login user name and password are rejected, check the following settings.
• Network Authentication setting of the machine
• User property of the Authentication Server
• Date and time setting of the machine and the Authentication Server
If you cannot login because of the setting of the machine, login with any administrator
registered in the local user list and correct the settings.
Up to 10 domains can be registered for network authentication.
9-5
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > User Login
Authentication Security
If user authentication is enabled, configure the user authentication settings.
User Account Lockout Set.
Configure these settings to restrict the operation for the user being authenticated.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to User Login Setting on page 9-2, display the user login setting screen.
2 Press [Next] of "Authentication Security" and then [Next] of "User Account Lockout Set.".
2
Configure the settings.
The following settings can be selected.
Item
Lockout
Descriptions
Select whether or not account lockout policy is enabled.
Value: Off, On
Lockout Policy
Specify the conditions and the extent to which the account lockout is
applied.
Value
Number of Retries until Locked:
Specify how many login retries are allowed until
the account is locked out.
(1 to 10 times)
Lockout Duration: Specify how long the account is to be locked out
until it is unlocked.
(1 to 60 minutes)
Lockout Target
Locked out Users List
Specify the extent to which the account lockout
is applied. You can select from [All] or [Remote
Login Only]. Remote Login Only locks out all
operations from outside the operation panel.
Displays a list of locked out users. You can unlock a user by selecting the
user in the list, and pressing [Unlock].
9-6
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > User Login
Password Policy Settings
You can prohibit the setting and use of passwords that do not comply with the password policy.
Setting the Password Policy makes it more difficult to break the password.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to User Login Setting on page 9-2, display the user login setting screen.
2 Press [Next] of "Authentication Security" and then [Next] of "Password Policy Settings".
2
Configure the settings.
The following settings can be selected.
Item
Password Policy
Descriptions
Select whether or not password policy is enabled.
Value: Off, On
Minimum password
length
Set the minimum password length of characters for password.
Password complexity
Set the password complexity.
Value: Off, On (1 to 64 characters)
Value
No more than two consecutive identical char: Off, On
At least one uppercase letter (A-Z): Off, On
At least one lowercase letter (a-z): Off, On
At least one number (0-9): Off, On
At least one symbol: Off, On
Maximum password age
Set the maximum password age.
Value: Off, On (1 to 180 days)
Policy Violated User
List
List of users do not meet password policy requirements.
9-7
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > User Login
Adding a User (Local User List)
This adds a new user. You can add up to 1,000 users (including the default login user name).
NOTE
By default, one of each default user with machine administrator rights and administrator privileges is already stored.
Each user's properties are:
Machine Administrator
User Name:
DeviceAdmin
Login User Name: d-Copia 3500MF plus: 3500, d-Copia 4500MF plus: 4500, d-Copia 5500MF plus: 5500
Login Password:
d-Copia 3500MF plus: 3500, d-Copia 4500MF plus: 4500, d-Copia 5500MF plus: 5500
Access Level:
Machine Administrator
Administrator
User Name:
Admin
Login User Name: Admin
Login Password:
Admin
Access Level:
Administrator
* Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).
It is recommended to periodically change the user name, login user name and login password regularly for your
security.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to User Login Setting on page 9-2, display the user login setting screen.
2 Press [Add/Edit] of "Local User List" and then [Add].
9-8
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > User Login
2
Enter the user information.
User:
User Name:
㪚㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼
01 User
Login User Name:
㪚㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼
0099
Access Level:
㪚㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼
Account Name:
㪚㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼
02 Account
㪚㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼
ID Card Information:
㪚㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼
Empty
[email protected]
Local Authorization:
㪚㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼
**********
User
E-mail Address:
Login Password:
Next
My Panel:
Next
Cancel
Save
The table below explains the user information to be registered.
Item
User Name*1
Descriptions
Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).
Login User
Name*1
Enter the login user name to login (up to 64 characters). The same login user
name cannot be registered.
Login Password
Enter the password to login (up to 64 characters).
Access Level*1
Select "Administrator" or "User" for user access privileges.
Account Name
Add an account where the user belongs. The user, who registered his/her
account name, can login without entering the account ID. Refer to Job
Accounting Setting on page 9-27
NOTE
Select [Name] or [ID] from the "Sort" to sort the account list.
Press [Search(Name)] or [Search(ID)] to search by account name or account
ID.
E-mail Address
The user can register his/her E-mail address. The registered address will be
automatically selected for subsequent operations that need any E-mail function.
ID Card
Information
Register IC card information.
Place the ID card on the ID card reader, and press [Read].
NOTE
This function is displayed when the optional ID Card Authentication Kit is
activated.
Card Authentication Kit(B) "Card Authentication Kit" (page 11-6)
9-9
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > User Login
Item
Local
Authorization
Descriptions
Set usage authority for each user. Local Authorization must be enabled.
(Refer to page 9-15.)
The following restriction items are available:
Print Restriction:
Select whether or not use of the print function of the printer is prohibited.
Print Restriction (Color):
Select whether or not use of the print function (color) of the printer is prohibited.
Copy Restriction:
Select whether or not use of the copy print function is prohibited.
Copy Restriction (Color):
Select whether or not use of the copy print function (color) is prohibited.
Copy Restriction (Full Color):
Select whether or not use of the copy print function (full color) is prohibited.
Duplex Restriction:
Select whether only duplex printing is allowed.
Combine Restriction:
Specify whether only Combine is allowed.
EcoPrint Restriction:
Specify whether only EcoPrint is allowed.
Send Restriction:
Select whether or not use of the send function is prohibited.
FAX TX Restriction*2:
Select whether or not use of the fax send function is prohibited.
Storing Restr. in Box:
Select whether or not use of the box store function is prohibited.
Storing Restr. in Memory:
Select whether or not use of the removable memory store function is prohibited.
My Panel
You can register the language selection and initial screen settings for each
user.
Settings registered here can be applied simply by logging in.
*1
Mandatory at user registration.
*2
Displayed only when the optional fax kit is installed.
NOTE
Refer to the Entering Characters on page 11-12 for details on entering characters.
If you selected [Send], select the screen to display from [Destination], [Machine Address
Book], or [Ext Address Book].
3
Press [Save].
A new user is added on the local user list.
NOTE
If simple login is enabled, a confirmation screen appears when new registration is finished
asking if you will configure simple login settings. To configure simple login settings, press
[Yes]. For the procedure for configuring simple login settings, refer to Simple Login Settings on
page 9-23. If you select [No], you will return to the user list screen.
9-10
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > User Login
Changing User Properties
User properties can be changed. Types of user properties that could be changed may be different depending on user
access privilege.
NOTE
To change the user information of the machine administrator, you must log in with machine administrator authority.
You can only view user information if you log in as a regular user.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
d-Copia 3500MF plus
3500
3500
d-Copia 4500MF plus
4500
4500
d-Copia 5500MF plus
5500
5500
For a user with administrator rights who logs in
User properties can be changed and users can be deleted. The items, which can be added, are all able to be changed.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to User Login Setting on page 9-2, display the user login setting screen.
2 Press [Add/Edit] of "Local User List".
2
Change the user properties.
1 Select the user whose properties you wish to change.
NOTE
Select [Name] and [Login Name] from the "Sort" to sort the user list.
Press [Search(Name)] or [Search(Login)] to search by name or login user name.
2 Change the user properties.
9-11
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > User Login
Changing user properties
1 Press [Detail].
2 Refer to step 2 of Adding a User to change a user property.
User:
User Name:
㪚㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼
01 User
㪚㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼
Login User Name:
Login Password:
0099
㪚㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼
**********
Access Level:
㪚㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼
Account Name:
User
㪚㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼
02 Account
㪚㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼
E-mail Address:
ID Card Information:
㪚㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼
Empty
[email protected]
Next
Local Authorization:
My Panel:
Next
Cancel
Save
3 Press [Save].
4 Press [Yes] in the registration confirmation screen.
The user information is changed.
Deleting a user
1 Press [Delete].
2 Press [Yes] in the deletion confirmation screen.
The selected user will be deleted.
NOTE
The default user with administrator rights cannot be deleted.
To change the user information of logged in user (User Property)
These users can partially change their own user properties including user name, login password, and E-mail address.
Although "Login User Name", "Access Level", or "Account Name" cannot be changed, the users can check the present status.
1
Display the screen.
1 Press the [System Menu] key.
2 Press [
] and then [User Property].
9-12
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > User Login
2
Change the user properties.
1 Refer to step 2 of Adding a User to change a user property.
Press [Detail] of "Login User Name" or "Account Name" to check the present status.
User Property
User Name:
㪚㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼
01 User
Login User Name:
Detail
0099
Login Password:
㪚㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼
**********
Access Level:
Maximum Password Age:
User
Remaining: 7 day(s)
E-mail Address:
㪚㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼
Authorization Rules:
Detail
[email protected]
Next
Simple Login:
1/2
Cancel
Item
Save
Description
User Name
Changes the name shown on the user list. Up to 32 characters can be
entered.
Login User Name
Displays the login user name that is entered at login.
Login Password
Changes the password that is entered at login. Up to 64 characters can be
entered.
Access Level
Displays the user's access level.
Maximum Password
Age
Displays the term of validity of the login password.
NOTE
This function does not appear when Password Policy is set to [Off] or the
term of validity of the password is set to [Off].
E-mail Address
Changes the user's e-mail address. Up to 128 characters can be entered.
NOTE
This function appears when Local Authorization is set to [On], Group
Authorization is set to [On], and Guest Authorization Setting is set to [On].
Authorization Rules
Displays the usage restriction that is set for the logged in user.
NOTE
[Job Accounting Rules] shows the account name set for the logged in user
and the usage restrictions that are set for that account. This function
appears when job accounting is set to [On]. For information on job
accounting, refer to Job Accounting Setting (page 9-27).
Simple Login
When simple login is enabled, changes associated settings.
NOTE
This function does not appear when Simple Login is set to [Off] or the user
is not registered in Simple Login.
9-13
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > User Login
Item
ID Card Information
Description
Displays the ID card information of the logged in user.
NOTE
This function is displayed when the optional ID Card Authentication Kit is
activated.
Card Authentication Kit(B) "Card Authentication Kit" (page 11-6)
This function does not appear when the server type is set to [Ext.] in
Network Authentication, and logged in with the user account certificated in
the server specified as the [Ext.] server type.
My Panel
Register the language and default screen for each user. Once registered,
the setting will be applied simply by login. Network users are not displayed.
2 Press [Save].
The user information is changed.
9-14
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > User Login
Local Authorization
Select whether or not to use Local Authorization.
NOTE
When using Local Authorization, the user authentication type must be set to [Local Authentication].
For details, refer to User Login on page 9-4.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to User Login Setting on page 9-2, display the user login setting screen.
2 Press [Change] of "Local Authorization".
2
Configure the setting.
1 Select [Off] or [On].
2 Press [OK].
Group Authorization Set.
Set restrictions of the machine usage by each individual group registered in the authentication server.
NOTE
To use the group authorization settings, [Network Authentication] must be selected for the authentication method in
User Login on page 9-4. Select "On" for "LDAP" in Protocol Settings on page 8-45.
Group Authorization
Use the group authorization.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to User Login Setting on page 9-2, display the user login setting screen.
2 Press [Next] of "Group Authorization Set.", and then [Change] of "Group Authorization".
2
Configure the setting.
1 Press [On].
2 Press [OK].
9-15
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > User Login
Group List
Register the groups that are restricted the machine usage. Up to 20 groups can be individually registered. Other users
and groups belong to "Others".
The table below explains the group information to be registered.
Item
Descriptions
Group ID*1
Enter the ID displayed on the group list (between 1 and 4294967295).
Group Name
Enter the name displayed on the group list (up to 32 characters).
Access Level
Select [Administrator] or [User] for group access privileges.
Print Restriction
Select whether or not to reject usage of print functions for the printer.
Copy Restriction
Select whether or not to reject usage of copy functions.
Duplex Restriction
Select whether only duplex printing is allowed.
Combine Restriction
Specify whether only Combine is allowed.
EcoPrint Restriction
Specify whether only EcoPrint is allowed.
Send Restriction
Select whether or not to reject usage of the send functions.
FAX TX Restriction*2
Select whether or not to reject usage of the FAX transmissions.
Storing Restr. in Box
Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the document boxes.
Storing Restr. in Memory
Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the removable memory.
*1
For "Group ID", specify PrimaryGroupID assigned by Active Directory of Windows. If you are using Windows Server 2008, check Attribute
Editor tab of user properties. If you are using Windows Server 2000/2003, check ADSIEdit. ADSIEdit is a support tool included on the
installation DVD for Windows Server OS (under \SUPPORT\TOOLS).
*2
These items are displayed when the optional fax kit is installed.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to User Login Setting on page 9-2, display the user login setting screen.
2 Press [Next] of "Group Authorization Set.", [Next] of "Group List" and then [Add].
User Login/Job Accounting - Group List
Add or edit the groups. (Maximum: 20)
Group ID
Group Name
Others
㪘㪻㪻
㪛㪼㫋㪸㫀㫃
㪛㪼㫃㪼㫋㪼
Cancel
9-16
Save
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > User Login
2
Configure the settings.
Group:
Group ID:
Change
Group Name:
Change
Access Level:
Change
Print Restriction:
Change
Copy Restriction:
Change
1/2
Cancel
Save
1 Press [Change] of "Group ID".
2 Enter the group ID and press [OK].
3 Press [Change] of "Group Name".
4 Enter the group name and press [OK].
NOTE
Refer to Entering Characters on page 11-12 for details on entering characters.
5 Press [Change] of "Access Level".
6 Select the group access privileges and press [OK].
7 Press [Change] of "Print Restriction".
8 Select [Reject Usage] or [Off] and press [OK].
9 Similar to steps 7 and 8, set "Copy Restriction", "Duplex Restriction", "Combine
Restriction", "EcoPrint Restriction", "Send Restriction", "Fax TX Restriction", "Storing Restr.
in Box", and "Storing Restr. in Memory".
3
Register the group.
Press [Save]. A new group is added on the group list.
9-17
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > User Login
Guest Authorization Set.
When User Login Administration is enabled, set the functions that guest users who cannot log in to the machine are
allowed to use.
NOTE
To use Guest Authorization Set., User Login Administration must be enabled in User Login on page 9-4.
Cannot be used when the Key Counter option is used.
Guest Authorization
Use the guest authorization.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to User Login Setting on page 9-2, display the user login setting screen.
2 Press [Next] of "Guest Authorization Set.", and then [Change] of "Guest Authorization".
2
Configure the setting.
1 Select [On] or [Off].
2 Press [OK].
NOTE
If the guest authentication setting is enabled, the [Authentication/Logout] key must be
pressed when logging in.
In the guest user default settings, only monochrome copying can be used. If you wish to use
a different function, log in as a user who can use that function, or change the settings in the
guest properties.
Guest Property
Register guest user information and functions that are restricted.
The table below explains the user information to be registered.
Item
User Name
Descriptions
Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).
The default setting is "Guest User".
Access Level
The authority of the user appears. This cannot be changed.
Account Name
Add an account where the user belongs.
If the user does not belong to any account, select [Other Account].
9-18
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > User Login
Item
Descriptions
Authorization Rules
Set usage authority for each user.
The items you can restrict the access level with are as follows.
Print Restriction:
Select whether or not use of the print function of the printer is prohibited.
Copy Restriction:
Select whether or not use of the copy print function is prohibited.
Duplex Restriction:
Select whether only duplex printing is allowed.
Combine Restriction:
Specify whether only Combine is allowed.
EcoPrint Restriction:
Specify whether only EcoPrint is allowed.
Send Restriction:
Select whether or not use of the send function is prohibited.
FAX TX Restriction*:
Select whether or not use of the fax send function is prohibited.
Storing Restr. in Box:
Select whether or not use of the box store function is prohibited.
Storing Restr. in Memory:
Select whether or not use of the removable memory store function is prohibited.
*
These items are displayed when the optional fax kit is installed.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to User Login Setting on page 9-2, display the user login setting screen.
2 Press [Next] of "Guest Authorization Set.", and then [Change] of "Guest Property".
2
Configure the settings.
User Login/Job Accounting - Guest Property
User Name:
㪚㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼
Guest
Access Level:
Account Name:
User
Authorization Rules:
㪚㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼
02Account
Next
Close
1 Press [Change] of "User Name".
2 Enter the user name and press [OK].
NOTE
Refer to the Entering Characters on page 11-12 for details on entering characters.
9-19
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > User Login
3 Press [Change] of "Account Name".
4 Select the account and press [OK].
NOTE
Select [Name] or [ID] from the "Sort" to sort the account list.
Press [Search(Name)] or [Search(ID)] to search by account name or account ID.
5 Press [Next] of "Authorization Rules".
6 Press [Change] of "Print Restriction".
7 Select [Reject Usage] or [Off] and press [OK].
8 Repeat steps 7 and 8, set "Copy Restriction", "Duplex Restriction", "Combine Restriction",
"EcoPrint Restriction", "Send Restriction", "Fax TX Restriction", "Storing Restr. in Box", and
"Storing Restr. in Memory".
9 Press [Close].
3
Register the guest property.
Press [Save].
9-20
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > User Login
Obtain NW User Property
Set the required information to obtain the network user property from the LDAP server. The user name and E-mail
address obtained with this setting is shown in the user information, the status confirmation screen, and the header of
E-mail.
NOTE
To obtain the network user property from the LDAP server, [Network Authentication] must be selected for the
authentication method in User Login on page 9-4. Select "On" for "LDAP" in Protocol Settings on page 8-45.
The table below explains the required information to be registered.
Item
Descriptions
Server Name*1
Enter the LDAP server name or the IP address (up to 64 characters). If a server
name is not entered, user information will be acquired from the server set for
Network Authentication.
Port
Set the LDAP port number or use the default port 389.
Name 1*2
Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be displayed from the
LDAP server (up to 32 characters).
Name 2*3
Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be displayed from the
LDAP server (up to 32 characters).
E-mail Address*4
Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the E-mail address from the LDAP server
(up to 32 characters).
Authentic at Type*5
Set the authentication method. Select [Simple] or [SASL]. After changing the
setting, restart the system or turn the power off and then on.
Search Timeout
Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds (from 5 to 255
seconds).
LDAP Security
Select the type of encryption according to the type of security employed by the
LDAP server. The value is [Off], [SSL/TLS] or [STARTTLS].
*1
If using Active Directory of Windows, the server name may be the same as the server name entered in the network authentication.
*2
If using Active Directory of Windows, displayName of Attribute may be used as "Name 1".
*3
"Name 2" can be left out. When you assign displayName in "Name 1" and department in "Name 2", and if the value of displayName is
"Mike Smith" and the value of department is "Sales" in Active Directory of Windows, the user name appears as "Mike Smith Sales".
*4
If using Active Directory of Windows, mail of Attribute may be used as E-mail Address.
*5
Appears when the server type is set to "Kerberos" in "Network Authentication".
9-21
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > User Login
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to User Login Setting on page 9-2, display the user login setting screen.
2 Press [Change] of "Obtain Network User Property".
2
Configure the settings.
User Login/Job Accounting - Obtain NW User Property
Get the network user information.
LDAP Server Information:
㪦㪽㪽
Server Name
Port:
㪦㫅
Simple
192.181.11.11
389
Authenticat
Type
# Keys
30 sec.
Acquisition of User Information:
Name 1
Search
Timeout
displayName
Name 2
E-mail Address
Off
LDAP
Security
mail
Cancel
OK
1 Press [On].
2 Press [Server Name].
3 Enter the LDAP server name or the IP address and press [OK].
4 Press [# Keys] to enter the LDAP port number using the numeric keys.
5 Press [Name 1].
6 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be displayed and press [OK].
7 Similar to steps 5 and 6, set [Name 2].
8 Press [E-mail Address].
9 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the E-mail address and press [OK].
10 If you set the server type to "Kerberos", press [Authentication Type] and set the
authentication method.
11 Press [Search Timeout] to set the amount of time to wait before time-out.
12 Press [+], [-] or the numeric keys to enter the time and press [OK].
13 Press [LDAP Security] to select the type of encryption according to the type of security
employed by the LDAP server.
14 Select [Off], [SSL/TLS], or [STARTTLS] and press [OK].
9-22
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > User Login
Simple Login Settings
The simple login function allows users to log in simply by selecting a user name. Users must be registered in advance to
use this functionality.
NOTE
For user registration, refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on page 9-8.
To use Simple Login, User Login Administration must be enabled in User Login on page 9-4.
If the guest authentication setting is enabled, Simple login cannot be enabled.
Simple Login
Select whether or not simple login is enabled.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to User Login Setting on page 9-2, display the user login setting screen.
2 Press [Next] of "Simple Login Settings", and then [Change] of "Simple Login".
2
Configure the setting.
1 Select [On] or [Off].
2 Press [OK].
Simple Login Key
Register users to use simple login. You can add up to 20 users.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to User Login Setting on page 9-2, display the user login setting screen.
2 Press [Next] of "Simple Login Settings", and then [Next] of "Simple Login Key".
2
Enter the user information.
1 Press the key to which you want to register a user.
2 Press [Add/Edit].
User Login/Job Accounting - Simple Login Key
1
Add or edit the Simple Login key.
01
02
03
A
B
C
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
2
No.
Add/Edit
Delete
1/2
Detail
Close
9-23
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > User Login
3 Press [Change] in "Display Name", enter the user name to be displayed, and press [OK].
Simple Login Key:
Display Name:
㪚㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼
User:
Change
Password Login:
㪚㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼
Icon:
㪚㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼
Male 1
Off
Cancel
Save
NOTE
Refer to Entering Characters on page 11-12 for details on entering characters.
4 Press [Change] of "User".
5 To specify the user from local users, select [Local User]. To specify from network users,
select [Network User]. Press [Next].
The procedure differs depending on the transmission method selected.
Specifying the user from local users
Simple Login Key: - User
Select the user.
User Name
Sort
User Name
Login User Name
A
A
B
B
C
C
Search(Name)
Search(Login)
1/1
Detail
Cancel
Back
OK
Select the user to be set for simple login.
NOTE
Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number. For details,
refer to Specifying Destination on page 5-26.
9-24
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > User Login
Specifying the user from network users
Simple Login Key: - User
Enter login user name and password.
Domain:
User
Name
Login
User Name
domain 1
0099
# Keys
Login
Password
**********
# Keys
Cancel
Back
OK
Press [Login User Name] and [Login Password], enter the information of the user to be
registered, and press [OK].
If you are specifying a user for whom a domain is set in network authentication, press the
"Domain" and select the domain where the user is registered.
NOTE
Refer to Entering Characters on page 11-12 for details on entering characters.
5 Press [Change] of "Password Login".
6 Press [On] or [Off] and then press [OK].
7 Press [Change] of "Icon".
8 Select the user icon to be displayed and press [OK].
Simple Login Key: - Icon
Set the icon to use for the Simple Login key.
Male 1
Male 2
Female 1
Female 2
Soccer
Tennis
Basketball
Piano
Guitar
Trumpet
Car
Bicycle
Train
Dog
Cat
Parakeet
Sunflower
Tulips
Earth
Moon
Cancel
3
Register the user.
Press [Save].
9-25
1
2
OK
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > User Login
ID Card Settings
If ID card authentication is enabled, select the authentication type.
NOTE
This functions appears when the Card Authentication kit is activated.
Card Authentication Kit(B) "Card Authentication Kit" on page 11-6
This function does not appear when the user logs in as a network authentication user.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to User Login Setting on page 9-2, display the user login setting screen.
2 Press [Next] of "User Login Setting", and then [Next] of "ID Card Settings".
2
Configure the settings.
The following settings can be selected.
Item
Keyboard Login
Descriptions
When ID card authentication is enabled, select whether or not login by
keyboard is allowed.
Value: Prohibit, Permit
Password Login
Select whether or not to require password entry after authenticating by
ID card.
Value: Off, On
9-26
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting Setting
Job Accounting Setting
Job accounting manages the copy/print count accumulated by individual accounts by assigning an ID to each account.
Job accounting helps the following activities in business organizations.
•
Manageability of up to 1,000 individual accounts.
•
Availability for account IDs with as many as eight digits (between 0 and 99999999) for security.
•
Integrated management of printing and scanning statistics through the use of an identical account ID.
•
Tracking the print volume for each account and for all accounts combined.
•
Restricting the print counter in one-page increments up to 9,999,999 copies.
•
Resetting the print counter for each account or for all accounts combined.
First Job Accounting Setup
Follow these steps for the first job accounting setup.
Enable job accounting. (page 9-29)
T
Add an account. (page 9-32)
T
Log out. (page 2-22)
T
Other users login for operations. (page 9-29)
Job Accounting Setting
1
Display the screen.
1 Press the [System Menu] key.
2 Press [
] and then [User Login/Job Accounting].
System Menu
Edit Destination
2
User Login/Job Accounting
User Property
Date/Timer/Energy Saver
Adjustment/Maintenance
Internet
Application
1
2/2
Close
9-27
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting Setting
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password
and press [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
d-Copia 3500MF plus
3500
3500
d-Copia 4500MF plus
4500
4500
d-Copia 5500MF plus
5500
5500
3 Press [Next] of "Job Accounting Setting".
User Login/Job Accounting
User Login Setting:
㪥㪼㫏㫋
Unknown ID Job:
㪚㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼
Job Accounting Setting:
㪥㪼㫏㫋
Close
2
Login Password
Configure the settings.
User Login/Job Accounting - Job Accounting Setting
Job Accounting:
㪚㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼
Job Accounting Access:
㪚㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼
Job Accounting (Local):
㪥㪼㫏㫋
Apply Limit:
㪚㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼
Copy/Printer Count:
㪚㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼
Close
Job Accounting (page 9-29)
Job Accounting Access (page 9-30)
Job Accounting (Local) (page 9-31)
Apply Limit (page 9-40)
Copier/Printer Count (page 9-40)
9-28
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting Setting
Job Accounting
Enable job accounting. Use the procedure below.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Job Accounting Setting on page 9-27, display the job accounting access
screen.
2 Press [Change] of "Job Accounting".
2
Configure the settings.
1 Press [On].
To disable job accounting, press [Off].
2 Press [OK].
NOTE
When the display returns to System Menu default screen, logout is automatically executed
and the screen to enter the Account ID appears. To continue the operation, enter the
Account ID.
Login/Logout
If job accounting is enabled, an account ID entry screen appears each time you use this machine.
Use the procedure below to login and logout.
Login
1 In the screen below, enter the account ID using the numeric keys and press [Login].
1
********
2
Check Counter
Login
NOTE
If you entered a wrong character, press the [Clear] key and enter the account ID again.
If the entered account ID does not match the registered ID, a warning beep will sound and
login will fail. Enter the correct account ID.
By pressing [Check Counter], you can refer to the number of pages printed and the number
of pages scanned.
9-29
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting Setting
When the screen to enter the login user name and password appears
If user login administration is enabled, the screen to enter the login user name and password
appears. Enter a login user name and password to login. (Refer to Adding a User (Local User
List) on page 9-8.) If the user has already registered the account information, the account ID
entry would be skipped. (Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on page 9-8.)
2 Proceed to complete the rest of the steps.
Logout
When the operations are complete, press the [Authentication/Logout] key to return to the account ID entry screen.
Job Accounting Access
Set the job accounting access.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Job Accounting Setting on page 9-27, display the job accounting access
screen.
2 Press [Change] of "Job Accounting Rules".
2
Configure the settings.
Select [Local] or [Network] and press [OK].
NOTE
To select [Network], network authentication must be enabled and [Ext.] must be selected for
server type.
User Login (page 9-4)
9-30
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting Setting
Job Accounting (Local)
Perform job accounting, such as printing counts and reports for each account.
Print Accounting Report
The total pages counted of all relevant accounts can be printed as an accounting report.
Reports have different formats depending on how the count of copiers and printers is administered.
When "Individual" is selected for Managing the Copy/Printer Count
ACCOUNT.REPORT
Firmware Version
For the count by paper size, the report will be printed by size.
Use the procedure below to print a job accounting report.
1
Prepare paper.
2
Display the screen.
Check that A4 or Letter paper is loaded in the cassette.
1 Referring to Job Accounting Setting on page 9-27, display the job accounting access
screen.
2 Press [Next] of "Job Accounting (Local)".
3
Print the report.
1 Press [Print] of "Print Accounting Report".
2 Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the printing.
Accounting report is printed.
9-31
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting Setting
Accounting List
Adding an Account
Manage accounts.
Item
Descriptions
Account Name
Enter the account name (up to 32 characters).
Account ID
Enter the account ID as many as eight digits (between 0 and 99999999).
Restriction
This prohibits printing/scanning or restricts the number of sheets to load.
Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 9-34.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Job Accounting Setting on page 9-27, display the job accounting access
screen.
2 Press [Next] of "Job Accounting (Local)", [Add/Edit] of "Accounting List", and then [Add].
2
Enter the account information.
Account: 01 Account
Account Name:
Change
01
Account ID:
Change
00001000
Copy Restriction (Total):
Off
Change
Print Restriction (Total):
Change
Off
1/2
Cancel
Save
1 Press [Change] of "Account Name".
2 Enter the account name and press [OK].
The "Account" screen reappears.
NOTE
Refer to Entering Characters on page 11-12 for details on entering characters.
3 Similar to steps 1 and 2, enter the "Account ID".
NOTE
Any "Account ID" that has already registered cannot be used. Enter any other account ID.
4 Activate or deactivate restriction.
Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 9-34.
5 Press [Save].
A new account is added on the Account List.
9-32
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting Setting
Managing Accounts
This changes the registered account information or deletes the account.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Job Accounting Setting on page 9-27, display the job accounting access
screen.
2 Press [Next] of "Job Accounting (Local)", and then [Add/Edit] of "Accounting List".
2
Edit an account.
1 Select an account to change or delete.
User Login/Job Accounting - Accounting List
Add or edit the account. (Maximum: 1000)
Sort
Account Name
Account Name
Account ID
01 Account
00001000
02 Account
00002000
03 Account
00003000
Search(Name)
Search(ID)
1/2
㪘㪻㪻
04 Account
00004000
05 Account
00005000
㪛㪼㫋㪸㫀㫃
㪛㪼㫃㪼㫋㪼
Close
NOTE
Select [Name] or [ID] from the "Sort" to sort the account names.
Press [Search(Name)] or [Search(ID)] to search by account name or account ID.
The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited.
Changing account information
2 Press [Detail].
3 Refer to step 2 of Adding an Account and step 2 of Restricting Using the Machine to
change account information.
Account: 01 Account
Account Name:
Change
01
Account ID:
Change
00001000
Copy Restriction (Total):
Off
Change
Print Restriction (Total):
Change
Off
1/2
Cancel
Save
4 Press [Save].
5 Press [Yes] in the registration confirmation screen.
The account information is changed.
9-33
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting Setting
Deleting an account
2 Press [Delete].
3 Press [Yes] in the deletion confirmation screen.
The account is deleted.
Restricting the Use of the Machine
This section explains how to restrict the use of the machine by account or the number of sheets available.
The items that can be restricted differ depending on whether "Individual" or "Total" is selected for Copier/Printer Count
on page 9-40.
Restriction Items
"Individual" selected for Copy/Printer Count
Item
Descriptions
Copy Restriction (Total)
Limits the number of sheets used for copying.
Print Restriction (Total)
Limits the number of sheets used for printing.
Scan Restriction (Others)
Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes copying).
FAX TX Restriction
Limits the number of sheets sent by fax. This is displayed when the optional fax kit
is installed.
FAX Port Restriction
Restricts the ports used for faxing. This is displayed when two optional FAX kits are
installed.
"Total" selected for Copy/Printer Count
Item
Descriptions
Print Restriction (Total)
Limits the total number of sheets used for copying and printing.
Scan Restriction (Others)
Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes copying).
FAX TX Restriction
Limits the number of sheets sent by fax. This is displayed when the optional fax kit
is installed.
FAX Port Restriction
Restricts the ports used for faxing. This is displayed when two optional FAX kits are
installed.
IMPORTANT
Select [Off], [Use Port 1 Only] or [Use Port 2 Only] as the "FAX Port Restriction"
setting.
9-34
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting Setting
Applying Restriction
Restriction can be applied in the following modes:
Item
Descriptions
Off
No restriction is applied.
Counter Limit
Restricts the print counter in one-page increments up to 9,999,999 copies.
Reject Usage
Restriction is applied.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Adding an Account on page 9-32, display the screen to add an account.
2 Press [Change] for the item to be restricted.
2
Configure the settings.
1 Select the restriction mode.
If [Counter Limit] is selected, press [+], [-] or numeric keys to enter the number of pages.
Account: - Copy Restriction (Total)
Restrict use of the functions.
1
Off
Limit
2
(1 - 9999999)
Counter Limit
99999
page(s)
Reject Usage
Cancel
OK
2 Press [OK].
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for other accounts to be restricted.
4 Press [Save].
The restricted account is added.
9-35
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting Setting
Default Setting
Select the default value for usage limit, and whether or not to enable counting by paper size.
Default Counter Limit
When you add a new account, you can change the default restrictions on the number of sheets used. You can set any
number from 1 to 9,999,999.
The items that can be set differ depending on whether "Individual" or "Total" is selected for Copier/Printer Count on page
9-40.
Available Settings
"Individual" selected for Copy/Printer Count
Item
Descriptions
Copy Restriction (Total)
Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for copying.
Print Restriction (Total)
Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for printing.
Scan Restriction (Others)
Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for scanning (excludes
copying).
FAX TX Restriction
Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for sending faxes. This is
displayed when the optional fax kit is installed.
"Total" selected for Copy/Printer Count
Item
Descriptions
Print Restriction (Total)
Sets the default restriction on the total number of sheets used for copying and
printing.
Scan Restriction (Others)
Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for scanning (excludes
copying).
FAX TX Restriction
Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for sending faxes. This is
displayed when the optional fax kit is installed.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Job Accounting Setting on page 9-27, display the job accounting access
screen.
2 Press [Next] of "Job Accounting (Local)", [Next] of "Default Setting" and then [Next] of
"Default Counter Limit".
9-36
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting Setting
2
Configure the settings.
1 Press [Change] for the item you want to modify and then press [+], [-] or use the numeric
keys to enter the default restriction on the number of sheets.
2 Press [OK].
User Login/Job Accounting - Copy Restriction (Total)
Set the default limit value for restricting use of the functions for each account
by counter.
Use [-]/[+] or the numeric keys to enter a number.
(1 - 9999999)
1
99999
2
Cancel
OK
3 To set another default restriction, repeat steps 1 and 2.
Count by Paper Size
This counts the number of pages by paper size (e.g. Letter).
NOTE
Paper size is available in five types, 1 to 5. These types are specified in accounting reports. Refer to Print Accounting
Report on page 9-31.
In addition to paper size, media type can also be specified (e.g. count the letter-size color paper used). If you do not specify
the media type, the number of used sheets will be counted for the specified sheet size, regardless of the media type.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Job Accounting Setting on page 9-27, display the job accounting access screen.
2 Press [Next] of "Job Accounting (Local)", [Next] of "Default Setting", [Next] of "Count by
Paper Size", [Change] of Paper Size 1 to 5.
2
Configure the settings.
1 Press [On].
2 Select the paper size.
3 Press [Media Type] to specify media type.
User Login/Job Accounting - Paper Size 1
㪪㪼㫃㪼㪺㫋㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫇㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㫊㫀㫑㪼㫊㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫋㫐㫇㪼㫊㩷㫋㫆㩷㪺㫆㫌㫅㫋㪅
2
㪦㪽㪽
㪦㫅
1
㪘㪊
㪘㪋
㪘㪌
㪙㪋
㪙㪌
㪝㫆㫃㫀㫆
㪣㪼㪻㪾㪼㫉
㪣㪼㪾㪸㫃
㪣㪼㫋㫋㪼㫉
㪪㫋㪸㫋㪼㫄㪼㫅㫋
3
㪧㫃㪸㫀㫅
㪤㪼㪻㫀㪸㩷㪫㫐㫇㪼
Cancel
4 Select the media type and press [OK].
5 Press [OK].
9-37
OK
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting Setting
Counting the Number of Pages Printed
This counts the number of pages printed. Counts are classified into Total Job Accounting and Each Job Accounting. A
new count can also be started after resetting the count data which was stored for a certain period of time.
Types of the counts are as follows.
Item
Descriptions
Printed Pages
Displays the number of pages copied and printed, and the total number of pages
used. You can also use "Count by Paper Size" and "Count by Duplex/Combine" to
check the number of pages used.
•
You can use "Count by Paper Size" to check the number of pages used in the
paper size set in Count by Paper Size on page 9-37 as well as the number of
pages used in other paper sizes.
•
You can use the "Count by Duplex/Combine" to check the number of pages
used in Duplex (1-sided) mode, Duplex (2-sided) mode and the total for both,
as well as the pages used in Combine (None) mode, Combine (2 in 1) mode,
Combine (4 in 1) mode and the total for all three.
Scanned Pages
Displays the number of pages scanned for copying, faxing* and other functions, as
well as the total number of pages scanned.
FAX Transmission
Pages
Displays the number of pages faxed.
FAX Transmission
Time
Displays the total duration of fax transmissions.
Total Job Accounting
This counts the number of pages for all accounts and resets the counts for those accounts together at the same time.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Job Accounting Setting on page 9-27, display the job accounting access screen.
2 Press [Next] of "Job Accounting (Local)", and then [Next] of "Total Job Accounting".
2
Check the number of pages.
1 Press [Check] at the function to check the count.
The results will be displayed.
Confirm the count and press [Close].
User Login/Job Accounting - Total Job Accounting
Printed Pages:
㪚㪿㪼㪺㫂
FAX Transmission Pages:
㪚㪿㪼㪺㫂
FAX Transmission Time:
2
Counter Reset:
Scanned Pages:
0:00:10
㪪㫋㪸㫉㫋
Close
2 Press [Start] of "Counter Reset" to reset the counter.
3 Press [Yes] in the confirmation screen.
The counter will be reset.
9-38
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting Setting
Each Job Accounting
This counts the number of pages for each account and resets the counts by account.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Job Accounting Setting on page 9-27, display the job accounting access
screen.
2 Press [Next] of "Job Accounting (Local)", and then [Check] of "Each Job Accounting".
2
Check the number of pages.
1 Select the account to check the count.
2 Press [Detail].
User Login/Job Accounting - Each Job Accounting
Maintain a separate counter for each account (department).
1
Sort
Account Name
Account Name
Account ID
06 Account
00006000
Search(Name)
Search(ID)
2/2
Other Account
2
㪛㪼㫋㪸㫀㫃
Close
NOTE
Select [Name] or [ID] from the "Sort" to sort the account names.
Press [Search(Name)] or [Search(ID)] to search by account name or account ID.
To display an account other than your own account, press [Other Account].
3 Press [Check] at the function to check the count.
The results will be displayed.
Confirm the count and press [Close].
Account:06 Account
Printed Pages:
㪚㪿㪼㪺㫂
FAX Transmission Pages:
㪚㪿㪼㪺㫂
FAX Transmission Time:
2(20)
Counter Reset:
Scanned Pages:
0:00:10
㪪㫋㪸㫉㫋
Close
4 Press [Start] of "Counter Reset" to reset the counter.
5 Press [Yes] in the confirmation screen.
The counter will be reset.
9-39
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting Setting
Apply Limit
This specifies how the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of restriction. The table below
describes the action taken.
Item
Immediately*
*
Descriptions
Job stops when the counter reaches its limit.
Subsequently
Printing/scanning of the job continues but the subsequent job will be
rejected.
Alert Only
Job continues while displaying an alert message.
The next job will be prohibited in sending or in storing in the box.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Job Accounting Setting on page 9-27, display the job accounting access
screen.
2 Press [Change] of "Apply Limit".
2
Configure the settings.
1 Select [Immediately], [Subsequently], or [Alert Only].
2 Press [OK].
Copier/Printer Count
You can select how the copying and printing page counts are shown - either the total of both or each of copying and
printing individually. The selection may influence restriction on the count and count method. For details, refer to
Restricting the Use of the Machine (page 9-34), Counting the Number of Pages Printed (page 9-38), and Print
Accounting Report (page 9-31).
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Job Accounting Setting on page 9-27, display the job accounting access
screen.
2 Press [Change] of "Copier/Printer Count".
2
Configure the settings.
1 Press [Total] or [Individual].
2 Press [OK].
9-40
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Unknown ID Job
Unknown ID Job
This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with unknown login user names or User ID (i.e. unsent IDs). If the
User Login is set to invalid and Job Accounting is set to valid, follow the procedure when the Account ID is unknown.
The setting items are as follows.
Item
Descriptions
Permit
The job is permitted to be printed.
Reject
The job is rejected (not printed).
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to User Login Setting on page 9-2, display the user login setting screen.
2 Press [Change] of "Unknown ID Job".
2
Configure the settings.
1 Press [Reject] or [Permit].
2 Press [OK].
9-41
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Unknown ID Job
9-42
10
Troubleshooting
This chapter explains the following topics:
Regular Maintenance ....................................................................................................................................... 10-2
Cleaning ................................................................................................................................................. 10-2
Toner Container Replacement ............................................................................................................... 10-6
Waste Toner Box Replacement ............................................................................................................. 10-9
Replacing Staples ................................................................................................................................ 10-12
Disposing of the Punch Waste ............................................................................................................. 10-16
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................................. 10-18
Solving Malfunctions ............................................................................................................................ 10-18
Responding to Messages .................................................................................................................... 10-23
Adjustment/Maintenance ..................................................................................................................... 10-36
Clearing Paper Jams ........................................................................................................................... 10-39
Clearing a Staple Jam .......................................................................................................................... 10-63
10-1
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
Regular Maintenance
Cleaning
Clean the machine regularly to ensure optimum printing quality.
CAUTION
For safety, always unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine.
Platen Cover/Glass Platen
Wipe the backside of the platen cover, the inside of the document processor and the glass platen with a soft cloth
dampened with alcohol or mild detergent.
IMPORTANT
Do not use thinner or other organic solvents.
10-2
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
Slit Glass/Dual scanning area
If black streaks or dirt appears in copies when using the optional document processor, clean the slit glass with the
supplied cleaning cloth. When using the document processor that features dual scanning, clean the dual scanning unit
also.
NOTE
Wipe the slit glasses with the dry accessory cloth. Do not use water, soap or solvents for cleaning.
1
2
3
10-3
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
Conveying Guide
Clean the conveyor guide regularly (at least monthly) to ensure optimum printing quality.
NOTE
Wipe the slit glasses with the dry accessory cloth. Do not use water, soap or solvents for cleaning.
Do not touch the photoconductor drum.
1
2
CLICK!
10-4
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
Separator
Clean the separator regularly (at least monthly) to ensure optimum printing quality.
1
2
3
CLICK!
10-5
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
Toner Container Replacement
When toner runs low, "Toner is running out" appears in the touch panel. Make sure you have a new toner container
available for replacement.
When the touch panel displays "Toner is empty.", replace the toner.
NOTE
• For the toner container, always use a genuine toner container. Using a toner container that is not genuine may
cause image defects and product failure.
• The memory chip in the toner container of this product stores information necessary for improving customer
convenience, operation of the recycling system for used toner containers, and planning and development of new
products. The stored information does not include information that makes it possible to identify individuals, and is
only used anonymously for the above purposes.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.
1
2
10-6
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
3
4
5
6
CLICK!
10-7
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
7
NOTE
Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service
representative. The collected toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or
disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.
10-8
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
Waste Toner Box Replacement
When "Waste toner box almost full" appears in the touch panel, make sure you have a new waste toner box available for
replacement.
When the touch panel shows "Check waste toner box.", immediately replace the waste toner box.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.
1
2
1
2
3
10-9
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
4
5
1
2
6
CLICK!
7
CLICK!
10-10
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
8
NOTE
Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. The collected
toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.
10-11
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
Replacing Staples
A staple cartridge is installed in the optional 1,000-sheet finisher, 4,000-sheet finisher, and center-fold unit.
If a message displays indicating that staples have run out, the staple cartridge holder need to be replenished with
staples.
NOTE
If the Staple Unit runs out of staples, contact your service representative or the place of purchase.
Follow the steps below to refill staples.
1,000-sheet Finisher (Option)
1
2
1
2
1
NOTE
The staple cartridge can only be removed when it contains no more staples.
10-12
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
3
CLICK!
4,000-sheet Finisher (Option)
The 4,000-sheet finisher contains staple cartridge holder A.
The optional folding unit contains staple cartridge holders B and C. The refill procedure for staple cartridge holders B
and C are the same as for staple cartridge holder A.
Refilling Staple Cartridge Holder A
NOTE
See page 10-14 to refill staple cartridge holder B/C of the optional folding unit.
1
2
1
2
1
NOTE
The staple cartridge can only be removed when it contains no more staples.
10-13
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
3
CLICK!
Refilling Staple Cartridge Holders B/C (Option)
Follow the steps below to refill staples for the optional folding unit. Follow the same procedure to refill staple cartridge
holders B and C.
1
2
10-14
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
3
2
2
1
1
1
1
NOTE
The staple cartridge can only be removed when it contains no more staples.
4
CLICK!
5
10-15
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
Disposing of the Punch Waste
If a message is displayed on the machine operation panel indicating that the waste punch box is full, be sure to empty
the scraps in the punch waste box.
Leave the main power switch on the machine switched ON ( | ) while performing this procedure.
1,000-sheet Finisher (Option)
1
NOTE
Take care not to spill the waste hole punch scraps when removing the container.
2
3
10-16
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
4,000-sheet Finisher (Option)
1
NOTE
Take care not to spill the waste hole punch scraps when removing the container.
2
3
10-17
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Solving Malfunctions
The table below provides general guidelines for problem solving.
If a problem occurs with your machine, look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the following
pages. If the problem persists, contact your Service Representative.
Symptom
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
An application does not
start.
Is the Auto Panel Reset time short?
Set the Auto Panel Reset time to 30
seconds or more.
page 8-54
The screen does not
respond when the main
power switch is turned on.
Is the machine plugged in?
Plug the power cord into an AC outlet.
page 2-9
Pressing the [Start] key
does not produce copies.
Is there a message on the screen?
Determine the appropriate response to
the message and respond accordingly.
page 10-23
Is the machine in Sleep mode?
Press the [Power] key to recover the
machine from Sleep mode.
page 3-15
Are the originals loaded correctly?
When placing originals on the platen,
place them face-down and align them
with the original size indicator plates.
page 5-2
When placing originals in the document
processor, place them face-up.
page 5-3
―
Check that the settings of the
application software.
―
Is the paper damp?
Replace the paper with new paper.
page 3-16
Have you changed the density?
Select appropriate density level.
page 6-22
Blank sheets are ejected.
Printouts are totally too light.
page 8-57
Printouts are too dark even
though the background of
the scanned original is white.
Is the toner distributed evenly within the
toner container?
Shake the toner container from side to
side several times.
page 10-6
Is EcoPrint mode enabled?
Disable [EcoPrint] mode.
page 8-18
―
Run [Drum Refresh 1].
page 10-37
―
Run [Developer Refresh].
page 10-38
―
Make sure the paper type setting is
correct for the paper being used.
page 8-10
Have you changed the density?
Select appropriate density level.
page 6-22
page 8-57
―
Run [Calibration].
page 10-38
―
Run [Developer Refresh].
page 10-38
10-18
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Symptom
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Copies have a moire pattern
(dots grouped together in
patterns and not aligned
uniformly).
Is the original a printed photograph?
Set the original image to [Printer Output]
or [Book/Magazine] in [Photo].
page 6-23
Texts are not clearly printed.
Did you choose appropriate image
quality for the original?
Select appropriate image quality.
page 6-23
Black or color dots appear on
the white background when
white original is scanned.
Is the original holder or the glass platen
dirty?
Clean the original holder or the glass
platen.
page 10-2
Is the conveying guide dirty?
Clean the conveying guide.
page 10-4
―
Run [Developer Refresh].
page 10-38
Is the machine being used in conditions
of very humid, or humidity or
temperature rapidly changes?
Use in an environment that has suitable
humidity.
―
―
Run [Drum Refresh 1].
page 10-37
Are the originals loaded correctly?
When placing originals on the platen, align
them with the original size indicator plates.
page 5-2
When placing originals in the document
processor, align the original width guides
securely before placing the originals.
page 5-3
Check the position of the paper width
guides.
page 3-18
Load the paper correctly.
page 3-18
Printouts are fuzzy.
Images are skewed.
Is the paper loaded correctly?
Paper often jams.
Is the paper loaded correctly?
page 3-26
page 3-26
―
Turn the orientation 180 degrees around
in which the paper is positioned.
page xiv
page 3-18
page 3-26
Is the paper of the supported type? Is it
in good condition?
Remove the paper, turn it over, and
reload it.
page 3-18
Is the paper curled, folded or wrinkled?
Replace the paper with new paper.
page 3-18
Are there any loose scraps or jammed
paper in the machine?
Remove any jammed paper.
page 10-39
10-19
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Symptom
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
2 or more sheets are
overlaps when ejected.
(multi feed)
―
Printouts are wrinkled.
Are the originals loaded correctly?
Load the paper correctly.
Reference
Page
page 3-18
page 3-26
Load the paper correctly.
page 3-18
page 3-26
―
Clean the paper separator.
page 10-5
―
Turn the orientation 180 degrees around
in which the paper is positioned.
page xiv
page 3-18
page 3-26
Printouts are curled.
Is the paper damp?
Replace the paper with new paper.
page 3-16
―
Turn the paper over in the cassette, or
turn the orientation 180 degrees around
in which the paper is positioned.
page xiv
Is the paper damp?
Replace the paper with new paper.
page 3-16
Is the paper printed out to the finisher?
Change the [Correct Paper Curl].
page 8-59
―
Check the specified cassette and
change its paper type to Custom 8.
page 3-30
page 3-18
page 3-26
NOTE
If you specify the paper type to Custom
8, copy speed or printing speed
becomes slower.
Is the machine plugged in?
Plug the power cord into an AC outlet.
―
Is the machine powered on?
Turn on the main power switch.
page 2-10
Are the printer cable and network cable
connected?
Connect the correct printer cable and
network cable securely.
page 2-6
Was the machine powered on before the
printer cable was connected?
Power on the machine after connecting
the printer cable.
―
Is the print job paused?
Resume printing.
page 7-4
Cannot print with USB
memory.
Is the USB host blocked?
Select [Unblock] in the USB host
settings.
page 8-50
USB memory not
recognized.
―
Check that the USB memory is securely
plugged into the machine.
―
Printouts have vertical lines.
Are the slit glass and the Dual scanning
area dirty?
Clean the slit glass and the Dual
scanning area.
page 10-3
Cannot print.
10-20
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Symptom
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Dirt on the top edge or back
of the paper.
Check the machine interior.
Open the right cover. If the machine
interior is dirty with toner, clean it using
soft, dry, lint-free cloth.
―
Part of the image is
periodically faint or shows
white lines.
―
Run [Drum Refresh 1].
page 10-37
―
Run [Developer Refresh].
page 10-38
Print on the back of the
sheet is visible on the front.
―
Set [Prevent Bleed-through] to [On].
page 6-26
White dots appear on the
image.
―
Run [Drum Refresh2].
page 10-37
Colors appear different than
you anticipated.
―
Run [Tone Curve Adjustment].
page 10-36
Perform Tone Curve
Adjustment in the System
Menu. is displayed.
Over long periods of use, the effects of
the ambient temperature and humidity
can cause output hues to vary slightly.
Run [Tone Curve Adjustment].
page 10-36
Cannot create Searchable
PDF file.
Is the proper language selected?
Check the language to extract.
page 6-60
Can the texts on the original not be
recognized as texts, or is the PDF
creation time taken?
Check the following:
page 6-60
page 8-17
10-21
•
The original orientation is correct.
•
When setting the originals with the
mixed orientation at once, [On] is
selected for [Auto Image Rotation].
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Symptom
Cannot search a text that
you want to search on the
PDF file.
Cannot send via SMB.
Cannot send via the e-mail.
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Have you set [OCR Recognition] in
[File Format]?
Set [OCR Recognition] in [File Format].
page 6-60
Are the texts of the scanned original
fainted or too light?
Set [Density] to darker level.
page 6-22
Is the background of the scanned
original too dark and the texts are
difficult to recognize?
Set [Background Density Adj.] to [On] or
[Manual] and manually adjust the
density lighter. Otherwise, set [Density]
to darker level.
page 6-22
Is the text or image on the back of the
original visible on the front?
Set [Prevent Bleed-through] to [On].
page 6-26
Is the network cable connected?
Connect the correct network cable
securely.
page 2-6
Have the network settings for the
equipment been configured properly?
Configure the TCP/IP settings properly.
page 8-43
Have the folder sharing settings been
configured properly?
Check sharing settings and access
privileges under the folder properties.
―
Has the SMB protocol been set to [On]?
Set the SMB protocol setting to [On].
page 5-26
Has [Host Name] been entered
properly? *1
Check the name of the computer to
which data is being sent.
page 5-26
Has [Path] been entered properly?
Check the share name for the shared
folder.
page 5-26
Has [Login User Name] been entered
properly? *1*2
Check the domain name and login user
name.
page 5-26
Has the same domain name been used for
[Host Name] and [Login User Name]?
Delete the domain name and backslash
("\") from [Login User Name].
page 5-26
Has [Login Password] been entered
properly?
Check the login password.
page 5-26
Have exceptions for Windows Firewall
been configured properly?
Configure exceptions for Windows
Firewall properly.
page 3-36
Do the time settings for the equipment,
domain server, and data destination
computer differ?
Set the equipment, domain server, and
data destination computer to the same
time.
―
Is the screen displaying Send error?
Refer to Responding to Send Error?
page 10-33
Is the E-mail send size limit set in the
SMTP server registered on the
machine?
Check the limit value is entered to "Email Size Limit" of [E-mail] setting in
Embedded Web Server RX and change
the value as necessary.
page 2-37
*1
You can also enter a full computer name as the host name (for example, pc001.abcdnet.com).
*2
You can also enter login user names in the following formats:
Domain_name/user_name (for example, abcdnet/james.smith)
User_name@domain_name (for example, james.smith@abcdnet)
10-22
page 6-25
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Responding to Messages
If the touch panel or the computer displays any of these messages, follow the corresponding procedure.
A
Message
*
Reference
Page
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Acceptable fold count
exceeded.
Is the acceptable number of sheets
exceeded?
Press [Continue] to print using Fold
per acceptable number of sheets.
Press [Cancel] to cancel the job.
page 6-17
Acceptable staple count
exceeded.*
Is the acceptable number of sheets
exceeded?
Press [Continue] to print without
using Staple. Press [Cancel] to
cancel the job.
—
Activation error.
―
Failed to activate the application.
Contact administrator.
―
―
Expansion Authentication is
disabled. Turn the main power
switch off and on. If the error exists,
contact administrator.
―
Add paper in cassette #.
Is the indicated cassette out of
paper?
Load paper.
Select the available paper. Press
[Continue] to print.
page 3-16
Add paper in Multi
Purpose tray.
Is the paper of the selected size
loaded in the multi purpose tray?
Load paper.
Select the available paper. Press
[Continue] to print.
page 3-26
Adjusting Scanner.
—
The machine is under the
adjustment to maintain its quality.
Please wait.
—
When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.
B
Message
*
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Box is not found.
—
The specified box cannot be found.
Job is canceled. Press [End].
—
Box limit exceeded.*
Is [End] displayed on the screen?
The specified box is full, and no
further storage is available. Job is
canceled. Press [End]. Try to
perform the job again after printing
or deleting data from the box. The
job is canceled. Press [End].Refer
to Responding to Send Error for the
error code and corrective actions.
—
—
Repeat Copy box is full, and no
further repeat copy is available.
Press [Continue] to print scanned
pages. Press [Cancel] to cancel the
job.
—
When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.
10-23
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
C
Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Calibrating...
―
The machine is under the
adjustment to maintain its quality.
Please wait.
―
Cannot connect to
Authentication Server.*
—
Set machine time to match the
server's time.
page 2-23
—
Check the domain name.
page 9-2
—
Check the domain name.
page 9-2
—
Check the connection status with
the server.
—
Cannot connect to
Server.
—
Check the connection status with
the server.
—
Cannot duplex print on
this paper.*
Did you select a paper size/type
that cannot be duplex printed?
If the selected paper is not changed
and [Continue] is pressed, duplex is
released.
Select the available paper. Press
[Continue] to print.
page 6-39
Cannot find the
destination computer.
Check the computer.
Is the machine and the PC to which
the scanned image is to be sent
connected to the network?
Check the network and SMB
settings.
page 2-6
Is the account information (user ID,
password) used to access the
shared folder to which the scanned
image is to be sent incorrect?
•
The network cable is connected.
•
The hub is not operating
properly.
•
The server is not operating
properly.
•
Host name and IP address
•
Port number
Check the following settings of the
PC to which the scanned image is
to be sent.
•
Host name
•
Path
•
Login user name
—
NOTE
If the sender is a domain user,
specify the domain name.
[Login User ID]@[Domain Name]
Example: sa720XXXX@km
Cannot fold this paper.
Did you select a paper size/type
that cannot be folded?
•
Login password
•
Folder share permissions of the
recipient
If the selected paper is not changed
and [Continue] is pressed, fold is
released.
Select the available paper. Press
[Continue] to print.
10-24
page 6-17
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Message
Cannot offset this
paper.*
Checkpoints
Did you select a paper size/type
that cannot be offset?
Corrective Actions
If the selected paper is not changed
and [Continue] is pressed, offset is
released.
Reference
Page
page 6-18
Select the available paper. Press
[Continue] to print.
Cannot perform print
from remote.
—
Cannot print the
specified number of
copies.*
—
Only one copy is available. Press
[Continue] to continue printing.
Press [Cancel] to cancel the job.
—
Cannot process this
job.*
―
Restricted by Authorization settings.
The job is canceled. Press [End].
―
―
Restricted by Job Accounting. The
job is canceled. Press [End].
page 9-29
Have you selected a position that
cannot be punched?
If the selected paper is not changed
and [Continue] is pressed, punch is
released.
page 6-20
Cannot punch at the
specified position.
Remote printing is prohibited.
page 8-27
The job is canceled. Press [End].
Select the available paper. Press
[Continue] to print.
Cannot punch this
paper.
Did you select a paper size/type
that cannot be punched?
If the selected paper is not changed
and [Continue] is pressed, punch is
released.
page 6-20
Select the available paper. Press
[Continue] to print.
Cannot staple at the
specified position.
Have you selected a position that
cannot be stapled?
If the selected paper is not changed
and [Continue] is pressed, staple is
released.
Select the available paper. Press
[Continue] to print.
page 6-19
Cannot staple this
paper.*
Did you select a paper size/type
that cannot be stapled?
If the selected paper is not changed
and [Continue] is pressed, staple is
released.
Select the available paper. Press
[Continue] to print.
page 6-19
Cannot use ##### due to
a failure.
―
Call service.
―
Check the document
processor.
Is the top cover of the document
processor open?
Close the document processor
cover.
―
Is the document processor open?
Close the document processor.
―
Check the main unit
right tray.
Is the main unit right tray closed?
Open the main unit right tray.
—
Is the acceptable storage capacity
exceeded?
Remove the paper. Printing then
resumes.
—
Check the paper in the
multi purpose tray.
—
The paper size is different. Set
selected size paper and press
[Continue].
page 3-33
Check the side feeder.
—
The side feeder is not installed
correctly. Attach the side feeder.
—
10-25
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Message
Check waste toner box.
Confidential document
was detected.
*
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
—
The waste toner box is not installed
correctly. Set it correctly.
page 10-9
Is the waste toner box full?
Replace the waste toner box.
page 10-9
―
The machine detects the document
guard pattern. Job is canceled.
Press [End].
―
When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.
E
Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Empty the punch waste
box.
Is the punch waste box full?
Follow the instructions on the
screen. and empty the punch waste
box.
page 10-16
Error occurred at
cassette #.
―
Open the cassette. Check inside
the machine and remove the paper.
―
Error occurred at the
multi purpose tray.
—
Remove the paper from the multi
purpose tray.
—
F
Message
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Failed to specify Job
Accounting.*
—
Failed to specify Job Accounting
when processing the job externally.
The job is canceled. Press [End].
—
Failed to store job
retention data.
—
The job is canceled. Press [End].
—
Finisher left tray is full of
paper.
Is the acceptable storage capacity
exceeded?
Remove the paper. Printing then
resumes.
—
Is the paper curled?
Check the checkpoints of "Printouts
are curled." in Solving Malfunctions
and take the corrective actions.
page 10-20
Is the acceptable storage capacity
exceeded?
Remove the paper. Printing then
resumes.
—
Folding tray is full of
paper.
*
Checkpoints
When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.
10-26
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
H
Message
Hard Disk error.
Checkpoints
—
Corrective Actions
An error has occurred on the hard
disk. Job is canceled. Press [End].
Reference
Page
—
The possible error codes and their
descriptions are as follows.
01: The amount of data that can be
saved at once has been exceeded.
Restart the system or turn the
power OFF/ON. If the error still
occurs, divide the file into smaller
files.
If the error occurs after the file is
divided, the hard disk is damaged.
Execute [System Initialization].
04: Insufficient space on the hard
disk to complete this operation.
Move data or delete unneeded data.
I
Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Incorrect account ID.*
—
The account ID was incorrect when
processing the job externally. The
job is canceled. Press [End].
—
Incorrect box password.
—
The box password was incorrect
when processing the job externally.
The job is canceled. Press [End].
—
Incorrect Login User
Name or Password.*
—
The login user name or password
was incorrect when processing the
job externally. The job is canceled.
Press [End].
—
Install the punch waste
box.
—
Follow the instructions on the
screen. and install the punch waste
box.
page 10-16
Invalid configuration.
Are the originals loaded correctly?
When placing originals on the
platen, place them face-down and
align them with the original size
indicator plates.
—
When placing originals in the
document processor, place them
face-up.
*
Reference
Page
When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.
10-27
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
J
Message
*
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Job Accounting
restriction exceeded.*
Is the acceptable printing count
restricted by Job Accounting
exceeded?
The printing count exceeded the
acceptable count restricted by Job
Accounting. Cannot print any more.
The job is canceled. Press [End].
—
Job separator tray is full
of paper.
Is the acceptable storage capacity
exceeded?
Remove the paper and press
[Continue]. Printing then resumes.
—
Is the paper curled?
Check the checkpoints of "Printouts
are curled." in Solving Malfunctions
and take the corrective actions.
page 10-20
When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.
K
Message
KPDL error. *
*
Checkpoints
―
Corrective Actions
PostScript error has occurred. The
job is canceled. Press [End].
Reference
Page
―
When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.
M
Message
*
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Machine failure.
―
Internal error has occurred. Make a
note of the error code displayed on
the screen. Call service.
―
Mailbox tray is full of
paper.
Is the acceptable storage capacity
exceeded?
Remove the paper. Printing then
resumes.
—
Main unit inner tray is
full of paper.
Is the acceptable storage capacity
exceeded?
Remove the paper. Printing then
resumes.
—
Is the paper curled?
Check the checkpoints of "Printouts
are curled." in Solving Malfunctions
and take the corrective actions.
page 10-20
Main unit upper left tray
is full of paper.
Is the acceptable storage capacity
exceeded?
Remove the paper and press
[Continue]. Printing then resumes.
—
Maximum number of
scanned pages.
Is the acceptable scanning count
exceeded?
Cannot scan pages any more.
Follow the instructions on the
screen.
—
Memory is full.*
—
The memory is full and the job
cannot be continued. Press
[Continue] to print the scanned
pages. The print job cannot be
processed completely. Press
[Cancel] to cancel the job.
—
—
The process cannot be performed
due to insufficient memory. If only
[End] is available, press [End]. The
job will be canceled.
—
When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.
10-28
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
P
Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Paper jam.
―
If a paper jam occurs, the machine
will stop and the location of the jam
will be indicated on the screen.
Leave the machine on and follow
the instructions to remove the
jammed paper.
page 10-39
Paper left.
—
Remove paper from the document
finisher.
—
Performing Drum
Refresh…
—
The machine is under the
adjustment to maintain its quality.
Please wait.
—
Perform Tone Curve
Adjustment in the
System Menu.
Over long periods of use, the effects
of the ambient temperature and
humidity can cause output hues to
vary slightly.
Run [Tone Curve Adjustment].
page 10-36
Preparing to print.
—
The machine is under the
adjustment to maintain its quality.
Please wait.
—
R
Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Regulating the
temperature…
―
The machine is under the
adjustment to maintain its quality.
Please wait.
―
Removable memory
error.*
Is writing to a removable memory
prohibited?
An error occurred in the removable
memory. The job stopped. Press
[End].
―
The possible error codes and their
descriptions are as follows.
01: Connect a removable memory
that can be written to.
―
An error occurred in the removable
memory. The job stopped. Press
[End].
The possible error codes and their
descriptions are as follows.
01: The amount of data that can be
saved at once has been exceeded.
Restart the system or turn the
power OFF/ON. If the error still
occurs, divide the file into smaller
files.
If the error still occurs, the
removable memory is not
compatible with the machine. Use
the removable memory formatted
by this machine.
If the removable memory cannot be
formatted, it is damaged. Connect a
compatible removable memory.
10-29
page 5-63
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Message
*
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Removable Memory is
full.*
―
Remove originals in the
document processor.
Are there any originals left in the
document processor?
Remove originals from the
document processor.
―
Replace all originals and
press [Continue].
—
Remove originals from the
document processor, put them back
in their original order, and place
them again. Press [Continue] to
resume printing. Press [Cancel] to
cancel the job.
—
The job is canceled. Press [End].
―
Insufficient free space in the
removable memory. Delete
unneeded files.
When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.
S
Message
*
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Scanner memory is full.*
—
Scanning cannot be performed due
to insufficient memory of the
scanner. Follow the instructions on
the screen.
—
Send Error.*
—
An error has occurred during
transmission. The job is canceled.
Press [End].Refer to Responding to
Send Error for the error code and
corrective actions.
page 10-33
Skewed originals fed.
―
See the caution attached on the
document processor and check the
originals. If the originals are
jammed, follow the instructions on
the screen to remove the originals.
―
Staple is empty. (Manual
Staple)
Has staple cartridge holder A run
out of staples?
Add staples to staple cartridge
holder A.
page 10-13
Staple is empty. *
Has staple cartridge holder run out
of staples?
If the staples are depleted, the
machine will stop and the location of
staple depletion will be indicated on
the screen. Leave the machine on
and follow the instructions to
replace the staple case. Press
[Continue] to print without stapling.
Press [Cancel] to cancel the job.
page 10-12
Staple jam.
—
If a staple jam occurs, the machine
will stop and the location of the jam
will be indicated on the screen.
Leave the machine on and follow
the instructions to remove the
jammed staple.
page 10-63
System error.
—
System error has occurred. Follow
the instructions on the screen.
—
When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.
10-30
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
T
Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
The cover is open.
Is there any cover which is open?
Close the cover indicated on the
screen.
―
The folding unit is open.
—
Close the folding unit.
—
The password does not
meet password policy.
Is the password expired?
Change the login password.
page 9-7
The job is canceled. Press [End].
page 9-8
Confirm the password policy
requirements and change the login
password.
page 9-7
Is the password policy requirement
(such as password length or
required characters) changed?
page 9-8
The job is canceled. Press [End].
The print system
connected to the current
port is not supported by
the printer driver.
Is the printer driver for this product
used?
Check the product name of the
machine and reinstall the printer
driver.
—
The removable memory
is not formatted.
Is the removable memory formatted
by this machine?
Perform [Format] on this machine.
―
The slit glass requires
cleaning.
—
Clean the slit glass using the
cleaning cloth supplied with the
document processor.
page 10-3
This user account is
locked out.
—
Contact administrator.
―
Toner is empty.
—
Replace the toner container to our
specified toner container.
page 10-6
Toner is low. (Replace
when empty.)
—
It is almost time to replace the toner
container. Obtain a new toner
container.
—
Tray # is full of paper.
Is the acceptable storage capacity
exceeded?
Remove the paper. Printing then
resumes.
—
Is the paper curled?
Check the checkpoints of "Printouts
are curled." in Solving Malfunctions
and take the corrective actions.
page 10-20
Use a printer driver for
this port that matches
the print system.
The job is canceled. Press [End].
U
Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Unknown toner installed.
Is the installed toner container our
own brand?
We will not be liable for any damage
caused by the use of third party
supplies in this machine.
—
Unknown Toner
Installed. PC
Does the installed toner container's
regional specification match the
machine's?
Install the specified container.
—
10-31
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
W
Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Warning for high
temperature. Adjust the
room temperature.
―
Print quality may be deteriorated.
Adjust the temperature and the
humidity of your room.
―
Warning for low
temperature. Adjust the
room temperature.
—
Print quality may be deteriorated.
Adjust the temperature and the
humidity of your room.
—
Warning low memory.
—
Cannot start the job. Try again later.
—
Waste toner box almost
full.
—
It is almost time to replace the
waste toner box. Obtain a new
waste toner box.
—
Y
Message
You cannot use this box.
Checkpoints
—
Corrective Actions
You cannot use the specified box.
Job is canceled. Press [End].
10-32
Reference
Page
—
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Responding to Send Error
Error
Code
1101
1102
Message
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Failed to send the e-mail.
Failed to send i-FAX.
Check the host name of the SMTP server on the
Embedded Web Server RX.
page 2-33
Failed to send via FTP.
Check the host name of FTP.
—
Failed to send via SMB.
Check the host name of SMB.
—
Failed to send via SMB.
Check the SMB settings.
—
•
Login user name and login password
NOTE
If the sender is a domain user, specify the domain
name.
Failed to send the e-mail.
Failed to send i-FAX.
Failed to send via FTP.
•
Host name
•
Path
Check the following on the Embedded Web Server RX.
•
SMTP login user name and login password
•
POP3 login user name and login password
•
E-mail size limit
Check the following on the Embedded Web Server RX.
•
SMTP login user name and login password
•
POP3 login user name and login password
Check the FTP settings.
•
—
—
—
Login user name and login password
NOTE
If the sender is a domain user, specify the domain
name.
1103
Failed to send via SMB.
•
Path
•
Folder share permissions of the recipient
Check the SMB settings.
•
page 5-27
Login user name and login password
NOTE
If the sender is a domain user, specify the domain
name.
Failed to send via FTP.
•
Path
•
Folder share permissions of the recipient
Check the FTP settings.
•
Path
•
Folder share permissions of the recipient
10-33
—
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Error
Code
1104
Message
Failed to send the e-mail.
Corrective Actions
Check the E-mail address.
Reference
Page
page 5-31
NOTE
If the address is rejected by the domain, you cannot
send the E-mail.
Failed to send i-FAX.
Check the i-FAX address.
NOTE
refer to FAX
Operation
Guide
If the address is rejected by the domain, you cannot
send the E-mail.
1105
1106
Failed to send via SMB.
Select [On] of the SMB settings on the Embedded
Web Server RX.
page 2-33
Failed to send the e-mail.
Select [On] of the SMTP settings on the Embedded
Web Server RX.
page 2-33
Failed to send via FTP.
Select [On] of the FTP settings on the Embedded
Web Server RX.
page 2-33
Failed to send i-FAX.
Select [On] of the i-FAX settings on the Embedded
Web Server RX.
Refer to FAX
Operation
Guide
Failed to send the e-mail.
Check the sender address of SMTP on the Embedded
Web Server RX.
page 2-33
Failed to send i-FAX.
1131
Failed to send via FTP.
Select [On] of the secure protocol settings on the
Embedded Web Server RX.
page 2-33
1132
Failed to send via FTP.
Check the following of the FTP server.
page 2-33
2101
Failed to send via SMB.
•
Is FTPS available?
•
Is the encryption available?
Check the network and SMB settings.
•
Failed to send via FTP.
—
The network cable is connected.
•
The hub is not operating properly.
•
The server is not operating properly.
•
Host name and IP address
•
Port number
Check the network and FTP settings.
•
The network cable is connected.
•
The hub is not operating properly.
•
The server is not operating properly.
•
Host name and IP address
•
Port number
Failed to send the e-mail.
Check the network and Embedded Web Server RX.
Failed to send i-FAX.
•
The network cable is connected.
•
The hub is not operating properly.
•
The server is not operating properly.
•
POP3 server name of the POP3 user
•
SMTP server name
10-34
—
—
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Error
Code
2102
Message
Failed to send via FTP.
2103
Corrective Actions
Check the network and SMB settings.
•
Reference
Page
—
The network cable is connected.
•
The hub is not operating properly.
•
The server is not operating properly.
Check the following of the FTP server.
•
Is FTP available?
•
The server is not operating properly.
Failed to send the e-mail.
Check the network and SMB settings.
Failed to send i-FAX.
•
The network cable is connected.
•
The hub is not operating properly.
•
The server is not operating properly.
—
—
2201
Failed to send the e-mail.
Check the network and SMB settings.
2202
Failed to send via FTP.
•
The network cable is connected.
2203
Failed to send via SMB.
•
The hub is not operating properly.
2231
Failed to send i-FAX.
•
The server is not operating properly.
2204
Failed to send the e-mail.
Check the E-mail size limit of the SMTP settings on
the Embedded Web Server RX.
—
Check the authentication methods of both the sender
and the recipient.
—
Failed to send i-FAX.
Failed to send via FTP.
Check the network and SMB settings.
—
Failed to send i-FAX.
3101
3201
Failed to send the e-mail.
Failed to send the e-mail.
The network cable is connected.
•
The hub is not operating properly.
•
The server is not operating properly.
Check the authentication methods of both the sender
and the recipient.
—
—
Turn the main power switch off and back on. If this
error occurs several times, make a note of the
displayed error code and contact your service
representative.
—
—
The scanned original exceeds the acceptable number
of pages of 999. Send the excess pages separately.
—
Failed to send i-FAX.
0007
•
—
4201
4701
5101
5102
5103
5104
7101
7102
7103
720f
9181
10-35
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Adjustment/Maintenance
Tone Curve Adjustment
After prolonged use, or from the effects of surrounding temperature or humidity, the printed output tone may differ from
the original. Perform this function to ensure consistency with the original tone. Before executing Tone Curve Adjustment,
execute calibration (see page 10-38).
NOTE
To perform tone curve adjustment, verify that either Letter or A4 paper is loaded into a cassette.
A total of 2 pattern pages (No. 1 and 2) are printed during adjustment. The printed patterns are read sequentially during
the adjustment.
1
Display the screen.
1 Press the [System Menu] key.
2 Press [
2
], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [
] and then [Next] of "Tone Curve Adjustment".
Adjust the tone curve.
1 Press [Start]. A pattern is printed.
Check that the number "1" is printed at the bottom of the pattern.
2 As shown in the illustration, place the printed side down on the platen with the edge with
the arrows toward the back.
3 Press [Start]. The pattern is read and adjustment begins.
The second pattern is output.
4 Check that the number "2" is printed at the bottom of the pattern and repeat steps 2 to 3 to
read the pattern.
5 Press [OK] in the adjustment end confirmation screen.
10-36
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Drum Refresh1
Refresh the drum when image blur appear on images in copies. Takes about 85 seconds.
NOTE
Drum Refresh1 cannot be performed while printing. Execute Drum Refresh1 after the printing is done.
1
Display the screen.
1 Press the [System Menu] key.
2 Press [
2
], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [
] and then [Next] of "Drum Refresh1".
Perform the Drum Refresh 1.
Press [Start] to perform Drum Refresh1.
Drum Refresh2
Use this mode when white spots appear on images. Takes about 85 seconds. To use [Drum Refresh2], load Ledger or
A3 size paper into the Multi Purpose tray.
When you run [Drum Refresh 2], the machine makes a vibrating sound for about 85 seconds until drum refreshing is
completed. The toner soiling on the ejected paper is normal and does not indicate a fault.
NOTE
Drum Refresh2 cannot be performed while printing. Execute Drum Refresh2 after the printing is done.
1
Display the screen.
1 Press the [System Menu] key.
2 Press [
2
], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [
Perform the Drum Refresh 2.
Press [Start] to perform Drum Refresh2.
10-37
] and then [Next] of "Drum Refresh2".
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Developer Refresh
Adjust the printed image that is too light or incomplete, even though there is enough toner. In addition, Black or color
dots appear on the white background when white original is scanned can be removed.
1
Display the screen.
1 Press the [System Menu] key.
2 Press [
2
], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [
] and then [Next] of "Developer Refresh".
Perform the developer refresh.
Press [Start]. "Developer Refresh" begins.
NOTE
Waiting time may be longer when the toner is refilled during developer refresh.
Calibration
Calibrate the device to ensure consistency with the original grayscale. If you find that the grayscale is not improved by
this calibration, use Tone Curve Adjustment (page 10-36).
1
Display the screen.
1 Press the [System Menu] key.
2 Press [
2
], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [
Perform the calibration.
Press [Start]. "Calibration" begins.
10-38
] and then [Next] of "Calibration".
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Clearing Paper Jams
If a paper jam occurs, the touch panel will display "Paper Jam". and the machine will stop. Refer to these procedures to
remove the jammed paper.
Paper jam.
1. Remove the paper from
the paper ejector.
2. Open main unit right cover 1 and
remove the paper.
Remove the paper from
the multi purpose tray.
3. Open fuser cover (A1) and
remove the paper.
4. Close the cover.
Shows the location
of a paper jam.
JAM 0110
15, 18
Shows the removal procedure.
08/13
Shows the next step.
Shows the previous step.
Jam Location Indicators
If a paper jam occurs, the location of the jam will be displayed on the touch panel as well as the cleaning instructions.
Paper jam.
L
1. Remove the paper from
the paper ejector.
2. Open main unit right cover 1 and
remove the paper.
Remove the paper from
the multi purpose tray.
3. Open fuser cover (A1) and
remove the paper.
4. Close the cover.
JAM 0110
15, 18
K
K K
K
K
08/13
K
H
I
J
G G
K
E
F
M
M
C
M
Paper Jam Location Indicator
I
A
E
B
C
E
C
D
N
Paper Jam Location
Reference Page
A
Cassette 1
page 10-41
B
Cassette 2
page 10-42
C
Cassette 3 or 4 (Option)
page 10-43
D
Multi Purpose Tray
page 10-46
E
Inside the right cover 1, 3 or 4
page 10-47
F
Duplex unit
page 10-48
G
Fixing unit
page 10-51
H
Document processor (Option)
page 10-52
I
Job Separator (Option)
page 10-53
J
Bridge Unit
page 10-54
K
1,000-sheet Finisher (Option)
page 10-55
4,000-sheet Finisher (Option)
page 10-56
L
Mailbox (Option)
page 10-59
M
Center-Folding Unit (Option)
page 10-60
N
Cassette 5 (Option)
page 10-62
After you remove the jam, the machine will warm up again and the error message will be cleared. The machine resumes
with the page that was printing when the jam occurred.
10-39
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Precautions with Paper Jams
•
Do not reuse jammed papers.
•
If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine. Scraps of
paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
•
After clearing the paper jam, close the cassette and cover in the reverse procedure.
•
Discard paper that has jammed in the optional document finisher. A page affected by a paper jam will be printed
again.
CAUTION
The fixing unit is extremely hot. Take sufficient care when working in this area, as there is a danger of getting
burned.
10-40
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Cassette 1
1
2
NOTE
To remove paper which is difficult to get access to, the inner part the cassette can be
removed.
10-41
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Cassette 2
1
2
NOTE
To remove paper which is difficult to get access to, the inner part the cassette can be
removed.
10-42
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Optional Cassettes 3 and 4
Paper Feeder (500-sheet x 2)
1
1
2
2
3
10-43
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
NOTE
To remove paper which is difficult to get access to, the inner part of the cassette can be
removed.
10-44
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet x 2)
1
2
1
2
3
4
B2
B1
10-45
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Multi Purpose Tray
1
2
3
4
10-46
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Inside the Right Covers 1, 3 and 4
1
2
If you are using the optional document finisher, follow step on page 10-54 to remove jammed
paper in the optional bridge unit.
10-47
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Duplex unit
1
2
10-48
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Duplex Unit and Cassette 1
1
2
CLICK!
3
10-49
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
4
NOTE
To remove paper which is difficult to get access to, the inner part of the cassette can be
removed.
10-50
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Fixing unit
1
2
A1
3
10-51
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Optional Document Processor
1
2
If the original is difficult to remove, turn the dial. The original will scroll out to a position where it
can be removed easily.
If you are using the document processor (Automatic 2-Sided), go to step 3.
3
10-52
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Optional Job Separator
Inner Job Separator
1
2
3
A1
10-53
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Right Job Separator
1
2
3
A1
Bridge Unit (Option)
1
2
10-54
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
1,000-sheet Finisher (Option)
1
2
D1
3
1
2
D2
D3
10-55
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
4,000-sheet Finisher (Option)
Coupling Section
1
2
D1
Tray A
1
2
D6
10-56
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
3
D4
NOTE
If it is difficult to remove the jammed paper, turn feed knob D3 until the jammed paper is in a
location where it is easy to remove.
D3
10-57
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Tray B
1
2
D2
3
D3
Tray C
1
10-58
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Conveyor/Inner Tray
2
D2
3
D3
Mailbox (Option)
1
1
2
10-59
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Center-Folding Unit (Option)
Ejection Section
1
1
2
1
2
2
D9
1
2
3
D9
10-60
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Conveyor Section
1
2
D5
D7
If there is no paper jam in the conveyor guide (D7), proceed to the following step.
3
4
D8
10-61
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
5
Cassette 5 (Option)
1
2
1
2
10-62
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Clearing a Staple Jam
1,000-sheet Finisher
1
2
1
2
3
CLICK!
10-63
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
4,000-sheet Finisher
Staple cartridge holder A
1
2
1
2
3
CLICK!
10-64
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Staple cartridge holder B/C
1
2
3
2
1
4
CLICK!
10-65
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
10-66
11
Appendix
This chapter explains the following topics:
Optional Equipment .......................................................................................................................................... 11-2
Overview of Optional Equipment ............................................................................................................ 11-2
Optional Applications .............................................................................................................................. 11-8
Character Entry Method .................................................................................................................................. 11-10
Entry Screens ....................................................................................................................................... 11-10
Entering Characters .............................................................................................................................. 11-12
Paper .............................................................................................................................................................. 11-13
Basic Paper Specifications ................................................................................................................... 11-13
Choosing the Appropriate Paper .......................................................................................................... 11-14
Special Paper ........................................................................................................................................ 11-17
Specifications .................................................................................................................................................. 11-22
Common functions ................................................................................................................................ 11-22
Copy functions ...................................................................................................................................... 11-24
Printer functions .................................................................................................................................... 11-25
Scanner functions ................................................................................................................................. 11-25
Document Processor (Option) .............................................................................................................. 11-26
Paper Feeder (500-sheet x 2) (Option) ................................................................................................. 11-26
Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet x 2) (Option) ............................................................................... 11-27
Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) (Option) ...................................................................................................... 11-27
1,000-sheet Finisher (Option) ............................................................................................................... 11-28
4,000-sheet Finisher (Option) ............................................................................................................... 11-29
Hole Punch Unit (Option) ...................................................................................................................... 11-29
Mailbox (Option) ................................................................................................................................... 11-30
Center-Folding Unit (Option) ................................................................................................................. 11-30
Inner Job Separator (Option) ................................................................................................................ 11-31
Inner Job Separator (JS-732) (Option) ................................................................................................. 11-31
Right Job Separator (Option) ................................................................................................................ 11-32
Banner Tray (Option) ............................................................................................................................ 11-32
Glossary .......................................................................................................................................................... 11-33
11-1
Appendix > Optional Equipment
Optional Equipment
Overview of Optional Equipment
The following optional equipment is available for the machine.
*
If neither a document finisher nor a side feeder is installed, the toppling prevention kit must be installed.
11-2
Appendix > Optional Equipment
11-3
Appendix > Optional Equipment
(1) DP-770(B) "Document Processor (Reverse Automatic)"
DP-772 "Document Processor (Dual Scan)"
PLATEN COVER TYPE E "Platen"
Automatically scans originals. Also you can perform duplex copying and split copying.
For document processor operation, refer to Loading Originals in the Document Processor on page 5-3.
When the document processor is not used, please use the PLATEN COVER TYPE E.
(2) MT-730(B) "Mailbox"
Makes it easy to sort output into separate trays. Installing this option adds 7 output trays. When multiple computer users
share the printer, each user can print to a specified tray. Installs on the 4,000-sheet Finisher.
NOTE
To deliver output to the mail box, change the Paper Output selection on the operation panel or in the printer driver, or
change in the default settings. (For details, refer to Paper Output on page 6-22.)
(3) DF-790(C) "4,000-sheet Finisher"
This is a large-capacity document finisher capable of holding large print runs and of separating and offsetting multiple
copies of a printout into individual copies. It can also staple or hole-punch (optional) the offset printouts.
User can select manual staple by operation button. A mail box and folding unit are also available as options.
(4) DF-770(C) "1,000-sheet Finisher"
This is a document finisher capable of holding large print runs and of separating and offsetting multiple copies of a
printout into individual copies. It can also staple or hole-punch (optional) the offset printouts.
(5) BF-730 "Folding Unit"
Folds printed output at the center or in tri-fold to enable the creation of simple booklets. Installs on the 4,000-sheet
Finisher.
(6) PF-730(B) "Paper Feeder (500-sheet x2)"
Two additional cassettes identical to the printer's cassette can be installed in the printer. Paper capacity and loading
method are the same as the standard cassettes. Refer to Standard cassettes on page 3-18 for loading paper.
(7) PF-740(B) "Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet x 2)"
In addition to the printer's cassettes, you can also install an optional large capacity feeder (1,500-sheet x 2) capable of
holding up to 3,000 sheets of A4, B5 or Letter paper. Refer to The Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet x 2) (Option) on
page 3-21 for loading paper.
11-4
Appendix > Optional Equipment
(8) JS-730 "Inner Job Separator"
Separate paper according to output tray for easier sorting. Specify as the output tray for copy or print jobs. Or, specify as
the default output tray for printing from the copy or Document Box screen, printing from the PC, and printing of the
received fax data.
IMPORTANT
Note that some paper types have a tendency to curl and may jam in the paper eject unit.
If the ejected paper slips or stacks unevenly, turn the paper in the cassette over and try again.
NOTE
To ensure that paper is delivered to the Inner Job Separator, select the output destination or change the default
setting. (For details, refer to the Paper Output on page 6-22.)
(9) JS-732 "Inner Job Separator (JS-732)"
Separate paper according to output tray for easier sorting. Specify as the output tray for copy or print jobs. Or, specify as
the default output tray for printing from the copy or Document Box screen, printing from the PC, and printing of the
received fax data.
IMPORTANT
Note that some paper types have a tendency to curl and may jam in the paper eject unit.
If the ejected paper slips or stacks unevenly, turn the paper in the cassette over and try again.
NOTE
• To ensure that paper is delivered to the Inner Job Separator (JS-732), select the output destination or change the
default setting. (For details, refer to the Paper Output on page 6-22.)
• If the paper is A3, B4, Ledger, or Legal, pull out the auxiliary tray.
• The busy light stays on until the output is removed from the Inner Job Separator (JS-732).
11-5
Appendix > Optional Equipment
(10) JS-731 "Right Job Separator"
Separate paper according to output tray for easier sorting. Specify as the output tray for copy or print jobs. Or, specify as
the default output tray for printing from the copy or Document Box screen, printing from the PC, and printing of the
received fax data.
.
(12) PF-770 "Side Feeder (3,000-sheet)"
In addition to the printer's cassettes, you can also install an optional side feeder (3,000-sheet) capable of holding up to
3,000 sheets of A4, B5 or Letter paper. Refer to Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) (Option) on page 3-25 for loading paper.
(13) Printed Document Guard Kit(B) "Printed Document Guard Kit"
This prevents the unauthorized copying and/or transmission of documents that contain important confidential or
personal information. When a document is printed from a computer, this feature imprints a special pattern on the
document. When anyone attempts to copy or send that document on this machine, the machine detects the pattern and
protects the information by printing the document in blank and prohibiting transmission.
(14) Keyboard Holder(B) "Keyboard Holder"
A USB keyboard connected to the machine can be placed here.
(15) Card Authentication Kit(B) "Card Authentication Kit"
User login administration can be performed using ID cards. To do so, it is necessary to register ID card information on
the previously registered local user list. For more information about how to register this information, refer to the Card
Authentication Kit(B) Operation Guide.
(16) MM-16-128 "FAX Expansion Memory"
Image storage memory (128 MB) that allows the machine to receive more pages of incoming faxed originals. Expansion
memory should only be installed or removed by the service representative.
(17) Fax System(W) "FAX Kit"
By installing the FAX kit, fax send/receive is enabled. Also, it is possible to use it as a network fax, by using it with a
computer. When two FAX kits are installed, the units can be connected to two different telephone lines which will enable
quicker message transmission to a number of recipients. If one of the lines is dedicated to receiving, the busy line time
can be reduced. For further details, refer to FAX Operation Guide.
11-6
Appendix > Optional Equipment
(20) Key Counter "Key Counter"
Use the key counter to monitor machine usage. The key counter offers a convenient solution for centralized
management of copy volume for different departments in a large company.
Inserting the Key Counter
Insert the key counter securely into the key counter slot.
NOTE
When the key counter function is activated, copies can only be made when a key counter is inserted. If the key
counter is not inserted, "Insert key counter". will be displayed.
(21) DT-730 "Document Table"
Place original or other documents when using the machine. It has a drawer to accommodate clips.
(22) Internet FAX Kit(A) "Internet FAX Kit"
Activating the Internet FAX Kit sends and receives faxes via the Internet without using a phone line. It can only be added
when the FAX Kit is installed.
(23) Data Security Kit(E) "Data Security Kit"
The Data Security Kit overwrites all unnecessary data in the storage area of the hard disk so that it cannot be retrieved.
The Data Security Kit encrypts data before storing it in the hard disk. It guarantees higher security because no data
cannot be decoded by ordinary output or operations.
(24) UG-33 "ThinPrint Option"
This application allows print data to be printed directly without a print driver.
(25) UG-34 "Emulation Upgrade Kit"
Enables emulation whereby the machine operates using commands for other printers. Installing this option enables IBM
Proprinter, Line Printer, and EPSON LQ-850 emulation.
(26) Scan extension kit(A) "OCR Scan Activation Kit"
This option enables the use of the OCR function in the applications of the machine.
(27) USB Keyboard "USB Keyboard"
A USB keyboard can be used to enter information into the text fields on the operation panel. A special mount is also
available to install the keyboard on the MFP. Please contact your dealer or service representative for information on
keyboards that are compatible with your MFP before you purchase one.
11-7
Appendix > Optional Equipment
Optional Applications
Overview of the Applications
The applications listed below are installed on this machine.
Application
Data Security Kit
Internet FAX Kit
Card Authentication Kit
ThinPrint Option*
Emulation Upgrade Kit
OCR Scan Activation Kit*
*
This can be used on a trial basis for a limited time.
NOTE
Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period differ depending on the
application.
If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you will no longer be able to use the
application.
Starting Application Use
Use the procedure below to start using an application.
1 Press the [System Menu] key.
2 Press [System/Network], [Next] of "Optional Function".
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password
and press [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. The factory
default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
d-Copia 3500MF plus
3500
3500
d-Copia 4500MF plus
4500
4500
d-Copia 5500MF plus
5500
5500
3 Select the desired application and press [Activate].
You can view detailed information on the selected application by pressing [Detail].
11-8
Appendix > Optional Equipment
4 Press [Official] in the license key entry screen.
Some applications do not require you to enter a license key. If the license key entry screen does not
appear, go to Step 5.
To use the application as a trial, press [Trial] without entering the license key.
5 Press [Yes] in the confirmation screen.
NOTE
Icons of activated application are displayed in the Home screen.
Checking Details of Application
Use the procedure below to check the details of application.
1 Press the [System Menu] key.
2 Press [System/Network], and [Next] of "Optional Function".
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password
and press [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. The factory
default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name
Login User Name
Login Password
d-Copia 3500MF plus
3500
3500
d-Copia 4500MF plus
4500
4500
d-Copia 5500MF plus
5500
5500
3 Select the desired application and press [Detail].
You can view detailed information on the selected application.
11-9
Appendix > Character Entry Method
Character Entry Method
To enter characters for a name, use the on-display keyboard in the touch panel following the steps as explained below.
NOTE
Keyboard Layout
"QWERTY", "QWERTZ" and "AZERTY" are available as keyboard layouts the same as a PC keyboard. Press the
[System Menu] key, [Common Settings] and then [Change] of "Keyboard Layout" to choose the desired layout.
"QWERTY" layout is used here as an example. You may use another layout following the same steps.
Entry Screens
Lower-case Letter Entry Screen
3
Use the keyboard to enter.
1
Limit: 128 characters
Input: 0 characters
Backspace
!
@
Q
#
W
A
E
S
Z
6
$
Upper-case
R
D
X
C
Lower-case
Lower-case
^
T
F
7
No.
%
Y
G
V
B
*
U
H
No./Symbol
8
&
I
J
N
(
O
K
M
)
_
P
L
<
{
:
>
+
2
4
˜
}
|
"
5
?
Space
9
Display/Key
Cancel
OK
10
11
Description
1
Display
Displays entered characters.
2
Limit Display
Displays maximum number of characters.
3
Cursor Key
Press to move the cursor on the display.
4
[Backspace]
Press to delete a character to the left of the cursor.
5
Keyboard
Press a character to enter.
6
[Upper-case]
Press to use upper-case letters.
7
[Lower-case]
Press to use lower-case letters.
8
[No./Symbol]
Press to enter numbers and symbols.
9
[Space]
Press to insert a space.
10
[Cancel]
Press to cancel entered characters and return to the
screen before the entry.
11
[OK]
Press to finalize entry and return to the screen before
the entry.
11-10
Appendix > Character Entry Method
Upper-case Letter Entry Screen
Use the keyboard to enter.
Limit: 128 characters
Input: 0 characters
Backspace
!
@
Q
#
W
A
S
Z
$
E
D
X
Upper-case
%
R
F
C
Lower-case
Lower-case
^
T
G
V
&
Y
H
B
*
U
(
I
J
N
K
M
No./Symbol
)
O
_
P
L
<
:
>
+
{
˜
}
|
"
?
Space
Cancel
OK
Number/Symbol Entry Screen
Use the keyboard to enter.
Limit: 32 characters
Input: 0 characters
Backspace
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
"
#
$
%
&
’
(
)
*
+
,
-
.
/
:
;
<
=
>
?
@
[
\
]
^
_
`
{
|
}
Upper-case
˜
Lower-case
Lower-case
No./Symbol
Space
Cancel
No.
12
Display/Key
[
]/[
12
]
OK
Description
To enter a number or symbol not shown in the
keyboard, press the cursor key and scroll the screen
to view other numbers or symbols to enter.
11-11
Appendix > Character Entry Method
Entering Characters
Follow the steps shown below to enter "List A-1" for example.
1 Press [Upper-case].
2 Press [L]. The letter "L" is shown on the display.
Use the keyboard to enter.
Limit: 32 characters
Input: 1 characters
L
Backspace
!
@
Q
#
W
A
$
E
S
R
D
Z
X
Upper-case
%
^
T
F
C
Y
G
V
Lower-case
Lower-case
&
*
U
H
B
(
I
J
N
)
O
K
M
_
P
L
<
+
{
:
>
˜
}
|
"
?
Space
No./Symbol
Cancel
OK
3 Press [Lower-case].
4 Press [i], [s], [t] and [Space].
Use the keyboard to enter.
Limit: 32 characters
Input: 4 characters
List
Backspace
1
2
q
3
w
a
4
e
s
z
r
d
x
Upper-case
5
t
f
c
7
y
g
v
Lower-case
6
u
h
b
8
i
j
n
0
o
k
m
No./Symbol
9
!
p
l
,
[
;
.
=
`
]
\
’
/
@
_
Space
Cancel
OK
5 Press [Upper-case].
6 Press [A].
7 Press [No./Symbol].
8 Press [
] or [
] repeatedly to view the keyboard containing [-] and [1].
9 Press [-] and [1].
Use the keyboard to enter.
Limit: 32 characters
Input: 8 characters
List_A-1
Backspace
1
2
3
$
%
&
’
;
<
=
>
|
}
Upper-case
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
"
#
(
)
*
+
,
-
.
/
:
?
@
[
\
]
^
_
`
{
˜
Lower-case
Lower-case
No./Symbol
Space
Cancel
10Check that the entry is correct. Press [OK].
11-12
OK
Appendix > Paper
Paper
This section explains the paper sizes and types that can be used in the paper source.
For details on the sizes, types, and number of sheets of paper that can be loaded in each paper tray, refer to Specifications on
page 11-22.
Basic Paper Specifications
This machine is designed to print on standard copy paper as used in regular ('dry') copiers and page printers such as
laser printers. It also supports a variety of other types of paper that conform to the specifications given in this appendix.
Be careful when choosing paper. Paper unsuitable for the machine may cause jams or may be wrinkled.
Supported Paper
Use standard copy paper for regular copiers or laser printers. The printing quality will be affected by the quality of paper.
Poor quality paper may result in unsatisfactory output.
Basic Paper Specifications
The following table lists the specifications of paper that is supported with this machine. Refer to the subsequent sections
for further details.
Criteria
Weight
Specifications
Cassettes: 60 to 220 g/m2
Multi purpose tray: 60 to 300 g/m2
Dimensional accuracy
±0.7 mm
Squareness of corners
90° ±0.2°
Moisture content
4 to 6%
Pulp content
80% or more
NOTE
Some recycled paper does not meet requirements for use with this machine as listed in the Basic Paper Specifications
shown below, such as moisture or pulp content. For this reason, we recommend purchasing a small amount of
recycled paper as a sample for testing prior to use. Choose recycled paper that gives the best printing results and
contains low levels of paper dust.
We are not responsible for the problems occurred from the use of paper that does not conform to our specifications.
11-13
Appendix > Paper
Choosing the Appropriate Paper
This section describes guidelines for choosing paper.
Condition
Avoid using paper with bent corners or that is curled, dirty, or torn. Do not use paper that has a rough surface or paper
fiber lint, or that is especially delicate. Use of paper in any of these conditions will not only deliver poor copies but may
also cause jams and shorten the useful life of the machine. Choose paper with a smooth and even surface; however,
avoid coated paper or paper with a treated surface as it may damage the drum or fusing unit.
Ingredients
Do not use paper such as paper that has been coated or surface-treated or paper that contains plastic or carbon. Those
types of paper may produce harmful fumes from the heat of printing and may damage the drum.
Be sure to use the standard paper that contains at least 80% pulp, i.e., not more than 20% of the total paper content
consists of cotton or other fibers.
Supported Paper Sizes
Paper of the following sizes is supported by the machine.
Measurements in the table take into account a ±0.7 mm dimensional accuracy for length and width. Corner angles must
be 90° ± 0.2°.
Multi Purpose Tray
Cassette or Multi Purpose Tray
A6-R (105 × 148 mm)
A3 (297 × 420 mm)
B6-R (128 × 182 mm)
B4 (257 × 364 mm)
Hagaki (100×148 mm)
A4 (297 × 210 mm)
Oufuku hagaki (148 × 200 mm)
A4-R (210 × 297 mm)
Executive (7 1/4 × 10 1/2")
B5 (257 × 182 mm)
Envelope DL (110 × 220 mm)
B5-R (182 × 257 mm)
Envelope C5 (162 × 229 mm)
A5-R (148 × 210 mm)
Envelope C4 (229 × 324 mm)
Folio (210 × 330 mm)
ISO B5 (176 × 250 mm)
Ledger
Envelope #10 (Commercial #10) (4 1/8 × 9 1/2")
Legal
Envelope #9 (Commercial #9) (3 7/8 × 8 7/8")
Letter
Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4) (3 5/8 × 6 1/2")
Letter-R
Envelope Monarch (3 7/8 × 7 1/2")
Statement-R
Youkei 2 (114 × 162 mm)
Oficio II
Youkei 4 (105 × 235 mm)
12 × 18"
Size Entry (98 × 148 to 297 × 432 mm)
8K (273 × 394 mm)
16K (273 × 197 mm)
16K-R (197 × 273 mm)
216 × 340 mm
Size Entry (140 × 182 to 304 × 457 mm)
11-14
Appendix > Paper
Smoothness
The paper surface should be smooth, but it must be uncoated. With paper that is too smooth and slippery, several
sheets may accidentally be supplied at once, causing jams.
Basis Weight
In countries that use the metric system, basis weight is the weight in grams of one sheet of paper one square meter in
area. In the United States, basis weight is the weight in pounds of one ream (500 sheets) of paper cut to the standard
size (or trade size) for a specific grade of paper. Paper that is too heavy or too light may be supplied incorrectly or cause
paper jams, which may cause excessive wear of the machine. Mixed paper weight (i.e., thickness) may cause several
sheets to be supplied at once accidentally and may also cause blurring or other printing problems if the toner fails to
adhere correctly.
Moisture Content
Paper moisture content is the ratio of moisture to dryness expressed as a percentage. Moisture affects how the paper is
supplied, the electrostatic chargeability of the paper, and how the toner adheres.
Paper moisture content varies depending on the relative humidity in the room. High relative humidity causes paper to
become damp, making the edges expand so it appears wavy. Low relative humidity causes paper to lose moisture,
making the edges tighten and weakening print contrast.
Wavy or tight edges may cause the paper to slip when it is supplied. Try to keep the moisture content between 4 to 6%.
To maintain the right level of moisture content, bear in mind the following considerations.
•
Store paper in a cool, well-ventilated place.
•
Store paper flat and unopened in the package. Once the package is opened, reseal it if the paper is not to be used for
a while.
•
Store paper sealed in the original package and box. Put a pallet under the carton to keep it raised above the floor.
Especially during rainy seasons keep the paper a sufficient distance away from wooden or concrete floors.
•
Before using paper that has been stored, keep it at the proper moisture level for at least 48 hours.
•
Do not store paper where it is exposed to heat, sunlight, or dampness.
11-15
Appendix > Paper
Other Paper Specifications
Porosity: The density of the paper fibers
Stiffness: Paper must be stiff enough or it may buckle in the machine, causing jams.
Curl: Most paper naturally tends to curl after the package is opened. When paper passes through the fixing unit, it curls
upward slightly. To deliver flat printouts, load the paper so that the curl faces towards the bottom of the paper tray.
Static electricity: During printing, paper is electrostatically charged so that the toner adheres. Choose paper that can be
discharged quickly so that copies do not cling together.
Whiteness: Paper whiteness affects print contrast. Use whiter paper for sharper, brighter copies.
Quality: Machine problems may occur if sheet sizes are not uniform or if corners are not square, edges are rough,
sheets are uncut, or edges or corners are crushed. In order to prevent these problems, be especially careful when you
cut the paper yourself.
Packaging: Choose paper that is properly packaged and stacked in boxes. Ideally, the packaging itself should have
been treated with a coating to inhibit moisture.
Specially treated paper: We do not recommend printing onto the following types of paper, even if it conforms to the
basic specifications. When you use these kinds of paper, purchase a small amount first as a sample to test.
•
Glossy paper
•
Watermarked paper
•
Paper with an uneven surface
•
Perforated paper
11-16
Appendix > Paper
Special Paper
This section describes printing onto special paper and print media.
The following paper and media can be used.
•
Transparencies
•
Preprinted paper
•
Bond paper
•
Recycled paper
•
Thin paper (from 60 g/m2 to 64 g/m2 or less)
•
Letterhead
•
Colored paper
•
Prepunched paper
•
Envelopes
•
Cardstocks (Hagaki)
•
Thick paper (from 106 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 or less)
•
Labels
•
Coated paper
•
High-quality paper
•
Index Tab Dividers
When using these paper and media, choose those that are designed specifically for copiers or page printers (such as
laser printers). Use the multi purpose tray for transparencies, thick paper, envelopes, cardstocks, and label paper.
11-17
Appendix > Paper
Choosing Special Paper
Although special paper that meets the following requirements can be used with the machine, print quality will vary
considerably due to differences in the construction and quality of special paper. Thus, special paper is more likely than
regular paper to cause printing problems. Before purchasing special paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the
print quality is satisfactory. General precautions when printing onto special paper are given below. Note that we are not
responsible for any harm to the user or damage to the machine caused by moisture or specifications of special paper.
Select a cassette or multi purpose tray for special paper.
Transparencies
Transparencies must be able to withstand the heat of printing. Transparencies must meet the following conditions.
Heat resistance
Must withstand at least 190°C
Thickness
0.100 to 0.110 mm
Material
Polyester
Dimensional accuracy
±0.7 mm
Squareness of corners
90° ±0.2°
To avoid problems, use the multi purpose tray for transparencies and load transparencies with the long side facing the
machine.
If transparencies jam frequently at output, try pulling the leading edge of sheets gently as they are ejected.
11-18
Appendix > Paper
Label
Be sure to feed labels from the multi purpose tray.
For selecting labels, use extreme care so that the adhesive may not come in direct contact with any part of the machine
and that the labels are not easily peeled from the carrier sheet. Adhesives that stick to the drum or rollers and peeled
labels remaining in the machine may cause a failure.
When printing onto labels, you must be liable for the print quality and possible trouble.
Top sheet
Adhesive layer
Carrier sheet
Labels consist of three layers as shown in the illustration. The adhesive layer contains materials that are easily affected
by the force applied in the machine. The carrier sheet bears the top sheet until the label is used. This composition of
labels may cause more problems.
The label surface must be covered completely with the top sheet. Gaps between labels may cause peeling of labels,
resulting in a serious failure.
Some label paper has large margins on the top sheet. When using such paper, do not peel these margins from the
carrier sheet before completing output.
Allowed
Not allowed
Top sheet
Carrier sheet
Use label paper that conforms to the following specifications.
Top sheet weight
44 to 74 g/m²
Basis weight
(overall paper weight)
104 to 151 g/m²
Top sheet thickness
0.086 to 0.107 mm
Overall paper thickness
0.115 to 0.145 mm
Moisture content
4 to 6 % (composite)
11-19
Appendix > Paper
Hagaki
Burrs
Burrs
Before loading Hagaki into the multi purpose tray, fan them and align the edges. If the Hagaki paper is curled, straighten
it before loading. Printing onto curled Hagaki may cause jams.
Use unfolded Oufuku hagaki (available at post offices). Some Hagaki may still have rough edges developed by a paper
cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges by placing the Hagaki on a flat surface and rubbing the edges
gently a few times with a ruler.
Envelopes
Use the multi purpose tray for envelopes.
Due to the structure of envelopes, printing evenly over the entire surface may not be possible in some cases. Thin
envelopes in particular may be wrinkled by the machine in some cases as they pass through. Before purchasing
envelopes in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the print quality.
Storing envelopes for a long period may cause them to become wrinkled. Thus, keep the package sealed until you are
ready to use them.
Keep the following points in mind.
•
Do not use envelopes with exposed adhesive. In addition, do not use the type of envelope in which the adhesive is
exposed after the top layer is peeled off. Serious damage may be caused if the paper covering the adhesive comes
off in the machine.
•
Do not use envelopes with certain special features. For example, do not use envelopes with a grommet for winding a
string to close the flap or envelopes with an open or film-covered window.
•
If paper jams occur, load fewer envelopes at once.
•
To prevent paper jams when printing onto multiple envelopes, do not allow more than ten envelopes to remain in the
Inner tray at once.
Thick Paper
Before loading thick paper in the multi purpose tray, fan it and align the edges. Some thick paper may still have rough
edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges just as with Hagaki by placing the
paper on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler. Printing onto paper with rough edges may
cause jams.
NOTE
If the paper is not supplied correctly even after it is smoothed, load the paper in the multi purpose tray with the leading
edge raised a few millimeters.
Colored Paper
Colored paper must conform to the specifications listed on page 11-13. In addition, the pigments in the paper must be
able to withstand the heat of printing (up to 200°C or 392°F).
11-20
Appendix > Paper
Preprinted Paper
Preprinted paper must conform to the specifications listed on page 11-13. The colored ink must be able to withstand the
heat of printing. It must be resistant to silicone oil as well. Do not use paper with a treated surface such as glossy paper
used for calendars.
Recycled Paper
Recycled paper must conform to the specifications listed on page 11-13; however, its whiteness may be considered
separately.
NOTE
Before purchasing recycled paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure satisfactory print quality.
Coated Paper
Coated paper is created by treating the surface of the base paper with a coating that provides higher printing quality than
plain paper. Coated paper is used for particularly high quality printing.
The surface of high-quality or medium-quality paper is coated with special agents that improve ink adhesion by making
the paper surface smoother. These agents are used either to coat both sides of the paper or just one side. The coated
side appears slightly glossy.
IMPORTANT
When printing on coated paper in very humid environments, ensure that the paper is kept dry as moisture
may cause sheets to stick together when they are fed into the machine. If printing in very humid
environments, set coated paper for one sheet each.
11-21
Appendix > Specifications
Specifications
IMPORTANT
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
NOTE
For more information on using the FAX, refer to the FAX Operation Guide.
Common functions
Item
Description
Type
Desktop
Printing Method
Electrophotography by semiconductor laser
Paper Weight
Paper Type
Paper Size
Warm-up Time
(22°C/71.6°F,
60%)
Cassette 1, 2
60 to 220 g/m2
Multi Purpose
Tray
60 to 300 g/m2
Cassette 1, 2
Plain, Rough, Vellum, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color (Colour),
Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, High Quality,
Custom 1 to 8 (Duplex: Same as Simplex)
Multi Purpose
Tray
Plain, Transparency (OHP film), Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled,
Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color (Colour), Prepunched,
Letterhead, Thick, Coated, Envelope, High Quality,
Index Tab Dividers, Custom 1 to 8
Cassette 1, 2
A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 12 × 18",
Letter-R, Letter, Statement-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R, 216 × 340 mm,
Size Entry (Metric: X; 182 to 457 mm (in 1 mm increments),
Y; 140 to 304 mm (in 1 mm increments), Inch: X; 7.17 to 18.00"
(in 0.01" increments), Y; 5.51 to 12.00" (in 0.01" increments))
Multi Purpose
Tray
A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5 (ISO), B5-R, A5-R, B6-R, A6-R,
Oufuku hagaki, Hagaki, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4,
Envelope #10 (Commercial #10), Envelope #9 (Commercial #9),
Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4), Envelope Monarch, Youkei 2,
Youkei 4, Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 12 × 18", Letter, Letter-R,
Statement-R, Executive, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, 8K, 16K, 16K-R,
Custom (98 × 148 mm to 304.8 × 1,220.0 mm)
Power on
d-Copia 3500MF plus: 23 seconds or less
d-Copia 4500MF plus: 23 seconds or less
d-Copia 5500MF plus: 23 seconds or less
Low Power
d-Copia 3500MF plus: 10 seconds or less
d-Copia 4500MF plus: 10 seconds or less
d-Copia 5500MF plus: 10 seconds or less
Sleep
d-Copia 3500MF plus: 16 seconds or less
d-Copia 4500MF plus: 16 seconds or less
d-Copia 5500MF plus: 16 seconds or less
Paper Capacity
Cassette 1
500 sheets (80 g/m2)
Cassette 2
500 sheets (80 g/m2)
Multi Purpose
Tray
A4/Letter or less
150 sheets (80 g/m2)
More than A4/Letter
50 sheets (80 g/m2)
11-22
Appendix > Specifications
Item
Output Tray
Capacity
Description
Inner tray
250 sheets (80 g/m2)
(When the inner job separator (JS-732) is installed, 180 sheets.)
with optional
inner job
separator
30 sheets (80 g/m2)
with optional
inner job
separator
(JS-732)
100 sheets (80 g/m2)
with optional
right job
separator
70 sheets (80 g/m2)
Image Write System
Semiconductor laser and electrophotography
Main Memory
2,048MB
Hard Disk
d-Copia 3500MF plus:160GB or more (standard)
d-Copia 4500MF plus:160GB or more (standard)
d-Copia 5500MF plus:160GB or more (standard)
Interface
Standard
USB Interface Connector: 1 (USB Hi-Speed)
Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)
USBPort: 2 (Hi-Speed USB)
Option
Fax: 2
Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)
A maximum of two interface options can be installed.
Only one network interface can be installed.
When a network interface is installed, only one fax line can be installed.
Operating
Environment
Temperature
10 to 32.5°C/50 to 90.5°F
Humidity
15 to 80 %
Altitude
2,500 m/8,202 ft maximum
Brightness
1,500 lux maximum
Dimension (W × D × H)
(Main unit only)
26 19/32 × 30 3/16 ×29 13/32"
668 × 767 × 747 mm
Weight
180.8 lb/82kg
Space Required (W × D)
38 29/64 × 30 3/16"
(Using multi purpose tray)
977 × 767 mm
Power Source
120 V Specification Model:
120 V AC 60 Hz 12.0 A
230 V Specification Model:
220 to 240 V AC 50/60 Hz 7.2 A
Options
Refer to Optional Equipment on page 11-2.
11-23
Appendix > Specifications
Copy functions
Item
Copy Speed
Description
d-Copia 3500MF plus A4/Letter
35 sheets/min
A4-R/Letter-R
24 sheets/min
A3/Ledger
17 sheets/min
B4/Legal
21 sheets/min
B5
35 sheets/min
B5-R
24 sheets/min
A5-R
17 sheets/min
d-Copia 4500MF plus A4/Letter
45 sheets/min
A4-R/Letter-R
A3/Ledger
22 sheets/min
B4/Legal
27 sheets/min
B5
45 sheets/min
B5-R
31 sheets/min
A5-R
22 sheets/min
d-Copia 5500MF plus A4/Letter
First Copy Time
(A4, feed from
Cassette)
Black and
White
31 sheets/min
55 sheets/min
A4-R/Letter-R
38 sheets/min
A3/Ledger
27 sheets/min
B4/Legal
33 sheets/min
B5
55 sheets/min
B5-R
38 sheets/min
A5-R
27 sheets/min
d-Copia 3500MF plus: 4.7 seconds or less
d-Copia 4500MF plus: 3.8 seconds or less
d-Copia 5500MF plus: 3.2 seconds or less
Zoom Level
Manual mode: 25 to 400%, 1% increments
Auto mode: Preset Zoom
Continuous Copying
1 to 999 sheets
Resolution
600 × 600 dpi
Supported Original Types
Sheet, Book, 3-dimensional objects (maximum original size: Ledger/
A3)
Original Feed System
Fixed
11-24
Appendix > Specifications
Printer functions
Item
Printing Speed
Description
d-Copia 3500MF plus A4/Letter
d-Copia 4500MF plus
d-Copia 5500MF plus
First Print Time
(A4, feed from
Cassette)
Black and
White
35 sheets/min
A3/Ledger
17 sheets/min
A4/Letter
45 sheets/min
A3/Ledger
22 sheets/min
A4/Letter
55 sheets/min
A3/Ledger
27 sheets/min
d-Copia 3500MF plus: 6.0 seconds or less
d-Copia 4500MF plus: 5.3 seconds or less
d-Copia 5500MF plus: 4.9 seconds or less
Resolution
600 × 600 dpi
Operating System
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows 7,
Windows 8, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2012, Mac OS 10.x
Interface
Standard
USB Interface Connector: 1 (USB Hi-Speed)
Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)
Optional Interface (Option): 1 (For IB-50/IB-51 mounting)
Page Description Language
PRESCRIBE
Emulations
PCL6 (PCL5e, PCL-XL), KPDL3 (PostScript3 compatible)
Scanner functions
Item
Description
System
requirements
CPU: Celeron 266 MHz or higher
RAM: 300 MB or more
Resolution
600 dpi, 400 dpi, 300 dpi, 200 dpi, 200 ×100 dpi, 200 × 400 dpi
(Resolution in FAX mode included)
File Format
PDF (high compressive, encrypted, PDF/A), JPEG, TIFF, XPS
Scanning Speed*1
d-Copia 3500MF plus
1-sided
B/W 80 Images/min
Color 50 Images/min
2-sided
B/W 160 Images/min
Color 80 Images/min
d-Copia 4500MF plus
d-Copia 5500MF plus
(A4 landscape, 300 dpi, Image quality: Text/Photo original)
Interface
Ethernet (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)
Network Protocol
TCP/IP
Transmission
System
SMB, SMTP, FTP, FTP over SSL, USB, TWAIN*2, WIA*3, WSD
*1 When using the dual scan document processor (except TWAIN and WIA scanning)
*2 Available Operating System : Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008,
Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows 7, Windows Server 2012
*3 Available Operating System : Windows Vista, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008,
Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows 7, Windows Server 2012
11-25
Appendix > Specifications
Document Processor (Option)
Description
Item
Document Processor
(Dual scan DP)
Document Processor
Original Feed Method
Automatic feed
Supported Original
Types
Sheet originals
Paper Size
Maximum: Ledger/A3
Maximum: Ledger/A3
Minimum: Statement-R/A5-R
Minimum: Statement-R/A6-R
Sizes smaller than B6-R are 50 to 105
g/m2 (one-side/duplex)
1-sided: 45 to 160 g/m2
1-sided: 35 to 220 g/m2
2-sided: 50 to 120 g/m2
2-sided: 50 to 220 g/m2
100 sheets (50 to 80 g/m2) maximum
175 sheets (50 to 80 g/m2) maximum
When originals have different widths:
30 sheets (50 to 80 g/m2) maximum
When originals have different widths:
30 sheets (50 to 80 g/m2) maximum
Dimensions
22 23/32 × 21 13/64 × 7 5/64"
23 5/8 × 20 13/64 × 6 45/64"
(W) × (D) × (H)
577 × 534 × 180 mm
600 × 513 × 170 mm
Weight
32 lbs. or less /14.5 kg or less
Paper Weight
Loading Capacity
Paper Feeder (500-sheet x 2) (Option)
Item
Paper Supply Method
Description
Feed & reverse roller method
(No. Sheets: 500, 80 g/m2, 2 cassettes/No. Sheets: 550, 64 g/m2, 2 cassettes)
Paper Size
A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Folio, Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 12 × 18",
Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, 8K, 16K, 16K-R, 216 × 340 mm
Supported Paper
Paper weight: 60 - 256 g/m2
Media types: Plain, Recycled, Thick
Dimensions
23 35/64 × 27 35/64 × 12 13/32"
(W) × (D) × (H)
598 × 699.6 × 315 mm
Weight
Approx. 66.1 lbs. / Approx. 30 kg
11-26
Appendix > Specifications
Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet x 2) (Option)
Item
Description
Paper Supply Method
Feed & reverse roller method
(No. Sheets: 3,000 (80 g/m2)/No. Sheets: 3,500 (64 g/m2))
Paper Size
A4, B5, Letter
Supported Paper
Paper weight: 60 - 256 g/m2
Media types: Plain, Recycled, Thick
Dimensions
23 35/64 × 27 52/64 × 12 26/64"
(W) × (D) × (H)
598 × 706.6 × 315 mm
Weight
Approx. 63.93 lbs / Approx. 29 kg
Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) (Option)
Item
Paper Supply Method
Description
Feed & reverse roller method
(No. Sheets: 3,000, 80 g/m2/No. Sheets: 3,500 64 g/m2)
Paper Size
A4, B5, Letter
Supported Paper
Paper weight: 60 - 300 g/m2
Media types: Plain, Recycled, Thick
Dimensions
12 41/64 × 24 13/32 × 19 27/32"
(W) × (D) × (H)
321 × 620 × 504 mm
Weight
Approx. 55.1 lbs. / Approx. 25 kg
11-27
Appendix > Specifications
1,000-sheet Finisher (Option)
Item
Description
Number of Trays
2 trays
Paper Size
A3, B4, Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-R, 216 × 340 mm, Statement-R,
Executive, Foolscap, A3 Wide(310 × 433 mm), Ledger Wide(310 × 440 mm),
12 × 18": 500 sheets
(80 g/m2)
Tray A
(Nonstapling)
A4, A4-R, B5, A5-R, B6-R, B5-R, Letter, Letter-R, 16K,
Custom (98 × 148 mm to 297 × 432 mm): 1,000 sheets
Tray B
A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5 (ISO), B5-R, A5-R, A6-R, B6-R, Letter, Letter-R,
Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 12 × 18", Statement-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R,
216 × 340 mm, Oufuku hagaki, Cardstock, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,
Envelope C4, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10), Envelope #9 (Commercial #9),
Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4), Envelope Monarch, Youkei 2, Youkei 4,
Statement-R, Executive, Foolscap, A3 Wide(310 × 433 mm),
Ledger Wide(310 × 440 mm), 13 × 19", Custom (98 × 148 mm to 297 × 432 mm)
: 100 sheets
Supported Paper
Weight
Stapling: 90 g/m2 or less
Stapling
A3, B4, B5-R, Ledger, Legal,
Oficio II, 12 × 18",
216 × 340 mm, Folio, 8K,
16K-R
30 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)
A4, A4-R, B5, Letter,
Letter-R, 16K
50 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)
Number of
Sheets
20 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)
2 cover sheet only (106 g/m2 to 256 g/m2)
40 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)
2 cover sheet only (106 g/m2 to 256 g/m2)
Media
types
Plain, Recycled, Prepunched, Preprinted, Bond, Letterhead, Color, Coated,
Thick, High Quality, Rough, Vellum, Transparency, Labels, Envelope,
Cardstock, Custom 1 to 8
Dimensions
26 7/32 × 24 11 × 32 × 42 5/8"
(W) × (D) × (H)
666 × 618.5 × 1,083 mm
Weight
Approx. 66.1 lbs. or less / Approx. 30 kg or less
11-28
Appendix > Specifications
4,000-sheet Finisher (Option)
Item
Description
Number of Trays
3 trays
Paper Size
A3, B4, B5-R, Ledger, Legal, 12 × 18", 8K, 13 × 19": 1,500 sheets
(80 g/m2)
Tray A
(NonStapling)
A4, A4-R, B5, Letter, Letter-R, 16K, 16K-R, Folio,
Custom (98 × 148 mm to 297 × 432 mm): 4,000 sheets*
A5-R, B6, Statement-R: 500 sheets
Stapling
Tray B
A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5, A5-R, Folio, Ledger, Legal, 12 × 18", 8K, Letter,
13 × 19", Letter-R, Statement-R, 16K, 16K-R,
Custom (98 × 148 mm to 297 × 432 mm): 200 sheets
Tray C
A4, B5, B5 (ISO), B5-R, B6-R, A5-R, A6-R, Letter, Statement-R, 16K,
Cardstock, Oufuku hagaki, Custom (98 × 148 mm to 297 × 432 mm)
: 100 sheets
Maximum
Number
A3, B4, B5-R, Ledger, Legal,
Oficio II, 12 × 18",
216 × 340 mm, Folio, 8K,
16K-R
30 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2)
A4, A4-R, B5, Letter,
Letter-R, 16K
65 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2)
30 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)
2 cover sheet only (106 g/m2 to 256 g/m2)
55 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)
2 cover sheet only (106 g/m2 to 256 g/m2)
Media
types
*
Plain, Recycled, Prepunched, Preprinted, Bond, Letterhead, Color, Coated,
Thick, High Quality, Rough, Vellum, Transparency, Labels, Envelope,
Cardstock, Custom 1 to 8
Dimensions
23 29/32 × 26 5/16 × 41 25/32"
(W) × (D) × (H)
607.2 × 668.5 × 1,061.3 mm
Weight
Approx. 88.2 lbs or less / Approx. 40 kg or less
When the Folding Unit is installed, 3000 sheets.
Hole Punch Unit (Option)
Item
Paper Size
Description
2 Hole
A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R, Letter-R, Legal, 12 × 18", Statement, Folio,
8K, 16K, 16K-R
3 Hole,
4 Hole
A3, A4, Letter, Ledger, 12 × 18", 8K, 16K
Paper Weight
45 - 300 g/m2
Media types
4,000-sheet Finisher
Plain, Transparency, Preprinted, Bond,
Recycled, Rough, Letterhead, Color (Colour),
Prepunched, Thick, Coated, High Quality
1,000-sheet Finisher
Plain, Transparency, Preprinted, Bond,
Recycled, Rough, Letterhead, Color (Colour),
Prepunched, Thick, Coated, High Quality
11-29
Appendix > Specifications
Mailbox (Option)
Item
Description
Number of Trays
7 trays
Paper Size
A3, B4, Ledger, Legal: 50 sheets
(80 g/m2)
A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Foolscap, Letter, Letter-R, 216 × 340 mm, Executive,
Executive-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R, Statement-R, Oficio II: 100 sheets
Dimensions
20 1/16 × 15 3/4 × 18 1/2"
(W) × (D) × (H)
510 mm × 400 mm × 470 mm
Weight
Approx. 22 lbs. / Approx. 10 kg
Center-Folding Unit (Option)
Item
Sizes
Number of Sheets
Description
Bi-Fold
A3, B4, A4-R, Ledger, Legal, Letter-R, Oficio II, 8K
Saddle Stitch
A3, B4, A4-R, Ledger, Legal, Letter-R, Oficio II, 8K
Tri-Fold
A4-R, Letter-R
Bi-Fold
5 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)
3 sheets (91 to 120 g/m2)
1 sheet (121 to 256 g/m2)
Saddle Stitch
16 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)
13 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)
1 cover sheet only (106 g/m2 or heavier)
Tri-Fold
5 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)
3 sheets (91 to 120 g/m2)
Maximum Number for
Storage
Bi-Fold
5 sheets or less per set: 30 sets or more
6 to 10 sheets per set: 20 sets or more
(80 g/m2)
11 to 16 sheets per set: 10 sets or more.
Saddle Stitch
5 sheets or less per set: 30 sets or more
6 to 10 sheets per set: 20 sets or more
11 to 16 sheets per set: 10 sets or more.
Tri-Fold
1 sheet per set: 30 sets or more
2 to 5 sheets per set: 5 sets or more
Media types
Bi-Fold
Plain, Recycled, Thick, Coated
Saddle Stitch
Plain, Recycled, Thick, Coated
Tri-Fold
Plain, Recycled, Thick
11-30
Appendix > Specifications
Inner Job Separator (Option)
Item
Description
Number of Trays
1 tray
Maximum Sheets
30 sheets (80 g/m2)
Paper Size
A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Folio, Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R,
Executive, Executive-R, Foolscap, Oficio II, Statement-R, 8K, 16K, 16K-R,
216 × 340 mm
Paper Type
Paper weight: 60 - 256 g/m2
Paper type: Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Rough, Recycled, Letterhead,
Color (Colour), Prepunched, Coated, Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
Dimensions
17 7/16 × 15 7/16 × 4 1/64"
(W) × (D) × (H)
443 × 392 × 102 mm
Weight
1.76 lbs. / 0.8 kg
Inner Job Separator (JS-732) (Option)
Item
Description
Number of Trays
1 tray
Maximum Sheets
100 sheets (80 g/m2)
Paper Size
A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Folio, Ledger, Foolscap, Legal, Letter,
Letter-R, Executive, Executive-R, Oficio II, Statement-R, 8K, 16K, 16K-R,
216×340 mm
Paper Type
Paper weight: 60 - 256 g/m2
Paper type: Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Rough, Recycled, Letterhead,
Color (Colour), Prepunched, Coated, Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
Dimensions
18 1/2 × 17 43/64 × 4 1/64"
(W) × (D) × (H)
470 × 449 × 102 mm
Weight
Approx. 4.63 lbs. / Approx. 2.1 kg
11-31
Appendix > Specifications
Right Job Separator (Option)
Item
Description
Number of Trays
1 tray
Maximum Sheets
A4, A4-R, B5, Letter, Letter-R, B5-R, A5-R, Executive, Executive-R,
Statement-R, 16K, 16K-R: 70 sheets (80 g/m2)
A3, B4, Folio, Ledger, Legal, Foolscap, Oficio II, 8K, 216 × 340 mm:
30 sheets (80 g/m2)
Paper Size
A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Folio, Ledger, Foolscap, Legal, Letter,
Letter-R, Executive, Executive-R, Oficio II, Statement-R, 8K, 16K, 16K-R,
216 × 340 mm
Paper Type
Paper weight: 60 - 256 g/m2
Paper type: Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Rough, Recycled, Letterhead,
Color (Colour), Prepunched, Coated, Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
Dimensions
14 27/32 × 17 13/32 × 5 29/32"
(W) × (D) × (H)
377 × 442 × 150 mm
Weight
5.1 lbs. / 2.3 kg
Banner Tray (Option)
Item
Description
Max. number of sheets
10 sheets (Multi Purpose tray)
Paper length
210 (8.26") to 304.8 (12") mm
Paper weight
Max. 1220.0 (48 1/64") mm
Paper Type
Paper weight: 136 to 163 g/m2
Paper type: Heavy 2
Dimensions
9 27/32 × 14 23/32 × 5 63/64"
(W) × (D) × (H)
250 × 374 × 152 mm
Weight
Approx. 0.78 lbs. / Approx. 0.352 kg
NOTE
Consult your dealer or service representative for recommended paper types.
11-32
Appendix > Glossary
Glossary
Accessibility
The machine is designed featuring good accessibility even for the elderly and those who are physically challenged or
visually impaired. Touch panel characters can be enlarged while the touch panel is adjustable in two angles.
AppleTalk
AppleTalk, which comes with Apple Computer's Mac OS, is a network protocol. AppleTalk enables file/printer sharing
and also enables you to utilize application software that is on another computer on the same AppleTalk network.
Auto Form Feed Timeout
During data transmission, the machine may sometimes have to wait until receiving the next data. This is the auto form
feed timeout. When the preset timeout passes, the machine automatically prints output. However, no output is
performed if the last page has no data to be printed.
Auto-IP
Auto-IP is a module that enables dynamic IPv4 addresses to be assigned to a device on startup. However, DHCP
requires a DHCP server. Auto-IP is a server-less method of choosing an IP address. IP addresses between 169.254.0.0
to 169.254.255.255 are reserved for Auto-IP and assigned automatically.
Auto Paper Selection
A function to automatically select paper in the same size as originals when printing
Auto Sleep
A mode designed for electrical power saving, activated when the machine is left unused or there is no data transfer for a
specific period. In Sleep mode, power consumption is kept to a minimum.
Bonjour
Bonjour, also known as zero-configuration networking, is a service that automatically detects computers, devices and
services on an IP network. Bonjour, because an industry-standard IP protocol is used, allows devices to automatically
recognize each other without an IP address being specified or DNS server being set. Bonjour also sends and receives
network packets by UDP port 5353. If a firewall is enabled, the user must check that UDP port 5353 is left open so that
Bonjour will run correctly. Some firewalls are set up so as to reject only certain Bonjour packets. If Bonjour does not run
stably, check the firewall settings and ensure that Bonjour is registered on the exceptions list and that Bonjour packets
are accepted. If you install Bonjour on Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later, the Windows firewall will be set up correctly
for Bonjour.
Default Gateway
This indicates the device, such as a computer or router, that serves as the entrance/exit (gateway) for accessing
computers outside the network that you are on. When no specific gateway is designated for a destination IP address,
data is sent to the host designated as the Default Gateway.
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) that automatically resolves IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateway
addresses on a TCP/IP network. DHCP minimizes the load of network management employing a large number of client
computers because it relieves individual clients including printers from the IP address being assigned.
11-33
Appendix > Glossary
DHCP (IPv6)
DHCP (IPv6) is the next-generation of the Internet's Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol and supports IPv6. It extends
the BOOTP startup protocol that defines the protocols used for transferring configuration information to hosts on the
network. DHCP (IPv6) permits the DHCP server to use its expanded functionality to send configuration parameters to an
IPv6 node. Because the network addresses that can be used are allocated automatically, the IPv6 node management
workload is reduced in systems where the administrator has to exercise close control over IP address allocation.
dpi (dots per inch)
A unit for resolution, representing the number of dots printed per inch (25.4 mm).
EcoPrint Mode
A printing mode that helps save toner. Copies made in this mode are thus lighter than normal.
Emulation
The function to interpret and execute other printers' page description languages. The machine emulates operation of
PCL6, KPDL3 (PostScript 3 compatible).
FTP (File Transfer Protocol)
A protocol to transfer files on the TCP/IP network, whether the Internet or an intranet. Along with HTTP and SMTP/POP,
FTP is now frequently used on the Internet.
Grayscale
A computer color expression. Displayed images of this sort are typically composed of shades of gray, varying from black
at the weakest intensity to white at the strongest, without any other colors. Gray levels are displayed in numerical levels:
that is, white and black only for 1 bit; 256 gray levels (including white and black) for 8 bits; and 65,536 gray levels for 16
bits.
Help
A [Help] key is provided on this machine's operation panel. If you are unsure of how to operate the machine, would like
more information on its functions or are having problems getting the machine to work properly, press the [Help] key to
view a detailed explanation on the touch panel.
IP Address
An Internet protocol address is a unique number that represents a specific computer or related device on the network.
The format of an IP address is four sets of numbers separated by dots, e.g. 192.168.110.171. Each number should be
between 0 and 255.
IPP
IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) is a standard that uses TCP/IP networks such as the Internet to enable print jobs to be
sent between remote computers and printers. IPP is an extension of the HTTP protocol used to view websites and
enables printing to be carried out via routers on printers in remote locations. It also supports the HTTP authentication
mechanisms along with SSL server and client authentication as well as encryption.
KPDL (Kyocera Page Description Language)
Kyocera's PostScript page description language compatible with Adobe PostScript Level 3.
11-34
Appendix > Glossary
Multi Purpose (MP) Tray
The paper supply tray on the right side of the machine. Use this tray instead of the cassettes when printing onto
envelopes, Hagaki, transparencies, or labels.
NetBEUI (NetBIOS Extended User Interface)
An interface, developed by IBM in 1985, as an update from NetBIOS. It enables more advanced functions on smaller
networks than other protocols such as TCP/IP, etc. It is not suitable for larger networks due to lack of routing capabilities
to choose the most appropriate routes. NetBEUI has been adopted by IBM for its OS/2 and Microsoft for its Windows as
a standard protocol for file sharing and printing services.
NetWare
Novell's network management software that is able to run on a variety of operating systems.
PDF/A
This is "ISO 19005-1. Document management - Electronic document file format for long-term preservation - Part 1: Use
of PDF (PDF/A)", and is a file format based on PDF 1.4. It has been standardized as ISO 19005-1, and is a
specialization of PDF, which has been mainly used for printing, for long-term storage. A new part, ISO 19005-2 (PDF/A2), is currently being prepared.
POP3 (Post Office Protocol 3)
A standard protocol to receive E-mail from the server in which the mail is stored on the Internet or an intranet.
PostScript
A page description language developed by Adobe Systems. It enables flexible font functions and highly-functional
graphics, allowing higher quality printing. The first version called Level 1 was launched in 1985, followed by Level 2 that
enabled color printing and two-byte languages (e.g. Japanese) in 1990. In 1996, Level 3 was released as an update for
the Internet access and PDF format as well as gradual improvements in implementation technologies.
PPM (prints per minute)
This indicates the number of A4 size printouts made in one minute.
Printer Driver
The software to enable you to print data created on any application software. The printer driver for the machine is
contained in the DVD enclosed in the package. Install the printer driver on the computer connected to the machine.
RA(Stateless)
The IPv6 router communicates (transmits) information such as the global address prefix using ICMPv6. This information
is the Router Advertisement (RA). ICMPv6 stands for Internet Control Message Protocol, and is a IPv6 standard defined
in the RFC 2463 "Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMPv6) for the Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) Specification".
Send as E-mail
A function to send the image data stored in the machine as an E-mail attachment. E-mail addresses can be selected
from the list or entered at each time.
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
A protocol for E-mail transmission over the Internet or an intranet. It is used for transferring mail between mail servers as
well as for sending mail from clients to their servers.
11-35
Appendix > Glossary
Status Page
The page lists machine conditions, such as the memory capacity, total number of prints and scans, and paper source
settings.
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask is a way of augmenting the network address section of an IP address. A subnet mask represents all
network address sections as 1 and all host address sections as 0. The number of bits in the prefix indicates the length of
the network address. The term "prefix" refers to something added to the beginning and, in this context, indicates the first
section of the IP address. When an IP address is written, the length of the network address is indicated by the prefix
length after a forward slash (/). For example, "24" in the address "133.210.2.0/24". In this way, "133.210.2.0/24" denotes
the IP address "133.210.2.0" with a 24-bit prefix (network section). This new network address section (originally part of
the host address) made possible by the subnet mask is referred to as the subnet address. When you enter the subnet
mask, be sure to set the "DHCP" setting to "Off".
TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol)
TCP/IP is a suite of protocols designed to define the way computers and other devices communicate with each other
over a network.
TCP/IP (IPv6)
TCP/IP (IPv6) is based on the current Internet protocol, TCP/IP (IPv4). IPv6 is the next-generation Internet protocol and
expands the available address space, which resolves the problem of the lack of addresses under IPv4, while also
introducing other improvements such as additional security functionality and the capacity to prioritize data transmission.
TWAIN (Technology Without An Interesting Name)
A technical specification for connecting scanners, digital cameras, and other image equipment to computers. The
TWAIN compatible devices enable you to process image data on any relevant application software. TWAIN is adopted
on a large amount of graphic software (e.g. Adobe Photoshop) and OCR software.
USB (Universal Serial Bus) 2.0
A USB interface standard for Hi-Speed USB 2.0. The maximum transfer rate is 480 Mbps. This machine is equipped
with USB 2.0 for high-speed data transfer.
WIA (Windows Imaging Acquisition)
A function to import images supported after Windows Me/XP from digital cameras and other peripheral devices. This
function replaces what TWAIN used to do. The feature is provided as a part of Windows functions and improves ease of
operation, so that you import images directly to My Computer without using any application.
11-36
Index
(Paper Width Guide) Lock 2-3
Numerics
1,000-sheet Finisher 11-4
2-sided/Book Original 6-57
4,000-sheet Finisher 11-4
A
Accessibility 11-33
Accessibility Functions 3-13
Adding a Destination 3-45
Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle 3-3
Adjustment/Maintenance
Auto Color Correction 8-58
Background Density Adj. 8-57
Calibration 8-59, 10-38
Color Calibration Cycle 8-58
Correct Paper Curl 8-59
Correcting Black Lines 8-57
Density Adjustment 8-57
Developer Refresh 8-58, 10-38
Display Brightness 8-57
Drum Refresh1 8-58
Drum Refresh2 8-58
Memory Diagnostics 8-57
Silent Mode 8-57
System Initialization 8-57
Tone Curve Adjustment 8-58, 10-36
Apache License (Version 2.0) 1-13
AppleTalk 11-33
Settings 8-47
Auto Form Feed Timeout 11-33
Auto Image Rotation
Default 8-18
Auto Low Power Mode 3-14
Auto Paper Selection 11-33
Auto Sleep 3-15, 11-33
Auto-IP
Settings 8-43
Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function 1-16
B
Background Density Adj. 6-25, 8-57
Default 8-17
Banner printing 4-7
Banner Tray 11-6
Bates Stamp 6-50
Bonjour 11-33
Settings 2-27, 8-44
Booklet
Binding Left 6-36
Binding Right 6-36
Binding Top 6-36
Border Erase 6-34
C
Calibration 10-38
Canceling Jobs 5-18
Cassette
Paper Size and Media 8-7
Loading Paper 3-18
Cassette 1 2-2
Cassette 2 2-2
Cassette 3 to 5 2-5
Cassette 5
Paper Jams 10-62
Cassette Settings 3-30
Cassette/MP Tray Settings 8-7
Center-Folding Unit
Paper Jams 10-60
Centering 6-33
Character Entry Method 11-10
Checking the Counter 2-30
Cleaning
Conveying Guide 10-4
Dual scanning area 10-3
Platen Cover / Glass Platen 10-2
Separator 10-5
Slit Glass 10-3
Cleaning Brush 2-4
Cleaning Cloth Compartment 2-2
Clip Holder 2-3
Coated Paper 11-21
Collate/Offset 6-18
Default 8-18
Color Selection
Default 8-17
Combine 6-31
Common Settings 8-9
Customize Status Display 8-26
Default Screen 8-9
Display Status/Log 8-25
Error Handling 8-14
Function Defaults 8-17
Function Key Usage 8-26
Keyboard Layout 8-10
Language 8-9
Low Toner Alert Level 8-25
Manual Staple 8-24
Measurement 8-14
Message Banner Print 8-25
Message Board Settings 8-27
Offset Documents by Job 8-24
Offset One Page Documents 8-24
Orientation Confirmation 8-16
Original/Paper Settings 8-10
Paper Output 8-16
Remote Printing 8-27
Sound 8-9
System Stamp 8-20
USB Keyboard Type 8-20
Index-1
Connecting
LAN Cable 2-8
Power Cable 2-9
USB cable 2-9
Connecting Power Cable 2-9
Connection Method 2-6
Continuous Scan
Default 8-18
Conventions Used in This Guide xi
Conveyor Guide
Cleaning 10-4
Copy 5-20, 11-6
Copy Speed 11-24
Copying Settings
Auto % Priority 8-28
Auto Image Rotation Action 8-28
Auto Paper Selection 8-28
Paper Selection 8-28
Preset Limit 8-28
Quick Setup Registration 8-29
Reserve Next Priority 8-29
Counting the Number of Pages Printed
Count by Paper Size 9-37
Counter 2-30
Each Job Accounting 9-39
Print Accounting Report 9-31
Total Job Accounting 9-38
Unknown ID Job 9-41
Cover 6-42
Custom Box
Creating a New Box 5-52
Delete 5-63
Edit 5-59
Printing Documents 5-56
Send 5-57
Storing Documents 5-55
D
Daily Maintenance
Replacing Staples 10-12
Toner Container Replacement 10-6
Waste Toner Box Replacement 10-9
Data Sanitization 8-50
Data Security 8-50
Data Security Kit 11-7
Date/Timer/Energy Saver 8-54
Auto Error Clear 8-54
Auto Panel Reset 8-54
Auto Sleep 8-54
Date Format 8-54
Date/Time 8-54
EnergySaver RecoveryLevel 8-56
Error Clear Timer 8-55
Error Job Skip 8-55
Interrupt Clear Timer 8-55
Low Power Timer 8-55
Panel Reset Timer 8-55
Sleep Level 8-55
Sleep Timer 8-55
Time Zone 8-54
Unusable Time 8-55
Weekly Timer Settings 8-56
Default
Auto Image Rotation (Copy) 8-18
Auto Image Rotation (OCR) 8-19
Backgrnd Density (Copy) 8-17
BackgrndDens.(Send/Store) 8-17
Border Erase Default 8-17
Border Erase to Back Page 8-17
Collate/Offset 8-18
Color Selection 8-17
Color TIFF Compression 8-18
Cont. Scan (Except FAX) 8-18
Continuous Scan 8-18
Continuous Scan (FAX) 8-18
DP Read Action 8-19
EcoPrint 8-18
E-mail Subject/Body 8-19
FAX TX Resolution 8-17
File Format 8-17
File Name Entry 8-18
File Separation 8-17
High Comp. PDF Image 8-18
i-FAX Subject/Body 8-19
Image Quality (File Format) 8-18
JPEG/TIFF Print 8-18
Margin 8-18
OCR Text Recognition 8-19
Org. Image (Send/Store) 8-17
Original Image (Copy) 8-17
Original Orientation 8-17
PDF/A 8-18
Prevent Bleed(Send/Store) 8-17
Prevent Bleed-thru (Copy) 8-17
Primary OCR Language 8-19
Repeat Copy 8-20
Scan Resolution 8-17
Skip Blank Page 8-20
Toner Save Level (EcoPrint) 8-18
XPS Fit to Page 8-18
Zoom 8-17
Default Gateway 11-33
Settings 8-43
Default Screen 8-9
Delete after Printed 6-64
Index-2
Delete after Transmitted 6-64
Density 6-22
Density Adjustment 8-57
Destination
Address Book 5-26
Address Book Type 8-53
Check before Send 8-29
Checking and Editing 5-34
Confirmation Screen of Destinations 5-35
Entering a New E-mail Address 5-29
Entry Check for New Dest. 8-29
Multi Sending 5-36
Narrow Down 8-53
Search 5-27
Sort 8-53
Specifying a New PC Folder 5-31
Speed Dial 5-29
Device
Canceling FAX Communication 7-19
USB Memory 4-2, 7-18
DHCP 11-33
Settings 8-43
DHCP (IPv6) 11-34
Settings 8-44
Disposing of the Punch Waste
1,000-sheet Finisher 10-16
4,000-sheet Finisher 10-17
Document Box/Removable Memory
Custom Box 8-34
Job Box 8-34
Quick Setup Registration 8-34
Document Finisher 2-5
Document Processor 2-2, 11-4, 11-26
Part Names 2-2
Document processor
How to Load Originals 5-3
Loading Originals 5-3
Originals Not Supported by the Document
Processor 5-3
Originals Supported by the Document
Processor 5-3
Document Table 11-7
DP Read Action 6-56
dpi 11-34
DSM Scan
Protocol Settings 8-45
Duplex 6-39
E
EcoPrint
Default 8-18
Printer 8-35
EcoPrint Mode 11-34
Edit Destination
Address Book 8-53
Address Book Defaults 8-53
Contact 3-45
Group 3-50
One Touch Key 3-53, 8-53
Print list 8-53
E-mail
E-mail Subject/Body 6-62
Send to Folder (FTP) 5-23
Send to Folder (SMB) 5-23
E-mail Subject/Body
Default 8-19
Embedded Web Server RX 2-33
Emptying the Punch Waste Box (Option)
1,000-sheet Finisher (Option) 10-16, 10-17
Emulation 11-34
Selection 8-35
Emulation Upgrade Kit 11-7
Encrypted PDF Password 6-65
Energy Saver Recovery Level 3-14, 3-15, 8-56
Energy Saving Control Function 1-16
Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program 1-17
Enhanced WSD
Protocol Settings 8-46
Enhanced WSD over SSL
Protocol Settings 8-46
Enlarged Display 3-13
Enter key 3-11
Entry
File Name 6-54
Subject 6-62
Environment 1-3
Error Handling 8-14
F
FAX 8-35
FAX Expansion Memory 11-6
FAX Kit 11-6
File
Format 6-59
PDF 6-61
Separation 6-62
File Format
Default 8-17
File Name Entry 6-54
Default 8-18
File Separation 6-62
Default 8-17
File Size Confirmation 6-64
First Copy Time 11-24
First Print Time 11-25
Fixing unit 10-51
FMU Connection 5-45
Fold 6-17
Folding Unit 2-5, 11-4
Form Overlay
Storing a Form 5-65
Front Cover 2-2, 2-5
FTP 11-34
G
Gigabit Ethernet Board 11-6
Glossary 11-33
GPL/LGPL 1-11
Grayscale 11-34
Index-3
Group Authorization Set. 9-15
Group Authorization 9-15
Group List 9-16
Guest Authorization Set. 9-18
Guest Authorization 9-18
Guest Property 9-18
Guides Provided with the Machine
H
Handle 2-2
Hard Disk Initialization 8-50
Help 11-34
Home 8-28
Customize Desktop 3-5
Customize Taskbar 3-5
Wallpaper 3-5
Home Screen 3-4
Host Name 8-43
HTTP
Protocol Settings 8-46
HTTPS
Protocol Settings 8-46
I
Image Repeat 6-47
Inner Job Separator 11-5
Inner Job Separator (JS-732) 11-5
Inner Tray 2-2
Install
Macintosh 2-17
Software 2-13
Windows 2-14
Internet
Proxy 8-47
Internet Browser
Instructions for use 5-16
Internet Fax Kit 11-7
Interrupt Copy 5-22
IP Address 11-34
Settings 8-43
IPP 11-34
Protocol Settings 8-45
IPP over SSL
Protocol Settings 8-45
IPSec
Settings 8-44
J
Job
ix
Available Status 7-2
Canceling 7-14
Checking History 7-11
Checking Status 7-2
Detailed Information 7-9
Detailed Information of Histories 7-13
Details of the Status Screens 7-4
Displaying History Screen 7-12
Displaying Status Screens 7-3
Pause and Resumption 7-14
Priority Override for Waiting Jobs 7-15
Reordering 7-16
Sending the Log History 7-13
Job Account Settings
Adding an Account 9-32
Counting the Number of Pages Printed 9-38
Default Setting 9-36
Enabling/Disabling 9-29
Login 9-29
Logout 9-30
Managing Accounts 9-33
Print Accounting Report 9-31
Restricting the Use of the Machine 9-34
Job Accounting Settings
Counting the Number of Pages Printed 9-27
Job Box
Deletion of Job Retention 8-34
Form for Form Overlay 5-65
Form Overlay 5-65
Private Print/Stored Job 4-14
Quick Copy Job Retention 8-34
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold 4-16
Repeat Copy Job Retention 8-34
JPEG/TIFF Print
Default 8-18
K
Key Counter 11-7
KIR 8-36
Knopflerfish License 1-13
KPDL 11-34
L
Label 11-19
LAN Cable 2-7
Connecting 2-8
LAN Interface 8-46
Language 8-9
Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet x 2) 11-4
LDAP
Protocol Settings 8-46
Legal Information 1-10
Legal Restriction on Copying 1-9
Legal Restriction on Scanning 1-9
Limitations 8-52
Loading Originals
Loading Originals in the Document Processor 5-3
Placing Originals on the Platen 5-2
Index-4
Local Authorization 9-15
Combine Restriction 9-16
Copy Restriction 9-16
Duplex Restriction 9-16
EcoPrint Restriction 9-16
FAX TX Restriction 9-16
Print Restriction 9-16
Send Restriction 9-16
Storing Restr. in Box 9-16
Storing Restr. in Memory 9-16
Login 2-21
Logout 2-22
Low Power Mode 3-14
LPD
Protocol Settings 8-45
M
Mailbox 2-5, 11-4
Main Power Switch 2-2
Management 9-1
Manual Setting (IPv6) 8-44
Manual Staple 5-72
Margin 6-33
Default 8-18
Margin/Centering 6-33
Measurement 8-14
Media Type Setting 8-10
Memo Page 6-46
Memory Diagnostics 8-57
Mirror Image 6-53
Mixed Size Originals
Combinations 6-14
Copy Size 6-15
Mixed Size Stapling 6-20
Monotype Imaging License Agreement 1-12
Multi Purpose Tray 2-3
Paper Size and Media Type 3-33
Multi Sending 5-36
N
Negative Image 6-53
NetBEUI 11-35
Protocol Settings 8-45
NetWare 11-35
Settings 8-47
Network
Preparation 2-25
Settings 8-43
Network Cable 2-7
Network Interface 2-7
Network Interface (Send) 8-49
Network Interface Connector 2-4
Network Interface Kit 11-6
New E-mail Address 5-29
New PC Folder 5-31
O
One Touch Key
Deleting the Registered Information 3-54
Editing 3-54
One Touch keys
Changing the Registered Information 3-54
OpenSSL License 1-11
Operation Panel 2-2
Option
1,000-sheet Finisher 11-4
4,000-sheet Finisher 11-4
Banner Tray 11-6
Card Authentication Kit 11-6
Data Security Kit 11-7
Document Processor 11-4
Document Table 11-7
Emulation Upgrade Kit 11-7
FAX Expansion Memory 11-6
Folding Unit 11-4
Inner Job Separator 11-5
Inner Job Separator (JS-732) 11-5
Internet Fax Kit 11-7
Key Counter 11-7
Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet x 2) 11-4
Mailbox 11-4
Network Interface Kit 11-6
OCR Scan Activation Kit 11-7
Overview 11-2
Paper Feeder (500-sheet x2) 11-4
Printed Document Guard Kit 11-6
Right Job Separator 11-6
Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) 11-6
ThinPrint Option 11-7
USB Keyboard 11-7
Wireless Network Interface Kit 11-6
Option Interface 2-4
Optional Function 8-52
Optional Network
Basic 8-47
Wireless Network 8-48
Original
Automatic Detection 8-11
Custom 8-10
Settings 8-10
Size 1-xiv
Original eject table 2-2
Original Image 6-23
Default 8-17
Original Loaded Indicator 2-2
Original Orientation
Default 8-17
Orientation Confirmation 8-16
Original Preview 3-9
Original Size 6-11
Original Size Indicator Plates 2-2
Original SSLeay License 1-11
Original stopper 2-2
Original Table 2-2
Original Width Guides 2-2
Index-5
P
Page # 6-44
Paper
Checking the Remaining Amount of Paper 7-20
Appropriate Paper 11-14
Cassette 8-7
Custom Paper Size 8-10
Default Paper Source 8-11
Index Tab Dividers 3-29
Loading Envelopes 3-28
Loading Paper 3-16
Loading Paper in the Cassettes 3-18
Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray 3-26
Media Type Setting 8-10
MP Tray 8-8
Paper Source for Cover 8-12
Size and Media 8-7, 11-13
Size and Media Type 3-30
Special Paper 11-17
Special Paper Action 8-12
Specifications 11-13
Weight 8-13
Paper Before Loading 3-17
Paper Feeder (500-sheet x2) 11-4
Paper Jams 10-39
1,000-sheet Finisher 10-55
4,000-sheet Finisher 10-56
Bridge Unit 10-54
Cassette 1 10-41
Cassette 2 10-42
Cassette 5 10-62
Cassettes 3 and 4 10-43
Center-Folding Unit 10-60
Document Processor 10-52
Duplex unit 10-48
Fixing unit 10-51
Inside the Right Covers 1, 3 and 4 10-47
Jam Location Indicators 10-39
Mailbox 10-59
Multi Purpose Tray 10-46
Optional Job Separator 10-53
Paper Length Guide 2-3
Paper Output 6-22, 8-16
Paper stopper 2-2
Paper Width Adjusting Tab 2-3
Paper Width Guides 2-3, 3-19
Part Names 2-1
PDF/A 11-35
Platen 2-2
Platen Cover 2-5
POP3 11-35
POP3 (E-mail RX)
Protocol Settings 8-45
PostScript 11-35
Power Cable:Connecting 2-9
Power Management 1-16
Power Off 2-11
PPM 11-35
Precautions for Use 1-4
Preparing Cables 2-7
Prevent Bleed-thru
Default 8-17
Print Report
Font List 8-37
Network Status 8-37
Optional Network Status 8-38
Service Status 8-38
Status Page 8-37
Print Settings 4-5
Printed Document Guard Kit 11-6
Printer 8-35
Banner printing 4-7
Copies 8-35
CR Action 8-36
Duplex 8-35
EcoPrint 8-35
Emulation 8-35
Form Feed Timeout 8-36
Job Name 8-36
KIR 8-36
LF Action 8-36
Orientation 8-36
Override A4/Letter 8-35
Paper Feed Mode 8-36
Toner Save Level (EcoPrint) 8-35
User Name 8-36
Printer Driver 11-35
Help 4-6
Printing
Print setting 4-5
Printing from PC 4-2
Printing from PC 4-2
Printing Speed 11-25
Priority Override 6-55, 7-15
Product Library ix
Program 5-6
Editing and Deleting 5-9
Recalling 5-7
Registering 5-7
Punch 6-20
Q
Quick No. Search key 3-11
Quick Setup Registration 8-29, 8-34
Quick Setup Wizard 2-28
R
RA (Stateless) 11-35
Settings 8-44
Recycled Paper 11-21
Regarding Trade Names 1-10
Regular Maintenance 10-2
Disposing of the Punch Waste 10-16
Replacing Staples 10-12
Toner Container Replacement 10-6
Waste Toner Box Replacement 10-9
Release Button 2-4
Remaining amount of toner 7-20
Index-6
Repeat Copy
Default 8-20
Printing 6-55
Repeat Copy Job Retention 8-34
Replacing Staples
1,000-sheet Finisher 10-12
4,000-sheet Finisher 10-13
Report
Admin Report Settings 8-38
Device Log History Settings 8-41
Login History Settings 8-40
Print Report 8-37
Result Report Settings 8-38
Secure Comm. Error Log 8-42
Sending Log History 8-39
Reserve Next 5-21
Reserved copy 5-21
Resolution 6-62, 11-24, 11-25
Responding to Messages 10-23
Restart Entire Device 8-52
Restart Network 8-46
Right Cover 1 Lever 2-3
Right Cover 2 2-3
Right Cover 2 Lever 2-3
Right Cover 3 Lever 2-3
Right Job Separator 11-6
S
Safety Conventions 1-2
Safety Conventions in This Guide 1-2
Scan Resolution
Default 8-17
Security Level 8-49
Send 8-29
Send and Forward
File format 8-31
PDF Encryption Functions 8-32
Send and Print 6-63
Printing 6-63
Storing 6-63
Send and Store 6-63
Send Result Report 8-38
Send Settings
Color Type 8-29
Default Screen 8-29
Dest. Check before Send 8-29
Entry Check for New Dest. 8-29
HighCompressionPDF Mode 8-30
New Destination Entry 8-30
OCR Text Recognition Act. 8-30
Quick Setup Registration 8-29
Recall Destination 8-30
Send and Forward 8-30
Send to Folder (FTP) 5-23
Send to Folder (SMB) 5-23
Sending
Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC 3-35
Separator
Cleaning 10-5
Serial Number 5-5
Setting Date and Time 2-23
Setting TWAIN Driver 2-19
Sharpness 6-25
Shortcuts
Adding 5-14
Editing and Deleting Shortcuts 5-15
Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) 11-6
Simple Login 2-22
Simple Login Settings
Simple Login 9-23
Simple Login Key 9-23
Skip Blank Page 6-56
Sleep 3-15
Slit Glass 2-2
Slit Glass/Dual scanning area 10-3
SMB Client (Transmission)
Protocol Settings 8-45
SMTP 11-35
SMTP (E-mail TX)
Protocol Settings 8-45
SNMPv1/v2c
Protocol Settings 8-46
SNMPv3
Protocol Settings 8-46
Solving Malfunctions 10-18
Specifications 11-22
1,000-sheet Finisher 11-28
4,000-sheet Finisher 11-29
Banner Tray 11-32
Center-Folding Unit 11-30
Common functions 11-22
Document Processor 11-26
Hole Punch Unit 11-29
Inner Job Separator 11-31
Inner Job Separator (JS-732) 11-31
Large Capacity Feeder 11-27
Mailbox 11-30
Paper Feeder (500-sheet x 2) 11-26
Printer functions 11-25
Right Job Separator 11-32
Scanner functions 11-25
Specifying Destination 5-26
SSL 8-46
Staple 6-19
Staple Jam 10-63
1,000-sheet Finisher 10-63
4,000-sheet Finisher 10-64
Staple/Punch 6-19
Status Page 11-36
Status/Job Cancel 7-1
Storing Size 6-65
Subnet Mask 11-36
Settings 8-43
Supplies
Checking the Remaining Amount 7-20
Support Tray Section of the Multi Purpose Tray 2-3
Symbols 1-2
System Initialization 8-57
Index-7
System Menu 8-2
Adjustment/Maintenance 8-57
Application 8-60
Cassette/MP Tray Settings 8-7
Common Settings 8-9
Copy 8-28
Date/Timer/Energy Saver 8-54
Document Box/Removable Memory 8-34
Edit Destination 8-53
FAX 8-35
Home 3-4
Internet 8-60
Printer 8-35
Quick Setup Wizard 2-28
Report 8-37
Send 8-29
System/Network 8-43
User Login/Job Accounting 8-53
User Property 8-54
System/Network 8-43
Data Security 8-50
Document Guard 8-51
Interface Block Setting 8-50
Network 8-43
Network Interface (Send) 8-49
Optional Function 8-52
Optional Network 8-47
Restart Entire Device 8-52
Security Level 8-49
T
TCP/IP 11-36
Settings 8-43
TCP/IP (IPv4)
Settings 8-43
Setup 2-25
TCP/IP (IPv6) 11-34
Settings 8-44
Thin Print over SSL
Protocol Settings 8-45
ThinPrint
Protocol Settings 8-45
ThinPrint Option 11-7
Tone Curve Adjustment 8-58, 10-36
Toner Container (Black) 2-4
Toner Container Release Lever 2-4
Toner Container Replacement 10-6
Touch Panel 3-4
TWAIN 11-36
Scanning using TWAIN 5-41
USB Memory
Printing 5-67
Remove 5-71
Save 5-69
USB Port (A1) 2-2
USB Port (A2) 2-4
User Login Setting 9-2
Adding a User 9-8
Changing User Properties 9-11
Group Authorization Set. 9-15
Guest Authorization Set. 9-18
Local Authentication 9-15
Local User List 9-8
Obtain NW User Property 9-21
Simple Login Settings 9-23
User Login/Job Accounting
Job Accounting Setting 9-27
Unknown ID Job 9-41
User Login Setting 9-2
User Property 8-54
W
Waste Toner Box Status 2-4
Waste Toner Tray 2-4
White space 6-46
WIA 11-36
Setting WIA Driver 2-20
Wireless Network Interface Kit 11-6
WSD Print
Protocol Settings 8-45
WSD Scan
Protocol Settings 8-45
X
XPS Fit to Page
Default 8-18
Z
Zoom 6-27
Default 8-17
U
USB 11-36
USB cable
Connecting 2-9
USB Interface 2-7
USB Interface Connector (B1) 2-4
USB Keyboard 11-7
USB Keyboard Type 8-20
Index-8
DIRECTIVE 2002/96/EC ON THE TREATMENT, COLLECTION, RECYCLING AND
DISPOSAL OF ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND THEIR COMPONENTS
INFORMATION
1. FOR COUNTRIES IN THE EUROPEAN UNION (EU)
The disposal of electric and electronic devices as solid urban waste is strictly prohibited: it must be collected separately.
The dumping of these devices at unequipped and unauthorized places may have hazardous effects on health and the
environment.
Offenders will be subjected to the penalties and measures laid down by the law.
TO DISPOSE OF OUR DEVICES CORRECTLY:
a) Contact the Local Authorities, who will give you the practical information you need and the instructions for handling the
waste correctly, for example: location and times of the waste collection centres, etc.
b) When you purchase a new device of ours, give a used device similar to the one purchased to our dealer for disposal.
The crossed dustbin symbol on the device means that:
- when it to be disposed of, the device is to be taken to the equipped waste collection centres and is to be
handled separately from urban waste;
- The producer guarantees the activation of the treatment, collection, recycling and disposal procedures in
accordance with Directive 2002/96/EC (and subsequent amendments).
2. FOR OTHER COUNTRIES (NOT IN THE EU)
The treatment, collection, recycling and disposal of electric and electronic devices will be carried out in accordance with the
laws in force in the country in question.
N ° 13-102
DICHIARAZIONE CE DI CONFORMITA' del COSTRUTTORE secondo ISO/IEC 17050
MANUFACTURER’S CE DECLARATION of CONFORMITY according to ISO/IEC 17050
OLIVETTI S.p.A
Via Jervis, 77 - IVREA (TO) - ITALY
Dichiara sotto la sua responsabilita' che i prodotti:
Declares under its sole responsibility that the products:
Categoria generale:
Equipment category:
Tipo di apparecchiatura:
Product type:
Nome / model:
Opzioni / options:
Apparecchiature per la Tecnologia dell'Informazione
Information Technology Equipment
Stampante Multifunzionale
Multifunctional Printer
d-Copia 3500MF plus, d-Copia 4500MF plus, d-Copia 5500MF plus
PF-770, Fax System (W), IB-50, DP-770(B), DP-772, PH-7, PF-730(B),
PF-740(B), DF-770(C), MT-730(B), DF-790(C),BF-730, JS-730, JS-731,
JS-732, AK-731, IB-51, Printed Document Guard (B)
sono CONFORMI alla Direttiva 1999/5/CE del 9 marzo 1999
are in compliance with directive 99/5/EC dated 9th march 1999
e soddisfano i requisiti essenziali di Compatibilità Elettromagnetica, Consumo Energetico e Sicurezza previsti
dalle Direttive:
and fulfill the essential requirements of Electromagnetic Compatibility, Electrical Power Consumption and
Electrical Safety as prescribed by the Directives:
2004/108/CE del 15 Dicembre 2004; (EMC)
2004/108/EC dated 15th December 2004;
2009/125/CE del 21 Ottobre 2009; (ErP)
2009/125/EC dated 21st October 2009;
2006/95/CE del 12 Dicembre 2006; (LVD)
2006/95/EC dated 12th December 2006;
in quanto progettati e costruiti in conformità alle seguenti Norme Armonizzate:
since designed and manufactured in compliance with the following European Harmonized Standards:
EN 55022:2010 (Limits and methods of measurements of radio interference characteristics of Information
Technology Equipment) / Class B;
EN 61000-3-2:2006+ A1:2009+ A2:2009 (Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Part 3: Limits - Section 2:
Limits for harmonic current emissions (equipment input current  16 A per phase)
EN 61000-3-3:2008 (Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Part 3: Limits - Section 3: Limitation of voltage
fluctuations and flicker in low voltage supply systems for equipment with rated current up to and including
16A);
EN 55024:2010 (Electromagnetic Compatibility – Information technology equipment – Immunity characteristics
– Limits and methods of measurement);
EN 60950-1:2006+ A11:2009+ A1:2010+ A12:2011 (Safety of Information Technology Equipment, including
electrical business equipment.)
EN 60825-1:2007 (Radiation Safety of laser products, equipment classification, requirements and user's guide).
ETSI TBR 21/1998 - Requirements for pan-European approval for connection to the analogue Public Switched
Telephone Networks (PSTN) of TE (excluding TE supporting the voice telephony service) in which network
addressing, if provided, is by means of Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) signaling.
EN 302 291-1 V1.1.1
EN 302 291-2 V1.1.1
EN 300 328 V1.7.1
EN 62311: 2008
EN 62301:2005 (Household electrical appliances – Measurement of standby power)
La conformità ai suddetti requisiti essenziali viene attestata mediante l'apposizione della Marcatura CE sul
prodotto.
Compliance with the above mentioned essential requirements is shown by affixing the CE marking on the product.
Ivrea, 28 Febbraio 2013
Ivrea, 28th Febraury 2013
Walter Fontani
Quality Director
Olivetti S.p.A.
Note: 1) La Marcatura CE è stata apposta nel 2013
Notes: 1) CE Marking has been affixed in 2013
2) Il Sistema della Qualità è conforme alle norme serie UNI EN ISO 9000.
2) The Quality System is in compliance with the UNI EN ISO 9000 series of Standards
Olivetti S.p.A. - Via Jervis, 77 - 10015 Ivrea (To) - Italy - Tel +39 0125 7751 - Cap. Soc. € 63.000.000 R.E.A. 547040 - Cod. Fisc./P.IVA e iscriz. al Reg. Imp. Di Torino 02298700010
Società con unico azionista, Gruppo Telecom Italia - Direzione e coordinamento di Telecom Italia S.p.A.